May 2005 Publication Notes

NASA SP-87 was a view of the Apollo world-wide tracking net-

work as of July of 1965. While there were changes to the network
after this publication was written, it is an amazingly complete de-
scription of the Apollo era Manned Space Flight Network that was
so successful in providing critical communications between the
Apollo spacecraft and the Mission Control Center in Houston,
Texas.

This PDF version of NASA SP-87 was produced by Bill Wood

using Adobe Photoshop CS and Acrobat 7 Pro. The source for the
text page images was the archived PDF version of NASA SP-87,
while the cover and all printed halftone images were scanned and
converted to grayscale images by Neil Sandford using his original,
serial number 0030, SP-87 edition. The grayscale images were in-
serted into the page images before producing the final PDF ver-
sion.

Bill Wood was a Unified S-Band Lead Engineer at the Goldstone

Apollo MSFN station during the lunar missions. Neil Sandford
was the RF Supervisor at the Honeysuckle Creek MSFN station
near Canberra, Australia. Both are now retired in Barstow, Cali-
fornia and Port Macquarie, NSW, Australia.
 NASA SP·S7

Proceedings of the

APOLLO UNIFIED S BAND -

TECHNICAL CONFERENCE

Held at Goddard Space Flight Center,

July 14·15,1965

Prepared by Goddard Space Flight Center

Scientific and TechlJjcal In/ormation Divhion 1 9 6 5

NATIONAL AERONAUTICS AND SPACE ADMINISTRATION
Wa.rhingltm, D.G.
 FOREWORD

The history of the Manned Space Flight Network reveals that each
successive mission is considered more complex than the previous one. As a
result, the tracking and communication problems become more complicated,
requiring more sophisUcaled equipment.

The Apollo missions differ considerably from past manned missions in

that there Is a requirement, for the first time, to send astronauts to the moon
and return them safely to earth. For this reason, the position of the space·
craft must be lmown at all times and continuous communications must be
maintained between the earth and the spacecraft during most of the mission
phases. This requirement has dictated incorporating the Unified S-Band
System into the Manned Space Flight Network. This system will provide the
primary tracking and communications data between earth and the spacecraft
in the later Apollo missions.

The proceedings contai.ned herein are the conference records of papers

presented at the Technical Conference on the Apollo Unified S-Band System,
which was held at the Goddard Space Flight Center on July 14 and IS, 1965.
This conference brought together about 500 participants from the various NASA
centers and Apollo contractors. These proceedings will constitute a first
handbook pertaining to the Apollo Marmed Space Flight Network.

Each person concerned with the Apollo Manned Space Flight Network,
either from an engineering or operational viewpoint, will find that this docu­
ment contains a reasonably comprehensive description of the primary equipment
used a t the Apollo ground stations.

Kenneth E. Peltzer
Manned Flight Support Office (T&DS)
Goddard Space Flight Center

iii
 PARTICIPANTS
SESSION I SESSION III (Conl.)

INTRODUCTORY SESSION G. Hondros

Manned Flight Support Office
E. W. Wasielewski, Associate Director Goddard Space Flight Center
Goddard Space Flight Center Greenbelt, Maryland
Greenbelt, Maryland
T. E. McGunigal
W. P. Varson R. F. Systems Branch
Manned Flight Support Office Godd ard Space Flight Center
Goddard Space Flight Center Greenbelt, Maryland
Greenbelt, Maryland
SESSION IV
W. D. Kahn
Systems Analysis Office DIGITAL SYSTEMS
Goddard Space Flight Center
Greenbelt, Maryland P. Lindley
Jet PropulSion Laboratory
Pasadena, California

SESSION n W. M. Hocking
Network Engineering Branch
ANTENNA SYSTEM Goddard Space Flight Center
Greenbelt, Maryland
L. E. Hightower
Engineering Support Office R. L. Granata
Goddard Space Flight Center Network Engineering Branch
Greenbelt, Maryland Goddard Space Flight Center
Greenbelt, Maryland
N. A. Raumann
Antenna Systems Branch
Goddard Space Flight Center SESSION V
Greenbelt, Maryland
IMPACT OF USB SYSTEM ON
J. Flowers, Jr. ORBIT DETERMINATION
Network Engineering Branch
Goddard Space Flight Center J. H. Donegan
Greenbelt, Maryland Data Operations Branch
Goddard Space Flight Center
Greenbelt, Maryland

SESSION m J. Barsky
Data Operations Branch
TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER SYSTEM Goddard Space Flight Center
Greenbelt, Maryland
J. B. Martin
Network Engineering Branch
Goddard Space Flight Center
Greenbelt, Maryland
SESSION VI
R. Bunce
Jet Propulsion Laboratory NE1WORK SYSTEMS
Pasadena, California

J. H . Jacobi C. O. Roberts
Manned flight Support Office Manned Flight Engineering Branch
Goddard Space Flight Center Goddard Space Flight Center
Greenbelt, Maryland Greenbelt, Maryland

iv
 SESSION VI (Cont.) SESSION VIII

W. A. Dental S-BAND IMPACT ON OPERATIONS,

Manned Flight Engineering Branch NASCOM, APOLLO SHIPS,
Goddard Space Flight Center AND APOLLO AffiCRAFT
Greenbelt, Maryland
R. H. Newman, Jr.
W. E. Willis Manned Flight Support Office
Manned Flight Engineering Branch Goddard Space Flight Center
Goddard Space Flight Center Greenbelt, Maryland
Greenbelt, Maryland
W. B. Dickinson
C. B. Knox Communications Engineering Branch
Manned Flight Engineering Branch Goddard Space Flight Center
Goddard Space Flight Center Greenbelt, Maryland
Greenbelt, Maryland
M. D. Greene
G. N. Georgeadis Office of Instrumentation Ships
Manned Flight Engineering Branch Goddard Space Flight Center
Goddard Space Flight Center Greenbelt, Maryland
Greenbelt, Maryland
L. C. Shelton
Manned Flight Operations Branch
SESSION VII Goddard Space Flight Center
Greenbelt, Maryland
SPACECRAFT USB SYSTEM
O. M. COVington, Deputy Assistant Director
B. H. Hood Goddard Space Flight Center
Systems Analysis Branch Greenbelt, Maryland
Manned Spacecraft Center
Houston, Texas

W. E. Kuykendall
Systems Analysis Branch
Manned Spacecraft Center
Houston, Texas

A. Travis
System Engineering and Test Branch
Manned Spacecraft Center
Houston, Texas

B. Reed
Marshall Space Flight Center
Huntsville, Alabama
vi
 CONTENTS

Page

Program Committee . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . . • • . • . • . . . • • • • • • • • . . . • . . • • ii

Foreword . . . . . . • • • . • . . . . • . • • . • . . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • iii

SESSION I: INTRODUCTORY SESSION

Introduction

E. W. Wasielewski . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
.

Functional Description of Unified S-Band System and Integration into the

Manned Space Flight Network

W. P. Varson • . . • . • • • • . • • . • • • . • . • • • . • • • . . • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • 3

Tracking Studies for Project Apollo

W. D. Kahn . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 13

SESSION ll: ANTENNA SYSTEMS

USB Antenna Structures

L. E. Hightower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

USB Servo System

N. Raumann • • • . . . • • • . • . . • • . • • • • . . • • • • . . . • • . • • • . • • • • • • . • 29

Antenna Feeds and Acquisition Antennas

J. Flowers . • • . • . • • . • • • . . • . . • . . • . . . . 39

SESSION m: TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER SYSTEM

Parametric Ampltrier, and Noise Figure and Test Signal Network

J. B. Martin • . . . . . . • . • . . . • • • • . • • • • .
47

Rece!�·c:--Exctt.:r Suu�ystem

R. BWlce . . • • • . • • • • • • • • • • . • • • . . . . . . . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • • • • 59

Ve!'ific:lUcr. R;::c€�v':j:, sec C�ciiiaior and Up-L>ata Modems

J. H. Jacobi . . • • • • • . . . • • . . • . . . . • • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Signal Data Demodulator

G. Hondros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

vii
 CONTENTS (Cont. )

Page

The Unified S-Band Power Amplifier

T. E. McGunigal • • . . . • • • • . • • • • • • . • • • . . . . • • • • • • • • • . . . • . • • .
91

SESSION IV: DIGITAL SYSTEMS

JPL Ranging System

P. Lindley . • • . . . • . • • • • . . . . . . . • . • . . • . . . . . . • . . • • • • . . • . . • . 99

Doppler Counter, Antenna Programmer, and Tracking Data Processor

W. M. Hocking . • • • • • • . . . . . . . • • • . • . • • • • . . . . . • • • . . . • • • . • • . 109

Apollo Precision Frequency Source and Time Standard

R. L. Granata . . • • . • • • . • • • . • • • . • . • . . • • . • • . • • . • . • • • • . • • • • • 125

SESSION V: IMPACT OF USB SYSTEM ON ORBIT DETERMINATION

ApOllO Mission Profile

J. J. Donegan . • • • • • • . . • • • • • • • . . . . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . . . • . • • • • 135

computer Test Program to Qualify USB System

J. Barsky • • • • • • . . . • • • • . • . • . • • . • . . • . • . • • • • . • • • • • • • , , • • . 145

SESSION VI: NETWORK SYSTEMS

Network Systems

C. 0, Roberts • • . . . . . . . • . . . • • • • , . . , • • • • . . • . • • • • • • . • . • . • . •
151

Apollo Network PCM Decommutation Systems

W. A. Dentel • • • • • . . . • • " . • , • • • . • • , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165'

ApOllo Network Remote SUe Computer Systems

E. Willis • . . . • • • • • • . • • • • • . • • • , . • • . • • . • • • • . . • • • • • • . • • • • • 181

Apollo Digital Command System

C. B. Knox . , . • • • • • . • • • " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Apollo Remote Site Display System

G. N. Georgeadis . . . • • • . . . . • • • • • . . • . • . • • • • • • • • • • • • . • • . • . . 205

viii
 CONTENTS (ConL)

SESSION VII: SPACECRAFT USB SYSTEM Page

Command and Service Module Unified S�Band System

B. Hood . • • • • . . . . • • • • . . . . . • . . • • • . • . . • • • . • . • . • . • . . • • • • . • 223

Lunar Excursion Module Unified S-Band System

W. Kuykendall . . . . • • • . • . • • • • • . • • • . . . • • • • . • . . . . . . . . . • • • • •
233

Unified S- Band RF System Compatibility Test Program

A.Travis................ . 243

Command and Communication System

B. Reed. • • • • • • • • . • • • . • • . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . • • • 247

SESSION VITI: S-BAND IMPACT ON OPERATIONS, NASCOM, APOLLO SHIPS

AND APOLLO AIRCRAFT

Typical Acquisition Procedure

R. H. Newman. • • • • . • . . . . . • . • • . • • . . . . . . • . • . . . . • . . • . . . • • • . 261

Impact of Apollo Unified S-Band System on NASA Communication Network

W. Dickinson . . . . . . . . • . • . . . • • . . . . . • . • . . . . . • . . . . . • • . . . . • . 269

Role of Apollo Ships

M. D. Greene . . . . . . . • . • • . • . • . • . . • • • . . . . . . . . • . • . • . • . • • • • •
275

Apollo/Range Instrumented Aircraft

L. C. Shelton . . . • • . . • . . • . • . • • • . . . • . . . . • • . • . • . • . • . • . • • . • • 283

STATUS OF THE PROGRAM

O. M. Covington . . • • • • • • • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . 293

APPENDIX A: GLOS�ARY. ....... ............. . . . . ....... ...... 297

APPENDIX B: LIST OF ATTENDEES . • • . . • . • • • . • • • . . . . . . . • • • . • • • . . 299

ix
x
 INTRODUCTION

Mr. Eugene W. Wasielewski, the Associate

Director of the Goddard Space Flight Center,
opened the Technical Conference on the Unified
S-Band System by extending a welcome to
Goddard employees, contractors, members o f
DOD, and three other NASA centers namely:
Manned Space Flight Center, Marshall Space
Flight Center, and the Jet Propulsion Laboratory.
He gave a brief description of Goddard's missions
and the role it is playing in the Apollo Unified S­
Band System.
2
 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF
UNIFIED S-BAND SYSTEM AND INTEGRATION
INTO THE MANNED SPACE FLIGHT NETWORK

by
W. P. Varson
Goddard Space FUgilt Center

ABSTRACT

The lunar phases of the Apollo missions require t.cchnlqucs and eq uipm ent
u s ed In the Manned Space Flig ht
excc.eding Ihc capability of those previously
Network. This impro\'cment in network c apabi lity Is necessary to p rovide re­
liable tracking and communications of the Apollo spacecraft 3t lunar distances.
To fulfill this requir ement the unified S-band (USB) system has been introduced
,

Into Ihe network. The USB system used with 85-fool nntennas will provide the
only means of tra cki ng and communications at lunar distances. The USA system
wlth30·footantennas will be used to fill the gaps In the coverage provided by the
three as-foot antennas. TIle U SB system wilh Ihc 30-fool antennas will also be
used to provi de dala during the earth-orbital and post-inj e ction phases of the
miSSions,

Tn order to Insure rel iability . the USB system utili:tes existing. pro\'en
techniques and hardware, These items of equipment developed and used by the
Jet Propulsion Laboratory and the Scientific Satellite �ctwork have been adapted
to the USB system. The more significant of this equipment is the range and
range rate equipment supplied by the Jet Propulsion Laboratory to the program
and the antenna systems which arc nearly identical to those used In theScieruific
Satellite p ro gram
,

INTRODUCTION

The Apollo program is Significantly more complex than either the Mercury or Gemini
programs and has consequently presented a corresponding increase in the comple1d.ty of the
support required from the Manned Space Flight Network(MSFN). This has affected the quantity
of data that must be handled, the geographic areas that must be covered, and the technical
capability of equipment. For the first time, the network is required for provide reliable track­
ing and COmmunications to lunar distance. This has required the in('ol'!'QraUo:: of tlle uiiUi�
S-b<md (USB) system into the network. The existing network instrumentation is capable of sup­
porting the earth-orbital phases of the mission and, in fact, will be the sole support for the
initial Apollo flights. Since the USB system Will be the only means of tr�('king a..'!.::J. ,:o:r;:r;",.i­
�:!.ti:::; ·,'.:ith th� I:iVacecratt during the lunar phases of the mission, it is mandatory that it be
installed, checked out, and proven operational during the early Apollo missions.

3
4 1. P. YAR$ON

FUNCTIONAL OESCRIPTION OF USB SYSTEM

The USB system utilizes a Single carrier frequency in each direction to provide tracking

as well as communications with the spacecraft. This is depicted in Figure 1, where all of the
functions are accomplished with a single
system. The interface with the network

equipment is the same whether the data

comes from the USB system or the Gemini

equipment.

Perhaps the first thing that should be

discussed is why the unified systems approach

was adopted rather than extending the range

of the existing network equipment. It was

adopted primarily because it was considered

to oiler a superior technical solution with a

minimum of new development. To expand

the range of the existing type of network

equipment would have required development
Figure l-Apollo network evolution.
of high-powered radar beacons, the use of

coherent radar techniques and a major ex­

pansion of the range capability of the VHF and UHF equipment. Systems capable of operating
to lunar distance which employ the unified systems techniques were already in operation. In
addition to requiring considerably less development and expense, the unified systems approach
also reduced the equipment required aboard the spacecraft.

One of the major decisions was the selection of the basic techniques to be used in the

unified systems approach. It is desirable to use the best equipment available in support of the

Manned Space Flight Missions; however, it is also desirable to use proven techniques and
equipment to minimize development and to afford the highest probability of success. There

have been several approaches to the unified systems concept, but perhaps the most thoroughly

developed is that used by the Jet Propulsion Laboratory. This system has been employed suc­
cessfully in support of lunar and planetary programs and, with minor modifications, was ap­

plicable to the Apollo tracking and communications requirements. Therefore, it was a logical
choice for the USB system.

The design of the USB system is based on a coherent doppler and the pseudo-random range
system which has been developed by JPL. The S-band system uUUzes the same techniques as

the ex.1sting systems, with the major changes being the inclusion of the voice and data channels.

A single carrier frequency is utilized in each direction for the transmission of all tracking
and communications data between the spacecraft and ground. The voice and up-date data are
modulated onto subcarriers and then combined with the ranging data (Figure 2). This composite
informatiOn is used to phase-modulate the transmitted carrier frequency. The received and trans­

mitted carrier frequencies are coherently related. This allows measurements of the carrier dop­

pler frequency by the ground station for determination of the radial velocity of the spacecraft.
 FUHCllOOAl DESCRIPTION OF UNIFIED S'8AND SYSTEM AND INTEGRATION INTO THE "'NNED SPACE FllGKT NETl'ORK 5

UP·lINK
PM COHERENT CARRIER
VOICE SUBCARRIER
UP·O·ATA SU8CARRIER

RANGE CODE ENVElOP E

fo·2 MC fo·1 MC '0.70 KC to·IMC fo.2MC

'o.301C
I.

DOWN·lINK
PM COHERENT CARRIER

ENVELOPE
T/M
RANGE COOE

peM
SUBCARRIER
VOICE SUBCARRIER

peM

Des

Figure 2-US8 modulation technique.

In the transponder the subcarriers are extracted from the RF carrier and detected
to produce the voice and command information. The binary ranging signals, modulated

directly onto the carMer, are detected by the wide-band phase detector and translated to
a video signaL

The voice and telemetry data to be transmitted from the spacecraft are modulated
onto subcarrlers, combined with the video ranging signals, and used to phase-modulate

the down-link carrier frequency. The transponder transmitter can also be frequency­

modulated for the transmission of television information or recorded data instead of rang­
ing signals.

The basic USB system ha!l thl;' ability to p:,o\1dc tracking and eOlllnJunications data [or two
spacecraft simultaneously, provided they are within the beamwidth of the single anterma. The
primary mode of tracking and communications is through the use of the PM mode of operation.

Two sets of frequencies separated by apprmdraatoely 5 !'!!eg::�:.·ck:; arc usw [VI' tili::; VUrpose
(Figure 3). In addition to the primary mode of communications, the USB system has the capa­
bility of receiving data on two other frequencies. These are used primarily far the transmission

of FM data from the spacecraft.

6 W. P. VARSOO

RECEIVE BAND

�H
'r
------
---------------- ____ ___
A� ______________________ ____ __
,

JtTIl
2270 Me 2272.5 Me
CM-FM
2277.5 Me
S-I![-FM
22'82.5 M<;
HM- PM
2287.5 M e
CM-",
2300 Me

TV, fM, 1M O. TM, VOICE

VOICE S-lY-PM RANGE, OQrplU
TM, VOICE
RANGE, OOPPLER

TRANSMIT SAND
-- __________
______________ ___
A
� __________ �,
r
________________
,

�LcvHL 2101.8 Me
LEM-PM
2106.� Me
eM- PM
2120 Me

O. DATA, YOKE
DATA, VOICE RANGE, OOPPLU
RANGE, DOPPLER

Figure 3-USB system frequency spectrum.

INTEGRATION O F USB SYSTEM INTO MSFN

Since JPL had developed some of the equipment to be used in the unified systems, it was

decided to have them continue to provide these elements of the system. This includes the

receiver, the transmitter/exciter, the ranging system, and test transponders. This equipment

will be supplied to the USB system contractor for integration into the system.

A typical USB site is shown in Figure 4, which identified the equipment to be supplied by

the contractor, equipment supplied by JPL, and the network equipment. The majOrity of equip­

ment shown in Figure 4 is the network equipment, which points out the significance of the sys­

tem engineering and interface job facing the USB system contractor. The network equipment

for the most part is the same equipment which is utilized for the Gemini program. The USB

system has been designed so that the data inputs and outputs into the network equipment are

identical to those of the Gemini equipment. This approach was selected to allow the USB sys­

tem to be integrated into the MSFN without disrupting the normal network operations or re­
quiring equipment changes or modifications.

The tracking and communications with the spacecraft during the lunar missions will be

provided b y three primary deep-space facilities, employing as-foot antennas, spaced at ap­

proximately equal intervals of longitude around the earth to provide the continuous coverage of

the lunar missions (Figure 5). Three of the deep space instrumentation facilities (DSIF) lo­
cated at apprOximately the same locatiOns will be equipped to serve as backup to the primary

stations. Each of these facilities, both the primary and backup stations, will be equipped to

track and provide communications with both the Lunar Excursion Module (LEM) and the Com­
mand Module Simultaneously.
 FIJICTIOHAL DESCRIPTION (F UNIFIED S·BAND SYSTEM AND INTEGRATI� INTO THE MANNED SPACE FLIGHT NETWORK 7

Figure 4- Typicol USB site.

_POLIO PIlI/lUlllr �"lf"M'

In addition to the stations with the 85-

1M1I"N�
foot antennas, a number of other stations
employing 30-foot antennas are also required COVlUG!

=-- /: :::,. /
a�O'IOMO
in the network. These systems are needed
fOr launch coverage in-flight checkout of the MillS

spacecraft, to fill ga.ps in the coverage of the WIliNG CUP IPHI nATIOH

ULlIO��IA
three lunar stations, and to provide instru­
mentation coverage for testing the spacecraft
in earth orbit.

Four land stations (Cape Kennedy, Grand

Bahama, Antigua. and Bermuda) and one in­
strumentation ship are required to provide Figure 5-85-foot ontenno stotions for Apollo.
continuous USB coverage from launch through
insertion. Seven land stations (Canary Islands. Guavmas. Texas, Ar.cp.nr.ion T!':bnri, r�rn"'''''0!!.
Guam, and Hawaii) and two additional instrumentation ships are required to complete the USB
system coverage requirements. In addition to these stations (Figure 6) the Apollo networks will
also include two reentry ships and eight instrumented aircraft.
8 VI. P. VARSON

II ! , I 11 I I I' I
I I
,

,.

. '
"
"

"

F' �
I I
,. i 'i
,..
.
,>0'

Figure 6-Apollo usa network.

The 30·foot antenna system was selected as a result of a study of the gain and tracking
accuracy requirements and comparative costs of several systems. The 30-foot systems must
provide data in ea.rth orbit as well as during the realignment of the spacecraft during the lunar
phases of the missions. During the lunar missions, these systems should be capable of track­
ing the spacecraft to a range of apprOximately 15,000 nautical miles, using the spacecraft omni­

directional antenna. This represents the most stringent requirement and COmes about because
it is desirable to complete the spacecraft transposition prior to deployment of the directional
antennas. These systems will also be capable of providing tracking data at lunar distance.

The 30-foot antenna has a beamwidth of approximately one degree at 2300 megacycles.
This requires that acquisition information be provided in order that the system can acquire
the target. This information could be provided by a separate acquisition system operating at
a lower frequency. However, the USB system may be used when 2300 megacycles is the only
signal radiated from the spacecraft. This requires that the USB system contain its own ac­
quisition aids.

The acquisition information is normally provided by the antenna programmer, which drives
the antenna system so that the target stays within its one-degree beamwidth. The second ac­
quisition device is the 3-foot antenna and its associated receiver which provide a lO-degree
beamwidth for initial target acquiSition. The acquisition antenna is mounted o n the large antenna
to simplify the overall system.
 F�CTIOOAL DESCRIPTI()I OF UNIFIED $-BAND SYSTEM AND INTEGRATION INTO THE MANNED SPACE FLIGHT NETWORK 9

The USB system includes a number of self-cnecking features to assist in the checkout and
maintenance of the system and to increase its overall operating reliability. The verification
receiver monitors the transmitted data to the spacecraft to ensure the proper performance of
the up-data transmission link. The system also contains built-in test equipment which will
allow test data to be inserted into the data demodulator. The JPL equipment allows the signal
from the transmitter/exciter to be injected directly into the receiver to provide an internal
check of the RF system. In addition to these internal checks, the system also uses the trans­
ponder on a boresight tower for checkout of the RF system, the angle system, and the ranging
system.

There are several variations to the basic USB system: the single" and dual 30-foot systems,
the primary and backup as-foot antenna systems, and the single and dual instrumentation ships.
The Collins Radio Company has the complete responsibility for the 30-foot antenna systems
(Figure 7). They are provided with the JPL-supplied and other equipment to be integrated with
Collins-supplied equipment to prOvide a complete system. Collins is required to erect, install,
and checkout the systems on site. The facilities will be made available to the contractor and
the network equipment will already be available on site. This equipment will be installed by
others; however, Collins is responsible for the proper interface with this equipment.

For the primary 85-foot systems (Figure 8), Collins will be supplied Government-furnished
equipment which he will integrate with the equipment he furnishes prior to shipment to the site.
The 8S-foot antenna structure is befng provided under a separate contract. The contractor is
responsible for integrating the USB on site.

At the JPL facilities (Figure 9), the contractor will supply components as indicated.. These
will be added to the other equipment at the facility to allow it to be used in support of the Apollo
missions. These units will be checked out prior to shipment and installation of the equipment

Figure 7-USB s),stem 3D-foot ol"lteono foci lit)'.

10 •• P. Y.t.R$OH

VOICE
ANGLE OATil.

: :
r-----

rIMING
1

<---t---'

L __ : - W._"'-�._iE.-}t_yOICE
--:
- - -�s: - - ...It-- OATA
____

�=J:J��-
L _

AUlOrUoCK fROM RCVR

r

Figure 8-USB system 85-fool onteMo facility primary dOlions.

and its Integration into the system. A microwave link will be used to remote the data from the
JPL site to the MSFN site. where both sites will have a common set of network equipment.

The contractor will be required to supply inSlrumentation for five ships. Three of these
are the insertion and lnjection ships which will utilize the 30-foot antenna. The contractor
will supply the equipment indicated in Figure 10. Reeves Instrument Company wUl supply the
antenna system and be responsIble for the overall integration of the system.

The contractor will also supply test and training units as a part of the systems contract.
These consist of essential elements of the system and will be used for checkout of the space­
craft and as aids in the test and training program. These Wlits are shown in Figure 11.

GSFC awarded the USB system contract to the Collins Radio Company on July 14,1964.
Slaw-Knox is building the 30-foot antenna structures under a subcontract to Collins. The
antenna structure was shipped to Guam on June 7,1965 and to Carnarvon on June 18,1965. The
first USB (lor Guam) has been delivered and the remainder of the 30-Coot systems will be

delivered at a rate of one per month. The 85-foot antenna structures were built by Blaw-Knox
under separate contract.

The USB system will be installed in the network during the next year. They will be checked
out on the SA-202 through SA-206 and on SA-Sal and SA-502 missions and will be used to pro­
vide primary mission support data beginning with SA-207 and SA-503.
 FUNCTIONAL OESCRIPTION OF UNIFIEO S'BAND SYSTEM AND INTEGRATION IIHD THE MANNED SPACE FLIG� NmORK 11

DATA �+WAVE TO MSFN

NT I DEMOD LINK 85 FT SITE

� � -WAVE
'"
PARAMP .CV. �tEM
"M
'"
"
TRACKING
DATA
PROCESSOR
DATA
TT Y 011. HIGH
"HO

7
'NT
RANGING
sua SYST

I' ....,,�� I
-WAVE .1 DATA VOICE
I '"
PAAAMP I J''''' oOM D£MOD , NGlf DATA

t
I DUAL
10 Kwf'A
EXCJTEk L RANGING
SUB sysr

+1 r-----., 1
....i SUB·CAUIU
,
"-
OK
rt-- VOICE
..J1.t---- DATA
I TIMING
II
MAGNETIC
TAPE REC
I
'M
I EXCITU FREQ STO

- - , -

-
ANT ,..SUB-CARRIER
- VOICE
t
\4
El.ECTRDNICS I OSC 14 DATA
I L. _____ ..J
AUTOTAACK

I,
nOM lCVR
ANT
TTY PIIIDICT
Pll. OO RAMME I!

Figure 9-USB system as-foot antenno focility backup station.

, ------ , r-··············· 1 �·····O:AjA ···· ........... ....

-
:

'. l FT "
'., ANT,'
'PCM mUIP;'----'+: · .i
DISI'lAY

L�?:�rL _O' � --;;-"'� ��]TL�. -+.��

,, ,
, :","" ······.1
, ,,

'u
' 1 �-WAVE'. '1 PARAMP j"'""'<l
,

11 CIRCUIT ,"""4
L_______ .J
,.
,
,-- -- _ - '"" ,i�
•

L
RECOVER

r
tf
OCM .J
-
!
·
1 DATA LINK
.

·:-��D��;-l
_ __
VOICE
+!,o!
--- ----·

'-_ ____ .J
1
30 FT �
DEMOD' VIDEO TArt: RECORDE!! '
'NT
- ,
__

----<)
-

L___.__J tL __ . _ _ .J

r'-'-' r--' l .----:1

lEM DOmER .1
r-------------.,
TRACKING � HIGH
_
TTY
�-WAVE
CIRCUIT
,
,
PARAMP i---....
"
.I,
,
RECEIVER
0

0--
0
•

I
CM..i"j r---i ,"o<:mo.
, DATA
l 0'"
: SPHD

L--1------- ��G�T � C---T--�r

_ _

I
L. _ _ -.J

r --' � EM
L __
-- --.
_
.J
r---L--., r
I
1..

- _ ;,
r-------,

: ' . : : dMGNETIC,
_
-;;: 10 KW PA ;4---1 EXCITER I FRED STD t-f" TIMING 1 TAPE
, •

-
'-- - I 1
i E D��
L______J L __ J �L __ �J L______ J � ��
_
FROM RCVR - -
ANHNNA r �:��R�I�� ��'t>---V - OICE
ANTENNA TTY
ELECTRONICS PROGRAMMER
I<- PREDICT :
,
L...
OSC '
,
f
.;' --- DATA
______ ____.J
�

Figure ID-USa system ontenna facility primory slotions,

12 W. P.I/ARSON

Figure l\-USB system lest voil.

 TRACKING STUDIES FOR PROJECT APOLLO
by

W. O. Kahn

Goddard Space Flight Cen.ter

ABSTRACT

A trackin g error analysis study Is presente d in which the earth orbital,

translunar lunar. and transearth phases of the Apollo Mission arc considered
• .

Principal error sources, such as m e asurement random errors, measurement

bias errors, and errors in tracking station location, are analyzed to determine
how well a tracking network such as the Manned Space Flight Net,work (MSFN)
can determine the orbit of the spacec raft .

Results of an error analysis s tu dy co nsid e r ing tracking of th e spacecraft

during all the different IiJases of the Apo ll o Mission are described. Specifically,
trac k ing d urin g the ea rth orbital, translunar lunar, and transearth phas es are
,

simulated in this study.

INTROOUCTION

Tracking radars of the Manned Space Flight Network (MSFN) will be used. to determine the

trajectory of the Apollo spacecraft during the earth orbital, translunar, lunar, and transearth

phases of the Apollo Mission. Because of the effects of errors in the measurements as well as
errors in the equations of mOtion, it is possible to obtain only an estimate of the spacecraft's

true trajectory. How good the estimate will be is dependent on the volume and quality of the

tracking data, as well as the adequacy of the mathematical model used in the data reduction
process. Error analysis studies, incorporating the effects of the principal error SOurces,
simulate the data acquisition and data reduction processes. Such studies, subject to the initial
assumptions, provide information on the capability of the MSFN tracking radars to determine

the trajectory of the Apollo spacecraft.

THE EARTH ORBITAL PHASE

The Apollo spacecraft is inserted into a 100 nautical miles (185 km) earth parking Orbit.
Tracking of the spacecraft is assumed in this study to commence immediately after insertion.

The trajectory prOfile from insertion through translunar injection is given in Figure 1. Tnck­

ing r:overage dti.ing ttl.:. 1in;i. orbit by stations of the MSFN is given in Figure 2.

Propagation of the rms errors in the state vector (a vector composed of the components of

the position and velocity vectors) ro'''-'llti!!:; !roIr: r...-.dvi.... el run, in the measurements, bias

errors in the measurements, and errors in tracking station location is analyzed during the first
parking orbit of the Apollo spacecraft (Fi gures 3 and 4).

13
 14 W. O. KAf\rt

"

�" _ • . <V7"l l ...., ...

', , ''' ' .. 1.. ,
0,''''
'

..

I" '"

,.

Figure l-lunar tron$fer from the second parking orbit, 0. 73°,

SUMUDA
CANARY

GUAYMAS

�
-
"

CAPE

r\'U""
KENNEDY
l"f-
<

INDIAN
�
"
INSERTION OCEAN SHIP
� CARNARVON
- "

'�, , ��, ,\�" 30 32 34 36 ., . .

"ME fROM INSERTION (.,inu,e,)

j:HflCt H
IItACK INC 51A liON INFORM'"liON

_l�<:.'�E
STATION lOCATION URO� ORBITA l PARAM£HR$

I SS I T:Sept. I7,I96 9 I1'OI"'�01(,8

1
85 2 'I "3
STAIION
..!:) :!:!!! �1
, S5lt
�':'..2IT�(�

I
\ .... ,�,.) �''',.I (.,.t....) XI. ·.138.2120. -5. 11.(53'115 kmjoec
•

_
INSERTION X2 3671.81888 km '! 2 --5.92nlI31 Ianj...c
2 6 O' 'JS3

1
N "6.0 353 S$ 0 XJ - JSJI.J7I>4bkm X3 - 0 .16 83.567 1 W
TRACKING SHIP

I s�,
CANARY 27.73552' N IS 0 .
6 0006
'w 19 .770.1380 . 1270

I
INDIAN OCEAN
O �. lS]

II
2 6 O' S 64 O' E 55" 353 0
SHIP •

CARNARvON 24. 04 • 60.0 897356' 5 '13.7)6067' f

I
GUAYMAS 27.958406'N 1Io.72079' W 18 ,)2 0
.
CAPE KENNEDy 28.481767' N 81).576$14' W I 14 • 32.0
BUMUOA 32.3 4 .390
. 776 7'N 6 4
,

Figure 2-Tracking station coverage dvr;ng first Apollo porkins orbit.

 TRACKING STUOIES Fffi PROJECT APOllO

,
, Trocking

'�k;�:l
by

! Tf<lcki"ll by
lnodion O<;..,n Ship
T,acki"ll by

! "''''
In.e"l"" Tracking Ship In dian Ocean Ship
·
·

""_ 2.0

�""li
11
"
•
Z
""'"
eo,,'arYon
� Loun-ch ""-imulh 73.4"

el Irackil>i
-.. -- Erro<, projK..d 10 b.gin ning
1:: 1,0
..-

Q - In finite i�loe i"" orro<

by ne.1 ,lotion
.

8
t
:
" •
"
Tf<lcking by Co,.., - Trockir>g >lalion re<:ati<>rt and re<:alian
�
0
• V(o<. a. 9i�en ;., lobi. I

0 • " " " " " " " O_L-

o ��- 67-7 -Cc
31-t
��� Cc-+'-
4� �
0
, , , 2 4 8 10 � �2 �
TIME F�OM INSE�TlON ("'i""le,)
TIME HOM INSER710N (""nul"')

:,: �� ",:oj�l... t(l beg!nni"9

----

(If rrac�,"9 by ne�1 n(l l ion

,
( Inlin le
.

'" V.locily .,,0' of 2. 2 .y.""

{
injeclion orro<.
1"-. Pos, ef1'Ofof
__

at ,Iart of Gouoy"",", I",ckin;

I '2.17k",al,la,lcf
'":1. 0
Guoy ..... lrack ing

T",,��_'� by c.....y.....
·
·

k
•

�
T,o.�;ny I., Guo,,,,,,.

Tra c lng by
;0_ , Copo K.nn edy

o
T""'king by -
--
•

'SI...... lracki"ll ae""udo

Cope Kennedy -
-

�
,, _.

l,"c-:o-:o-'cc'c"-'�":::;:l;::'�·�"r;"�' �' =;":,Cc..,J_

.

k�""
.

o
80 801 86 %
n � % ro n
78 82 88 90 92 9� 98 100 0 .

( Minule, )
80 82 88 9�
TIME FROM INSERTION
( ..i"vle,)
aUITAl PARAMETERS
TIME FROM INSERTION

Og8llALfA�M\EmS
T -Sepl. 17, 1%9 13' 01"' 8'.468 h
T�Sept. 17, 1969- 13 Olm8�468
::tl" -5. I 1453915 km/.oc

km k., kml_
X, _ -4138.21240 km �, __ S.1145.1915km;_
X2 - 3671 81888 k..
Xlz -4138.212401,.
<
�1- -5.92771131 km;_ ;\(2--5.92nI131 km/.""
0.168351>17 km;see X3w 3531. 37646
X 2z 3671.81888 "'"

, �SO
XJ - 35.11 37646 �J. X3w 0.16835617
HoglZON HORIZON

MMPtiNG RAn
SAMPLING �ATE I ",eao/.K

rMa';' ..c TRACKER UNCERTAINTIES Aequ,.ili ... e<:cu" JO ,eC.

Sr • � 10 mde"
1
aft.r >f>Ocoerah ,eache,
a" K!;' K � 2.1O-·radion. el.�alion of SO
TRACKER UNCERTAINTI�S

OM
10 ....1." 0, • * 20 moton Moow,emenl no;," _d big. and
"
>leli"" lacation ..."". ar e inel ".d
s, - *
.. S<"'2�1O-'radion. M.",u ..",enl ""i,e OM bia. ,Ialion
.I••oli... of 5"

I""alion erran a'e i.... lcoded

6� Oa ��, z*�� 10-·radion.

,. 4. 10-' radian. Tracking 'I<>lion lacari"" ond lacalian

/)., = * 20 ....1.."
'"
". gi.en in Fig....
/).. ", • •
Figure 4-PropQgotion of spocecroft velocity
30 ""' .
er...,... . 2

i.au....h Az._tII73.4"
A<�ui.ition accu" errors dlJring fin! Apollo porking orbit.
01,", If'O'Cecralt ,..,ch••

Figure 3-Propogotion of spoc::e c::r oft position During periods when observational data
errors during first Apollo porking orbit,
are obtained, the rms errors in the state

vector slowly decrp�se u!"!.til s;.;.ch tim", aiS no

tr3.ckine; data are avallable. As the rms errors in the state vector are propagated through a
region where there is no tracking coverage, their magnitudes increase or decrease, depending

on where along the orbit they are evaluated, In the study presented, the rms erro::-� in th€ stai.�
v�tor eo::-e i,.Ci''''<tseci when propagated without tracking data. As soon as tracking data are added
to the projected rms errors in the state vector, these errors decrease very rapidly.

Despite the assumption of no initial knowledge about the state (position and velocity), as
well as the inclusion of the principal error sources in the tracking data, it is shown in
 16 W. D. KAHN

Figures 3 and 4 that the rros errors in position and velocity will be :t:40 meters and ±4 centi­
meters per second at the end of the first parking orbit. Therefore, it is safe to conclude that
the spacecraft's orbit can be determined very accurately from tracking data.

THE TRANSLUNAR PHASE

The spacecraft is injected into a lunar transfer orbit between the second and third earth
parking orbits. In Figure 1, a profile of the transfer trajectory is given from injection up to
several hOUfS beyond injection.

Figures 5 and 6 show the propagation of rms errors in the state vector up to three hours
after injection. A comparative analysis is made of the effects of random measurement errors,

' '''''' �
c
. O § -

L;;
I.; "
.,
•
-- - -- .,
�.---'

--
-----_.
-
-

- .-'
-

.-
"
, -.-

\
-. ;

---::j
• "

g
. .

�
�
•

,oo�
,/'/'-

E: " ',�::::::::::
0.1 ' ' _�_ _ _ C
__

.
__
____
__ _
....................
z - --- ----- - ------- --
Q
"
-
•

II M.o.uf .....n' r>ai• • ""Iy

.
A
•
A
..
.....
8 Meo,"'.....n• ...,i•• OM bio.
.
. C Mea'u. .....'" no;.., and bio.
.
.

ond >10' ion loco. ion ."....

.....
.... .
A - Meow,...,,,,,' no... only . . ....... .... .

L
B - Meo""...,.nl noi.c �nd bio.
. ... .......... ......... . .
C - Moa,ur."'.�t �oi.� ""d b..... . .. . . ...... A
��d .t�tio� loc�tian e"Of ..

LO
l----
O 0�.,c_--"�.0,---'""----2"�0,---'2'.'C-C2�. 0 o.oo,
o 0, LO ' -, 2.'
,
"
TIME fROM INJtcTlON (hours)
TRACKING TIME ( ...... .. )

OR8ITAl PARAMHER� HORIZON HORllON TRACKING STATIONS

(! 50" lo,i,vt/e longi'...d�
T'�.pI. 17, 1969 15�55"14�4S2
lie."""", 32 . 3478· N 64.6536· W
X \.. - .
3665 269860 'm X," - 8.51524�S� k..v.K SAMPLING �AH
�AMPUNG RAH
A"'.mi"" 7.9730· S 14.4017' W
X2'" HII.7369S6�.. X2' -6.566111023 �..v••c Mo<kid 40.�I67° N 3.6667· W
Xl- J.563.:190604 "'" XJo 1.�985oe36km/.ec
TUCKER UNS.EU�TI§.. STATION �OCATION ERRORS I...�.e,,)
�TATION lOCAflON EUoaS (met.,, ) TUCKER UNCERTAINTIES 6' 20 """.f<
�,
", ", "',
SS, �Sl 5Sl 6'-.0.lm/.
6 , •• 20 m.I...
A oc e ,,,; on
Be""udo '39 • �I • 39 6a,-6, •• SoIO'·.odion, �,- ," , " , ,.
�i-'O.I..v.ec 103 105
A",.�.ion '�3 '103 .105
6 a_S, '�8x 10-·,od....."
' " • �
." .. . o.rn mf,
• 3'1 t 31 • 37 Mad,id ,,. , " , "
to, o. 40 me'.r> ,\".I\ •• ,1.6010-lrodion.
Mad.id

TRACKI�2. �TATION� hi otO.07 ..v,,,,, OUITAl PARAMETtRS

1\0 a 1\, ••I.6. 1O-l ,adio�.
I.o.ilude longitude I" S�pl. 17, 1969 15'55"' 14�.52
hmwdo 11.:J..t78°N M.6536Q W
A",en.ion J. 97300 � 14.4017QW X, - - 3665. 269860km �,. - 8 51SH�54 k",/w:
Ma&rid �O.�I67· N .1.6667' W X2 �3IL738986 km � 2 ' - 6 56681023 k.. /.ooe
XJ < 3563.390604�... �). 1.A98508J6 k",/w:

F i gu.e 5-P"sition errors for the Figure 6-Velocity errors for

Apollo lunar tromfer trajectory. Apollo lunar transfer trajectory.
 TRACIlIt«:i STUDIES FCfI Pf(lJECT APOLLO 17

measurement bias errors, and errors in

tracking station location, when these errors

are considered alone and in combination. Tne

results of the analysis indicate that measure­

ment bias errors produce the most significant

effect on the rms errors in the state vector.

1
:' 1500
Because of the continuously increasing dis­ <

tance between the spacecraft and the earth,

the contribution of the errors in the station

�.
z ,"'"
location on the rms errors in the state vec­ Q
"
tor is not too significant. 2 HORIZON
5"' • � 5·

For this error analysis study, it was SAMPliNG RATE

1 .....r/min
assumed that the spacecraft is tracked by the
S."""
"ion
85-foot unified S-band (USB) antennas at
°0;--------' ------"C-
C- 2 ------"C' -��cc�.
TIME fROM INSERTION (hou,, )
Madrid, and by two 30- foot USB antennas at
Bermuda and AscenSion. The 85-foot dish Moon """,.,...;
tracks the spacecraft in the two-way doppler T " $.o".. 20, \969 S�1O"12� 176
X," 306.7M09 k... *-," 1.58�IOll ""v'",c
mode, and the two 30-foot dishes track in the X2"'· I702,68611 kif' -
*-2 • O. 249Q3(7SS ."';.ec
Xl'" 770.17552 ".. *-3'"' 0.081 751624 ""v'••c
three-way doppler mode (passive doppler), TRACKER lOCATIONS
i.o,ilude longilvd. HI (nt)
_35° 18'41:50 149° 08' 09':00 ..

30:'96
Because the tracker-spacecraft geometry _24° 53' 50: 48 1 1 3 ° 42'57:804 ..
22° 09' · 159·40'00:'43 1142
weakens as the spacecraft recedes from the
earth, an increase in the rms position error

of the spacecraft results, However, the

spacecraft 's velOCity relative to the earth 2.0

decreases as the spacecraft's distance from "

the earth increases. Therefore, the rms er­ {

L5
ror in spacecraft velocity also decreases , •
This i s due to the relative decrease in the <

trajectory's sensitivity to velocity. �

• "
> Spocec",1!
" Occulle<l by Moon
0
THE LUNAR PHASE

.i
9
The Command and Service Module/Lunar
> 0.'
Excursion Module (CSM/LEM) is inserted

into an (SO :t: 5) nautical mile parking orbit

around the moon, with orbital insertion oc­ °0;-------C'C---"2C---"'C---�.

liME FROM INSERTION (hou,,)
curring on t.h€ b:l�k5id€ of the moon, For
UACKU tOCATION UNCE�TAINmS
purposes of this study, 22 minutes are re­
�1.9" �2,2" �66.0
Nom. ��. HI ( m )
Cartbe....o
quired before the spacecraft becomes visible Co,""rvOtl > 1 ,9"
�1 ?"
""_ii .1.4" � 4J.0
to the tracking �t ?H0!'!S en Cai'tl'i. Al i.ilis time ,, 1 . 6 "
TRACKU UNCUTAINTIES INJfCflON URORS
the 85-foot USB antennas at Canberra, and two CortbeffC' 5 ;".3 eM/I S X , " S X 1 " 6X3 " · 4 " m

30-foot USB antennas at Carnarvon and

ea.....rv.... ) S ; · .6 eM/. 6 *- , " 6 *- 2 " 8 *- 3 " " l l ny'.
Hoa"",ii

Hawaii, will track the spacecraft. The 85-

Figure 7-Propagation of spacecraft position and
foot dish will track in the two-way doppler velocity errors during CSM lunar parking orbits.
18 W. O. KAHN

mode, and the two 30-foot dishes will track in the three-way doppler mode. To insure good

tracker-spacecraft geometry, the tracking station configuration on earth was selected for

maximum north-south separation.

Approximately 3.8 hours after insertion, CSM/LEM separation occurs. In order to provide
a priori knowledge of the state to the LEM before the LEM descent maneuvers, very good
knowledge of the state must be determined by tracking the CSM/LEM from the earth. Figure

7 shows the rms errors in spacecraft position and velocity to be ±SOO meters and *24 centi­
meters per second at the time of CSM/LEM separation . Because the effects DC measuremenl­
bias errors are not included in this study, the results in Figure 7 are on the optimistic side.

The elapsed time from the initiation of the LEM descent maneuvers up to CSM/LEM dock-

ing maneuvers is approximately 36 hours. After this time period, the astronauts will have
abandoned the LEM to re-enter the CSM.
Upon re-entering the CSM, the LEM is jet­

tisoned . Shortly thereafter, the CSM is in­

jected into its earth transfer trajectory.

TRANS EARTH PHASE

"'" � 10 -
I
.
.
, '" Twenty hours after trans earth injection,

the first midcourse correction is made. Two

• other midcourse corrections are made at

(f 1.0
65 hours and at 88 hours after transearth
-
-
- injection. The last midcourse correction is
Ii made one hour before re-entry.
13. "
Error analysis studies during this phase

of the Apollo Mission are made from trans­

earth injection up to the first midcourse cor­

M<td,;d T,,,,,,k;"II
0.01 rection (Figure 8), after the first midcourse
1.0 0 2 4 6 a 10 12 14 16 18 20
correction up to the second midcourse cor­
TIME FROM TRANSEARTH INJ(CTION ( Io"v.,.)
rection (Figure 9), and eight hOUrs before
OR8ITAl PARAMETERS
re-entry up to re-entry (Figure 10). The last
M""", c�n'�,e<I eqv;no. of dote
T -.< Sept. 22. 1%9 I � S9'" 1 2'. 25 error analysis includes the time at which
x, - 1764.48081 'm X , : ·0.83083420 kmj",c
the third midcourse correction is made. For
X2 � · 6 1 6 . 7 1 037 k", Xl � - 2 .06SSJ93 .... joec
X3 � . 3(1).23143 km Xl • - 1 .0042193 "'OJ....: all these tracking-error analysis studies, the
TRACKER LOCATIONS
best tracking complex-spacecraft geometry
f,ach, No"", lo';''';e l""9;.ude HI ( ... )
configuration was chosen.
I\o\cd.;d 40_"6667" N 3.66bU7- W "
C"obe,..., 35.311528' S 149. 135833- E "
Gold"o... Attention is called to the increase in the
35.389639" N 1 1 6 . 84878" W ""
TRACKER LOCATION ERRORS INJECTION U�O!I:S rms velocity error as the spacecraft approaches
No_ Co. ''''' . HI ( m ) t, X , - t, X 1 1 5 X l .
km , 4 the re-entry altitude of 122 kilometers (Fig­
Mod,;d , , .0" • 1 .2" > 43 5X, � I>Xl ' :;Xl s l l l m/.
Cont>e,,,, , 1 . 9" , 2.2" I 66 HO!I:IZON ure 10). This increase in the rms error in
Gold"one • 1 . 1 " , 1.2" ' "
spacecraft velocity is due to the return tra­
TRACKeR UNCERTAINTIES
SAMPLING RATE
br " . 3 om/oec jectory's increased sensitivity to velocity as
,5 , .. . 20"",'et<
it approaches the earth. A corresponding de­

Figure 8-Errors in �pacecrah pO$ition and crease in the rms error in spacecraft position
velocity for Apollo return traieClary (finl 20 hours). results.
 TRACKtNG STU01ES FOR PROJECT APOLLO 19

100 10
<="------�

_ _ _ __ _ _ ... � POSITION
.- ...
... ...

' \ ..
\ •
- "
......
,
/
•

"
,
,
-; , " --" POS!T1ON • ,
,-
.....
,
...,
.. ... __ ...'
10 " ' " " , > '0

.
...... 1 , 0
. .
. :
, ,
- .....,
. :
\
�"""- VELOCITY
• •
•

0.
,.' ,.' �. t
£ ;; •
•

• • Z
"

Q �
0. O. ,
V
Z >

" LO •
LO
�
•
·

g
0, , 0.
� �
•
� CAN8ERRA
CARNARVON
MADRID GOAM
".....
'"GOLDSTONE

......
O. , O. 01
CANBERRA

0 '
, 2 -!---!O
. --"!--!--
�--!,--!,--!,----'!--
0.01
20 JO 40 " 60 HME BEfORE RE - ENTRY (hour,)

TIME FROM TRANSEARTH INJECTION 1 ....,,

.. ) TRACKER lOCAtiON UNCERTAINTIES HORIZON

No_ ... . HI ( m ) 2: 5·
0..,,._ � 1.9" �
'''' •
rulliAL PAR
MIETERS HORIZON 2.2" 66.0
T �Sepl. 22, 1969
�
' � 5°
SAMPING RATE
C""..,"'''' 1 .9" • 2.2" � 66.0
I "'-'/ min
21" 59"12� 25 '
•

X, � . 19lkb603 luryI,ec G�m 6.4" � 6.6" " 32.0

' , ' 2UIU.74 k", O. SAMPING RATE �

X2 • - 23-4554. 70 km ' ,'0.42912431 k.y.e<:

8,' 0.26682065 •.yo«
QRBlTAL PAMMETERS
T • Sepl. 24, 1969
I mN.,f..in
Xp- I21637 . l l k... 18k 47'" 59'.322
!BACKER LOCATION ERRORS (Ti .... f", ...,ond ",ide"",... �",,,,,, .i,,,,)
Nom.. 1.01. 1.00>9 . HI ( m ) XI " lSO,99\ .32km X I " - 0 . 76615626 km/sK
Meld"d * \ .0" � 1 .2" . ., Xl " · 121 ,.3-4.37 'm X2 : 1 . 0057749 km/oK
• \ . 9 �2.2" ... 57,370. 1 6 ,.. X3 " 0. $4979244 km/s.e<:
. 1 .2"
C"nb""" X3"
"

Gold,lone • 1.1" .40

TRACKER LOCATIONS
. "I
HI ( m )
TRACl5ERUNCUJAINIlt$ A p<io,; ;nlOfmalion 0' ....d
1i,,1 mideo�". co".�I"'" '",cke, Nome I.olit...de Lony;I"";"

(o...be,,,, '"
b,··20 .... ,,,,, 6 ,·.40 mele ..
6 ; � . 3 c.y,ec " ,"",2 cm/,ec ...,-�8.93km - 35· 18' 41 �50
57'.'8.4
149· 08' 09:00
..
?
Co""'''''''' -24' 53' 50�48 113· 42'
? .I"tO.t27 m/,,<
IRACISCR lOCAUONS G"".. 13" 35' OO�OO 144· 55' 30:00 20
T.ock", No .... I.o.i'ude I..<>ngil�de Ii! ( .. ) A pri"'i inl"' ....li"" "I end "I
40.416667" N 3.666667" W " ..cond mic/ccu... .".,-"cti""
'I... " * 3.48 km
Madrid
Canbe.", 35.31 1528" S 1�9.135833· E "
G"Id.lone 3�.3s<16l9· N 1 1 6 .84878 ° W "" '1 •• I - · O.0466 m/s.e<:

TRACKER UNCUTAINTIES

Figure 9-Errors in spacecraft position and velocity for 8' o ± 3 cm/_

Ba • b, - � 8� 10- ' ",di"",
Apallo return troiectory after first midcourse correction.
6' · . 2 cm/...,
6 .. . 6, • t 1 .6 . 10 -3 radion.

CONCLUSION Figure 1 00 Errors in spacecraft position and velocity

for Apollo return traje ctory during finQI eight hours
prior to re-entry.
The error analysis studies contained in

this paper demonstrate that the bias errors

in the measurements and in tr<'.r:ki.ng staUon locatlon most significantly influence the errors in
the state vector. These error sources, unlike the random errors in the measurement, do 1101

decrease as the amount of observational data is increased.

•CiiiiOWLEDGMENTS
The author expresses his appreciation to Mrs. A. Marlow and Mr. J, L. Cooley for their
help in preparing the data used in this paper.
20 w. D. KAHN

R E FERENCES

1. Katm, W. D . , and Vonbun, F. 0., "Tracking Systems, Their Mathematical Models and Their
E r rors, Part II - Least Square Treatment," to be published soon as NASA Technical Note.

2. Philco Corporation, "User's and Programmer ' s Manual for Interplanetary Error Propaga­

tion Program," prepared for contract NAS 5-3342.

3. Schmidt, S. F . , "The Application of State Space Methods to Navigation Problems," Philco

WDL Guidance and Control System Engineering Department, Technical RepOl't No, 4,

July, 1964.

4. VonhWl. F.O., and Kahn, W. D . , "Tracking Systems, Their Mathematical Models and Their

Errors, Part 1 - Theory," NASA Technical Note D-1471, October, 1962.

 USB ANTENNA STRUCTURES

by

L. E . Hightower
Goddard Space Flight Center

ABSTRACT

This paper describes the main features of the unified 5-band antennas, their
design consideratio ns, characteristics, parameters, functions, and modes of
operation. Description covers both land-based and shipboard antcrmas, specI­
fications, and maIntenance problems. Both Rosman and Apollo antennas arc
treated.

INTROOUCTION

This discussion will treat the main features of the unified S-band antennas and will give
some of the reasons behind these features. The presently planned Apollo ground system net­
work will employ ten 30-foot and three 85-foot diameter steerable antennas. These antennas

use what is known as X-V mounts. The network also uses ships instrumented with azimuth­
elevation antennas .

,
, , ,
, , ,
, ,
TYPES OF ANTENNA MOUNTS
Most steerable ante nnas have two

mutually perpendicular rotational axes as

shown in Figure 1. The main difference be­
tween antenna mounts is the orientation of the

lower of these two axes. There are three

main types of antenna mounts . AZ - f l x-v

Figure 1-Antenna mounts.

Azimuth·Elevation Mount
In the azimuth-elevation mount, the lower axis is vertical. This axis arrangement permits

compactness of design and rigidity and it is the logical choice when tracking through zenith is
not a requirement. It is by far the most popular mOWlt. The problem is that extremely fast
azimuth rates are required to track through zenith with the azimuth-elevation moWlt.

Polar {Hour Angle · D!!clinatiGnj Mount

In the polar mount the lower axis is parallel to the earth's rotational axis. Th is ;:Ir ra!1.;;C
ment facilitates ease of tracking of celesti:l_ l 0�j:;:Ct.:;. n is used for radio telescopes and for
antl:."!'!.!'!.:l.� in lh� NASA deep space effort.

21
22 l. L HIGHTOWER

x·y Mount
Both al(fS of the X-Y mOWlt are horizontal at zenith.. The mOWlt was designed especially

for tracking earU·.sateUites. Its main advantage is that it can track through zenith. All three
types of mOWlts have gimbal lock positions at th.e ends of the lower axis. For the X- Y mOWlt,

these positions are half cones (lO"wide) just above the horizon (areas which are not greatly
significant).

LAND-BASED ANTENNAS

It has been established that aU the Apollo land-based antennas must be capable of main­
taining contact with the spacecraft through zenith (orbital transfer could occur at zenith) and

essentially complete sky coverage is required. These requirements dictated selection of the

X-V mount for both the 30-foot and the 8S- foot land-based antennas.

3D·Foot Antenna

Tile first of the 30-foot S-band antennas has been erected at Collins Radio Company's

Dallas , Texas facility . The following features can be seen in Figure 2 (starting at top):

1. Three-foot diameter acquisition antenna at apex of quadripod (note radome cover).

2 . Secondary reflector for Cassegrain Ieed system located just below acquisition antenna.

3 . Y axis (upper).

4 . Y-wheel house (so-called cement mixer) whlch houses boresight package and equipment
such as parametric amplifiers that should be near the feeds. This room is air conditioned

by circulating a chilled glycol solution.

5. X axis and X·wheel assembly which houses Y-axis drive assembly and provides access

way for personnel to Y·wheel house.

6. Lower platform which provides mounting for X-drive W'lits.

7. Room beneath antenna which houses power amplifier units and motor starlers for drives.

Figure 3 shows the follow ing:

1. The main reflector. which is made up of 36 soUd surface panels . These panels are in­
dividually adjustable. Paint on the surface panels scatters solar radiation to prevent over­
heating feeds.

2. The feed cone mounted at center of disn.

3. Lights on rim of dish to warn when antenna may be transmitting. An audio warning is
also used.

Figure 4 shows tne axis movements. Figure 5 shows the optical boresight package mounted
in the Y-wheel house. The package lOOks through a window (optical flat). (Note foam insulation
on n
i side walls of wheel house . )

B5·Foot Antenna
Mucn of the structure for the three 85-foot Apollo antennas has been fabricated by the Blaw­

Knox Company, and an antenna bought under the same contract as the Apollo antennas has been
 USB ANTENNA STROCTURES 23

Figure 2-Thi rty-foot ontem'lo , side view of reflector. Figure 3-Thirty-foot ontenna, front view of reflector.

erected at Rosman, North Carolina. Figure 6 shows the two 85-foot antennas at the Rosman
Data AcquiSition Facility . The antennas are used for tracking earth satellites. The antenna in
the foreground has been in essentially continuous operation for some time and a free period
longer than 3 0 minutes is unusual. GSFC personnel have learned a lot about the maintenance of
large antennas from this and other big dish facilities. The antenna in the background is shown
in Figure 7 . The Rosman antenna in Figure 7 is the same as the Apollo antennas except for
some slight changes (mainly different quadripod support for acquisition antenna and secondary
renector) which were made to meet special S-band requirements. The main features of this
antenna are enlarged versions of those we have seen on the 30-foot antenna. Some features
worthy of note are:

1 . Axis wheel structures. In this antenna these become large space frames.

2. V-wheel house. This becomes a building mounted in the structure. In this case it
houses the power amplifier units.

3 . Optical boresight room (just left of the ladder suspended from dish structure).

Figure 8 gives a better view of the X-wheel structure. Note large counterweight box which
is filled with lead. Note also bridging beneath lower platform to hold drive pinion teeth in full
contact with the bull gear.

Figure 9 shows the Rosman 85- foot antenna reflector. This is the same as the S-band an-
tennas exceot for the quadrirod fp.p.1t .':"
: !'r"'T"t. Th';.' f<?';.'o:! c,:,�e !� ::.:::: ::.ttn.::hc':: , Aii':;' O",2 l;...u ::.t:t: the
three-foot diameter opening through the center of the dish structure . This provides a conduit
for connecting feed components with the parametric amplifiers and transmitter power ampli­
fiers in the room mounted in the V-wheel structure. The ring to which the feed cone will be
24 L. E. HIGHTOWER

Figure 4-Thirty-foot onlenno, (1)1.;5 movements.

attached is also shown. Four reflector panels have been removed to uncover the alignment
datum points. These points define the reference plane from which aU reflector panel adjust­
ments are made. The opening in the surface for the optical bol'csight equipment is also shown.

SHIPBOARD ANTENNAS
Althoug h the X-Y antenna can track through zenith, it has some drawbacks. When it is de­
signed for essentially complete sky coverage, the rotational axes are separated by a consider­
able distance. As a result, both axes must be counterweighted. This means that the design
lacks compactness and the lower axis has a high moment of inertia. For shipboard application
these disadvantages were judged to overshadow the advantage of being able to track through
zenith (considering the (act that the ship location could possibly be changed to avoid an over­
head pass). Therefore, azimuth-elevation mOWlts are used for the Apollo ships' antennas.
 USB AtlTENNA STROCTURE$ 25

Figure 6-Eighty-five-foot Qnter'lrlOS ot Rosmon.

Figure 5-Thirty-foot ontenno, opticol
boresight pockoge.
" 1' -"
.�
SPECIFICATIONS

The use of higher RF frequencies is the

obvious trend in spacecraft communications.

This, plus the fact that updating a completed

antenna is generally impractical, was the rea­
son why most main features of the Apollo an­

tennas were specified at the highest practical

level considering the present state of the art.

Many maj or parts of the antenna are specified

to greater accuracy than necessary for opera­

tion at S-band. Some examples are:

1. Reflector surface accuracy is held to

0.030 and 0.040 rms for the 30-foot and 85-

root a.;;tc;;;;as, .csp::: :::t:'.'c!j'. Thi.s should [.'P.rmit
satisfactory operation in the 10, 000 megacycle
region.

2. Alignment 01 rotallonai ax!:::; i::; ;,;:1':: I..::.

five seconds of arc. This is as close as is
feasible with existing field alignment equipment.

3 . POinting accuracy is specified to be Figure 7-Eighty-five-foot ontenno, s;milor to

within 40 seconds of arc. Apollo ontenno.
26 L. E. HIGHTOWER

�
I , ,.
MAINTENANCE --,1 .

Experience at GSFC has shown that ..

.,

steerable antennas , particulary 85-foot di­

ameter antennas, require considerable main­
tenance. Maintenance of drive systems and
gears is expected, but one of our most
troublesome problems has been the loosen­
ing of bolted jOints .

The problem is partly peculiar to X-Y

antennas . As the X- Y antenna tracks from
horizon to horizon, the gravity loading on
practically every joint in the structure is
completely reversed. Far an azimuth­
elevation antenna, only that part of the
structure below the azimuth axis experi­
ences reversal of stresses from gravity
loading. Simple calculations 5 how that
gravity loadings are, for most jOints, higher
than drive and brake loadings .
Figure 8-Eighly-five-foot antenna X-wheel �Iruclvre.

Figure 9-Eighty-five-foot antenna reflector_

 USB ANTENNA. $TR1.(TURES 27

Why does a bolted joint designed for a relatively high factor of safety loosen Wlder normal
antenna usage? First, most load values given Cor strengths of bolted jOLnts will allow a very
small amount of slippage, so that the margin of safety for a joint subjected to reversal of load·
ing may not be as high as calculated. Second, the actual loading of a particular jOint can be
higher than calculated because of slight inaccuracies in lengths of members. U a joint Slips
ever so slightly as the antenna is exercised, the bolt threads will Wlscrew because mechanical
rectification is inherent in a bolted joint which is slipped. Even if the threads are locked, the
joint will still loosen at a slower rate because of wear. This loosening of jOints can progress
throughout the structure.

A related problem is that bolts torqued to known values and then subjected to very light
loads have shown an appreciable relaxation of torque. There are at least three possible
causes:

1 . Cold flow of paint films.

2. Some extrusion of washers into bolt holes.

3 . Some yielding of "pinnacles" of irregular mating surfaces.

Because of GSFC's experience with loosening of structural joints, a program of periodic bolt
checking and torqueing is being included in the preventive maintenance program. It is expected
that a similar program will be necessary for antennas in the Apollo network.
28
 USB SERVO SYSTEM

by

N. Raumann

Goddard Space Flight Center

ABSTRACT

A unified S-band (USB) servo control and drive subsystem has been designed
aod Is being presently developed. The intent of this discussion Is to present an
overall view of the subsystem and its anticipated calXlbilltles. The text IncludeB,
8S an Introduction, a general description of the servo control and drive sub­

system, the system 's principal modes of operation and its required sky coverage.
More specific discussion on the dynamic behavior of the system (ollows lIIe
introductory portion. Finally, some preliminary results are given and the pres­
ent status of the subsystem u; discussed.

INTROOUCTION

The servo and drive system is the portion of the overall antenna system that permits the
aCCurate positioning of the gimbal axes in response to various input signals. First, the land­
based antennas will be discussed and then a few comments on snipboard systems will be made.

An X-V mount i s used for this application because zenith coverage is accomplished which is
not possible with a more conventional Az-El mount. Even though a two-axis mount could have

been designed mechanically to cover the whole hemisphere, a cone exists in which tracking is
impossible due to excessive drive rate requirements. This cone of Silence, or keyhole, is
always centered around the major axiS of the antenna and its size is proportional to maxl.mum

rates that the drive system can deliver. For the X-V mount, the keyhOle appears along its
major axis, the X axis, which is parallel to the surface of the earth and has a north-south
orientation for 30-foot systems; thus, only targets on the horizon appearing in a northern or
southern direction are affected by keyhole con·siderations. The Az-EI mount, which has its
keyhole at zenith, usually requires a larger keyhole for a given maximum drive rate because

satellite dynamics, as seen from the antenna, approach maximum values at zenith and minimum

values at the horizon.

The antenna gimbal axes are positioned by means of a hydraullc drive system. A hydraulic
system has been chosen rather than an electrical one because of inherent advantageO'..::; dlar­

acteristics, such as high torque to inertia ratio, b.rge ;:!yr.flmic range, lack of radio interference,
and lack of predomtn:L�.! Hille constants within the servo bandwidth. Nevertheless, in selecting
a hydraulic drive, certain possible problem areas have to be considered, and these :I.re r::.;;J.i1iy

concerned with hydraulic leaks and contamination of the !!;..1.:l.. (;areful design and preventative
maintenance will. how,,"...c:-, l"uinimize these problems. The rating of the drive system has been

29
30 N. RAUIoIANN

chosen to provide for obtaining maximum velocities and accelerations under maximum wind
conditions.

The servo Ind structural interface has been adequately covered for this application, which
requires that the lowest natural frequency of the structure is sufficiently high to realize the
required servo bandwidth. The servo bandwidth is mainly determined by satellite dynamics and
system noise considerations and is in the order of 1 cycle per second. The natural frequency
of the 30-foot antenna is specified to be 4 cycles per second and that of the 85-foot antelUla,
3 cycles per second.

Table 1 shows the performance speCification of the two antenna types, the 30-foot and
85-foot systems. It can be seen that the maximum tracking velOCity is 4 and 3 degrees/second
respectively and an acceleration capability of 5 degrees/second2 1s provided. These rates are
adequate to track a satell1te in a low earth orbit, of about 100 miles. The antenna will be able
to track in winds up to 45 miles per hour. Full tracking accuracy will be realized in winds up
to 20 miles per hour. Tolerances will be doubled for winds between 20 and 30 miles per hour
and quadrupled for winds between 30 and 45 miles per hour. The drive system will be powerful
enough to move the antenna to a stow position in 60 miles-per-hour winds.

Table 1

System Performance.

Criteria 30 Ft 85 Ft Units

Velocity • 3 Degrees/Second

Acceleration 5 5 Degrees/Second2

Winds; Operating
(
reduced
Operating accLlracy
) 20

45
20

45
MPH

MPH
Stowing 60 60 MPH
Survival 140 120 MPH

Sky Coverage 2 2 Degrees Above Horizon

Keyhole Cone 20 20 Degrees

Keyhole Orientation North-South Axis East-West Axis

Accuracy: Pointing ±O.6 :t o . 6 Minutes

Tracking 1 . 5 max 1 . 5 max MinLltes

Due to the particular arrangement of the axes of this mount, the keyhole will be oriented
along the X axis. The keyhole will describe a 20-degree cone at each end of the X axis. Except
for the keyhole, the antenna will be capable of tracking in all directions above a horizon of 2
degrees. POinting accuracy can be defined as the closeness to which the antenna can be directed
to a given coordinate position. Painting accuracy could be determined in the program mode, for
example, by introducing a fixed position into the programmer and measuring the error between
 USB SERVO SYSTEM 31

this commanded position and the actuaL POinting accuracy o f this system will be ±O.6 minutes
of arc. Tracking accuracy is determined by measuring the overall angular error between the

axi.s of the RF beam of the antenna and a line drawn between the antenna and the target. In
particular, this measurement could be performed by autotracking a calibration plane and ob­
serving the position of the plane on an optical monitor mounted on the antenna. The 3 - sigma

tracking error wil1 not exceed 1 . 5 minutes of arc.

DRIVE SYSTEM

Each antenna axis is driven by two fixed displacement hydraulic motors which are con­

nected to the bull gear through individual gear boxes. This configuration has been chosen to
eliminate backlash in the drive system. Figure 1 shows the X bull gear, a pinion extending

from a gearbox, and the hydraulic motor. The hydraulic pump unit is in the background. Fig­

ure 2 shows a closer picture of the gearbox with the motor. Figure 3 shows the pump unit

with its hydraulics. On one end of the pump unit, the variable displacement pump which drives

both motors is shown. On top of the pump is a servo valve. This cont rols a ram which in

turn positions the yoke of the pump. Yoke angle, for feedback purposes, i s derived from a
potentiometer in front of the pump. The pump is driven by a squirrel cage motor barely visible

behind the structure. The motor also drives two auxiliary fixed-displacement pumps which are

not visible. On top of the pump unit the reservoir is visible. Next to it is a box which houses

the brake control unit. This device permits a gradual application of the brakes for normal

shutdowns. Only during an emergency stop is sudden complete application of the brakes used.
In front of the pump unit are various filters, valves, and gauges required for the satisfactory

operation of the system.

A very simplified schematic of the hydraulic drive system is shown in Figure 4.

There are the two motors which are connected through gear reducers to the antenna axis

bull gear.

Hydraulically, the motors are connected

'"
•
in series and are energized by the main pump.

When the yoke of the pump is in its neutral, or •

..
•
�
•

._-'-

-.2.;
.

:.. ..

Figure I - Photogroph of USB antenna drive system

showing X-bull gear and hydraulic motor. Figure 2-Gearbo" and motor.
32 N. RAUMANN

>
/"' - ,
,

- -i?) '
.@
• •

·t ' �
,
.
_ .'
� C
• •
• '..
.,

�
IY r.
�
•
.
· - ,.

.
.
•
• '
• ''
•
" y-

. .

Figure 3-Pump unit with hydraulk�.

SOLENOID QP(R VALVE

r---------
( NORMALLY CLOSED)

==t__ PINION
--------- - - - - - - - ,
,

i,
I

t:=:!--' GEAR
, w"
o
I, ,

r-
�I
" ""'\-�L DIFF
�="'.':A NTENNA

INDuCTION AXIS
MOTOR
T OOl z Q

==,1--- PINION

HIGH PlIESSURE (UP TO 3000 p.i)

CONTROL PRESSURE 1000 1'"
81AS PRESSURE 100 P';
RnURN PRESSURE 0 p.i
_ MECHANICAL LINKAGE

Figure 4-Schemalic of hydraulic drive �y�lem with no excitation and brokes applied.
 lISB SERVO SYSTEM 33

central, position, as shown in this slide, no differential pressure is produced across the pump.
The anti-backlash feature of this drive system is accomplished by the first auxiliary pump.

The output of this pump is held to 100 pounds per square inch by means of a relief valve. This
100 pounds per square inch, or bias pressure, is applied through check valves to opposite ports
of the hydraulic motors, thus producing equal and opposite torques on the bull gear. Even

though no motion results, backlash in both gearboxe s and between pinion and bull gear will be

taken up. The second auxiliary pump produces a 1000 pounds per square inch control pressure
which is used to power the yoke servo and to lift the brakes whenever the solenoid operated

valve is energized. Having to rely on control pressure and current in the solenoid makes the

brakes fail-safe. Failure, electrical or hydraulic, will apply the brakes automatically.

Figure 5 shows the same schematic, only now the brakes are lUted and a signal has been
applied to the servo'valve causing its spool to be displaced to the right. This action raises the

pressure on one side of the piston of the ram actuator and moves it to the right. This in turn

moves the yoke to the right and causes a pressure increase at motor "1. Maximum pressure
could be as high as 3000 pounds per square inch. The check valve at motor n closes because
pressure on upper port of the valve is higher than on the lower port. The other check valve

remains open, thus maintaining the 100 pounds per square inch bias pressure on motor ,,2
which is required for the anti-backlash feature. Bec ause pressure P I is la rger than P l ' motor
n will develop a torque T\ that is larger than that of the other motor, and consequently a net
torque will be applied to the bull gear which is proportional to the difference of T\ and T l '

This net torque, if sufficiently high, will cause motion of the antelUla, say in a clockwise

direction.

�� :-;:;;;� �L,
SOLENOID OPU VAtVE
( NOItMAttY CLOSED)
r--------- ------- - - -; -

s
o
,

�..;
"'ANTENNA
F
"'''

I HIGH PRESSURE (uP TO 3OOO ,..i )

i �,."i!i='-'-""�':'L
CONUOL PRESSUU 1000 ..,.;
••••••••

---
81A{ MH�t,;t� lOOps;
,-
_
'"
__
'OV
__O"
__

--- RETURN PRESSUU 0 psi

_ MfCHANICAl liNKAGE
L _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Fi gure 5-Sehemotic of hydrav lic drive system with brakes lifted and signal applied
to servo valve cousil'l9 its spool to be di$ploced to righl.
34 N. RAUIAANN

Figure 6 shows a similar condition only now the drive signal to the servo valve has been

reversed. This will produce a torque T � at motor #2 which is higher than that of motor n and

motion of the bull gear will result in the opposite direction to that in the previous case.

SOLENOID OPER VAlVI:

( NORlAAllY CLOSED)
r--------- --------------------- 1
PI FIXED
HYOR
,
I DISPLAC
MOTOR BRAKE
i
i f t
j '--C'"'---, t::::::J..-.....
BUll

I' RELiH VALVE I

r"I-��
100p0
-�
; I A NTENNA
, Jf DIFF F=l
_ ""
" f':
r
.
iI
I
INDUCIION PRESS AX"
'-/1
:
MOTOR TRANS
-�-i

,
yon�
�
CHECK I
VALVE iL rAfiXED
m;
DISPLAC
3--tV ...P2.... '-'
I• I ,
:.................: ............. 1.. M��OR PINION

:I
1 -'--'
i,
I I I
I SPOOL
IT
1
I
L
' ' I J. I
L_ � I
1 u--l
- - -----

J:;;;"_J;�' . ,
I I HIGH PRESSURE (UP TO 3000 pli)
-I-�---1-.
...
I --- CONtROL f'RESSlJItE 1000 PO'
�':L
••.•••••

I RELIEF L _ _ ___ __ alAS PRESSURE 100 psi

I VALVE
- RETU�N PRESSURE 0 p.i
...1
L - - - - - - -'RESERVOIR
- ..J _ MECHANIC,\L lINK,\GE
_ _

Figure 6-Schemalic af hydraulic drive $ySlem with drive signol to servo valve rever$ed.

Note that several feedback transducers have been provided in the hydraulic drive system,
namely: a potentiometer measuring yoke angle, a differential pressure transducer across the

pump, and a tachometer at each motor shaft, which, however, is not shown. Also not shown are

many other hydraulic components and circuits, for example: a heat exchanger is provided to
cool the oil, several filters in the ranges between 1-1/2 - 25 microns are provided to keep
contamination to a minimum, an oil path through the pump housing is provided to prevent over­

heating of the pump (especially at no flow conditions), and several relief valves are provided in

case excess pressures appear.

SERVO SYSTEM

The servo system is capable of operating in any of the following modes.

1. manual

2. slew

3. programm er

4. slave
 USB SERVO SYSTEM 35

5. scan

6. acquisition track

7. automatic track

8. auto-program

9. test

A manual mode is provided which permits an operator to position the antenna to any desired

coordinate position by means of a ball tracker.

The ball tracker can also be used in the slew mode, in which the antenna can be operated

at various constant velocities. In the program mode, the antenna follows a command which is

generated from a prediction tape in the programmer. The antenna is also capable of following

any other antenna in the slave mode. A scan function generator has been incorporated to per­

mit superposition of a search pattern on most other modes of operation. Scan functions avail­

able are spiral, circle, raster, and sector search patterns. The acquisition track mode permits

automatic tracking of targets with the acquisition monopulse system and the automatic track

mode permits traCking with the narrow beam, high-gain, unified S-band monopulse system.

A new mode of operation has been added to this system which has not appeared on previOUS
GSFC antennas and this is the autoprogram mode, which will he explained a little later. Finally,

there is a test mode which permits testing of the variOus operational modes prior to a satellite
pass.

Figure 7 shows the servo control panel. The various mode switches are arranged in the
center of the panel. Several other switches required for operation of the antenna are provided
below, such as power on-off switch, hydraulic on-off SWitches, and disable switches. Indicator
lights are provided for each axis monitoring oil temperatures, oil filter conditions, and antenna

limit conditions. Servo error meters for each axis are also provided. The operator can, at
his discretion, adjust the servo loop bandwidth by means of a switch between the error meters.

Above the servo control panel is the

error monitor and slave selector panel. By X POSITION SERVO WARNING EUOR
REAOOUTS CONTROL CONTROL MONITOR
depressing any of the buttons, the antenna can

"fl �"F ""'�

, ,
POSITION
.. REAOOUTS
be slaved to any of six external sources. The
II!IIII!, ... 11111"11
additional servo error meters permit meas­ SCAN

�� � ��
• .
,,
OEN

""�=
urement of errors in any mane not selected
cro ' hi
by the servo control unit. Figure 8 again C ", . C �ITING
shows the servo control unit ;.nd the error SI1ElF

/
monitor and slave selector panel, but it

I I
shows it in relation to the ball tracker which

is just in front of the operator. 1 I

&AlL TRACKER

This ball tracker, as previously men­

tioned, permits simultaneous positioning of Figure 7-Servo control panel.

36 N. RAUIAANN

both axes of the antenna in the manual mode

of operation. In the slew mode, the ball
tracker permits variations in axis speeds.
Figure 9 shows the complete operator's sta­
tion. The servo control unit is in the center.
X and Y position readouts are on either side
of the control unit. Just below the Y position
readout is the scan generator. Next to the •

i t:::!
servo console is the TV monitor ('amera
•
�nci

• •
equipment. Next to it is the servO rack hous­
•
ing the various amplifiers and other elec­ . ....,
tronic components.
•
-I- • • •

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

Fi gure 1 0 shows a rough schematic of

the servo system. The antenna mount is
represented by the right-hand blOck. The
antenna axis is driven from the hydraulic
system through a gear box. Each antenna
axis is provided with a synchro transmitter -
actually, there are two, a coarse and a fine
transmitter, but for simplicity only one has
been shown. Furthermore, RF electronics
are provided which generate servo error Figure 8-Serllo control unit in relation to boll trocker.

-=auw.
;0 . o ·� = '.
,\
-.�
.
_
�

'''Ii_ _ ...
11
.
------- . ....---,
\.o o �.o , · . .,
'

\ . .\ "
,u,
.

- -
. . . . .. - . " .' ' .

=-�
• _ . F."

�
_

Figure 9-Complete operator's station.

 USl! SERVO SYSTEM 37

� - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - � - - - - - - - - - - - - - - � - - - - - - - - - -1
CONTROlL£R HYORAUlIC DRIVE ANITNNA
!<;AN SYSTEM MOUNT
G£NElATOI

YO" MOTOR G.",

SERVO ANTENNA
YOKE ANGU OlffUfNTlAl
1OTENTIOMHU HESSUU
TAAN50UCU

OPERATOR SYNCHRO
ADJUSTED TACHOMETER' TRANSMITTER
- - - - - - - - - - - - - .,
-

OPERATOR ,

-+1 RECfIVU
ADJUSTED CONTROL TRF,
L_..Y 4-
.:
A:c
urc:
O
c:: .:
' ",
:: '_
: C;O _ _ o-
' •. ,
r
---------
- -

L _ _ .,

fROM I SLAVE
REMOTE DATA
SOURa I , PROCeSSOll:
L.. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J , ENCOOE�
TAP£ LN L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .J

figure I�SchemDfic of servo system.

signals in the tracking modes, and each axis has a digital position encoder. The hydraulic
system conSists, as previously stated, of the motors, the pump, and the yoke servo with their

respective feedback elements. The controller is made up of several operaUonal amplifiers

and switching relays.

The system utilizes three minor servo loops [or stability and linearization purposes.
These are the yoke loop, pressure feedback loop, and the velocity loop. The main, or position,

loop is closed around equipment that depends on the various modes of operation. In the manual
mode, the operator adjusts the ball tracker, which is coupled to a control translormer. This

transformer compares the position of the mount to its shaft position and generates an error
signal which will move the drive system and therefore the mount in a direction to null this

error signal. During autotrack, the RF receiver acts as a position transducer and is used to
close the loop. In the program mode, the encoder output is compared to coordlnates on a pre­
diction tape, and an error signal is generated which again is fed to the servo system. Similarly,
in the slaved mode, an error signal is applied to the system.

The various amplifiers in the controller have been compensated to give the pr<'.:lpcr h-�uency
response for the various loop gain conditions ::Ind th� Se.l"VO bandwidth requirements. System
accuracy is a tlireet f;"uction of loop gain, bandwidth, and the type of servo system used. To

realize the tracking accuracy in the autotrack mode, a Type n servomechanism i� '.\9ed. This

type of system reduces velocity errors to zero, ::1"-1 C:'.:: :-.4S to contend with acceleration errors

only; however. thi! !.:,·p� .:ol a system is more diHicult to stabilize than a Type I system, which
is uUlized in all other modes of operation. BandWidth is dictated by target dynamiCS, wind
spectra, and nOise considerations. Normally tracking low altitude satellites In windy environment
38 N RAUI.'ANN

requires a bandwidth of about 1 cycle per second. Satellites far out in space have a very slow
apparent motion and therefore can use lower bandwidth. Lower bandwidth is especially desirable
from a noise standpoint because RFthermal noise increases with satellite distance due to
poorer signal�to-noise ratios. To accommodate these conditions, a variable bandwidth switch
has been provided, permitting servo bandwidth selection by the operator. Bandwidths between
0.12 cycle per second and 1.0 cycle per second are available.

Switching to a lower bandwidth may. however, not be justified for a distant satellite target
when tracking occurs during windy conditions. Even though target dynamics could use a narrow
servo bandWidth, varying winds require a wide bandwidth. To accommodate these contradictory
requirements, the autoprogram mode has been provided. This combination mode uses narrow
bandwidth tracking information for following target dynamics and uses wide bandwidth program
information to reduce wind effects. Computer results have indicated. that definite improvement
in operation can be expected; however, this type of operation has not been field-tested as yet.

The shipboard antennas, the 30-foot dishes on injeCtion ships, and the 12-foot dishes on
re-entry ships, have basically the same type of servo and drive system. The mount has an
Az-EI configuration. The drive system must have the capability of not only following a target
but also of stabilizing the mount against roll and pitch of the ship. This requires antenna
velOCities of 50 degrees/second and accelerations of 50 degrees/second 2. Stabilization against
ship's motion is accomplished by use of rate gyros on the mount and by utilizing information
derived from the ship's inertial navigation system. Contrary to the land-based antennas, an
electric drive system is provided which consists of a torque motor and an amplidyne con-
nected in a Ward- Leonard loop. The advantages of torque motors are that they do not require
gearing and consequently eliminate backlash. Also, these motors display a large dynamiC range
which cannot be duplicated with an ordinary dc motor. Torque motors permit a compact
design which influences favorably the nautral frequency of the structure. At present, a natural
frequency of 10 cycles per second is anticipated. These systems have essentially the same modes
of operation as their land based counterparts. Their tracking ac(:uracy will also be 1 . 5 minutes
of arc.
 ANTENNA FEEDS AND ACQUISITION ANTENNAS

by
J. Flowers
Goddard Space Flight Center

ABSTRACT

This paper presents the history and a technical description of the Apollo
Cassegrainian Feed System and Acquisition Antenna. Characteristics of the feed
and acquisition antenna systems are discussed, including design considerations,
configuratiOn, constraints, parameters, and interfaces witb. the Cassegralnian
feed system and the more conventional focal-point feed system. Discussion in­
cludes the 30-foot parabolic dish antenna, the shipboard 30-foot antennas, and
the feed and acquisition antenna systems for the proj e<:t<.
>(j 85-foOI dishes. Also
described are typical receiving patterns, the method of TE 11/TM 12 mode ex­
citation, effiCiency factors, and various packaging problems.

INTRODUCTION

The Cassegrainian feed system configuration was decided upon because it is better able to
carry the complexity of equipment required to be located in proximity to the feed. A simple
adaptation of already proved designs was made a firm requirement early in the design of the
Cassegrainian feed. The feed design is a basic four-horn monopulse in which the communica­
tions channel is formed by summing the four horns. The E-plane distribution is altered by
higher order modes, generated in side-wall launchers, to produce equal E- and H-plane illum­
inations. Simplicity of the feed design 1s further enhanced by limiting available polarizatiOns
to right -and-lefl circular, remotely selectable. A diversity communications channel is avail­
able but unused.

An early decision in the design of the acquisition antenna placed this unit on the periphery
of the 30-foot dish; with further study it was determined that for an X-V mounted antenna the
apex of the quadrapod was the more desirable location from both an RF and a mechanical stand­
point. The acquisition antenna has a Simple four-horn receive only feed. Any of four polariza­
tions is available, remotely selectable.

CASSEGRAINIAN FEED SYSTEM

The Cassegrai!,
j�n feed assembly serves as the illuminating system for the 30-foot para­
bolic dish antenna, and in due course, will serve likewise for the 85-foot model. In this dis­
cussion such terms as "illuminating" and "radiator" are u�I;'<:I. fo:: th€o ::;ake ot simplicity in
describing function� of the {.,.bu, irrespective of its use as a transmitting or receiving feed, even
though a receiving feed does not illuminate a reflector antenna, in a true sense.

39
40 J. FLOWERS

This assembly consists of the hyperboloidal subrenector and the feed cone or feed hous­
ing, which contain§' the feed, composed of the aperture horn, mode control sections circular

polarizer, orthogonal mode junctions, comparators, polarization switches, and the filters and
diplexer.

The feed system Is the connecting link between the physical antenna structure and the
unified S-band transmitters and receivers. By the very uniqueness of its position in the overall
system, the feed system, like the antenna structure, must have near 100 percent reliability,
as i t is virtually impossible to provide redundant circuits which may be quickly switched into
the system.

To the end of achieving reliability we chose a design approach which combined good micro­
wave engineering techniques and proved, established principles to create a simple and de­
pendable feed system. At the same time we felt constrained, by the complexity and weight of
receiving equipment which was required to be located in the immediate viCinity of the feed, to
introduce a small element of additional unreliability by the use of a Cassegrainian configuration.

The advantage of the Cassegrainian system over the more conventional focal-point system
is apparent in Figure I, which illustrates in simplified sketches the principal differenc e between
the two. The focal-point feed illuminates the main reflector surface directly, and its total
weight plus signal and control cabling must be supported by the quadrapod. legs, whereas the
Cassegralnian system uses a passive, secondary reflector in front of the focal pOint, permitting
the active feed components to be mounted close to the main reflector surface. The author
places the "unreliable" label on the Cassegrainian system only because there is an additional
item of equipment to sustain damage, or to become misadjusted; i n reality it is highly probable
that a Cassegrainian system will prove more reliable, as environmental protection capability is
enhanced by the closed, weather-tight wheel-house and cable runs for RF, power, and controls
are shortened and simplified.

DESIGN PARAMETERS [3D-FOOT DISH)

To summarize the pertinent basic design parameters of the 3(1-foot dish microwave sub­
system: The feed assembly wlll receive data in the 2270- to 2300-megacycle band with a
minimum gain of 44.Odb, corresponding to an

APeRTURE APERTURE overall efficiency of 53%, including 12R losses

PLANE PLANE
of less than 0.5db. Monopulse sum and error
'OCAC
PLANE signals of comparable gain are provided to the
tracking receiver In this band as well. Trans­
mission of up to 20-kilowatt RF power, at a
--'
AXIS minimum of 43.Odb gain, is possible over the
2090- to 2120- megacycle band. The feed system
receives and transmits only circular polariza­
tion with remote switching capability. Receiving
and transmitting circuits are switched simulta­

A. CASS£CRAINLAN B. fOCAL-POINT feED neously, with the primary data-receiving output,

as well as the monopulse tracking signals, being
Figure l-Anlenna feed systems. of the same polarization sense as the transmitted
 AftTENNA FEEDS AND ACQUISITION AftTENNAS 41

signals. Very close attention has been paid to the distribution and symmetry of phase and

amplitude in the feed system, providing a clean sidelobe structure and a sharp, stable tracking­
signal output .

DESIGN PARAMETERS [S5-FOOT OISHI

The feed and acquisition antenna systems for the 85-foot dishes have not yet been developed.

They will be electrically similar to those of the 30-foot dish; with less of a packaging problem

being posed by the larger feed cone of the 85-foot structure, the feed system can be further

Simplified, particularly with respect to ease of assembly and disassembly. The primary dif­
ference between the two subsystems, of course, is that in the 85-foot dish the feed will develop

gains of 50.5db receiving and 50.0db transmitting. Better sidelobe control will also be possible.

Except for these differences, what is said here applies as well to the 85-foot feeds and acqui­

sition antennas as to the 30-foot equipment.

SHIPBOARD ANTENNAS [30-FOOT OISHI

Also, in a general sense, the basic parameters given here for the feed system of the ground

station 30-foot unified S-band antennas apply as well to the shipboard 30-foot antennas, built for

the prime contractor, Reeves Instrument

_____ SUB REFLECTOR
Company, by Hughes Aircraft Company in
Fullerton, California. The basic technical
difference is in the method of injection of
higher order modes which are described
later. The designer of the shipboard 30-foot
feed system had an easier packaging problem

than did the Rantec engineers, due to more

space being available in the back-up structure

of the Az-El mounted shipboard antennas

than in the ground station structure.

UNIFIED SoUND FEED SYSTEM

The basic aperture components of the "'"

unified S-band feed system (produced by

Rantec Corporation in Calabasas, California)

OIPlEXER
are the four square waveguide horns, dis­

posed two opposing two to develop th� error

::;ign:L!s 1r. o::ach plane (Figure 2). These are
represented by the four parallel lines. From
this pOint back the system is a simple, r1as­

sical fo'.l!" channel-waveguide monopulse sys­ ERROR

,
- - - - - - - - - - - _. _

tem. Problems were encountered in packag­

ing the components within the feed cone figure 2-CosSoegroiniOr'! feed system, block diogrom.
42 J. FlIJ/IERS

(shown in outline here by the dashed lines), approximately 7 feet tall by 3 -1/2 feet in

diameter at the base, to the extent that the original design goal of packaging entirely within the

feed cone area was not achieved. However, observing the packaging design as it now stands

would lead one to the conclusion that the spilling-out of microwave equipment from the base of
the feed cone is intentional, as the input filters of the feed extend down or hack into the Y-wheel
house to a very convenient point for short-cable connection to the preamplifiers.

The four square waveguide horn outputs lead into the orthomode junctiOll section in which

the orthogonal circular polarizations are extracted. These are operated upon by the proper

combination of magic-T hybrids and transfer- switch positions to give sum and error channels

of remotely selectable right or left circular polarization. The transmitter input is diplexed

from the primary sum output, hence is of the same sense circular polarization as the primary

receive-sum output, which is also the tracking-reference channel, and the same sense as the
tracking-error channels. A diversity receiving-sum output, of the opposite sense circular

polarization to the primary, is available but unused in the present system. Better than 190db

isolation is obtained between the transmit and receive ports tn the transmitting frequency band;

and better than 16fidb isolation to any spurious signals generated by the transmitter in the re­

ceiving frequency band.

Outward from the basic four-horn monopulse aperture the feed system becomes what has

come to be called a "multi mode" horn. The multimode portion of the feed comprises the

sections at the top of Figure 2 and is shown SChe matically in Figure 3.

The effect of the multi mode action is to operate upon the amplitude distributions (shown
at the four-horn aperture to the left in Figure 3) to produce the distribution illustrated at the

right. The final result is that the H-plane

distribution is unaffected, and the E-plane

is modified to be essentially identical to the

TO:
-

MATCHING'"
1 H-plane, leading to higher efficiency and

improved side lobe control.

o =r--J1'
seCTION

, ,t
t L..;'
L� B ,. RANTEC FEED

[ffij The Rante<: feed differs from others in

tiM
n n
c +-- [±J this class which have been described in the

published literature in the method of TE

TM mode excitation.
III
Section B-B is a

'" mE
l
I

C [ill
section through the main square waveguide
, .,
n � beyond the four waveguide aperture, and
--+
includes a section through one of the sets of
MAGNETIC
FIHO IN higher mode exciters, which are essentially

filij C
....PERTURE

�
'"
four auxiliary waveguides, shOrted at their
� � --+ .�. ft HEcalC far ends. When the electric field is as shown,
FIElO

SEC A -.... SEC B- 8 SEC c - c

the upper and lower auxiliary waveguides
are excited. Being of very small axial di­
Figure 3-TEll�/TM I2 e)(ciler. menSion, the mouths of these auxiliary
 A/HENNA FEEDS AND ACQUISITION ANTENNAS 43

waveguides act as magnetic line sources. For the sum mode, these line sources couple to the
TE 10' TE I
l' and TM ! l modes, plus higher modes which are prevented from propagating by
choice of the main waveguide dimension A. Essentially only the TE \0 and the TE u /TM 1 2 modes
are present in the throat of the horn. Two independent and essentially non-interacting exciter
sections are used in series, the parameters of each being chosen so that one optimizes the
phase and amplitude relations for the 2270-2300-megacycle band, and the other functions like­
wise for the transmit band.

When the feed is operated in the X-difference mode, the higher mode exciter couples to
the higher order modes. However, these modes do not propagate in the main square waveguide
size chosen. In the Y-difference mode, the exciter section couples to the TE II /TM 1 1 modes,
which are the desired modes already launched by the phaSing of the four-waveguide sections.
Other modes are again cut off by the choice of the main square waveguide size.

The resulting aperture distributions approach the ideal, with the exception which is common
to all orthodox monopulse systems; for an optimum amplitude taper across the dish in the sum
modes the difference mode tapers are too low, resulting in high difference pattern sidelobes
(in the order of -15db). The phasing section and horn are designed to cause the TE 20 and the
TE 1 \ /TM !1 modes to be phased to maintain the orthogonal phasing generated by the circular
polarizer.

RECEIVING PATTERNS

A set of representative sum and error receiving patterns of the 30-foot dish is shown in
Figure 4. These are hand transcribed from data recorded at the experimental site at Dallas,
Texas; our instrumentation was not the best and the site is far from ideal for an exhaustive
evaluation of a large aperture antenna. Ground reflections were an obvious problem. Never­
theless, a sufficient number of our patterns recorded on this poor range were Similar to those
recorded on the shipboard 3D-foot dish at the relatively ideal Carbon Canyon range to give us
a measure of confidence in the results. It must be pointed out, however, that the sidelobes in
all planes about the antenna axis will not be as good as shown here; in some instances the first
sidelobes in the sum pattern are as high as
-17.5db below the sum pattern peale
O r-
---,
� ----
-- �
5° 30� � U� � -,
3 db 2 9 . 0 . 8

.: \
FOOT S B OISH
, '\ 2282.5 M<o

TRANSMITTING PATTERNS -"

: � i���il��::���E
Y-AXIS ROTATION

The transmitting patterns of the 3D-foot

dish have not yet been evaluated satisfactorily
at Dallas due to instrumentation problems. In­
dications are, in the preliminary data taken,
that these will show somewhat higher close-in
sidelobes th!>..!! th" i·�celving patterns. This
OEGREES
high energy content out to some 5 degrees will
actually be used to ad v a n t a g e as the Figure 4-Typicol receiving patterns.
44 J. FLOWERS

acqui sition-transmission mode, which will be discussed in this symposium by Mr.

R. H. Newman.

ACQUISITION ANTENNA SUBSYSTEM

The acquisition antenna subsystem was developed and built by the prime contractor of the

unified S-band system, Collins Radio Company. It was our intention at the outset of the program
to mount the acquisition antenna on the periphery of the main dish, but a study made by Collins

Radio in cooperation with Blaw-Knox convinced us that for an X-Y mounted antenna, the apex
of the quadrapod was the more desirable location, from both an RF and a mechanical standpoint.

From the RF viewpoint, the apex-mounted antenna maintains a more uniform earth-ta-antenna

relationship, irrespective of the direction of poInting, than does a peripherally mounted antenna
on an X-Y mount. Isolation between the main dish, transmitting, and the receiving acquisition
antenna is essentially equal in either location. The mechanical analysis showed that the de­
flection of the subreflector remained within the specified limits of 0.05 inches; this has been

substantiated by measurements at Dallas. Furthermore, the deflections are more uniform

than the off-center deflections produced by the periphery location.

The acquisition antenna has a Simple four square waveguide horn feed, as is shown in
Figure 5. Orthogonal linear polarizations are extracted from the square waveguides through

probes, and are carried through the rest of the circuitry in type-n/coaxial components. The

switch-hybrid packages are modularized components manufactured by Ramcor, and are sand­
wiched, with the comparator package, in the space between the acquisition dish and the sub­
reflector. From this network one sum and two error channels, of any linear or circular

polarization remotely seledable, are fed back through coaxial lines to the acquisition pre­

amplifiers. Three waveguide filters identical to the receive filters used in the main feed
system are inserted into these lines, and are mounted in the back-up structure of the main dish.

For the 30-foot dish the acquisition antelUla is a 42-inch diameter paraboloidal dish of

0 . 4 fld,with a beam width of apprOximately 10 degrees and a minimum of 22db gain over the

receiving band of 2270-2300 megacycles. For the 8S-foot system, the acquisition antenna will
be proportionately scaled.
 ANTENNA FEEDS AND ACQUISITION ANTENNAS 45

�
DIRECTION

,,,,2,'ON
ISO" PHASE
SHifT
�
(VIEW£O FROM Ru.R OF fEED)
1� PHASE
SHIFT 180· PHASE
SHIfT

A A e e c c o 180. PHASE
"'" VERT Hm VERT HOR SHIFT

liNE LINE
STRETCHER snnCHER (REMOTEl'(
LOCATED)

TRANSfER TkAN5FER TRANSfER

SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
46
 PARAMETRIC AMPLIFIER. AND NOISE FIGURE
AND TEST SIGNAL NETWORK
by
J . B. Martin
Goddard SPace Flight Center

ABSTRACT

Param etric amplifiers are uSe<i lo provide a low system noiSf.! temperature
for both the main tracking and acquisition antennas. Identical units are used to
simplify maintenance and allow substitution in an emergency. A noise tempera­
ture of 170'K degrees is achieved without cooling. The untts are housed
in weatherproof, pressurized containers to allow mounting without weather
protection.

It is imJXIrtant to determine system t"eadiness for operation without dis­

abling the equipment. The Noise Figure and Test Signal network is designed to
measure noise figure or inject test signals while the receivers arc connected to
the antenna terminals. This arrangement also allows more reali stic lests of
signal threshold since the effects of antenna temperature and sky noise are In­
cluded in the measurement.

INTRODUCTION

A large variety of techniques and devices is used to calibrate a tracking system prior to
its operational use. Typical examples which have already been discussed are the method of
aligning surface panels and the use of airplanes to calibrate all signal- receiving subsystems.
It is necessary, in a complex system such as thiS, to perform daily preoperational tests to as­
sure the operator that the equipment has been set up properly and is working to expectations.

Two subsystems-the Boresight EqUipment, and the Noise Figure and Test Signal network­
are used in performance of these tests. The Boresight Equipment is located on a remote tower
and is effective only when the dish can be pointed in the direction of the boresight tower. The
Noise Figure and Test Signal network is located near the feed on the dish and may be used with
the antenna in any position.

NOISE FIGURE AND TEST SIGNAL INJECTION SUBSYSTEM

The Noise Figure and Test Signal Injection S'.!b::;Y5tem is used to measure receiver nOise
figure (which l.ncluues the parametric amplifier) or to inject a variety of test signals into the
receiving equipment. This enables the operator to verify that the system has the proper .,'?!!�:.
tivity and that the data demodulator and data hanrllU!(; cq;;.iiJiu�nt will operate properly with the
receiver. A r-r!.r:'�:ry goal in the design of this subsystem has been flexibility: it may be used

47
48 J. 8. MARTIN

with the a�enna in any position and it allows the use of a wide variety of static or dynamic

test signals.

Figure 1 shows the functional block diagram of the Noise FIgure and Test Signal Injection
subsystem. The receivers are included, since this subsystem connects into the receiver both
at the input and output. Note the division drawn between the antenna-mounted equipment on the
left and the control room equipment on the right. The control assembly located in the control
room turns the network on, determines what signals will be injected and which receiver chan­
nels will be measured. We can, with the test transmitter, inject a CW or a phase- modulated
signal through the network assembly to selected receiver inputs. Note that the test inputs are
shown in parallel with the inputs from the feed. The test signals are injected into the receiver
without disconnecting the receiver from the antenna. This is done for two purposes: first, we
may be sure when the test signal is turned oll that the receiver 1s ready to operate; second,
this enables a test of system threshold and system noise figure to be made under conditions
which are very realistic because all noise from the antenna is present in the system at the
time the test is made. If we wish to inject a different type of signal, the test transmitter may
be disconnected and a special signal inserted. An example of an alternate source is a sweep
generator for checking the portion of the receiver which is mounted on the antenna.

It was mentioned previously that parametric amplifiers are mounted on the antenna. They
are used only on the sum channel of the main and acquisition receivers, because the error
channels in this application do not need the low noise figure. In addition, the first receiver

ACO MAIN
FEED FEED

"
"'M I "'M
, ,
, MAIN RECINER ANO ,
SUM ACQUISITION R£CEIVE_ - SO'"
INCLUDING PARAMPS SCM I - F OUTPuts
,

{H"
,
,
,

!
!
"ONAC
OR NOISE

I
SIGNAL

NOISE I SELECTED 1- F
TRIGGER
NOISE

NETWORK
I FIGUR!
METER ON-OfF
I
CONnOL
ASSEMSLY ASSEMaLY
I
TEST SIGNAL I ON- OFF
nST

I
I T MOOUlATION

ANTENNA ... I ., CONTROL ROOM

Figure I-Functional block diagram of noise figure and lest signal

iniection subsystem.
 PARAr.t:TRIC AMPLIFIER, AND NOISE FIGURE AND TEST SIGNAL NETWORK 49

frequency conversion is performed on the antenna. The total amount of antenna-moWlted equip­
ment is quite significant. Thus the need for nOise figure and test signal injection on the antenna
becomes quite clear. This network measures noise figure to an accuracy of about 1/2db on the
sum channel and about Idb on the error channels . This is not intended to be a precise measure­
ment. The primary purpose in this case is a measurement of relative accuracy which can be
repeated from day to day to obtain a trend of system deterioration.

Figure 2 shows the basic concept of the process of "automatic" noise figure measurement.
At the input of the receiver three noise signals may be present nOise which is due to the an­
tenna, noise which is due to the receiver, and noise from a noise source. For this purpose, a
nOise source located on the antenna is alternately fired on and off by the nOise figure control
circuitry in the operations room. When it is fired on, its output is added to the total noise
present at the receiver input. This is amplified through the receiver circuits and fed to the
noise figure indicator which adds gain to the signal to produce a constant amplitude (N 2) in the
noise figure indicator.

When the nOise source is turned off, the gain of the indicator is held constant and the ampli­
tude of noise left (N 1 ) is a measure of the total noise present in the receiving system. This
amplitude is displayed on the noise-figure meter as an indication of noise figure. Examples
are shown for both a low and a high system nOise figure. Both cases have the same amount of
antenna noise and noise-source noises but a different amount of receiver noise. The amount of
noise added to N 1 is the same for both cases. The magnitude of the ratio of N 2 to N 1 is in­
versely proportional to system noise figure. In other words, the larger the ratio of N 2 to N l '

the lower the system noise figure. It is also evident that the noise-figure meter not only dis­

plays the noise figure of the receiving channel but also includes the total antenna noise as a part
of the measurement.

Figure 3 shows a view of the noise fig­

ERROR CHAN.
ure and test signal network equipment. The (MIXU Oloof)
lower panel is the control panel with its ,
SUM CIiAN.
single switch. With this switch we may (PAUMP)
REC£IVU
INPUT
measure noise figure or insert a test signal INPUT
NOISE
into either the main charmel or the acquisi­ SIGNALS

tion channel. Noise figure is measured in­

dividually for each receiver channel, but the
test signal is inserted into the three channels NOISE
FIGURE
(sum, X, and Y) or either receiver simul­ INOICATOR

taneously. This panel is 3-1/2 inches tall by Nf HELO CONSTANT

19 inches deep. The upper panel is the BY TH� �:r J.\i:Tii<

AMPliFIERS

� ANTENNA
nOise-figure indicator. The reading o[ noise

f§ RECEIVER NOISE
figure is tlisplo.yed by the meter movement.
I
J
N2 - NOISE SOUIII:CE F lunl

� NOISE SOURCE NOISE L

The controls are [or operation of the noise­
N , - NOISE SOURCE OfF
figure meter. This panel is 5-1/4 inches tall
by 16 inche� deep. The network assembly,
which is the part of this subsystem located Figure 2-Basic concept of automatic noise
on the antenna, will be shown later with a figure measurement.
50 J. 8. I4ARTIN

view of the parametric amplifier. That panel is 10-1/2 inches tall by 25 inches deep. It con­
tains coaxial switches, directional couplers, signal equal izers, and the like and is actually the
place where the noise-figure signals or the test signals are routed to their intended destinations .

The test transmittp.r will be described as Dart of the JPL equipment.

: •
I '"''
• [ I

r;I�'I'�]-;
."""tI ,

(,-1+
I I
i;,
•.• . .1

0
.'
I. '"

••••

..
•

.
00> ••,

. ... .,.---- . ,... .. •- .

.. . ...

�-,
1-.... .

Figure 3-Noise figvre ond le51 $ignol network equipment.

PARAMETRIC AMPLIFIER

The purpose of the parametric amplifier (paramp) is to provide a low system noise tem­
perature constrained by such things as the necessity to produce equipment that will be reliable

W1der widely varying field conditions. Th.is equipn.ent will not be operated in a laboratory by

engineering personnel but will be operated W'lder field conditions which are not ideal and by

people who perhaps are not ideal. The noise temperature must be as low as practical within
the constraints of reliable performance, reasonable cost, and required sensitivity.

To provide a little backgroW'ld, a discussion of system noise temperature is presented.

Although simplifications have been made for the sake of clarity, the conclusions are accurate
to within a very few degrees. In this discussion, aU noise present is considered as nOise tem­
perature. Noise temperature is a convenient means of stating the noise power present in a

unit of bandwidth. The total noise power may then be determined from the expression:

where

Pn is the noise powerI

Tn is the noise temperature ("'K),

K is Boltzmann's constant,

and
Bn is the noise bandwidth.
 PARAMETRIC AMPLIFIER, AND MlISE FIGURE AND TEST SIGNAlNETWDRK 51

System sensitivity may be easily determined by assessing the effect of each system component
and adding all effects to obtain the total temperature. The concept of noise figure can be con­
fusing in computing system performance because noise figure presupposes a source tempera­
ture of 290"1<. The db number commonly used to express noise figure cannot be generally
applied to comparisons of system sensitivities.

Figure 4 shows a representation of the system including the antenna, the parametriC am­
plifier, and the receiver circuits . The noise temperature will be measured at the paramp
input. If the system is entered at that point and a measurement taken toward the antenna feed,
antenna temperature will be determined. That antenna temperature will include feed losses,
as well as sky noise, side-lobe noise, and so on. If the signal enters again at the same point and looks
toward the paramp, the total effect of parametriC amplifier and receiver noise temperature
will be seen. The receiver will have an effect on the noise temperature at the input of the sys­
tem, but the contribution to input-noise temperature will be divided by the gain of the stages
that precede it.

Antenna temperature will depend upon the position of the antenna. If the antenna is pOinted
toward zenith in a quiet section of the sky, the temperature will be lower than if it is pointed
toward the horizon. A temperature of 30"K is expected for the 30- foot antenna when it is
pointed near zenith. This temperature would increase to about 185"K when the antenna is
pointed at the horizon . If there is a discrete source of noise that falls within the antenna beam
width. This will tend to raise the antenna temperature. If the antenna is looking toward zenith
in the quiet sky but with the moon in the field of View, the temperature is raised from 65CX to
about 83CX. Under all of these conditions, the noise temperature of the equipment following
would remain a constant. The total of paramp noise temperature plus receiver noise temper­
ature would be 168'1< in each case. This figure results from a paramp having a noise figure
of about 1.7db followed by a receiver having a noise figure of about 10db when the paramp has
a net gain of 2Odb. All temperatures may be added to get a total system temperature of 233CX
for the quiet sky, 353"K at the horizon, and 251"K if the moon is in the held of view.

I ANTENNA ! , HCfIV!R !
,.

All LINE LOSSES AR£ INCLUDED IN HMPf.RATI..I<E T� ' '.. . T , • To'

H�HM
3 0 F OOl PARA"" COOU I> C OOUD '''P ROVE ·
"NTENH'" ..NTfNH" & RCVR P"R.."P IYSH" "'<;.;1
& R('V!': ��"'� F..eTOR
H ..P
POiNT'NC TEMP TEMP Tf .."
'" !.�) (0 " J (obi
I
(.�) ,·01
��NITH
QUIET SKY .. , .. m " '" '"
HORIZON '" , .. m " ". ,. ,
ZENITH
QUIET sn
"'TH MOON
IN VIEW " >0, m " , ", u

figvre 4-Antenna , porometric amplifier, and receiver circuih.

52 J. B. MARTIN

When the system was originally designed it was expected that the system temperature�

stated here would be sufficient to meet the need for the Apollo program. Lately it has COme to

Ught that the spacecraft in some attitudes will not be quite what we expected, and there will be

conditions where system temperatures as originally specified will be marginal.

There are means that we can use to improve the system temperatures. It can be seen that

the paramp temperature is considerably larger than the antenna temperature from a compari­

son of the two. We can lower the paramp noise temperature by employing a cooled paramp.

Typical numbers on the right-hand part of the chart show a cooled-paramp-plus-receiver

temperature of 35"K. This compares with the prevlous figure of 168"K. If the temperatures

are added as before, a cooled paramp would provide system temperatures of lOO"K, 220"K,

and 118"K. Comparing the cooled-system temperature with the uncooled-system temperature

indicates an improvement of 3.7, 2 . 1 , or 3 . 3db. In other words, employing a cooled paramp

in this application could improve system sensitivity by approximately 3db for the average

condition. This improvement is bought for a price. That 'price is a complexity of the parametric
amplifier which would be two to three times that of the present unit.

Figure 5 shows a block diagram of the parametric amplifier. The signal input is fed into

a device which is referred to as a five-port circulator. It is really three, three-port circula­

tors connected together and built as a Single subassembly. A decoupled input is also included

for injection of the test signal which was discussed a little bit earlier. This is a two-stage

parametric amplifier which provides a total gain of 30db with a good degree of stability. A

single-stage paramp could achieve 30db of gain, but at the cost of poor gain stability with
change in time and change in temperature. Since this stability is important, the added com­
plexity of the two-stage parametric amplifier is warranted.

The first stage of the parametric amplifier is shown on the left. The signal enters and

exits the paramp through the same connection. The five-port calculator is the key to the

VOLTAGE COUPLER
VAQIA.IU:
I(lYSTRON
ANO
AlTEN
"""
ISOLATOR

SIGNAL
OUTPUTS

SIGNAL FIVE -POIIT powu

INPUT CIRCULATOR DIVIDER

'----- TEST INPUT

Figure 5-Slock diagram of parametric omplifier.

 PARAMETRIC AMPLIfiER. AND NOISE FIGURE AND TEST SIGNAL NETWORK 53

successful operation of this paramp because energy that enters the circulator at the input will

appear at the first output and at no other output (within reasonable limits, of course). The

signal will appear at other outputs but will be attenuated by some 45 or 5Odb. Again, signals
that enter at the first output port will exit at the second output port, enter the second para­

metric amplifier, experience gain, and be reinserted into the directional coupler to appear at

the third output port. Energy fed into the test input will be combined with the normal signal

input after being attenuated by the coupling loss of 2Odb.

The klystron pump provides the microwave energy needed to drive the parametric ampli­

fiers. The output of the pump is fed through a coupler and an isolator and then through a voltage

variable atlenuator. The pump power that is actually inserted into each stage of the paramp

may be adjusted from the control panel. The pump Signal is tlten passed through a power divider

and manual attenuators . These atlenuators would be set as part of the alignment procedure.
Bias controls for each of the parametric amplifier stages are also located on the remote con­

trol panel.

The signal that has passed through the two stages of the paramp is then fed through the
power divider to five isolated outputs. These five outputs are provided so that more than one

receiver at a time may be connected to the same parametric amplifier. The bandwidth of this
paramp is about 30 megacycles. As such it can pass all the expected unified S-band Signals.

Isolation is provided so that the receivers will not interact with each other.

A typical noise figure which has been measured on the parametric amplifier is 1 .68db,

which would be an excess nOise temperature of about 136 "K. This measured noise tempera­
ture includes loss due to the input circulator. Further, this noise figure can be obtained with
diodes which are of average quality. The diodes are tailored to the diode holders and the
diode-plus-holder would be replaced as a unit i n the field. The holders would then be returned

to a central facility or to the manufacturer for outfitting with a replacement diode should the

diode burn Out. The gain stability of the parametric amplifier assembly has been measured to

be 0.7db per day and this measurement was made while the environmental temperature outside
of the paramp enclosure was varied from about 5 0 " to 100OP.

Figure 6 shows a view of the parametric amplifier in its enclosure. This is a pressurized
box. The top row of attachments includes the pressurizing connection, pressure relief valves

which are set to prevent the pressure inside the box from exceeding twelve pounds per square

inch, and a manual depressurization switch for use should it be necessary to disassemble the

box for service. The bottom row shows the five isolated outputs, the test input, the signal
input, the name-plate, and the power plug.

Figure 7 and 8 are views of the parametric amplifier with lhe cover off. Figure 9 is a

view of the control panel. The two bias adjustments and thp. V'.!!!!P jX
.• wt:r adjustment which con­
trols gain are visible. The W.,it"'I' was informed that this unit was photographed prior to accept­
ance testing, hence the running-time meter reading of 0000.0 hours. At the center of the panel

are the diode current meters and the pump power monitor. The three enclosure-temperature
54 J. B. MARTIN

I I

Figure 6-Poromelrk a mp l ifier, enclosure otto<:hed.

,
J Jr,
-

F i gure 7-Porometric amplifier, enclosure removed .

 PARAMETRIC AMPLIFIER, AND IiOISE FIGURE ANO TEST SIGNAL NETWORK 55

• •

•
. --
----
--_
. --
----
_--
. --
----
_...

a& a& a& a& .-

Figure 8-Top lIiew of parometric omplifier.

--------- ----�-
•"�" ! ' . '� •
[ �.� I �.,.
. "., .., . _" .

.... ,
•. .
,
;-/

Figure 9-Porometric amplifier control panel.

56 J. B. MARTIN

lights show that the temperature in the antenna enclosure is either low, normal, or high. At
the lower right are the ON/OFF switch and an OPERATE/STANDBY switch.

Figure 10 shows the parametric power supply, including the klystron bias monitors, reflec­
tor voltage adjustment, and fuses. Figure 1 1 shows the main channel paramp and the acquisition

""--- -..
_� I -
-.=u--
- - -

• •
«.- --

Figure 10-PQrometric amplifier power supply.

Figure l l -Mein channel and acquisition parametric amplifiers mounted in

wheelhouse of ontenno.
 PARAMETRIC AMPLIFIER, AND NOISE FIGURE AND TEST SIGNAlNETWI)IfK 57

paramp mounted in the wheelhouse of thean­

tenna, The panel below the left paramp is
the network panel. The panels to the lower
right are part of the JPL receiver. The out­
puts from the feed which were discussed
earlier can be seen at the top.

Figure 12 shows the antenna installation

from the outside. Paramps, of course, are
located in the top of the wheelhouse. Cables
from the acquisition antelUla come down the
legs, enter the wheelhouse, and are fed to the
paramp. Cables come out the side of the
wheelhouse and pass over the axes of the an­
tenna and down and into the operations
building.

Figure 12-Antenna installatian.

58
 RECEIVER-EXCITER SUBSYSTEM
by
R. C , Bunce

Jet Propulsion Laboratories

ABSTRACT

The receiver-exciter subsystem, MSFN version, may be described as nine

external subsystems. The prime Interunit
functional units interfacIng with nine
and interlace signals, gross frequenc ies le vel s , and functions are initially
,

presented in diagram form .

Following the initial description, six functional block diagrams showing the
mcchanil.ation within the functional units in greater detail are also presented.

Finally, photographs and diagrams showing equipment layout within the

cabinets and lIicws of the control panels are Included. and functions of the im­
portant controls and indications arc explained.

INTRODUCTION

In earlier NASA manned flight programs, several functionally independent systems using
different frequency bands have been employed in the two-way spacecraft-ground links, re­
sulting in highly complex facilities. However, in the Unified S- Band (USB) equipment for the

Apollo program, most of the communications functions have been integrated, for the first time,
into a single comprehensive capability. For example, all of the carrier frequenCies in the
two-way path are in S-band region (between 2100 and 2300 megacycles). Voice, television,
telemetry data, range, range-rate, and antenna- tracking information may aU be processed

separately or simultaneously by the same radio frequency equipment.

Within the ground station facilities of the Manned Space Flight Network (MSFN). this uni­
fied concept is extremely evident in the receiver-exciter subsystem equipment. The subsystem

acts as a link between the microwave equipment (such as the power amplifier and parametric

amplifier) and the low-frequency RF, digital data processing, and dc actuated equipment. in­

formation and reference signals from ten different external subsystems interface with the
receiver-exciter equipment, which is, in essence, a focal point in the USB concept.

These basic interfaces are shown in Figure 1, together with the gro!;.s chssi.fieaLions of
equipment within the subsystem. Only cne or lwo identical receivers in the normal single
cor-.fig-o.1l"':"Lion i s indicated. The equipment is also supplied, for most stations, in the dual con­

figuration. This configuration contains two complete receiver-exciter suhsy�te!T.s roJ.- redun­
dancy and multiple-vehicle operation. For 3i......"'iicity, only a single configuration will be dis­
cl1�sed ir, this description.

59
60 R. C. BllNCE

DOWN -LINK UP-LINK

CARRIER. CARRIER.

T!tACKING
DIGITAL TlMf & ANALOG AN.
AA-NGING
CONT &
,
fkfQ
DATA
COMMAND INSnU­
SUa5YSHM
OliVE
DATA
."
DEMOD
SYSTEM ,

Figure l-Receiver-exdter Unified S-Band system functions; doppler extroction,

two-way communi cot ions, ongle tracking ond ronging.

,
Operation of the receiver-exciter subsystem within the:Unified S-Band system can best be
understood through. a description of the following [our major functional capabilities:

Doppler Extraction

The subsystem provides a signal whose frequency is proportional to the doppler shift oc­
curring on the two-way transponded carrier. The doppler shift is a result of spacecraft motion
with respect to the ground equipment.

Two-way Communications

The subsystem contains an S-band transmitter exciter that processes the up-data and voice
modulation for the Apollo spacecraft, and also contains two functionally identical receivers
that process the modulated received carriers [rom the Apollo spacecraft. The received modu­
lation consists of spacecraft TV and data telemetry, as well as voice information .

Anele Tracklne

The subsystem contains dual-channel angle receivers which operate in conjunction with the an­
tenna feed and antenna control and drive equipment to form an antenna position tracking servo system.

Raneine

The subsystem contains a ranging receiver and other associated subassemblies that operate
in conjunction with the digital ranging subsystem to provide data which, when properly reduced,
yield the instantaneous range between the Apollo spacecraft and the ground staUon.
 RECE1VER·EXC1TER SUBSYSTEM 61

The fundamental S-band two-way carrier path is diagrammed in simplified form in Fig­
ure 1 . Excitation from the exciter is applied to the power amplifier. The amplifier output is
transmitted as the up-link carrier via the diplexer, antenna feed, and antenna. At the space­
craft, the up-link carrier is received, transponded and retransmitted as the down-link carrier.
This carrier is received by the antenna and feed, passed through the diplexer and amplified by
the parametric amplifier. The amplifier output is applied to the receiver.

The receivers and exciter interconnect with the doppler and ranging equipment to perform
the listed functions. In the paragraphs that follow, the mechanization of these four major
functional capabilities are discussed in greater detail.

DOPPLER EXTRACTION FUNCTION

Let the exciter output carrier frequency at S-band (between 2100 and 2110 megacycles) be
designated Fp as shown in Figure 2. The frequency FT has a preciSion based upon the accuracy
of a 1.0-megacycle reference supplied by the timing and frequency reference assembly.

The output frequency is amplified and transmitted to the spacecraft, where it is coherently
transponded by the ratio 240/221, and then retransmitted to the ground station. On the ground,
the received signal is preampliCied by the parametric amplifier and appears at the receiver
input as the frequency
v

( 240/ 221 ) FT ! D �
-
r::X 240/22 ,
�
The quantity " D " is the two-way doppler­ L
shift frequency, and has a maximum value of
about 200 kilocycles at earth escape velocity. TRANSPONDW &.
[)()PPlER - SHIfTED lJP - liNK
OOWN -liNK CARRIER
The receiver reference loop is phase­ CAR�ln

locked to this received frequency, and re­

FEED

r- - H
ceiver reference signals containing frequen­ &
PARAMP DIPlEXER PWR AMP
cies coherently related to the received
-
I I
f r eq u enC y - -- -- - -- - --
are applied to the doppler
240/"221 F l . D "
extractor.
I UCEIVER
I I EXCITER I
Similarly, frequenc ies coherently related
to the transmitted frequency are also applied I RECEIVU
REFERENCES
TRANSM1TTER
UFUENCES I
to the extractor. I DOPPlER

l, �
EXTRACTOR
I'

L_
,
I BIASED DOPPLER

- -
I Me • D
Within the doppler extractor, the trans­ (RANGE-RATE)
-- -- -- -
mitter references are suitably combined and
-
shifted coherently to simulate the 240/221 TIMING &.
r�,:;.;iN... &. DATA
FREQ1,J£NCY
rati o n.:C'.!!"!"ii"l� in the spacecraft. The re­ PROCESSING (TOP 1
REFERENCe

sulting signal is functionally differenced with

the receiver references to yield the doppler Figvre 2-Doppler e:draclion function.
 62 R. C. 6\JNC[

frequency D . Finally, this frequency is added to a 1.0- megacycle bias from the timing and
frequency reference assembly, and the resulting biased doppler, or range rale Signal, is sup­
plied for further reduction to the tracking and data processing (TOP) subsystem. The biaSing
is done to supply the doppler signal in a fornl that is convenient for further reduction by a
computer.

The frequency D is approximately related to the spacecraft radial velocity vector and
transmitter frequency by the expressiOn

240 V
D :::: TIl " fr ,. 2C

where v is considered positive when the range is increasing. Thus, if the spacecraft is moving
a/(lQ)' from the ground station, the biased doppler frequency will be greater than one megacycle,
while if the spacecraft is approaching the ground station, the biased doppler frequency will be
less than one megacycle.

TWO-WAY COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION

A typical operational configuration using both receivers is shown in Figure 3 . Up-data

and voice FM subcarriers from the subcarrier oscillators are applied to the exciter phase­
modulator. The PM- modulated carrier from the exciter drives the power amplifier, which, in
turn, feeds the PM-moduLated up-link carrier to the spacecraft - Lunar Excursion Module (LEM)
or Command and Service Module (CSM) - via the antenna and microwave eqUipment. Within the
spacecraft, the carriers are suitably demodulated to provide up-link information for the Ln­
!light equipment and personnel.

FM and PM- modulated carriers are

generated within the spacecraft (LEM, CSM,

r
APOLLO
SPACECRAFT or S-IV-B) and transmitted to the ground
station.

�;
FM-& PM-
MOOULAHO PM MOOULATEO
OQWN- liNK UP NI( CARRIER
CAUIER
In the configuration shown, the separate
carriers are amplified through the multi­
�ARAMP
1-1-_-'
FHO & L _
OIPUXEI
H PW. AMP channel, parametriC amplifier and applied
to the separate receivers.
1 -t
r - ,
I ,

1 IIECUVU '21
I I

I
I I
I RECEIVU ' I EXCIfU I Receiver 1 operates as phase-lock,
I I
� -- - -I
double-conversion equipment, and coherently
OEHCTEO PM
SP{CTWM- OATA
tJNOfHCTEO FM up- OAT, detects the phase- modulated carrier. The
TV SPfCTlUM & VOIC,
& VOICE SutCAlRlEIS resulting detected spectrum consists of
OlGITAL COMMA NO
DATA O£MODULATOR SVSHMS (DeS) & information subcarriers, frequency-modulated
ASSfMlL't SUBCARRIER
OSCILLATORS
by voice and data information. This spectrunl
is supplied to the data demodulator assembly
F i gure J-Two-woy communicotions function. for subcarrier demodulation.
 RECElVER·EXCITER SUBSYSTEM

Receiver 2 , in the example shown, operates in an open-loop, single-conversion, wide-band

mode. It supplies a gain-controlled FM spectrum (usually TV information) around a center
frequency of 50 megacycles, the receiver first intermediate frequency (IF). This spectrum
is also supplied to the data demodulator assembly for FM demodulation.

Receivers 1 and 2 are not limited to the modes of operation shown in Figure 3. Either Or
both receivers may be Simultaneously op€rated in either the open-loop or closed-loop configur­
ations on any one of four received channel frequencies in the 2270- to 2290-megacycle band.
The receiver internal configuration is identical, except that only one source of reference sig­
nals is required, and this is included in receiver No. 1, for use by both receivers.

ANGLE TRACKING FUNCTION

The received carrier from the spacecraft is split by the antenna feed equipment into three
channels, as shown in Figure 4: the sum channel ("1"), the "X" channel, and the "Y" channeL

The sum channel signal is amplified by the parametric amplifier, and is the main received
carrier for the reference loop of the receiver.

The X and Y channel signals are not preamplified, but are appLied directly to the duaI­
channel, angle receiver. Using reference signals generated by the receiver reference loop,
the angle channels operate as dual-conversion receivers. They produce dc outputs (Ex and
Ey) with magnitude proportional to the amplitude of the channel input signal.

The antenna pattern associated with each channel is such that, when the radial axis of the
antenna is perpendicular to the plane of the incoming wavefront, the sum channel amplitude is
maximum, but the angle channel inputs are minimum, or "null" inputs. Under this condition,
the error signal dc outputs Ex and Ey are also at a minimum.

When the antenna is slightly displaced

from radial alignment in either the X or Y APOLLO

I I
SPACECRAFT
tracking planes, as occurs during angular
tracking, the angle channel input amplitude
Increases. The detected error voltages then "-
take on dc values proportional to the angular
<- - - - -,
r-
ANTENNA

<---, I
displacement, orlracking errOr. The polarity STRUCTURE
PARAMP
,
of the error voltage is a function of the phase fUO I I
of the channel input Signal, which in tUrn is - ---
I I
y- - l
r­ I , I I
jCx
�
dependent on the direction of the angular
tracking error.
at�d
The antenna pattern assorl­
with tilt! angle channels is essentially
biphase; that is, the phase goes through a 180"
I
I REFERENCE
I
RECEIVER

woe
DUAL-CHANNEL
ANGLE
UCtIV(R
� ANTENNA
CONTROL
,
ORIVf
' Ey.
� ���;�
I
tm
�

reversal at the null (alignment) position of ,

RECEIVER _ �IGNA� GLE
the aT'!�e!,_n.;::..
_ _ _ _

SIGNALS
The error signals thus contain informa­
tion as to the direction and magnitude of the Figure 4-A.ngle tracking function.
64 R. C. SliNCE

angular tracking error, and the angle cbannels function as the amplifiers and detectors in tile
antenna tracking servo loop. The other elements of the loop are the antenna ieed. which per­
forms the sensing function, and the antenna control and drive equipment, which actuate the
motions of the antenna structure.

The standard single configuration contains two complete angle channel receivers, one
associated with each of the reference loops. Receiver No. 1 is ordinarily used with the main
(30-f001 or 85-fool) antenna, while receiver No. 2 is ordinarily associated with the small, wide­
beam acquisition anteiU1a. When the acquisition antenna is not in usc, receiver No. 2 reference
loop is ordinarily switched to receivp via the large antenna through the multi-channel parametric
amplifier.

RANGING FUNCTION

The major signal paths associated with the ranging function are shown in Figure 5 . The
digital ranging equipment, known as the rangIng subsy stem, although not a part of the receiver­
exciter subsystem, is shown in the diagram to simplify the description.

A pseudo-random noise code spectrum containing a "clOCk" component is applied from the
ranging subsystem as phase modulation (code x clock) to the exciter. The resulting modulated
carrier is transmitted to the spacecraft, "turned around", and retransmitted to the ground
receiver. Within the receiver reference loop, the carrier containing the received code x clock
modulation is translated to an IF of 10 megacycles and applied to the ranging receiver.

Within this receiver, the received code x clock is correlated with a locally generated code
from the ranging subsystem. The correlation process is functionally subtractive, yielding an
output of clock signal alone, whose amplitude is proportional to the degree of correlation. This
signal is tracked by a receiver phase-lock loop, and its amplitude is detected to appear as a
dc correlation i1uiicati07l . This indication is routed back to the ranging subsystem as a primary
information input.

APOLLO
SPACECRAFT

FEEP

1 - - - -- -- --
•
PIPLExn

I -oi
''''"' f--I- f---oi
----�;;- -;!
f--
RECEIVE� UHF RANGE DOPPL
U

�
CLOCK
OOPPLER RANGING I.
'--- --' I '--- .J
REHRENCE -
EXCITU PWR AMP

I
----

[xTRACTOR SU8SYSTEM

I
LaOI'

+
_

I
__

RECElvm CARRIER CO�ULATION RANGE

I RANGING
WITH CODE 0 C LOCK INDICATION DATA
TRACKING "'­

I CLOCK SIGNALS DATA

L
RECEIVER
PROCESSI NG
RECEIVU CODE

figure 5-Ranging function.

 RF':EIVERHCITER SUBSYSTEM 65

The ranging receiver also supplied clv.:k l'equency reference and clock dopple r signals,
while the reference loop supplies a UHF range doppler signal (at one-fourth the S-band doppler

value or oj4), for use by the ranging subsystem.

Using these various inputs, the ranging subsystem programs an acquisition sequence from
which data proportional to the range of the spacecraft is obtained.

Upon completion of the acquisition program, the ranging subs.ystem delivers updated

range information to the tracking and data processing subsystem upon r'ommand from that

subsystem.

THE RECEIVER REFERENCE LOOP

The reference loop of a typical receiver Is particularly important as an element of the

subsystem, as it contains equipment that i s operational in all four of the major functions. The

loop and its associated branches are shown in detail in Figure 6 .

S-band R F input, at one of four carrier center frequencies in the 2270- t o 2290-megacycle

range, is applied to the first mixer and preamplifier. At the mixer, the signal is differenced

with the local oscillator (1.0) chain injection signal, which is 50 megacycles lower in frequency
than the received signal. The resulting 50-megacycle IF signal is preamplified and applied

to the automatic gain control (AGe) 50-megacycle I F amplifier.

During open-loop operation, when the carrier is frequency-modulated by television infor­

mation, the 50-megacycle spectrum is branched off at this pOint, passed through a gain-controlled,

wide-band, 50- megacycle IF amplifier, and supplied as an undetected spectrum to the data
demodulator assembly.

r TO DATA
�EMOD ASSY �. SELfCT
I I
so Me
HM I F AGO ,GO
VIDEO TO
FILTER
,
rTO RANGE UCEIVU

S- IAND
}
1ST MIXU ,,, .
T •
, ,, ,. ,, �
R
tlNfA
AGC on
" •
so Me I 'NO " '"
INPUT
--+ 015T
"
"<AM. " I MIXER "'. � · DET

CO
INJECTION
ioo M,
"
20 M<
! X 1/2 I '" ''
osc !
, I I

I;I I j'PPLHH'-a-! I�r

""
'" • " veo • lOOP � -

iu ANGLE
RECEIVER
TO
EXTItACTOK
L {Aca
CONTROL
L {tOOP BW
SHECT

Figure 6-Receiver reference loop (typical).

66 R. C. BUNCE

In closed-loop operation, the signal is next gain controlled through a series of 50-megacycle
AGe IF amplifier stages, and then differenced with a SO- megacycle reference signal in the

second mixer to produce the second IF of 10 megacycles. The IF amplifier is capable of a

total gain control range of 91db, operating at an overall gain between +51db and -40db. The

phase and gain changes across this range must be carefully controlled during manufacture to
assure compatible operation with parallel units in the angle receiver channels.

The IO-megacycle output is applied to a distribution amplifier, where telemetry channel

IF and range receiver channel input signals are branched off. Operation of these channels
are covered in greater detail later in this paper.

The reference loop signal is next applied to a IO-megacycle IF amplifier, where a crystal
filter establishes the loop predetection noise bandwidth of about 7 . 0 kilocycles. After filtering,
the signal is split into two channels. The first operates at high gain and contains a limiter
whose output is applied to the loop phase detector. The second channel operates at lower gain
without limiting, and this channel output is applied to the loop AGe detector.

Within the loop phase detector, and assuming loop phase lock, the limited output signal
frequency is differenced with a lO- megacycle reference signal. The resulting output is a small
dc voltage proportional to the angular phase error in the loop. This dc output is applied to the
reference loop filter, within which time constants are selected manually to control the overall
loop-noise bandwidth (2B!_). Threshold values for this bandwidth (2 Bl.o) of 50, 200, and 700
cycles per second may be selected.

The loop filter output, known as the loop "static phase error" (SPE), is a small and rela­
tively noise-free dc voltage. This voltage is applied to the voltage-eontrolled oscillator (VeO)
where, during phase lock, it automatically adjusts the veo frequency to maintain lock during
input signal frequency variations.

An acquisition input voltage to the veo is applied manually by the operator to obtain initial
lock (acquisition), and then to balance out the residual phase error when acquisition has been
accomplished. This latter function is indicated by a reduction of the SPE to zero.

The yeO output is next multiplied by three, and acoherent reference signal for the doppler
extractor is branched off from the multiplier.

Finally, the veo signal is multiplied by 32 for a total multiplication of 96, and applied as
the local oscillator injection signal t o the first mixer, thus closing the loop. Local oscillator
injection signals for the angle channel receiver are also branched off at the x32 multiplier
output.

Returning to the AGe path, the detector output is applied to the AGe loop filter. Within the
filter, the AGe loop bandwidth is selected by the control operator for one of three values,
grossly designated narrow, medium, or wide.

These values are ordinarily paired with the corresponding reference loop 2 Bt-() settings,
although this is not a necessity for proper operation.
 RECElVER·EXCITER SUBSYSTEM 67

The filter output is the de AGC voltage, with a dynamic range of 1 0 volts. This
voltage is applied to the gain-controlled stages in the 50- megacycle IF amplifiers in the
reference loop, and to the parallel angle receiver channels. It is also displayed and recorded
by the analog instrumentation equipment, as it varies With, and is a measure of, the input signal
level.

The 60- and 10- megacycle reference frequencies are both derived from a 20-megacycle
crystal oscillator. The SO-megacycle signal is obtained through a x3 multiplier, while the
10- megacycle signal is derived from a x 1/2 multiplier. This reference generation equipment
is present only in one of the receivers. Reference signals for the second receiver, the angle
channels, the telemetry channels, the range receiver, and the doppler extractor are all branched
off of the x3 and x 1/2 multiplier output s.

In summary, the reference phase-lock loop is of second order, with the dual-phase integra­
tion occurring through the loop filter and YeO, while the AGe loop is of first order with single
integration occurring through the AGC filter.

VARIATION IN LOOP NOISE BAN OW 10TH

The reference loop gain varies with the input signal level, primarily because of
the suppression of signal by noise within the limiter preceding the phase detector. The
increased loop gain at high signal levels re-
sults in an increased damping and widening
of the bandwidth. The values of 50, 200, and """
2BL "700 cp'
O
700 cycles per second mentioned earlier are """
values occurring at the system signal thresh­
2Bl 0 200
K Cp$

old; the strong signal bandwidths are much

,�
wider. aoo
2BL - so CI"
0"" O

This effect is shown in Figure 7 . Note ;

"'"
%
that in the 700-cycles-per-second poSition, � '''''
•
the bandwidth rises to about 2 kilocycles 0
z '''''
when the signal exceeds the threshold value •
by about 30db. This wide bandwidth is de­
'''''
sirable for tracking the high doppler rates
'"
encountered during the earth orbital phase of
'"
the Apollo miSSions, and will ordinarily be
�
used during these passes. Carrier pho.se
mcdulalion within the loop bandwidth cannot
be properly demodulated because the loop
:l 0 " " � 4� � "
"tracks out" these frequenCies. ThiR ;,s o! RHATIVE SIGNAL t£VEl (db)

Httlc cvi"t.::�rn lor the Apollo program, hOW­

Figure 7-RF loop noise bandwidth os a function of
ever, as all modulation except the emergency relati ....e sigr"lOJ le ....el above Rf design frequency
voice information is on subcarriers at threshold.
 R.C. BUNCE
68

frequencies greater than 1.0 megacycle, well beyond the low frequency cut-off of the
loop.

The 50-cycles-per-second position, reaching a maximum bandwidth of 500 cycles per second,
is intended for use durIng the lunar phases of the mission. Doppler rates will be low during
these phases, and the increased sensitivity and narrow bandwidth will assure an adequate com­
munications margin for the expected received signal levels, even U the emergency modes must

be used.

The FM television spectrum will contain energy within the tracking bandwidths shown.
However, the receivers are in open-loop condition during FM reception, and no attenuation
occurs, as the tracking loop is inoperative.

THE RANGING RECEIVER AND DETECTED TELEMETRY CHANNELS

The 10-megacycle IF distribution amplifier in the receiver channel branches off signals
for the ranging receiver and the detected telemetry channel. As these two signal paths are
important to the basic functions of the subsystem, they are shown in greater detail in Figure 8 .

The ranging receiver input, from either receiver as selected b y the control operator,
consists of code x clock modulation on the 100megacycle IF. This modulation occupies a wide
spectrum containing significant sideband components as far as 2 megacycles from the carrier.
This spectrum is applied to a wideband phase detector which is referenced by "code x IF." The
code x IF is a modulated spectrum centered at the IF frequency of 10 megacycles. The spec­
trum is derived from a phase switch, within which the 100 megacycie IF reference signal is

'ROM
SECONO

'''1'''' � {
CORUlAnON

r
COOf • CLOCK . r F CLOCK

�
'" • coun OfTr · INOICAnoN TO
--0
NO
l4NGING
" '" f' .. · oer

COOE x I-F

I
COO� '''''
LOOP aw
"OM rj; sw If VCO FILTER

} 'CVO
SHECT
•

AANGING '"
(97 kc
nOCl( TO
" 'Xl( I(c UNGING

�� RANGING RECEIVER
�SI
"'"

T 10McTLM '" VIOEO

{OffECJ£D PM
:+ . SI't:CUUM TO OATA
" 9 ' OU "". O£MOOULATOR A�Y

T
,, �
'"

Figure 8-Deteeted telemetry channel (typicol).

 R[CEIVER-EXCIT[R SUBSYSTEM 69

periodically switched :90"by the code signal, also known as receiver <-ode. This code is sup­
plied by the ranging subsystem.

The phase detector differences the two signals, producing an output spectrum which always
contains some energy at the clock frequency. The amplitude of this energy is directly pro­
portional to the degree of correlation between the received code and the receiver code.

The energy at the clock frequency, known as the clock signal, is filtered and amplified
through a dual-channel IF amplifier. The channel outputs are applied to a loop phase detector
(limited output). and a correlatiOn detector (linear output). The correlation detector develops
the dc correlation indication for the ranging subsystem.

The phase detector output drives a loop filter and YeO, which in turn references the two
detectors. These units together define the ranging receiver phase-lock loop. The loop band­
width. as in the main receiver, is established by manual selection of the time constants In the
loop filte r. This bandwidth has threshold values of 4, 16, and 40 cycles per second. These are
considerably narrower than the bandwidths of the main loop; therefore ranging threshold is not
ordinarily reached during operation.

The receiver loop acts as a narrOW-band tracking filter, providing relatively noise-free
frequency references at the clock frequency and its second harmonic. These are supplied to
the ranging subsystem. The frequenCies are used to drive the receiver coder within that
subsystem.

The detected telemetry channel is a simple series arrangement of IF amplifier. wideband

phase detector. and video amplUier. The phase detector is referenced with a IO-megacycle
signal from the reference signal generator in the receiver.

The detected signal is supplied at a level of Odbm and a -ldb bandwidth of 1.25 megacycles
to the data demodulator assembly.

RECEIVER-EXCITER SUBSYSTEM EQUIPMENT LAYOUT

Control room cabinets containing the receiver-exciter equipment are shown in Figure 9 .
The first three cabinets on the left contain subsystem control panels and monitoring equipment,
tUted and arranged for convenience by a seated control operator. Continuing from left to right,
the fourth, fifth, and eighth cabinets each contain two roU-out frames which mount subassemblies
of the subsystem. Over eighty dHferent types of subassemblies are used, and the total count
exceeds 200.

O;;e frame of cabinet one is rolled out to show the subassembly packaging and mounting
methods. All of the interconnecting coaxial cabling is routed on the outer �lIr!:l.CC of th� mount­
ing plates, while the power, dc, and low-!!'cq..",icy Signal paths are all wired with shielded leads
on the :':;",,1' surlace of the plates within the frame. Each subassembly is individually remov­
able for quick replacement. Connections to the wiring within the frames are made through
multipin connectors mounted at the ends of the subassemblies. Intracablnet cabling is routed.
70 R. C. BUNCE

ANALOG INSTRUMENTATION INTER FACE

RECEIVER RECEIVER 2

DOPPLER E� R
RANGE �
� :'����
: ; �
EXCI TER ---,

,�
- -,

RCVR [
RANGE
RCVR
TER 2
•

CONTROL PANELS

figure 9-Receive.-exciter �ub$ystem.

through floor channels beneath the cabinets, and all connecHons to these cables afC made

through COnnector plates at the base of the cabinets.

Subassembly power supplies arc rack-mounted ben eath the roll-out frames, and :lC con ­
venience outlets afC placed on the cabinet lowe)' IiI)S.

Cabinets two and five contain the subassemblies for receiver one :Uld receiver two, re­
spectively. Each receiver thus housed consists of the reference loop, the anr;lc channels, and
the telcmctl'y channels.

Cabinet one contains subassemblies of the exciter, the doppler extractor, and the range

rec eiver, ;'\$ Well as othcr minor equipment used with the ral\gil\� receiver during: the rangin�
program. The exposed plate contains subassemblies of the doppler extractor.

Additional Subassemblies contairlillg equipment ojlC'fable ill the S-\):md rC'�ion are normally
mounted near the antenna, and do not appear in this picture.
 RECE!VERHXCITER SUBSYSTEM 71

Cabinets three and four of the right-hand group contain isolation amplifiers and power
supplies which preprocess monitoring signals before they are fed to the analog instrumentation
subsystem. All of these signals are normalized for a peak-to-peak level of 10 volts from the
low impedance output of the isolation amplifiers. The cabinets also contain instrumentation
used while testing and evaluating the performance of the subsystem equipment.

The location of the system control panels for the exciter, the two S-band receivers, and
the ranging receiver are indicated on racks one, two, and three. Figures 10, 11 and 12 show
these control panels in greater detail.

EXCITER CONTROL
......
. .. ......
,

.. "."--...,,,.

---

I I 1
,
0... oo,oM I .., 'co'
•. -

.....
. -......

r �, t::: J:::'
_ ..... .'.' ..0Il.. ..-'�".

•.
."
.�.

•
Figure 10-Exciter control.

RECErvtll E COHTllOl
... .......
I • . I.
!I"'"" ., ......." " " .,. -..

I
..&iiIIIOi '
... !-
I -J-
1 --+
1-11 u ."'• •0 ."'" ....�
--
-

.... _ ,
...... -.".. ..... ... ot_ " foe' "'>fO"""

I*' . • I I J
I I " ,..I·· "J. ".J
....
---
'

j .OO -"' I
...."". .- ..

' -' __

Figure l 1 - Receiver 2 control.

72 R.C. SIJNC£

AAtlaJHCI AECEIVEI! COHTRO\,.

_ ..wou _

I r- �I
-. .,.... _ ..-

_.-

A�J
-- ---

�--
Iffy] -- -

.......- ....... _..- .......

Figure 12-Ranging receiver control.

THE SYSTEM CONTROL PANELS

The exciter control panel contains all operational controls and indications for the exciter
and doppler extractor, as shown in Figure 10. Controls for a phase-lock loop which locks one

of four exciter veo's to a system frequency synthesizer are included, together with controls
for selecting the modulation source and the receiver inl)u1 to the doppler extractor. The panel

also contains controls for an automatic sweep generator that acts as an aid during acquisition

of down-link carriers by the receivers. The exciter veo's may also be automatically frequency­
swept to aid in the two-way carrier acquisition process.

The receiver control panel contains all operational controls and indications for the receiver

reference loop, angle channels, and telemetry channels, as shown in Figure 11. Push- button

controls for selecting the reference loop noise bandwidth and the AGe loop bandwidth are in­

cluded, as well as controls for selecting one of four VCO's for the corresponding four received

carrier frequencies. Coarse and fine manual adjustment controls for the veo acquisition

voltage are located conveniently in the lower right-hand corner of the panel.

The ranging receiver control panel, as shown in Figure 12, is not ordinarily used during

system operation, as all control of the ranging equipment is transferred to the digital ranging
subsystem. However, during test of the receiver-exciter equipment, this panel is used to

control and monitor operation of the ranging receiver and associated equipment. Typical con­

trols are those for selecting the ranging receiver bandwidth, and Jor selecting the main receiver,
from which the ranging receiver input is derived.

SUMMARY
The receiver-exciter subsystem interfaces with many of the other station subsystems to

aid in performing four major functions.

 RECEIVER-EXCITER SUBSYSTEM 73

1. Doppler extraction

2. Two-way communication

3. Angle tracking

4. Ranging

The subsystem embodies, in many ways, the heart of the unified S-band concept, as it:

1. Receives and generates the S-band carriers which define the Single-system approach.

2. Operates upOn modulation and frequency information contained in these carriers to aid

in giring the ground station a total communications capability with the spacecraft of the

NASA Apollo program.

74
 VERIFICATION RECEIVER, SCO OSCILLATOR
AND UP-DATA MODEMS

by

J, Jacobi

Goddard Space Flight Center

ABSTRACT

The verification n.'Ccivcr is a solid-state, S-band telemetry receiver with

special demodulators. It is a fixed-tuned superheterodyne, multiple- conversion
receiver of standard design. The purpose of the \lcrificallon receiver is to
sample the up-link signal at the power amplifier output and provide demodulated
voice and data signal s . The voice signal is recorded and the data i s utilized by
the command system as an input to the IIcrificalion loop.

The subcarrier oscillator (SeQ) subsystem comprises a 30-kHocydc voltage

controlled oscillator (VeO) and appropriate mixing networks. The 30-kilocycle
sea is modulated with voice and the 70-kilocydc SeQ Is modulated with data.
The two resulting signals are added linearly and modulated onto the S-band
carrier.

The up-data mooem (mooulator-demodulator) accepts a command message

from a modified Univac 6428 computer and converts it to a fonn suitable for
modulating onto the 70-kilocycle seo.

INTRODUCTION

The equipment which will be discussed includes the up-data buffer modem, the subcarrier

oscillator subsystem and the verification receiver. Together, these items comprise a signifi­

cant pOrtion of the up-link communications system. Figure 1 depicts the relationship between

these subsystems.

The up-data buffer modem accepts data r---­ --

,

data from a computer and operates on the

:
,
COM�UTER � UP- DATA
9lA'fU
-< SU8CA�RIH
OSCillATOR
data to put it into a form suitable for modu­ ,
�
J
MODEM
+-
SlJIISVSTEM

T J
lation onto a subcarrier. The subcarrier L _ _ _ _ __

UP- DATA
oscillator subsystem accepts data and voice r-- - - -,

�
tXClTER ,
signals and modulates these Signals onto VOKt VERifiCATION 'NO ,
their re��cti..·(> suucarners. Tne verifica­ RECEIVU , POWER ,
I AMPLIfiER I
tion receiver samples the output of the L _ _ _ _ _ _ J

S-band power amplifier and demodulates the

S-band carri�r. The uutput of the verifica- Fi9ure l-Retotiomhip between up-data buffer modem,
subcorrier oscil lator subsystem, and verification rece iver.

75
76 J. JACOBI

tion receiver is the original up-data and up-voice signals. The data is returned to the buffer

modem as an input to the system verification process. The voice output is recorded.

UP·DATA BUFFER MODEM

The hmction of the up-data buffer modem (Figure 2) in the Unified S-Band system is to

provide interface between a modified Univac CP-642B computer and the up-data subcarrier
oscillator. The computer provides digital data to the buffer modem. The buffer modem stores

this data and at the proper time, modulates the data onto an audio tone. This tone is mixed

with a synchronization tone and filtered, and the resultant is applied to the 70-kilocycle sub­

carrier oscillator. The buffer modem also accepts phase- modulated audio from the verifica­

tion receiver, demodulates this audio, and provides the demodulated data to the computer. The

computer uses this information as a part of a complex verification process.

The buffer modem may be divided into four main sections: a transmit section, a receive

section, the audio switching system, and control circuits. In the transmit section. the buffer

processes digital data and provides a phase shift-keyed audio signal to the subcarrier for up­
data transmission (the phase shift key will be subsequently referred to as PSK). The receive
section processes the output of the verification receiver. The audio switching circuits auto­
matically provide normal and emergency connections between modulators, demodulators and

RF equipment. The control section generates control and timing waveforms required by the
up-data buffer modem.

Transmit Section

The transmit section can be subdivided into two parts, the data input circuits and a PSK

modulator. The data input circuits consist of a 27-bit shift register and a 5-bit storage register.

f-t COMPUTER

....! I
�,
f->
m

I<-
SHIFT
INTlRfACE REGISHR SIACAItRIER

1 ]
MOO
cns OSCI LLATORS

f->
STORAGE �,
REGISTER MOD

H, ':,1,' "J
UNIVAC AUDIO
CPM2 I SWITCHING
CLOCK ClOCK
COMPUTU ' SYSTEM

CONTROL
CIRCUITS

1
1 --1 r-
StORAGE FROM
DEMOD
UGISHR VERIFICATION

r-
RECEIVER

.,
COMPUTa
INTERFACE SHIFT
--
D£MOD
CKTS REGISTER

F igure 2-Up-dalo buffer Modem.

 VERIFICATION RECEIVER. SCQ OSCILlATOlI ANO IJP'OATA MODEMS 77

When the buffer is ready to accept a word from the computer, it places a request signal on a

line to the computer. The computer responds with a 30-bit parallel word, conSisting of 25 data
bits and 5 control bits. The 25-bit data portion of the word is entered into the shift register

and the 5-bit control information is set into the storage register. The control information

selects the modulator, demodulator and transmitting equipment to be used during the trans­

mission of the data bits . If the computer does not respond to the request for a word, logic I
data bits are transmitted each bit time.

When the data is completely entered into the shift register, it is automatically dumped to
the PSK modulator at a I-kilobit rate. After the data is transferred to the PSK modulator, a
signal is generated to initiate another word transfer from the computer.

PSK Modulator

l l
Two identical phase modulator circuits

(Figure 3) are employed in the buffer, one 2 K< ONE 1 Kc SY C lONE

acting as a standby to increase operational

reliability. Digital signals from the shift

register are applied to the modulator and

PHASE
MOOULATOR f-. lJNEAR
AOOfR f---i LOW PASS
FILla
OUTPUT

shift the phase of a 2- kilocycle tone at a 1-

T
OAU INPUT

kilobit rate. The total phase shift between a

Figure 3-PSK modulator.
logiC "0" and a logic "1" is 180 degrees.

The phase-shifted signal is filtered and added linearly to the I-kilocycle synchronization
tone . The combined signal is filtered through a 3-kilocycle lOW-pass filter, amplified and

supplied through two balanced outputs to the RF equipment.

Receive Section

The receive section consists of a pair of phase demodulators and data output circuits. The

phase demodulators are depicted in Figure 4.

Phase- modulated audio is obtained from the verification receiver and applied to one of the
two demodulation circuits. The I-kilocycle synchronization tone and the 2-kilocycle PSK audio
are separated by filtering, the 2- kilocycle PSK audio is applied to a phase detector. and the
I-kilocycle synchronization tone is doubled to 2 kilocycles, and is used as the phase detector
reference. The demodulated output is then

"squared up" to provide the digital data to

COMPOSITE
the data output circuits.
AUDIO
,
(\
The data output ci.rcuits consist of a 26-
2Kc PSK
V
J!
AUDIO
FI LTER """ SQUAAING
bit shift register and a 5-bit storage regis­ CIKUlIS DETECTOR CIRCUIT
OUTPUT
L-
•
_

ter. The storage register receives informa­ ,... ... <

tion from the audio s�'!!t;:hl.r,� secnon and

drives a display unit for visual presentation

of equipment configuration. The demodulated Figure 4-PSK demodulator.

78 J. JACOBI

audio output is entered into the shift register at a I- kilobit rate. When a full word is stored the
buffer requests the computer to accept the word, The computer responds by accepting the word
in parallel readout and acknowledges to the buffer that it has accepted the word.

DATA
SUBCARRIER OSCILLATOR SUBSYSTEM INPUT

MODE OUTPUT
" "

T �
SELECTION
Thepurpose ofthe subcarrier oscillators ens
(Figure 5) in the system is to convert base­
band voice and data signals to frequency­
modulated subcarriers. The subsystem also � fiLTER
linearly adds these subcarriers and adjusts
VOICE INPUT
lheir respective levels so as to produce the
proper up-link modulation index at S-band Figure 5-Svbcorrier oscillotor wbsystem.
for the mode of transmission selected. For
purposes of discussion, this subsystem will be broken down into three components: the voice
subcarrier oscillator, the data subcarrier oscillator, and the mode selection circuit.

Voice Subcarrier

Voice signals are received from the station intercom and applied to the appropriate input
of the subcarrier oscillator subsystem. The input voice is passed through a low pass filter
which restricts the voice spectrum to a maximum frequency of 3 kilocycles. This filter has
relatively sharp cutoff characteristics attenuating 6-kilocycle components by 60db which reduces
the spreading of the VOice subcarrier spectrum and eliminates a certain amoW"ll of noise.

The voice subcarrier oscillator is a voltage-controlled multivibrator which operates at a

nominal center frequency of 30 kilocycles. The frequency deviation of the subcarrier oscillator
is a linear fWlction of the modulation voltage and has a maximum value of plus and minus 7.5
kilocycles about the center frequency. The linearity of the frequency deviation versus voltage
is I percent or better over the full range of plus and minus 7.5 kilocycles.

The output of the voltage-controlled multivibrator is filtered by a band-pass filter to re­

move harmonics of the 30 kilocycles and also to remove undesirable voice components which
might occur at frequencies of 3 kilocycles and less. The output of the band-pass filter is then
supplied to the mode selection circuitry.

Oata Subea"i.,

The data subcarrier oscillator is also a voltage-controlled multivibrator. The nominal

center frequency of this subcarrier is 70 kilocycles, and the maximum deviation of the data
subcarrier is plus and minus 5 kilocycles about the center frequency. The linearity proper­
ties are the same as those of the voice subcarrier. Filtering of the data prior to appli­
cation to the subcarrier is accomplished in the up-data buffer modem.
 VERIFICIITION RECEIVER, $CO OSCILLATOR liND UP'DIITA MDDEMS 79

The output of the 7D-kllocycle multivibrator is filtered by a band-pass filter for reasons
mentioned in the discussion of the voice subcarrier. The output of the filter is supplied to the
mode selection circuitry.

Mode Selection Circuitry

In the present Unified S-band system there are eight possible modes of up-link operation,
deSignated lA through lH. The basic mode structure is given in Table 1.

Table 1

Basic Mode StIUcture of Unified S-Band System.

Mode Operation

lA No subcarrier outputs

lB Voice subcarrier only

Ie Up.-data subcarrier only

10 Voice subcarrier only at a voltage level different from that in mode IB

IE Up-data subcarrler only at a voltage level different from that in mode le

IF Both subcarriers linearly added

lG Both subcarriers linearly added at voltage levels different from thOSe in mode IF

lH Backup vOice. This mode permits modulation of up--volce on the 70-kJlocycle subcarrier
in the event of certain failures.

The purpose of the mode selection circuitry 1s to make the proper subcarriers available
at the voltage levels required by Simply setting a selector switch to the mode desired.

To accomplish its purpose, the mode selection circuitry accepts the outputs of the two
subcarrier oscillators and applies them to two banks of variable attenuator networks. Each
bank of networks may be considered to contain eight variable attenuators corresponding to the
eight modes of operation. One bank of attenuators adj usts the voice subcarrier level and the
other, the data subcarrier level. The output of the two banks of attenuators are combined in a
linear fashion and provided to the transmitter-exciter through a line driver. It should be noted
that since each attenuator is variable, the level of either subcarrier may be adjusted inde­
pendently of the mode selected and independently of the level of the other subcarrier. The
range of output levels is sufficient to accommodate any present 01' Iuture modulation index
requirements.

VERIFICATION RECEIVER

The purpose of the verification receiver (Figure 6) in the Unified S-band system is to prO­
vide a means of demodulating a sample of the up-link signal as far upstream as possible . The
80 J. JACOBI

FROM
EXCITE•
AN' ATTENUAJO � J l2 NO
J
AFe
4 LIMITER \
""" • CO
I
l MI�XER
AM'lIF".
•
"""
"
MIXER
,OM<
"
I DISCRIM I
'"

I I AG' ""
""

t
DETECTOR
I I NTEGU.TOR

SELECTABLE
I
XTAL

L
w:
VIDEO
SPARE
AM'

OIST
H
SPARE

I
70l(e
DEMOD AM' m
IlUFFER MOOEM

" " SPAtE

Y DtMOD
OlST
AM' I TO
RECORDING

EMITTER L SPAR[
FOLLOWER

F i gure 6-Verifieotio., receiver.

demodulated outputs of the verification receiver consist of up-data and up-voice . The up-data

is returned to the buffer modem for further processing and the voice is recorded.

The verification receiver is a version of a commercial, SOlid-state, S-band telemetry re­

ceiver. It is a fixed-tW'led, superheterodyne, multiple-conversion receiver of standard design.

The unique items in this receiver are the phase demodulators and the subcarrier demodulators.

A sample of the up-link signal is obtained from a directional coupler located at the output

of the S-band power amplifier. The power level out of the directional coupler is approximately

+ 20dbm. Therefore it is necessary to reduce the signal to an acceptable level with the attenu­

ator shown in the diagram.

After reducing its power level the signal is converted to the first IF frequency of 30 meg­
acycles. The converter utilizes crystal-controlled oscillators that operate at approximately

40 megacycles, which requires a multiplication factor of 54. The output bandwidth of the con­
verter is approximately 3 megacycles.

The 30 megacycle first IF signal is supplied to the second mixer where it is heterOdyned
down to 10.035 megacycles. The signal is amplified, limited and applied to the phase demodulator.

The phase demodulator consists of a conventional Foster-Seeley discriminator and an in­

tegrating network. With a phase- modulated input a Foster-Seeley discriminator provides a

demodulated output which is a differentiated replica of the video intelligence. By integrating

this output, a true replica of the video is obtained, This type of phase demodulator gives ade­

quate performance at high signal-to-noise ratios. It has the advantage that it does not have
the acquisition problems associated willi a phase lock demodulator.
 VERlflCATIOIf RECEIVER, seD OSCILLATOR AND UP-DATA MODEMS 81

It should be noted that the receiver employs an automatic frequency control (AFC) loop_
This eliminates the problem of having to retune the receiver because of local oscillator drift
or because of slight changes in up-link frequency.

The output of the phase demodulator is supplied to the 30-kilocycle and 70- kilocycle sub­
carrier demodulators. The subcarriers are amplified, filtered and limited in their respective
demodulators. The resultlng signals are fed to discriminators, which are of the pulse averag­
ing type. The outputs of the discriminators are the desired up-data and up-voice.
82
 SIGNAL DATA DEMODULATORS

by
G. Handros
Goddard Space Flight Center

ABSTRACT

This paper presents an overall view of the function and capabilities of the
signal data demodulator which is an integral part of the heart of the Unified
5-Band system. The text inc ludes a general discussion of the different types of
demodulators . Then, more specific discussion follows explaining in detail the
dynamic behavior of each demodu lator, tabulation of parameters, operational
procedures and integration of the demodulators with the rest of the Unified
S-Band system.

INTRODUCTION

Before we begin the discussion of the signal data demodulator system (SODS), it is neces­
sary to acquaint the reader with the type of signals transmitted from the spacecraft . The
spacecraft has the capability of transmitting
VOICE AND
two carriers simultaneously at different fre­ TnfMET�Y BIOMfDlCAL

'" /'
SU8CAARIE� DATA SUBCARRIER
quencies, one of these is phase- modulated by RANGE CODE
the information and the other, is reserved
for frequency modulation. An examination
of typical spectra of the phase- and frequency­ i
modulated carriers, shown in Figures 1 and
2, reveals the necessity for simultaneous
\"10+ 1 .25
/0+ 1 .024 M<.
M<.

groWld demodulation of both carriers and

recovery of all data. For this reason, two
demodulator channels, which will be dis-
cussed in subsequent pages, have been de- EMERG£NCY VOICE
signed for the ground stations .

THE SIGNAL DATA DEMODULATOR SYSTEM ""- ----L--.JL-

'o �----
EMUGENCY KEY

I
•
The signal data demodulator system is
an i:otegl'al part of the heart of the Unified
i i
S- Band system.As Figure 3 indicates, the
snos is fed by the receiver and in turn , O R-
-----'
- -
- - 1 '0
,
/0+512 )(c
!eedG a iilwtichannel tape recorder, provides
the inputs to the various data display systems, F i gure I-PM spectra of frequency-modulated carriers.

83
84 G. HONOROS

TELEVISION
INFOR.\o\AtlON 5U&CAUIU
T[lEMURV

/ ,...- VOICE AND

'tOMfOlCAl
DATA
SU8CAHIU

fc.. .
1 2S M c
SCIENTifIC OArA "'. I .Ol. Mc
SUKAJl21US
nUMUl....

� l1 ������
�

��I------�I�I_IL---�_--f-�,
,- , �,----
"-,,--
" l fo. 12�.c �
" .,
UCORDED ON SPACECUff
AND PlAYW ·BACK
TEtfMET�Y

RECORDED ON 5''''CECMff

/
10
AND 'IAYfD - BACK VOIC[

SCIENTIFIC DATA T£tfM(TRY

suao.RRrE�S
1 5UtcAUIU

�- t
-L----------Jc-� ttt !i\/im
L L--"�J
"
L-->__ �,�,c-"_._,_, -'I
"-'<: "
..,
__
__ ,
__
____
_
10_1 .024 Me
fo.,y,:� "'- 135,«.

Figure 2-FM $peclra of frequency modulated eOrTiers.

I ::;
! "'NO
..!'Otto

I D Kw
0 - - - -

LO NOISE
-- -- - - -- �
,

ANTENNA
POWER PUAMPllflER ELECTRONICS
AMPLIFIER
1 AND I f

I r
TkAN5MITTU RANG ING DATA
DEMODUlATORS
ANTE NNA
EXCITER 5YST£M nQGlAMMU

ol L 'TAl v eE
DATA
ttACKING
o...r...
PROCESSOR
VIDEO
I:::i
TAP{
lfCORDER
ORirIAl
f'IlEDICTIONS

t
TTY ATA BIOMEDICAL nM
DATA "'>A
VOICE

Figure 3-Simplified Apollo Unified S-Bond �yslem.

and feeds the data processing equipment such as the PCM system, Figure 4 is a simplified
diagram of the SDOO. As the figure indicates, the receiver feeds the demodulators with two

signals. One is a 50-megacycle IF which carries the frequency modulation. The other input
 SIGNAL DATA O:NODULATDlIS .5

UCOROU

<xrUT t-< f-+ "

IECUV�1
"' � ISOlATION
AMI'llfll

AMI'llflU
.so 1&
�
j---i CAUIE_
t-<
VOICE Sic VOlCf
SI'lAIC{1

f-+ VOICE
mOUtNCY

U.
DEMOOUlATOI:

f-+
Dt:MODUlAfOR ..
DATA
0,""" <N'
nM
r::
SUfCTOI

J.
� TLM S/C 0,",""
D£MODuLATOI: PCM

1-+
tAICEl 7- CHANNEt
1f000D SIC
UCElV� PM MOD£ DIKIIMINATORS
r-< DEMOOUtATOR
VOICE SIC VOlCf
'M VIOEO _ WfFEI
AMPLIFIER
..

TLM sic

@
DEMODULATOR '<M

� KEY OUTPUT
�
SIMUlATED VIDEO � <tv
INPUTS UNIT SOMe DEMODULATe.! TONE OUTI'UT

EMERGENCY
vorCE OUTPUTS

Figure 4-Signal data demadulalar s),stem.

[rom the receiver Is at video aoo contains the phase modulation. Thus the SDOS consists of

two channels which may be referred to as the FM and PM channels.

The 50-megacycle IF is routed to the carrier frequency demodulator which reduces the

signal to video and feeds a recorder, an isolation amplifier and [ilter (television channel), the
voice and biomedical data demodulator, and the telemetry demodulator. The PM video input

from the receiver supplies the inputs to the VOice and biomedical data subcarrier demodulator,
the telemetry demodulator, and the emergency key demodulator. Also obtained from this chan­

nel is the emergency voice information . It should be noted at this POint that the telemetry sub­
carrier demodulators and the voice and biomedical data subcarrier demodulators of the PM

and FM channels are identical.

As Figure 4 indicates, the outputs of the voice and biomedical data subcarrier demod­

ulators and the telemetry subcarrier demodulators are routed to a data output selector,
which is simply a switch. This allows the ground operators to route the voice, telemetry,

and biomedical data to the proper data-processing equipment regardless of whether these
data are recovered from the FM or PM channels of the SDDS. In addition, the data l'Il'!l�c­
tor provides the inputs to seven biorneO:!i.ca! S\itcanier demodulators for the recovery of the

biumedical information.

CEMGiiiji.ATOk EQUIPMENT

At this point, let us discuss in some detail the various demodulators.

86 G. tiO�OROS

Carrier Frequency Demodulator

The carrier frequency demodulator is shown in detail in Figure 5 . The 50- megacycle IF

enters the demodulator through an attenuator and is routed to a bandpass filter of either 1- or

4-megacycle bandwidth. However, as shown in the figure, if the switch is in the horizontal

position, the input bandwidth is determined by the receiver and it is about 9.3 megacycles. The
reason for the usc of variable bandwidth Is to optimize the performance of the demodulator for

the various signals which are transmitted from the spacecraft. The output of the filter i s

amplified, limited, and converted to 120 megacycles using a local oscillator and doubler .
Subsequently, the signal i s reduced to video, using a modulation tracking phase-lock loop.

Again for optimization purposes, the loop has a 4- and an ll-megacycle closed loop nOise band­
width. The lOOp bandwidth is selectable through a front panel control. The output of the loop

is routed to an output amplifier via a buffer where the video outputs are used to feed the vari­
ous subcarrier demodulators, television monitors, and tape recorders. The demodulator also

contains a threshold detector and a loop lock indicator. A loop disable switch is also available.

'OM,
a.t.NOP....�S
If INPUT
fILTER
-)9 10 0"",,"
IW& 1 Me

....TTENUATOR !-_O O
_ __�O

a.t.NOP....SS
flLTU
IW-4 Me

' ''' ..
MIXER OIIVU VIDEO
OUTPUtS
'-------'-J"-+
I70M<

" ..
OSCILLA10ll:
ANO
OOU8UR

LOoP lOOK

Figure 5-Corrier frequem;:y demodulOlor.

The PCM Telemetry Subcarrier Demodulator

As previously pointed out, the telemetry demodulators of the PM and FM channels are

identical. Therefore, only one will be described here.

The telemetry demodulator is shown in Figure 6. Since the spacecraft has the capability

of transmUting 200, 51.2, or 1.6 kilobits per second bi-phase modulated on a 1.024-megacycle
 SIGNAL DATA DEUO[)ULATORS 87

subcarrier, it was necessary to provide the SAND-PASS coo,

fiLTER FILTER
demodulator with three different predetection
bandw idths. These bandwidths are obtained
using a variable bandwidth filter, shown in MND-PASS
FILTER
Figure 6, and their values are 600-, 150-, SHECTA8LE B

and 6-kilocycles, respectively. These band­ L_� DATA

widths are equal to three times the bit rate
Figvre 6-Telemetry subcarrier demodulator.
and are selected by a front panel control.
When the proper bandwidth is selected for
the particular iJil rate tJ'ansmiUed from the spacecraft, the l .024-megacych: iJi-phase modu­
lated subcarrier is routed to a limiter, a filter and a phase detector, The other output to the
phase detector is obtained by squaring the 1.024- megacycle bi-phase modulated subcarrier,
thus eliminating the modulation and obtaining a 2.MB- megacycle stable component which is
locked on using a modulation restrictive phase-lock loop. The output of the loop is then routed
to the phase detector via an X l !2 multiplier. The output of the multiplier is the PCM informa­
tion which is routed to the bit synchronizer and PCM data processing equipment.

The Voice and Biomedical Data Subcanier Demodulator

As previously pointed out, the voice and seven biomedical data subcarriers are frequency­
multiplexed and the composite is modulated onto the 1.25-megacycle subcarrier. This is done
only when EVA is performed. At any other time the biomedical data are transmitted via the
PCM telemetry system and the VOice is transmitted alone on the 1.2- megacycle subcarrier.

The voice and biomedical data demodulator is shown in Figure 7. The 1.25-megacycle
subcarrier enters the demodulator via an attenuator. If the subcarrier is modulated with the
voice information, the 20-kilocycle filter is used prior to detection. If, however, the sub­
carrier is modulated by voice and biomedical data, then the 3S-kilocycle filter is used. When
the proper filter is selected, the output is limited and detected using a modulation tracing
phase-lock loop. At the output of the loop a low-pass filter is used to recover the VOice infor­
mation and a wideband output is obtained which feeds the biomedical data demodulators via the
data output selector shown in Figure 4 . The demodulator also contains a threshold detector
and in-lock indicator.

The AM Key Demodulator

The emergency key demodulator is shown in Figure B. A 512-kilocycle band-pass filter is
used to recover the subcarder from the output of the PM buffer amplifier Shown in Figure 4 .
SubsequenUy the signal is amplified and convertl:'d to 1 !rJ.locycle Ul:iwg a Sl::!-kilocycle crystal
oscilla.tor. The I-kilocycle signal is filtered and detected using an amplitude detector. Thus dc
or keyed outputs are provided. Also incorporated is an audio output amplifier which provides
the required audio outputs.

The Test Unit

For field and laboratory performance evaluation of the various' demodulators, the SDDS is
provided with a test unit. This unit is shown in Figure 9. It can be seen that this test lUlit has
88 G. HONOROS

I PHASE:L"O-C; lOOPl AMPLlFI

SUFFER
LOO!' f6.3 v . 0, - )0% I I
U
lOOP
LOCK t:OR 0.5 AMPS I FILTER X2'!'i>-p---'i WIDEIlAND
OVTPUTS
I R ( OUT)"95
I SCAU
FACTOR
VSWR 1 .5: 1
lEVEL 0
LIMITER LIMItER OkIVE� I 3/V RAO TO:1 VRMS
BANDWIDTH
"26& +26db +20cIb I CO'" ,2M<,
<50 CPS
PHASE
DETECT.

UHRENCE
OliVER
8.l.NDPASS BANDPASS
.. IOdb<n
AUDIO
FILTER FllHR OUTPUTS
BW :20 1« BW"J51«; R (OU T)a
'" o .
°
,,%
&A.l.ANCEO

".
VOICE �UIlCARRIER
1 . 25 Mc t /)5 CPS O. l T0 1
¥OLT RMS IMPEDANCE 95 OIiM
UFERENCE
DRIVER
. 1 0 dbm
LOUD
THRESHOLD LOwPASS SPEAKER
'0 otTECTOI! QUAD FIL1U 010 3 WATTS
RELAY AND RELAY DETECTOR 3.4 Kc AT RMS <5%
AMPLIFIER Jdb HARMONIC
DISTORTION
•

F igure 7-Voic.e Jubcarrier demodulator.

512 Kc
25MV

1
BANDPASS

}
fiLTER
512 1(<;

1
.

I
W
BI .TO I .5I(c ""0
OUTPUTS
AUDIO ---+ , ( 1 VRMS)
AMPLlFlfR OUTPUT
AMPLIFIER

,
fKTER DIODE
MIXER AMPLIFIER ----0 DETECTOR DCOUTPUT
", AMPLlFJU ...
( KEYED)
--�--�
DC

I
B,W.
\00 - 150 CPS ! OVTPUTS
(0, .7 VOlTS )

� ''''N
�
�
I CRYSTAL I LOW· PASS DC OUTPUT
I OSCILlATOR OYSrAl FllHR A,MPUF1ER
I 513 K<
L: J
<IO PDM/DAY
Figure B-AM key demodulator.
 SIGNAL DATA DEMODULATORS 89

�"',",
nM
DATA P�SE BI'�!>£
SWITCH
anTAL

8.33 M<:
T
OSCILLATOR

DOUIlU 1
_,Ne
"""
� 'M
� Me

i
r
MODULATOR
AND 611.

I
M"""'"
CRYSTAL
OSCIlLATOR

,,�
512 ':c .:EYED
S12 IC<
� veo
1
" N
"' "'
STEP
ADDU ADDER

,.....
ATTfNVATO.

INPUT ,,�
nVING 'M

I.!
GATE

I' ��
B
�
'NM
AUDIO
veo
NOISE
SCURCt
1250 ICc "'M,
1150 IC<
TUNING

F
VIDEO
INPUT VIDEO
AMl'llflEl

Figure 9-S005 le�1 �y�lem.

the capability of simulating the telemetry subcarrier, the VOice subcarrier, the emergency key

subcarrier, and the video infor mation. These signals may be summed and routed to a 50-

megacycle veo from which the 50-megacycle IF is derived or to a phase modulator and multi­
plier where the SO- megacycle PM signal is obtained.

Depending upon which snns channel is to be tested, the PM or FM 50-megacycle signal is

obtained from the test unit, using a switch, and noise is added to it from a 50-megacycle noise
source which is built into the test unit. Thus a signal plus noise at 50 megacycles containing

the desired subcarrier and/or video information is avaUable to the snns for testing.

Two signal data demodulator systems have been completed and tested. Figure 10 shows
the first system. On the top draw there are three loud speakers used [or PM voice, FM voice
and emergency voice with the various volume controls also shown. In addition, this draw con­
tains the various in-lock indicators and a patch panel for routing the various signals to the

various demOdulators. The second draw contains thp. carrie:- !.equ.:ucy demodulator on the
l�!t and the �u voice demodulators on the right with their variOUS front panel controls. This
draw also contains the emergency key demodulator which has no front panel controls since they
are not necessary. The third draw contains the two telemptry de :::od;;.l..tuns with tneir band­

width s'.'!!.tcM:-.g ':::uULrOLS and in-lock indicators. The fourth draw contains the various power
units. In the fifth draw there are seven phase-lock biomedical subcarrier demodulators with

their power supplies.

90 G. HONDROS

From the data obtained from testing the first two

sons design is
", -
systems, GSFC is convinced that the
.
very good and there is every reason to believe that

this system will operate very well in the field.

• •

•••• 1
,
aaalllaa.llaall.....

k
•

. - . •

J . • •
•

• •
•
· .

l
,

• • •
I"
• \-
•
•

� [[ l:
J[" [ [ [ [
[
,

--
)0•

Figure IQ-Photograph of signol dolo

demodulator 'y5Iem.
 THE UNIFIED S-BAND POWER AMPLIFIER

by
T. E . McGunigal
Goddard Space Flight Center

ABSTRACT

Thispaper reviews the salient sp<.ocificaHons ofthe lO-kIlowatt power ampli­

lier including its interface characteristics and actual performance character­
istics dcterminL'<.I during the acceptance tests. Special emphasis is given to the
RF performance and the more difficult RF tests are discussed. Metering and
control C ircuil operation is covered In the light of the Apollo mission operational
requirements. An overall block diagram of the amplifier is included.

INTRODUCTION

The unified S-band (USB) power amplifier will provide uplink. data, voice commWlications,
and ranging transmissions to either the Apollo Command and Service Module (CSM) or the Lunar
Excursion Module (LEM). In an emergency situation, it would be possible to Simultaneously
provide two uplinks at 2 kilowatts each to both the C8M and the LEM. Essentially the same
power amplifier will be used by all the Apollo ground stations; that is, the 85-foot dish stations,
the 30-foot stations, and the shipboard installations. The power amplifiers were designed and
manufactured by Energy Systems, Inc. at Palo Alto under subcontract from Collins Radio in
Dallas .

SALIENT CHARACTERISTICS OF USB POWER AMPLIFIER

To begin, we will describe the power ampliher by reviewing the salient specifications . It
should be noted that in all but a couple of cases which will be mentioned as we go along, these
specifications represent demonstrated performance determined during type-testing of the first
two units at the manufacturer's plant. The output power of the power amplifier is continuously
variable from 1 to 20 kilowatts, cw. The tWlable frequency range of the transmitter is 3 0 meg­
acycles from 2090 megacycles to 2120 megacycles. The bandwidth of the power amplifier is
10 megacycles minimum to the Idb point at aU power levels. As a matter o! f:lct, it wa� de­
termined rl\\rLn.g typ;; te::.Ung that at aU but the very lowest power levels the bandwidths are
typically 16 to 1 8 megacycles at the Idb point.

The bandwidth is, of course, wider than the sin el.� '.!pl�!' ;;iX'ctJ"um to the CSM or the LEM
£c that it o.;an Simultaneously accommodate both spectrums or, on the other hand, provide rapid
switching between the C8M and the LEM by switching the exciter.

91
92 T. E. IItGUNIGAL

Tuning tl.mt.f however, if it is desirable to tune across the band, is less than 10 minutes
between any two frequencies in the specified hand.

The required drive power to produce the full 20 kilowatts of output is 500 milliwatts. The
linearity of the amplifier is such that when driven with two tones, each producing 2 kilowatts
of output power and separated in frequency from 1.5 to 8.5 megacycles, the third-order inter­
modulation products are down at least 3Odb.

The output power stability of the transmitter was specified to be less than O.5db of varia­
tion for a 24-hour period. Again during type-testing, it was determined that typical variations
for a daily period were on the order of O.ldb rather than 0.5 as required. The phase stability
and the phase-transient characte ristics of the amplifier have not been measured as yet due to
the unavailability of a phase-coherent receiver at the manufacturer's plant; however, these
parameters will soon be tested by Collins at their Dallas installation. The specifications are
that the power amplifier shall contribute less than 1 degree rms residual phase noise when
measured with a phase-coherent receiver having a double-sided loop bandwidth of 50 cycles
per second. The phase transients shall not exceed 4 degrees peak for power line variations of
:5%.

The wideband noise output of the power amplifier in the receive band, which is from 2270
to 2300 megacycles, will be less than -8Odbm per cycle. The in-band noise, that is from 2
kilocycles to 5 megacycles awa.y from the carrier on either side, will be at least 130db per
cycle below the carrier leveL In order to keep radia frequency interference problems to a
minimum, the conducted and radiated interference in the power amplifier is reduced to com­
ply with MIL-I-26600 for Class ill equipment.

The interface specifications of the power amplifier are as follows: The input impedance is
50 ohms with VSWR of not more than 1.25:1 over the entire amplifier bandwidth. The output
characteristics are such that the amplifier will perform to specifications when terminated with
a load having a VSWR of 1.5:1. The input primary power required by the amplifier is 440 volts
and 208 volts . The 440 volt-input can be :10 percent 60 cycle, 3-pbase, 3-wire and requires 85
kilovolt- amperes. The 208 volt can also be dO percent and is also 60 cycle, 3-phase, 4-wire and
requires 6 kilovolt-amperes. It was anticipated that the 85 kilovolt figure would be required
for operation in either the single 20- kilowatt mode or the dual 2- kilowatt, linear mode. However,
the tube seems to be more efficient than we expected and during type-testing it was determined
that a typical value for power consumption at 440 volts is on the order of 66 kilovolt-amperes.

POWER AMPLIFIER SYSTEM

Figure 1 is a power amplifier system block diagram. The exciter-supplied signal comes
into the RF input control and monitor circuitry, which consists of an input-isolator, waveguide
coaxial switch which permits rapid removal of the drive from the klystron, a directional coupler,
and a continuously variable 20db attenuator which permits smooth variations of the input drive
to the klystron. From there the signal goes into the klystron and electromagnet assembly . The
klystron is an Eimac tube, a 5KM7OSJ, which nas been modified to actually reduce its standard
hming range, thereby giving greater precision in tuning to preset counter readings and also
 TIlE UNIFIEO 5-BAIIO ?!JWER AMPLIFIER 93

R f INPVT OUTPUl

�
"
'"' MW CONTWt & KlVST1tON & MQNtlOfl &
[NNT SIGNA,---- MONITOR ElECTROMAGNET PROTECTIVE
EQUIPMENT DEVICES
EUCTROMAGNET
POWER SUPPLY
T ,
,
,

1
,
POWER
Y
,
208 1/ 60 CPS FILAMENT
3 � POWU -< 0ISTRI8U!10N
mUM
POWER SUPPlY I
I
I
,
CONTROL MONITc- PROTECTIVE Dl'VICES ,
& nOnCTIVE 4-- WITH. IN SYSTfM R F SWITCH
,
SYSTEM 460 V I
420 CPS ,
I 20KW
MOTet HIGH VOLTAGE TO "NT[

r
BEAM POW!;R ,
GENERATOit SUf'PlY I
I
440 V 60 CPS CPS POWU
60 ,
3 j POWER -< DISTRIB.UnON COOLANT J
SYSTEM '---' LIQUID TO AIR DISfll8VT.ON DUMMY
__

HEAT EXCHANGER MANifOLD

----- � lOAD

Figure l - Power amplifier 5yslem block diagram.

giving greater transmitter tWling stability. From there, the signal anywhere between the 1· and

20- kilowatt level is fed into the RF output monitor and protective devices which include a lOdb
output isolator and several directional couplers, one of which feeds the verification receiver,

an arc-detector Circuit, which detects the presence of an arc in the output waveguide and im­

mediately cuts the drive to the transmitter, and a reflectometer, which senses high output VSWR

and again cuts off the transmitter. From there the signal goes into the RF switch which, at the

discretion of the operator, controls the flow of the signal either to the 20-kilowatt feed or into
the dummy load.

At the middle of the block diagram we see the 208-volt power distribution system which

powers the electromagnet power supply, the filament power supply, and the control monitor

and protective system. The other input into this circuitry is provided by the variOUS protective

devices throughout the power amplifier .

The primary power for the amplilier is 440 volt, 60 cycles, which powers the motor�generator

set and the liquid-ta-air heat exchanger. The motor- generator converts the 60 cycle per second
power to 420 cycle per second power which is then, in turn, rectified by the high-voltage beam

power supply (22 kilovolts, 30 amperes). The advantages of using the motor-generator in this
system are two-fold. By converting the frequency of the primary power to the high voltage

beam power supply, the filtering job can be done better and in less space. Secondly, the motor­
generator provides a desired degree of isolation from linl" volugc ....al"i&tions and transients .

The liquid-to-air heat exchanger is of conventional design. The coolant flows from the

heat exchanger into the distribution manifold and then to both the dummy load ::I ':1-'=' the !-.!ysti."VlI/

electromagnet. The fiow il5' re;;.:.!...t€d in Lhe hquid-to-air heat exchanger so that the tempera­

ture of the coolant at the klystron is maintained to witltin ±5 degrees Fahrenheit of nominal value.

Figure 2 is a W'lit-identification diagram of the power amplifier system. As will be noted,

it is made up of four main enclosures: the power supply enclosure, the RF enclosure, the
 T. E. McGUNIGAL
94

MOMENTARY FAULT HOLD

POWER PANEL 8 BATTLE SHORI SW
PANEL

t
($IOE WALL)
�<LAV PANEL COOLANT
EXTUNAt ( UA� ALL) MANIFOLD
� .
INTERlOCKS (REAR WAUl

/ "
PS ENCLOSURe .L/ / PI' ENCLOSUR[ J. 1 / RF SWITC"
CONTIK)L >- (CENTE.,
PANEL PANEL flOW
CONTROL INDICATOIl: � OU
PANEL CAliBRATOR PANEL LOAD
PANEL
I-
,,� (CENTE.,
MONITOR VOLTAG[ TUNING
PANEL SUPPLY ACCESS ARC OU A
"
fOCUS PANEl ,
, ,
SLIP PANEL J
1/
TERMINAL "
KLY FIL , (SIDE PANH'
1
/ 7 COOLANT IN I I
COOLANT RETURN / / / /
REMOTE
HEAT EXCHANGER "0 MOTOR
CONTrol CONTROLS GENERATOR
PANEL
1/ / 1/
1 1
404OV 60 CPS
460V 420 CPS

Figure 2-Power amplifier unit identification.

motor-generator and its associated controls, and the heat exchanger. In the power supply en­

closure in the far right- hand cubicle, we have the high-voltage beam supply itself. The next

cubicle to the left houses most of the control circuitry and the battle-short switch, about which

a little more will be said later. On the left-hand portion of the power supply enclosure, we see

the circuit-breaker panel which contains the circuit breakers Cor the whole power amplifier
system, the control panel, the monitor panel , and a focus supply paneL

In the RF enclosure in the left-hand cubicle the klystron and the input RF circuitry is

housed. A small door is provided in the enclosure so that the transmitter can be tWled without

having to open the cubic le door. On the next panel over we have the control and monitor panel

which is very much like the one in the power supply enclosure. A calibrator panel which em­

ploys a bolometer-type RF power measurement system so that the meters in the variOUS con­

trol panels can be calibrated from time to time .

The next panel down contains the arc detector panel and the klystron filament meter ing and

controL On the right-hand panel of the RF enclosure is mounted the coolant flow, pressure and

temperature g"auges required for monitoring the status of the cool ing system. In back of this

monitoring panel is mounted the RF switch and the RF dummy load.

In the case of the 30-foot and the shipboard installations, the RF enclosure will be mounted

on the ground and power will b e fed through a waveguide system and rotary joints to the feed

paint. In the case of the 8S-foot stations, the RF enclosure will be mounted on the steerable

portion of the antenna eli mina t ing the waveguide run and the rotary jOints.
 THE UNIFIEO S'BANO POWER AMPLIFIER 95

On the lower left-hand portion of Figure 2 is shown a remote control panel which is again
essentially identical to the other two control panels. This remote panel is mounted within the
operations building at each site so that the transmitter can be operated from the central con­
trol area during a mission.

Figure 3 is a closeup view of the remote control panel which will serve to demonstrate the
protective circuit and monitor circuit philosophy employed in the power amplifier. Across the
top of the panel are two rows of lights which indicate that a failure has occurred causing the
transmitter to cycle down, either by removal of the beam voltage or by cutting back the RF drive,
or both.

The particular faults which will cause the power amplifier to cycle down are:

1. Loss of cabinet air flow.

2. Open cabinet door somewhere in the system.

� . . . . . . . . . . .

•
-
"

• • • • • • • • • . 0

"·
-• -I
1
,
• .

- .

Figure 3-Remote control ponel

96 T. E. /oItGUNICAL

3 . Failure of the heat exchanger.

•• Excessive temperature of:

a. Magnet.
b. Body.

c. Collector.

d. RF load.

•• Isolator .

5. Klystron filament undercurrent.

6. Klystron filament air How failure.

7. Phase failure of AC line.

8. AC Qvercurrent.

9. Excessive beam voltage.

10. Excessive beam current.

11. Magnet undercurrent.

12. Body over current.

13. Excessive forward or reflected output power.

14. Occurrence of an arc in output wave guide.

15. Loss of waveguide pressurization .

In the case of the Apollo system external interlocks are used to provide protection of the

RF horizon. If the power amplifier is illuminating the feed and is directed to a point on the

horizon which would be hazardous either to personnel or equipment, RF drive is removed from

the transmitter, leaving the beam voltage up so that as soon as the antenna comes above the

hazardous point, the transmissions are immediately resumed. If a failure has occurred which
causes the beam voltage to cycle down, it takes about 20 or 30 seconds for this to occur, and

while this is happening, the beam-voltage lowering light is illuminated. The large light in the

middle of the panel indicates that the battle-short switch is in the batUe-short poSition, which is

an extreme emergency measure because it wipes out the protective features just described.

The metered quantities on the control panel are the RF output power in either the forward

or the reflected direction, the body current, the beam current, the beam voltage, the status of
the input Circuit, the forward driving power, the reflected power in the input circuit, and the

position in db of the input-variable attenuator which is controlled by a switch below it, allowing

the operator to manually raise or lower the drive to the power amplifier.

An interlock light test is included which should light all of the fault-indicator lights if the
bulbs are in satisfactory condition. A pushbutton also allows the operator to flash a small light

in the output wave guide which Simulates an arc and should stop both the RF drive and lower the
beam voltage. A beam-voltage safety switch is key-operated and when placed in a safe position

on any one of the three control panels, precludes the operation of the high voltage beam power
supply.
 TIlE UNIFIHI S·BAND POWER AMPLIFIEr. 97

A 'Control Wlder the beam-voltage meter allows the operator to raise or lower the beam

manually. U it should become desirable to operate it automatically, theI''': is a switch h' the

control circuitry which permits him to have the beam-voltage cycle up at::�ll�atically to a pre­

set level simply by pushing the beam voltage on light.

The first two switches at the bottom of the control panel are the main system on/off. Next
is the dummy load antenna-selector switch follow ed by the ready light, and the two beam­

voltage switches. On most of these meters, a second needle is fOWld (on the power supply en­

closure control panel only) whose fWlction is to indicate the particular setting of the over­

VOltage or Wldercurrent, or whatever it is that is going to represent a fault which will cause

the transmitter to cycle down.

Figures 4-8 are photographs of the

actual eqUipment. Figure 4 is a picture of

the RF enclosure including the control panel,

RF calibration panel, arc detector, re­

flectometer panel and coolant flow, pressure

and temperature gauges. The waveguide can

be seen but the klystron itself cannot. Also

not viSible in Figure 4 are the dummy load

and RF switch which are right in back of the

coolant monito ring paneL

Figure 5 is a view of the klystron itself.

In the upper left-hand corner of the cubicle
is mounted a U of the RF input circuitry. The

tWling controls and the aSSOCiated mechanical

Figure 4-RF enclosure. Figure 5-KlyHron.

98 T. E. IAcGUNIGAL

counters which indicate the pOSition of the phmger in the cavity are lined up - five of them

since it is a five-cavity klystron - on the body of the electromagnet. To facilitate removal of

the klystron from the power amplifier system the rather large chassis slides are mOWlted so

that the whole power amplifier - the klystron and the electromagnet - can be slid out of the
cubicle and removed by using a hoist. The cooling connections are the quick-disconnect, leak­

proof type.

Figure 6 is a view of the liquid-ta-air heat exchanger which will be used at the groWld sta­
tions. It is approximately six feet tall to the top of the fan.

Figure 7 is a view of the liquid-ta-liquid heat exchanger which will be used in the ships'

systems. Its use was necessitated in spite of the fact that the ships have a built-in liquid-to­

liquid heat exchanger, because the regulation of the temperature of the coolant is not adequate

to permit the power amplifier to maintain the specifications; thus, this one is used to regulate
the temperature of the coolant at the klystron to ±5 degrees F.

Figure B is a view of the motor -generator

and its associated controls. There are two

because at the DaUas installation, the con­
tractor is operating two power amplifiers; but,

of course, one power amplifier requires only

one motor-generator.

In general, the transmitter tunes smoothly

and accurately to the preset cowlter readings

and meets most of the requirements by a

rather comfortable margin.

Figure 6-Uquid-to-oir heot ex.:.honger.

I
I

j
Figure 7-Uquid-to-oir heot ex.:.honger for V$e
\
i n ships' systems. Figure a_Motor_generotor.
 RANGING SUBSYSTEM - MARK I

by
P. Lindley

Jet PrQPulsioll Laboratory

ABSTRACT

This presentation covers the functional characteristics of the Mark I rang­

ing subsystem including: its genera! description, parameters, constnlints, and
interfaces with other subsystems of the ranging complex.

The following main functions of the Mark I are discussed: Code gene ration
and synthesis, code synchronization, code shifting, doppler detection, range
tallying, output, ranging code acquisition and tracking, and range monitoring.

INTRODUCTION

The JPL ranging system measures the rOWld-trip propagation time of a signal from a
groWld transmitter to a spacecraft transponder and back to a groW'ld receiver. The accuracy
and resolution are independent of the velocity of the spacecraft relative to either the ground
transmitter or the ground receiver.

The measurement is made continuously and can be sampled on demand. The unit of meas­
urement is called the range unit (RU) which has the dimension of time. The RU is defined and
determined by the frequency of the transmitter S-band carrier and is otherwise invariant.
SpeCifically, the RU is independent of any doppler shift on the signal received from the spacecraft.

The JPL ranging system transmits an S-band carrier, phase modulated by a particular type
of pseudo-random binary code (called a ranging code), to a transponder in a spacecraft. The
code modulation is detected in the transponder and used to remodulate a down-link S-band
carrier (shifted in frequency), which is then received by a ground receiver using the same an­
tenna as is used for transmitting. The ground receiver is a type of phase-locked receiver which
tracks both the S-band carrier and the ranging code.

The subsystems directly involved in the determination and readout of range data are the
S-band exciter and transmitter, the S-band receiver, the tracking data processor, and the Rang­
ing Subsystem Mark 1.

BASiCS OF PSEU DO·RANDOM·CODE RANGING

The baSic nature of pseudo-ranno!r.-:!od... 1"4llging is probably best explained by starting

with :0. t.....::;ic, though inadequate, concept and increasing its complexity as shortcomings become

99
100 P. LINDLEY

apparent. To this end a series of what in

German are called "gedanken-experimente"
or thought experiments are conducted in this
presentation.
8
V -,
RanKe Measurement On a Stationary TRANSMITTER RECEIVER

"'.�
Rellecting Target
IMTER
MODULATION
t
By assuming a reflecting target rather
GENERATOR
kA GE
than a transponder, and by stipulating that it
be anchored in space, as shown in Figure 1,
its range may be determined in the most
T
STANDARD
FREQUENCY
sOlJ�a
straighUorward manner.

This target constitutes a standard fre­

quency source which serves to modulate an Figure l-CW radar ranging system.

S-band carrier with periodic single pulses.

The reflected modulation signal is detected
in a receiver and, by means of a phase meter of some sort, the phase difference between
modulation transmission and reception is determined. It will be fOW"ld that the period of the
puls e modulation (Le., the interval between single-pulse transmissions) must be greater than
the TOW"ld-trip transit time. Otherw ise, there will be ambiguities of integral pulse periods.
Conventional pulse radar works in thIs way.

Range Change Measurement on a MovinK RenectinK larKet

Assuming the reflecting target is permitted to move, our concern is to detect the resultant
changes in range. As the target moves, the phase meter reading changes, increasing if the
target moves away.

Resolution 01 Ran,e Measurements

The resolution of the range increment

TARGET
detection and the initial range determination
depend on the precision of the phase meter.
By designing the phase meter as a digital
device as shown in Figure 2, it is possible to
attain almost any desired resolution, which
will then be invariant.
STANDARD '"'�
TRANSMItTER FREQUENCY MIXE� TkACKING
$OVR(E ucuvu
The transmitter is shown to be modula­
ted at a much higher frequency which is, in
OOl'PLEt
turn, continuously compared with the re­
ceived frequency in a doppler detector con­
sisting of a mixing device and a COW"lting Figure 2-Dappler measurement by conerent CW radar.
 RANGING SUBSYSTEM· MARK I 101

device; the shorter the period of the modulating pulses, the finer the resolution of
measurement.

The General Ranginll Principle

In general, ranging consists of filling the up-link and down-link path with Wliformly trans­
mitted cycles of known period, determining the number of cycles in space at the start of rang­
ing acquisition, and subsequently adding Or subtracting cycles in accordance with motion of the
target.

DETERMINATION OF FRACTIONAL CYCLE OF INITIAL RANGE

Again, conSidering the target anchored in space, by subdividing the transmitter local oscil­
lator frequency, a transmitter clock signal is derived which serves as one input to a clock
doppler detector and also drives a trans-
mitter coder which generates a continuous
code (101010 . . . ) two bits in length, referred
to as transmitter clock code. This then
TA�GEl
modulates the transmitter coherently with
the carrier, as shown in Fib'Ure 3 .
•

A receiver clock signal is derived from

TRANSMiTtER RECEIVER
the received modulation and fed to the other CLOCK CLOCK
TRANSMIHER R�CEIVER
input of the clock doppler detector. In the
absence of doppler (since the target is sta­
TRANSFE�
tionary), the received clock code will be de­ coo,
layed with respect to the transmitted clock TRANSMITTER
CLOCK CODE
code by some unknown integral number (n) of CLOCK
DOPPLER
clock code periods (.,), plus a delay (d) equal DETECTOR

to some unknown fraction of T . In other

,-_-!
words, total round-trip delay ;o nT + U.
TRANSMITTER TO RANGE
CODn TALLY
A clock transfer lOOp is then provided to
CLOCK· CooE PERIOD
help determine the value of d and concern •

TRANSMITTtD "CLOCK" COot

about the number n is postponed until later.
RECEIVED ' CLOCK · COOE

is provided in the form of

FRACTIONAL PiRIOO OF DELAY
A ra nge tally
TOTAL DELAY n?+d WH��t " - UNKNOWN INHGER
a digital accumulating register, in which
range numbers, in r<>. ng2 "'"1its, are tallied in F igure 3-D&lerminalion of fractiOr'loJ eyde.
accordance with outputs from the clock dop­
pler detector.

At the start of range acquisition, the input to the transfer loop is switch-connected to the
transmitter. The inputs to the clock doppler detector are then identical and there is no output.
The range tally is set to zero range units.
102 P. UNDLEY

The transfer loop is now switched to the receiver. As the transfer loop tracks into the
phase without loss of lock, the doppler detector keeps track and causes tallying of range num­

bers in accordance with what appears to be a slight spacecraft motion. This then correc�

what would otherwise have been an error in range corresponding to the fractional clock-cycle

delay, d.

DETERMINATION OF INCREMENTAL CYCLES OF RANGE

Assuming ag'.lin that the target is moving, the resultant increments in range wiU be detected,

clock cycle by clock cycle, in the clock doppler detector and will be continually tallied in the

range taUy.

THE COMPLETE RANGING EQUATION

The determmatiOIl of total range at time t is based on the relation

where Ku is the range at some reference time to and the integral is the sum of range incre­
ments since that time. The mechanization o f the ranging system is quite analogous to solving
this integral equation:

First the integration is performed by determining the incremental range throughout the

time required for acquisition and the subsequelll time of tracking. This is accomplished by

continual tallying of range units corresponding to doppler cycles which, in turn, are derived
from comparison of received carrier submultiple with transmitted carrier submultiple.

Secondly the constant of integration Ro is determined by determining the fixed range at the
start of ranging acquisition. This is accomplish'Old by tallying range units corresponding to the
time offset (or delay) between transmission and reception of a given point in the ranging code

at the start of range acquisition. ThiS, in turn, comprises the determination of the fractional
clock·cyc1e delay cl (already accomplished) and the determination of the integral number of

clock cycles n (next step): Ro � d • no 'r. The operations required to determine Ro are referred

to as range acquisition and are the only operations requiring the use of the pseudo· random

codes.

MODULATION PATTERN DESIDERATA

For the purpose of precisely determining the number of clock cycles 1l, a modulation pat­

tern is desired having the following four characteristics:

 RAflGING SUBSYSTEM· MARK I 103

L A detectable overall periodicity greater than the maximum anticipated round-trip time.
This is required to prevent ambiguous results, and means in effect that the measuring tape
should be longer than the distance to be measured.

2. A detectable, fixed, high-frequency periodicity within the overall modulation pattern.

This is required for the sake of high resolution or precision of measurement. The clock code
period of slightly over 2 microseconds, which we have previously discussed, will serve this
requirement.

3. The characteristic of two-level autocorrelation. This means that the overall pattern
is required to be such that if the pattern is compared with the same pattern displaced by in­
tegral numbers of bits, the two patterns will match exactly in one relative position, and they
wlll fail to match to the same degree in all other relative positions. The firm requirement
here is that there be only one relative position that yields maximum correlation. If it is pOSSi­
ble to have all other relative positions yield Wliiormiy low correlation, the correlation detec­
tion is, of course, greatly simplified because it becomes a binary (or true-false) problem,
rather than one of precise measurement.

4. The characteristic of being essentially balanced, I.e., of having as many 1 's as O's in it.
While this is not an absolute requirement, balanced use of power in the carrier sidebands
makes for higher efficiency and better system design.

RANGING CODES

The problem is solved by the use of a pseudo- random binary sequence continually generated
in the form of 1 's and O's in digital equipment.

Figure 4 shows two cycles of such a sequence having fifteen binary digits per cycle. Also
shown is the rectangular waveform of a ranging code derived from the sequence where 1 is
represented by a low level and 0 by a high level.

To see whether and how this code satisfies the requirement for two-level autocorrelation,
consider it matched against a second code, identical to that shown, but displaced by any num­
ber of digits other than 0, 15 or a multiple of 15. It will be found that the measure of correla­
tion, Le., of digit-by-digit matching, is uniformly low. It Is high when the two codes are in

phase, which occurs every 15 displacements in this example.

The resolution obtainable from a code

as such is inversely proportional to the digit , ,

period. The rr:�xii"i"tllm round-trip time which

can be determined without ambiguity cor­
responds to the total length of the code (here,
15-digit peril)ds).
A"IOCOi'Tejglion funclion

In Figure 5 a transmitter coder has Fig..,re 4-Pse..,do-raooom binory seq..,ence and

been provided to generate the repetitive ranging code waveform.
104 P. LINDLEY

pseudo- random ranging code to be used to

hi-phase modulate the transmitted S-band
carrier.

A receiver coder has been provided to

TRANSMI
CLOCKTTER REeE IVER r'L-,
CLOCK generate the same code as the transmitter
TPANSMITtu REC£fVU coder, with additional features whereby this
code can be matched to the received code in
TRANSFER
COO, the receiver. It must therefore be time­

TIV.NSMI
CODeTTER RECEIVER
movable by bits with respect to the received

CLOCK
DOPPLER CODE code or, in a way, with respect to the trans­
mitted code. A reference must, of course,
DETECTOR
,_....JL--, CO,"
be provided for this receiver code shifting.
Thus, when the transfer loop is still con­
SYNC
NSMITTER f-.'-
TRACODER -.I
J
.1 - --<t� '�C�<�
'CODER"�
'J
' -- nected to the transmitter and the range tally
reset to zero at the start of acquisition, the
receiver coder is code-synchronized to the
TOTAllY
RANGE transmitter coder. as shown schematically
by a switch.
F igure 5-Phose modulation of S-bond carrier.

THE OVERAll CODE AND CODE COMPONENTS

With respect to the overall code to be used, a bit period of 1/992,000 second or slightly
more than 1 microsecond has been chosen for Manned Space Flight Network (MSFN) use. This
corresponds roughly to 300 meters of round-trip distance or to 150 meters of one-way range.
It was intended that the Mark I reach to 800 million meters, requiring then a code of no less
than 800/150 or 5-1/3 million bits. Such a code can be generated directly, but its acquisition
would require 5-1/3 million correlation readings to determine the proper match.

It is possible on the other hand to generate such a long code by combining, bit by bit,
several repetitive shorter subcodes or code components cleverly chosen. These components
must meet the same requirements asthe total code. We have chosen five code components
whose designations and lengths in bits are:

CL code component of length 2 bits

X code component of length 11 bits
A code component of length 31 hits
B code component of length 63 hits
C code component of length 127 bits

Provided their lengths in bits have no common factors, the length in bits of the total code
is the product of the lengths in bits of the individual components, or 5,456,682 bits.

Further, it is possible to acquire the total cOde by acquiring the components individually
in turn. This reduces the number of correlation readings required from the previously sug­

gested 5�1/3 million to 232. It must be noted that the 2-bit CL component is not acquired by
 RAHGING SUBSYSTEM MARK I
•
105

digital means in the Mark I. but rather by the process of locking up the clock loop in the rang­
ing receiver.

Therefore, the transmitter code contains the five components CL, X, A. B. and C. com­
bined bit by bit in accordance with a certain Boolean logical relationship. The receiver code
as generated by the Mark I itself contains only the components X. A, B. and C.

CQUHA{lON
THE OOUBLE·LOOP RANGING RECEIVER INDIO-TOR

Figure 6 shows a schematic diagram

cooe x
of a part of the ranging receiver. Here CLOCK
the CL component is designated as clock, the
components X, A, a, and C in combination
are designated as code. and the combination
of all five components as code X clock. The CODE CODE ,
code generator shown Is the receiver coder OEN

of the Mark 1. Its code output, matched

Figure 6-Double-loop code trocking system .
against the received code X Clock 10 a bal-
anced detector, will provide a clock output whose average amplitude is a measure of the
degree of correlation between the received code and the receiver code.

The inner phase-locked lOOP. or clock loop, is initially locked up to the incoming clock
component which it subsequently tracks, whether or not there is any code present.

The outer. or code loop is held in gear by the locked state of the clock loop. It serves no
other purpose than to match the received code to the receiver code.

CODE CORRELATION:
DETERMINATION Of INTEGRAL CYCLES Of INITIAL RANGE

This matching is accomplished by digitally shifting the components of the receiver code
and measuring the correlation indication at each relative shift position Wltil a maximum is
obtained.

The total ultimate shift of lite receiver code from its initial phase is a measure of the ini­
tial range at the start of acquisition or, more correctly, a. measure of Ro - d (both Ro and d being
n
i units of time).

Each shirt of each component in the prn("ess of ::,c'i,uisilivn is noted by adding the appropri­
...te ',umber of range units into the range tally whenever such a shift is made. This in no way
interferes with the adding (or subtracting) of the previously mentioned clock doppler tallies, as
required by target motion, which can occur simultaneously.
106 P. LINDLEY

RESOLUTION OF MEASUREMENT IN THE MARK I

The resolution of measurement was indicated earlier as being :1 clock doppler cycle, [or

ease of presentation. Since this represents 2-bit periods of about 1 microsecond each, it cor­

responds roughly to =2 microseconds or ±600 meters of round-trip distance or =300 meters

of range. Actually clock doppler tallies are made every quarter cycle, for a resolution of

about :to.5 microsecond or =75 meters of range.

Once acquisition has been accomplished, the Mark I automatically switches from tallying

every 1/4 clock doppler cycle to taUying every 16th S-band doppler cycle. This improves the

resolution by a factor of 72 to =1 RU or approximately :t 1 meter.

MOOULATION CHANGE FROM CODE TO CLOCK

At the same time, or any time thereafter, it is possible to disable the full code modulation
and modulate the carrier instead, with the 2-bit clock component only. There is, as previously

indicated, no further need for the code, the clock component being alone responsible for keep­

ing the clock loop in lock. The advantage of changing from full code to clock code lies in the

fact that this not only cuts down on the required sideband power, but also limits the spectral

distribution of ranging frequencies to two single spectral lines - 496 kilocycles above and be­

low the carrier frequency.

THE MARK I RANGING SUBSYSTEM

Many of the statements and illustrations in this paper have been pur(XIsely Simplified to
present the basic principles of digital precision ranging as developed at JPL, and as employed

in the ranging subsystem Mark I (Figure 7a).

The Mark I is a special-purpose binary digital computer with special input and output in­

terface devices. As part of the receiver-exciter- ranging system, it makes on demand range

determinations without a priori knowledge of approximate range. Its construction is almost

completely modular. Monitor and display eqUipment, power supplies, and controls are located

in the upper half of the single cabinet. Some 300 pitch-wired, SOlid-state, digital logic modules

are mOlUlted in the lower half on movable frames as illustrated in Figure 7b. This subsystem

is not really complicated, but is definitely complex.

The principles of digital ranging are essentially straighUorward, consisting mainly of

counting integral cycles, a fractional cycle, and incremental cycles due to motion, on the two­
way radio link between ground and a spacecraft. It has been shown why and how pseudo-

random code components are combined and thus used in a ranging code for the purpose of a fix.
Once the code has been acquired, it is possible and desirable to shut it off and continue to track

doppler.
 RANGING SUBSYSTEM · WARK I 107

-
,
• -. - . .. .. . . .
rz
... 1
. . . ••
,. . • 0 , ", : . .,

,...; .•
��
.

.� ..
. , .
.
�
:
. . . -

: • • 6, • " I
.::
.

,.
�. . . : . . . . . .

'.. ",-- . . .:. . . . . ,

I • . . ........
• • • •
•

...
'II' • It •

(0)

Figure 7-(0) Ranging subsy$tem Mark I (closed),

(b) Ranging subsystem Mark I (open).

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MARK I

To summarize the performance parameters of the Mark I:

Its maximum unambiguous range of 800,000 kilometers is twice the distance to the moon.

Its resolution is ±1 range unit (RU), which is defined as

221 1 ight - seconds

30 x transmit t�In·quency

and is 01 the Order oi :l: 1 meter.

Overall system inaCCUraCies of no more than :15 meters arc attributable to drifts and in­

stabilities in ground and space lOOps.

Minimum range acquisition time is 1.6 seconds at strong signal levels and may possibly go

as high as 3 0 seconds at lunar distances in the MSFN configuration.

Range data output is in binary range Wlits and can be effected once per second.
108
 SHIPBOARD DOPPLER COUNTER, ANTENNA PROGRAMMER,
AND TRACKING DATA PROCESSOR

by
W. Hocking

Goddard Space Flight Center

ABSTRACT

This paper describes three subsystems within the Unified S-Band System:
the antenna position programmer (APP), the tracking data processor (TOP), and
the shipboard doppler counter (SDC). The discussion includes the relationship of
these subsystems to all interfacing subsystems of the overall S-band system,
and detailed description of their functions and mode of operation. Range and
range-rate data problems and characteristics are also treated.

INTRODUCTION

Two important tracking modes within the Unified S-Band System are autotrack (prime) and
program (acquisition and backup). The antenna position programmer subsystem provides the
backup or program mode. The programmer accepts real X and Y angular data from the angle
encoders mounted on the antenna. Command X and Y angle data (predictional data) are entered
into the programmer via punched paper tape. The spacecraft prediction data are processed by
computer into a five-level punched paper tape with X, Y, and time (command) information ex­
isting in Baudot code.

The tracking data processor subsystem collects and formats the Apollo tracking data on­
site, and prepares these data for communication to centralized Apollo computers. The track­
ing data parameters included in the format are antenna X and Y angular information, spacecraft
range and range -rate data, and Greenwich mean time (GMT). Apollo S-band transmitter fre­
quency information is also inserted into the data format as required. The tracking data proces­
sor provides the Apollo USB system with both a high-speed data rale (up to 2400 bits per second)
and low-speed (teletype) data rates.

The shipboard doppler counter subsystem accepts a 1 megacycle biased doppler signal
from the JPL range and range-rate subsystem, and operate s in two modes: I'\"!!.-deztr-....:t ana
destruct. In the non-destruct mode the doppier Signal is counted directly, and is read out upon
uperator deeision. A dual shipboard doppler counter accepts and processes simultaneously two
doppler signals: Lunar Excursion Module (LEM) and Command and Service M�.!le (CS:'.f).

The Antenna p.:.�iUG" Prvgl'ammer (APP) is fOWld in all 85 and 30-£oot dish sites along with
either a "single" or " dual" Tracking Data Processor (TDP)j "Single" or "dual" pertains to the

109
110 'II. HOCKING

capability of the USB tracking site to track one spacecraft only or two simultaneously. The
TDP system contains a doppler counter for measuring the doppler information prior to inser­
tion into the TDP data format. This doppler counter is packaged separately (SOC) with aug­
mentation to make the unit independent in operation and environmentally acceptable for ship­
board use. The SOC is included in the five USB Ships (2 single and 3 dual),

ANTENNA POSITION PROGRAMMER

The relationship of the APP with all interfacing USB sub systems is shOWn in Figure 1 .

There are two antenna tracking modes, autotrack and program. In autotrack mode (prime),
the spacecraft RF signals are received and processed by the tracking receiver. The tracking
receiver sends to the antenna servo system angular error signals (�x and (y) for both the X
and Y antenna axes. The servo system converts these signals into X and Y axes drive signals
which ultimately move the antenna. A backup mode exists, called program mode, in the event
that spacecraft autotracking fails. In this program mode, the APP generates the angular error
signals for both X and Y and supplies these signals to the servo system. The autotrac.k mode
may fail if, for instance, the tracking receiver fails or becomes intermittent, if the spacecraft
antenna or transmitting system becomes erratic or fails, and if the spacecraft attitude is such
as to cause the received RF signal to drop below the autotracking threshold.

The APP receives accurate X and Y axes positional information from angle encoders
mounted on the two axes of the antenna. These X and Y angular data are called true or real
data since they are the true or actual antenna pOinting information. True or real time information

/
#� REAL DATA

'1' _1
ANTfNNA nM<

TANHNNAT ot�f
GMT STANDARD
,

�
POS TlM[
/)
DRIVE t,
pas

.,
t,
ANTENNA COMMAND
TRACKING AUTOTRACK MODE COMPUTE�
POSITION ...
F
SEiVO PROGRAM MODE Y, TIME DATA
( ON-SITE)
X,
RECEIVER
•

SYSTEM PROGRAMMER
t, t,
xlUAL,ly
DATA
, ...
...
.00

00.

000
TRACKING l
VISUAL DIAPLAY DATA
'
000
PlOCESSOR ORBITAL
GM'
! !
• •
'. : : ELEMfNTS 000
. nM< 000

COMMAND
'< nw '< COMMUNICATIONS OMMUN ICATION
600, 1200, 2�00 �S TELETYPE

{d
TflETYPf.
TRACKING APOLLO PREDICT
DATA CENTRALIZED DATA
- - � COMPUTER
SYSTEM

Figure l-USB system antenna position programmer.

 SHIPBOAAO DQP?LEA COUKTEA, A/HENNA PAOGAAMMEA. ANO TAACI(ING OATA PAOCESSOA 111

is entered into the APP from the USB time standard. The APP now knows where the antenna
is pointing as a function of time. The APP is ready to accept X, Y, and time command data,
which are spacecraft prectictional information. These command data represent the best estimate
of where the spaceeraft should be as a function of time.

The APP then compares where the antenna is pointing at a given time (X and Y real data)
to where the spaceeraft should be at that time (X and Y command) and takes differences. If the
angular differences are zero meaning the antenna is pointing to the best estimate of spacecraft
position, then the APP feeds Cx and (y = 0 signals to the servo system. If, however, the antenna
is not pointing to the estimated spacecraft position, non-zero c� and cy signals are given to the
servo system which attempts to null out 'x and E y • Thus, in program mode, spacecraft track­
ing is achieved by comparing existing X and Y angles with predicted angles. The accuracy of
spacecraft tracking is therefore a function of how well the real antenna angles are measured,
as well as a function of the accuracy of the predictional data. Under similar antenna tracking
conditions experienced within the GSFC space tracking and data acquisition network, program
mode tracking has been a 0.1 degree or better for both 85- and 40-foot antennas.

The predicted or command X, Y, and time data are generated in the following manner:
The APP sends to the tracking data processor real X and Y angular data. The tracking data
processor accepts these data as well as range, range rate, and time information; formats and
transmits these tracking data through communication circuits to the Apollo centralized com­
puter system (ACeS). The ACCS digests this tracking message as well as the tracking data
messages from other Apollo facilities and generates an orbit. From this orbit, predictional
data are generated and transmitted back to the tracking facility to an on-site computer system.
The predictional data are transmitted to the tracking site in an abbreviated form to conserve
communication transmissioTJ. time. The on-site computer accepts the transmitted prediCtional
data and converts these data to antenna drive tapes containing command X, Y, and time data
words once each second. The antenna drive tapes (the familiar 5-level teletype paper tape) are
produced in advance of the actual tracking operations.

The antenna system is placed in the program mode for spacec raft acquisition purposes.
The antenna slews to that portion of the horizon and awaits the spacecraft horizon ascent to
occur at the predicted time on the drive tape.

Figure 2 is a Simplified block diagram of the APP. Real X and Y angular information from
antenna mOUnted encoders is supplied to the APP in straight binary form (these binary signals
are also sent to the traCking data processor). Translation from binary to binary coded decimal
(8-4-2-1 BCD) takes place before the X R and Y R angles are inserted into the "difference" arith­
metic unit . The APP operator has the option of selecting p.;thl?r the :!ch.:a1 a.-.gles fr(lill lhe
antenna or from an antenna simulator. The use of this " select" function is to input to the APP
X R and Y R angles for test and/or maintenance purposes (simulator mode) without actually re­
quiring the use of the anteiUla.
The cOmmand angles (Xl; and Yl;) may be il"'serted into the APP in one of three ways: from
drive tape, on-site computer, or manually inserted by means of digit switches. After command
data input selection has taken place, the Xc and Y c angles may be updated by adding or sub­
tracting bias X and Y angles. The APP provides a visual means of determining the quality of
112 ".HOCKING

f�
VISUAL DISPLAY

X REAL GMT TlME Y REAL

COMMAND
X COMMAND

I
REAL X BINARY Y COMMAND
ANHNNA W "'"
REAL Y
MOUNT &cO

ENCODER/TEST
SELECT XI, YI a ( X l - Xcl

FROM TAPE X & Y ANGLES

T DI GITAL

•
DIFFUENCE W
SIMULATOR ANALOG

COMMAND X ,,<, '"

� r--
TAPE!
SUEeT o IY. -Yc!

T 'x
o QMPUTER
'v
COMMAND Y

A!JTOMATIC/ 400
SELECT '" '----v-'
fROM MANUAL W

! !.t
SUBTRACT
COMPUTER ANTENNA
MANUAL )(RYO
x Y TIME SYSTEM

Figure 2-Anlenno position programmer.

the command information while the system is in autotrack mode. Any bias error that may
exist in the predictional data may be minimized by using this add/subtract bias function. The
updated command angles are then passed to the arithmetic difference unit where (X It - Xc) and
(YIt - Yc) signals are generated. These difference signals are in digital form and are therefore
passed through a digital to analog converted unit which outputs the angular error signals (tx and
<y ) to the antenna servo system.

The APP also provides visual displays as shown in Figure 2.

Figures 3 and 4 show the local and remote control panels respectively. The antenna sim­
ulated angles, as can be seen from Figure 3, are inserted into the APP by means of digit switches.

- ' ----'------ -------,

ANTENNA POSITION PROGRAMME,
. ________

PROGRAM CONTROL TAPE CONTROl

ENCODER SIMULATOR ADD TIME

X. ANGLE HOURS MINUTES SECONDS

".""O@NWOU
REAL ANGLE SOURCE

@
CONTROL MODE

WCA '.O" OOM,""@M

COMMAND DATA SOURCE

AN'XC

-- --,- - -------- ,------- ----

Figure 3-Antenno position progrommer c;ontrol panel (local).

 SliIPBOARD DOPPLER COUNTER, ANTENNA PROGRAA'J.lER. AND TRACKING DATA PROCESSOR 11'

ANTENNA POSITION PROGRAMMER -

J:
- n. OUstl ••
.�.

T!R@M
tin ,.. ,- ._, ""

COMMAND OATA SOURCE COMMANO IOFfSET ANGLES

COMPV ANVAl X ANGLE Y ANGLE

[�I�I�I�I�I�!l [�I�I�I��I�!1 @ REMOTE

I
POSITION
TEST

Figure 4-Anlenna po�j tian progrQmmer control pane I (remote).

Changing the command time may be accomplished with the bank of digit switches on the ex­

treme right. Note that the time bias may also be subtracted from command time by adding the

complement of the time to be subtracted (to subtract 1 hour and 1 0 minutes add 22 hours and

50 minutes). The dark edged boxes indicate visual displays only, while the undarkened boxes

represent both visual display and switch function.

The APP has the capability (while in autotrack mode) of storing any error that may exist

between the real X and Y antenna angles and the command X and Y angles. The operator need

only actuate the STORE ERROR button during the autotrack mode. U the USB system is forced
into the program mode, then this stored error may or may not be added to the command X and

Y angles at the discretion of the operator (ADD ERROR). The purpose of the ADD ERROR,
STORE ERROR and biasing X and Y digit switches is to provide the means to most effectively

update command or predictionai data during a mission,

As seen in Figure 4, the operator at the remote location (servo control console) may select
the input command source (computer, tape, or manual), provided the local (APP) operator has

relinquished control. U the manual input is selected (usually for test and maintenance purposes),
the operator can dial in the command data by means of the two banks of digit switches shown.

The "remote position test" button allows the remote operator to know the status of his control
panel when the APP control is in "local". This information is necessary before transfer of

control can safely be made.

TRACKING DATA PROCESSOR

The tracking data processor (TDP) is interfaced with nth�r .s'.,!!:l�:>y3ter.... :s within the uni­

ned S-uanri system (Figure 5). The two receiver systems (representing a dual USB station)
each oulput a thirty binary bit range word and a range rate signal. Certain data IdenlUica­

lion information is also fed to the TOP, e.g., one-way or two-w:>.y dcppkr, 6w.::/tau data

d:::tcrminaLiun. ·hme of year information from the Apollo time standard system is supplied

in straight binary form for the high speed section of the TDP and in BCD form for the low
speed section of the TDP. Several timing control signals are also used by the TOP.
114 It HOCKING

TIME STANOAW

"M<
STRAIGHT m .CO CONTROL
BINARY YEA� SIGNALS

.....to! UM lANGE (3Cl)

. oM RANGE RATE
TlACKING X-ANGLE
R£CEIVU f I
ANTENNA

I DATA IDENTIFICATION
DATA
Y -ANGLE
POSITION
PROGRAMMER
.
• LEM �ANGE pO)
.... CM
PROCESSOR
RANGE RATE
RECEIVER ' 2

�
RECORD
MAGNETIC PAPER
PLAYIlACK H IGH TRACKING COW TAPE
TAPE
DATA Sl'HD PU NCH TRACKING
UCOltDrR SPHD

��
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS HISTOR'!'
600. 1200, 2�OO 81'S TAPE
TELETYPE
W
APOLLO CENTRAL1ZfD
• DUAL STATION ONLY COMPUTER SYSTEM

Figure 5-U$8 �y�lem traeking data proce�50r.

As meutioned previously, the straight binal-y real X and Y antenna angles are received by

the TDP from the antenna position programmer. The function of the TDP therefore is to accept

range, range rate, X and Y angles, and time information; format these data into a 240-bit frame
and prepare these tracking data for communications to the Apollo centralized computer system.

The TDP records on a magnetic tape recorder the output serial bit stream in the event that
communications circuits are down during a missiOn. This emergency makes it necessary to

playback the data in "post" time through the TDP to the ACCS.

The same precaution is applied to the low speed data. As the low speed data is transmitted

to the ACCS, it is recorded on teletype 5-levc1 punched paper tape. This "history data" tape

(not to be confused with the antenna drive tape) may be fed into a tape reader and recorded on a

page printer in readable form. The TDP must be capable of interfacing the tracking data to a

family of communication circuits, namely, 600, 1200, and 2400 bits per second and 6 and 10

characters per second teletype.

Figure 6 is a simplified block diagram of the TOP. The data input unit accepts the input
data and distributes them to the high and low speed data sections. The range rate signal from
the Jet Propulsion LabOratory (JPL) range and range rate system is a one-volt rms sinUSOid

of frequency 1 ± 0 . 1 8 megacycle. This signal is passed through a doppler counter for measure­
ment prior to entering: the high or low speed sections of the TOP. The doppler counter will be
described later with a discussion of the shipboard doppler counter. A measurement of the
22 megacycle voltage control oscillator (VeO) transmitter frequency is inserted into the TDP
frequency counter which counts this veo Signal directly. This measurement is made auto­
matically and inserted into the data formats (both high and low speed) when a new range meas­

urement is made. The frequency measurement may also be performed at operator disc retion

by controlling: the "manual frequency measurement" button. The frequency data are inserted inte

the range word (bits 93 through 122 of the high speed format) after measurement takes place.
 StiIPBOARD OOPPLER COUNTER, ANTENNA PROGRAA!ljER, ANO TRACKING OATA PROCESSOR 115

VISUAL DISPLAY TlMl (&CD) H "'

RANGE (FR£QUfNCY) X
>0
ON SITE
COMPUTER
RANGE RATE COW
RANGE OR SPEED MUDOT
FREQUENCY DATA
REGISHR
•
.-==-1
RANGE RATE TELETYPE
"' ' PUNCH

��
I '':�
!\� , �
T

'::� TAPE
COW READER
SPARES (EXTERNAL) SPHD
DATA
PATCH PAGE
PANEL PRINTER TO APOLLO

COMPUTER
TIME (BCD) CfNTRALIZED

, I "Nm H"' SYSTEM

DATA
INPUT
UNIT HIGH

"'Ne, ,
HIGH
SPEED
DATA SPEW
DATA

�
PATCH
PANEl
REGISTER

Ll
TT
FUQUENCY
OUTPUT
GATING

FREQUENCY
COUNTER

INTERFACE
RANGE RATE I CIRCUITS
DOf'PLER
""
".
COUNTER

"DUAL TOP ONLY T REcORD/PlAYBACK

Figure 6-Trocking dolo processor.

It should be noted here that the TOP high and low speed data formats are transmitted in
complete blocks; no partial blocks are gated out as a result of switching, as an example from

"receiver number one" to " dual", or from 10 characters per second to one character per second

frame rate.

The low speed data are passed through a Baudot converter (converts to familiar teletype

code), where the data are permanently stored on punch paper tape. The low speed data are also
sent to the on-site computer system where some data smoothing or processing is being con­

sidered. The teletype data are transmitted to the AceS in real time if the facility has avail­
able 1 O-�hancter per si:c'::ll)d Lt;:'letype communications.

The high speed data are passed through the output gating ci rcuit and to the interface circuits.

A polynomial code g;:"sr"tol.' al:l:l<!pis the high speed bit stream and generates a powerful
33-bit error detection word which is inserted at the end of each 240-bit frame. The 33-bit

error detection word travels with the block of data through all communication circuits and

input and output buffers until the data are received at the ACCS, At this time the ACCS gen­

erates a second 33 -bit error detection word by knowing the original polynomial, assuming no
116 W. IfOCKI�G

errors due to communication circuits have occurred in the data bit stream itself. The trans­
mitted 33-bit word and the ACeS generated 33-bit word must be identical; otherwise an error
has been detected, thus enabling the ACeS to reject that particular frame of data. The 33-bit
code working with the seven " start of frame" hits provide a powerful format or data synchroni­
zation to be applied to the tracking data.

The TDP system has the capability of inserting a slightly less powerful 22-bit error
detection code word. The advantage of the smaller code is that 1 1 more data bits may be
inserted into the data format, should this prove necessary in the future; under good communi­
cation transmission conditions, the power of the 22-bit code may be all that is required for
protection of the USB tracking data. The normal mode of operation is to transmit to the ACCS
the data in real time. The magnetic tape recorder provides a backup to the communication
circuit so that the data are stored and may be fed back through the TOP to the AceS in "post"
time.

The high speed lormat is shown in Figure 7. The Apollo shipboard tracking data format is
identical to that in Figure 7. It is hoped that, where pOSSible, any future systems handling Apollo
tracking data will use this format. The first seven bits, slart of frame (SOF), and the suc ­
ceeding five station identification bits (SID) are inserted by toggle switches. data format All
bits from bit number 13 to bit 205 (when utilizing the 33-bit error detection word) are controlled

, • , 4 S , , • , '0 II II 13 II 'S 16 17 II II .0 " " " "

SO. SO. �. �. DI' ."

.S 16 " " " 30 31 31 33 " " " 37 " 39 .. " " " .. IS .. " ..

DI' lD' TO'

II S. S, S. II 54 SS SI S, S. S, 10 11 " " .. IS .. 67 .. .. 70 71 71
•GN 17
TO' TO'
X X X'
73 " 'S " 17 " 79 .0 " " " II .S .. " II II '0 tI 91 93 II 'S ..
SIGN
17
, , "0
" ... " '"

" .. 99 '00 '0' '0' '03 ,.. 'OS ,.. '0' '0' '0' 110 III III ' " 114 liS "' 117 II. "' 110
'" "

"' 12. '" '" '" 12' 117 '" "' "0 '" " . '" ,,. '" '" 137 13. 13, 110 "' '" '" ,..

'. " S. S, S. S. S. s.
m
ioa i,S I"
"
liS ,.. '" ,.. '" 'SO 'S, 'S. '" 'S4 'SS 'S, 'S, 'S. 'll ,.. 16' '" ' " ,.. I6S ,.. 16' ,..

i21 i, S. s. S.

"' "0 171 172 17' '" I7S 17, '" 17. 17' 110 "' '" '" '" 'Il 116 "' "' "' "' '" '"

lP S.

"' '" ' " "' "' II. "' 200 20' .0. 10' ... lOS 206 '0' .0. '0' "0 .11 112 "' .11 liS 216

S. S. ((33 !C"

'17 .11 .11 110 .11 III 113 114 '" 116 117 ". I2t 2'0 .31 232 233 234 "S '" '" ". 139 "0

((22 !C , (SS m

Figure 7-Tracking dolo processor high speed format.

 SHIPBOARD OQPPLER COUNTER. ANTENNA PROGRAIfAER, ANO TRACKING DATA PROCESSOR 117

by a patch panel which enables a binary "1" or "0" or external input to be inserted into the
format. Therefore all tracking data may be shifted in any sequence desired or deleted and
replaced by ones and zeros; the 33- or 22-bit error detection code words are always at the
end of the format, followed by two "fixed wired", communication synchronous signal (CSS) bits.

Data identification (DID) bits describe the sample data rates, frequency or range informa­
tion, and in general any pertinent information the ACCS needs to consider in processing the
tracking data, Time is 29 bits of straight binary which is required to give time of year (TOY)
information to O.l-second resolution. X and Y angles are next, followed by the range data
quality (RDQ) bit, which is a binary "1" when the range word is good, and binary "0" when bad.
Range acquisition (RA) is a binary "1" for one range reading only, when range acquisition has
occurred and "0" all other times. RA is succeeded by thirty bits of range data which have a
resolution of 1 . 5 meters; thirty bits therefore represent an unambiguous range measurement
of 10& miles. The 22- megacycle VCO frequency measurement bits are inserted in the range
word when frequency measurement takes place. Spare (SP) bits 123 to 128 are unique spares
in that any data placed into these bit locations are also placf!d into the low speed data format
(characters 58 and 59). Bit location number 129 (JPL 10) is a binary "0" when the station
operator considers that for any reason the range and/or range rate data are not good.

iU:>e;;! (R
This information is inserted manually and may be used effectively to override the RDQ
bits. represents range rate) serves the same function as the RDQ bit. Thirty-five bits
of range rate enables the TDP to count maximum doppler frequency without ambiguity for a
period of approximately seven hours. Bits 166 to 205 are at present designated as spare bits.
The 33 error control or error detection bits (EC) and the communication synchronization signal
bits (CSS) terminate each 240-bit frame of data.

Figures 8a and 8b show when the TDP multiplexes range and range-rate data in the high­
speed format for both single and dual TDP systems.

The low-speed data format is shown in Figure 9. This format consists of 60 teletype
characters and is transmitted to the ACCS in real time over a 10-character per second tele­
type circuit. The characters I, 2, and 60 (line feed, figures, and carriage return) offer the low
speed data "hard copy" readability when the traCking data (history tape) are played through a
page printer. Station ID and spare characters are inserted into the format by means of toggle
switches. The time of year, unlike time in the high-speed format, is binary coded decimal
(BCD). All other data in the format are the same as the data contained in the high speed format
with the exception of the spare, EC, and CSS bits. As a n example, consider the X angle infor­
mation in the high-speed format (17 bits plus one sign bit, straight binary). The first three
least significant hits of the l8-bit X ",-,gl.;;- S€-qul:c'lIce are grouped together to form the octad, 8 0
(character 26). The next three bits are grouped t o form 8 ! . All 1 8 X angle bits are grouped
into 6 octads with the most significant bit of the 8 5 octad (character 21) being the X-angle sign
hit. ApprOximately fOl!r ho:n.!!'s of !ow �p��d dat,;;, ';it.!I lot:! recorded on one roll of paper tape when

the recording rate is maximum (one frame each six seconds).

Figures lOa and lab show when the TDP multiplexes range and range rate data in the low
speed format for both Single and dual TDP systems.
118 'Ii. HOC)(ltlG

o S£C" 1 2 ., .. ., .6 ,
. , , L' " ,., ,. , '.2
HS !O PER .'
SECOND
o 5£C. . l 2 , .. . , 6 ., , ., L' ... . , . . , . 2

tiD 10 PER .', R! ��

seCOND

o sec .. 2 . . •• , L' " " . , '.2 •••

HS 5 HR R' .. '
seCOND
O HC. . 2 .. • ., L' " ,. , . ., '.2 , ..

HD 5 PO R: R, ��
SECOND
1.,

SEC �
• . ., " L6 2.' 2 ' 2.' '6 . , • • 6.'
HS , PER �I
SECOND
.. ., " L6 2 ' " 2.' , .. .., .. . ,

HD PER .1
2.5
SECOND

o SEC. I , • , • , , , " " " " "

HS I PER R' . .'

SECOND
o sec. I , , 6 , , , " " " " "

HD 1 PER R:
SECOND
101
Figure a-Range and range rate recordir'19 - high speed.

21 X-AN GlE-S'
22 X-ANGlE-S'
1 LINE f E E D 23 X-ANGlE-B'
2 fiGURES 24 X.ANGlE.B 2
3 STATION 1 0 25 X.ANGlE-S I 46 RANGE RATE.S"
4 STATION 10 26 X.ANGlE.SO 47 RANGE RATE-S'O
5 DATA 10 27 SPARE 4S RANGE RAT E . S '
6 DATA 10 2S Y.ANGlE-S' 49 RANGE RATE- S ·
7 DATA 1 0 29 Y ·ANGlE·S' 50 RANGE RATE.S 7
S DATA 10 30 Y.ANGlE-S ' 51 R A N G E RATE.S"
9 DATA 1 0 31 Y·ANGlE-S2 52 R A N G E RATE - S '
10 SPARE 32 Y.ANGlE.S I 53 RANGE R A T E - S '
n TlME·OAYS-H 33 Y - A NGlE·SO 54 R A N G E RATE·B'
12 TlME·OAY5-T 34 SPARE 55 RANGE RATE-S 2
13 TlME-OAY5·U 35 R·RR 1 0 56 RANGE RATE-B '
14 TIME-HOURS·T 36 RANGE-S' 57 RANGE RATE-SO
15 TIME.HOURS.U 37 RANGE-S • 5S BASIC SPARE
16 TlME·MIN·T 3S RANGE.S 7 59 BASIC SPARE
17 TIME-MIN-U 39 RANGE-S" 60 CARRIAGE RETURN
IS TIME·SEC-T 40 RANGE.S'
19 TIME· SEC ·U 41 R A N GE·S'
20 SPARE 42 RANGE. S '
43 RANGE.S 2
44 RANGE.S'
45 RANGE-S °

Figure 9-Trac king dato processor low $peed data format.

 SHIPBOARD DOPPLER COUNTER, ANTENNA PROGRA,I,lIlER, AND TRACKING OATA PROCESSOR 119

o SEC 6 " " " I MIN I MIN 6 SEC

lS I PER 6 , � 1� R 1R ii , •1 , ;I • ;IR R1 R •I , R1R k 1R d
SECONOS
o SEC. 6 " " " " " " " " I MIN. I MIN . 6 SEC.
LO I PER 6 " R,1RI RdR, it , I R � RdRl ; , ! Rz RdR, R 01 Rz R.� IR I Rd RZ R 21R I R,]R 1 "
S<cONOS
o SEC. 10 " 30 " " I MIN. 1 MIN.IO S. I MIN. 20 S.
LS 1 PER IO ° •I' R1 R d, d, R IR R1R �IR •I
seCONOS
o SEC. 10 " 30 '" " I MIN. I MIN. 10 S. I MIN. 20 S.
to I PER 10 " R I 1R 1 Rd R, Rl I Rz RI I R, R I R2
I RI I R) R, I Rz Rz I
SECONOS
o SEC. 30 I MIN. I MIN.30 S , M o SEC. I MIN. 2 MIN. 3 MIN.
lS 1 PER 30 •
;I· • I, ;I , •I lS I PeR I , •I' • I, d
SECONOS MINUl(
o Sec. 30 I MIN. I MIN.30 S. 2 M o SEC. I MIN. 2 MIN. J MIN.
LO I PER J0 0, R, 1 R2 RI1 R I R, 1Rz R2 I lO I PER 1 0, a , 1 Rl R21R, R 'l
SECOND, MIN un
1a I
o SEC. 10 MIN. 20 MIN. 30 MIN.
LS 1 PER 10 ,
O'_ -, � c-_ � � _ -c,-_ _
MINUTES r
_

o SEC. 10 MIN. 20 MIN. 30 MIN.

LO ·c
1 PER 10 ,_' _"-'L.:_-'L'----''-'
MINUTES r
___

Ibi

Figure lo-Range and range role recording - low speed.

SHIPBOARD DOPPLER COUNTER

Figure 11 is a Simplified block diagram of the shipboard doppler counter (SDC). The dop­
pler counter existing within the TDP is identical in function to the SDC; for shipboard use, the

doppler counter was repackaged and designed for shipboard envirOnment and to be independent

from a control and maintenance consideration. The SOC has two modes, destruct and
non-destruct.

In the destruct mode the tOO-megacycle counter performs a high resolution time measure­

ment of a predetermined number (N) of doppler cycles. After the measurement is made (N, for
10 times a second measurement rate and N 2 for I time per second rate), the contents of the

100-megacycle counter is transferred to the shipboard centralized computer system.

In the non-cip,<;truct mode, the Nw IN very iarge) switch position is selected which enables
the N-counter to count continuously without reset. Extreme care is exercised in transferring

the N-counter contents to storage each 0.1 second or Once per second. During the non-destruct
mode the measurempnt of doppler �s such t:,at a f./uise IS never gained or lost throughout the
entire spacecraft traCking time. The input doppler signal is S-band doppler (the SDC is designed

for plus o r minus ISO-kilocycles biased about a standard tMc frequency). The input signal is a

one-volt rms sinusoid.

120 W. HOCKINC

fROM TIME

�
STA,NDARD
,- I PPS

�d" !
2.SI'S 0 N
,
N N .. (NON - DeSTRUCT)
5PS
, 0
"
'
"

Q ON

----.j j
ON
lMo: t 180 I(�
OOPf'lER
GAH SHAPER • N · COUNTER I OFF IOOMc
COUNTER

-
t ,L
-

1 �, �
OH , "

RE
TUNSHR TIME
GAT[

'if - i"
TIME OESTRUCT
'" MODE
-
�

I HORAGE
NON-DESTRUCT
MODE
• THIS IMXIMUM RATE IS A FUNCTION OF AVAILABlE W
COMMUNICATION FACILITIES REGISTER

•• 2.5PS FOR 600 BIT/SECOND COMMUNICATION; 51'S FOR 1200

& lOPS FOR 2400 BIT/SECOND RATES

Figure I I -Shipboard doppler counter.

The destruct measurement is made in the following manner. The on pulse to the gate

comes from the time standard system. The 10 characters per second is selected when the com­

munication circuit available is 2400 bits per second (10 per second times 240 bit frames). When

the gate opens, the first positive zero crossing of the first gated doppler sinusoid is shaped and
advanc es the N-caunter to state one. This transition turns the IOO- megacycle counter on.
which starts immediately (within 10 nanoseconds) counting 100-megacycle pulses (synthesized

1 megacycle input from the Time standard System). The gating of the approximate I - megacycle

doppler signal continues until the count of "N" (N 1 or N z) has been reached in the N -counter.
At the positive going zero crossing of the Nth pulse. an off pulse is generated which turns off the

gate and the 100-megacycle counter. The result is a 100-megacycle counting operation for

precisely the period of time between positive going zero crossings of the first and Nth doppler

sinusoid. All gating and coonting operations are performed with Apollo time standard coherent

pulses. The advantage of N-counter techniques is briefly that high resolution measurements

(10 nanoseconds) are available with short measurement periods (100 milliseconds).

In the non-destruct mode the same operation takes place. except that "N" is very large and

the off pulse never occurs to turn off the gate. The counting operation continues without dis­

turbance or reset throughout the spacecraft tracking period. The advantage of the non-destruct

technique is that a continuous. undisturbed doppler measurement Is made with no data "gaps"

such as exist in the destruct mode.

 $IIIP80ARO OOPPLER COUNTER. ANTENNA PROCRAIIIER, ANO TRACKING OATA PROCESSOR 121

APOLLO USB HIGH SPEEO OATA FORMAT

Bit Function Description

1 - 7 Start of Frame Selectable by switch

8-12 Station or Site Selectable by switch
Identification
13 Data Identification Range Rate Destruct Mode is blnary "one"·
Range Rate Non-Destruct Mode is binary "zero"·
14 Data Identification Range Rate Nt Mode "1"
Range Rate N2 Mode "0"

15 Data Identification High Speed Format 10, 5 or 2.5 per second "1"
(The rate 10, 5 or 2.5 depends on communication
circuits available at site. This is identified by
the SID bits 8 - 12)
High Speed Format 1 per second "0"
16 Data IdentUication Real data "1"
Test data "0"
17 Data Identification Object number - not defined
18 Data Identification Object number - not defined
19 Data Identification Object number: LEM "1"
CSM "0"
20 Data Identification Auto Track Mode "1"
Other "0"
21 Data IdenlUication Time, X and Y angle data (manual) Good "1"
Bad "0"
22-23 Data Identification Doppler Mode
Bit 22 23
o 0 one way doppler
o I two way doppler
I 0 multiple (non-coherent)
1 1 multiple (coherent)
24 Data Identification Frequency Standard Identification
Rubidulm "1"
Crystal "0"
25 Data Identification Range data (bits 93 - 122) "1"

Frequency data (bils 93 - 122) "0"

122 W. HOCKING

Bit Function Description

26-54 Time of Year

55-72 X-Angle
73-90 V-Angle
91 Range Data Quality
92 Range Acquisition
93-122 Range
123-128 Spare Information inserted into these bit locations also
go into the Low Speed Format (characters 58 and
59)
129 Manual Good/Bad Data Range and Range data (manual)
Information Good "1"
Bad "0"
130 Range Rate Data Quality
131-165 Range Rate
1 66-205· Spare Information inserted into these bit locations is not
inserted into the Low Speed Format.

:::: ::
206-238 Error Control Bits These bits provide error detection to the data.
239 -2 4 0
, CommunicatiOn Sync Signal
�
Cc
__

_ -:-
' '''' h<'n 22 bi, err", <000'<01 ;5 u,ili��d bi.s L66-2[6 a,e �palC.

APOllO USB lOW SPEED DATA FORMAT

TTY
Character Function Description

I Baudot Line Feed (LF) Fixed for hard copy. computer, and
communication purposes.
2 Baudot Figures (FIGS) Fixed for hard copy, computer, and
communication purposes.
3 Decimal Station ID-Tens Variable
4 Decimal Station ID- Units
5 Octal Data Identification Data ID bits 13, 1 4 and 25
6 Octal Data Identification Slow Speed System data rate
0 • IPSS
I • IPI0S
2 • IP30S
3 IPM
4 •
IPIOM
5 • Manual
6 • Spare
7 Spare
7 Octal Data Identification Data ID hits 16, 20 and 21
 StilPBOARO DOPPLER COUNTER. ANTENUA PROGRAw.tER. ANO TRACKING DATA PROCESSOR 123

TTY
Character F\anction Description

8 Octal Data Identification Data ID bits 22, 23 and 24

• Octal Data Identific ation Data ID bits 17, 18 and 19
I. Baudot· Spare Variable (patch panel)·
11 Decimal Time-Oays-Hundreds Time of day and year
12 Decimal Time-Days-Tens
13 Decimal Time-Days-Units
14 Decimal Time-Hours-Tens
15 Decimal Time-Hours-Units
16 Decimal Time-Minutes-Tens
17 Decimal Time-Minutes-Units
18 Decimal Ttme-Seconds-Tens
I. Decimal Time-Seconds-Units
2. Baudot· Spare Variable (patch panel)·
21 Octal X Angle - 8s High Speed Data Bits 55, 56 and 57**
22 Octal X Angle - 8" High Speed Data Bits 58, 59 and 60
23 Octal X Angle _ 81 High Speed Data Bits 61, 62 and 63
2. Octal X Angle - 81 High Speed Data Bits 64, 65 and 66
25 Octal X Angle - 8 1 High Speed Data Bits 67, 68 and 69
26 Octal X Angle - 8° High Speed Data Bits 70, 71 and 72
27 Baudot.. Spare Variable (patch panel)"
28 Octal Y Angle - 8s High Speed Data Bits 73, 74 and 75
2. Octal Y Angle - 8� High Speed Data Bits 76, 77 and 78
3. Octal Y Angle - 8J High Speed Data Bits 79, 80 and 81
31 Octal Y Angle _ 81 High Speed Data Bits 82, 83 and 84
32 Octal Y Angle - 81 High Speed Data Bits 85, 86 and 81
33 Octal Y Angle _ 8° High Speed Data Bits 88, 89 and 90
34 Baudot .. Spare Variable (patch panel)"
35 Octal R-R ID High Speed Data Bits 9 1 , 92 and 130
36 Octal Range - 89 High Speed Data Bits 93, 94 and 95
37 Octal Range _ 86 High Speed Data Bits 96, 97 and 98
38 Octal Range _ 87 High Speed Data Bits 99, 100 and 101
3. Octal Range - 86 High Speed Data Bits 102, 103 and 104
4. Octal Range _ 8s High Speed Data Bits 105, 106 and 107
41 Octal Range - 8' High Speed Data Bits 108, 109 and 110
42 Octal Range - 8J Hilidt Speed OM" Bits 111, 112 ,,;id 1 1 3
" Octal Range - 81 High Speed Data Bits 114, 115 and 116
44 Octal Range - 8' High Speed Data Bits 117, U8 and U9
'5 Octal Range - go Hi� Speed Data RitA 1 20, 121 �::! 122
-io Octal Range Rate - 811 High Speed Data Bits 129, 131 and 132

.". TTY -space· ....iIl be p".cbed in.o .be IOf..... un.il cha....cter is '.ud�d lot da...
"All X. Y. It aDd R ch•••c.c,s . •he fi.,. bit 1,5fed ('.�., 55 ;" eh.,ae,e, 21) is 'he _. si,nifican' hi' of ,h•• «...d. Tht leas.
si,nifican. hi. of .he «lao;! is dlt I ... hi, \'S'ed (57 in eha.aclC' 21).
124 w. KOCKING

TTY
Character Function Description

47 Octal Range Rate _ 8 10 High Speed Data Bits 133, 134 and 135
48 Octal Range Rate _ 89 High Speed Data Bits 136, 137 and 138
4. Octal Range Rate - 88 High Speed Data Bits IS9, 140 and 141
50 Octal Range Rate _ 8' High Speed Data Bits 142, 143 and 144
51 Octal Range Rate - 86 High Speed Data Bits 145, 146 and 147
52 Octal Range Rale - as High Speed Data Bits 148, 149 and 150
53 Octal Range Rate - 8� High Speed Data Bits 151, 152 and 153
54 Octal Range Rate - 83 High Speed Data Bits 154, 155 and 156
55 Octal Range Rate _ 8' High Speed Data Bits 157, 158 and 159
56 Octal Range Rate _ 81 High Speed Data Bits 160, 161 and 162
57 Octal Range Rate - 80 High Speed Data Bits 163, 1 64 and 165
58 Octal Basic Spare High Speed Data Bits 123, 124 and 125
5. Octal Basic Spare High Speed Data Bits 126, 127 and 128
60 Baudot Carriage Return (CR) Fixed fOr hard copy, computer, and com-
munication purposes

NOTE: All e><:tal and de�ilDal d,.,acrt's .,� B.udor encoded f", transmission o�e' rtlc,ypt c""'....nic..lion$ eircuits.
 APOllO PRECISION FREQUENCY SOURCE
AND TIME STANDARD
by

R. L. Granata

Goddard Space Flight Center

ABSTRACT

A brief description I s given of the Apollo precision freq,lcncy source and

time standard.

The precision frequency source wlll be the source of accurate Il'f 'jL:f·',.cy
reference for the Apollo time standard, 5-band ranging system, tracking data
equipment, and other site functions. This unit contains four frequency refer­
ences, two rubidium resonators and two crystal resonators. These four sources
are processed through combiner circuitry and distributed throughout the s..band
system. A brief description of the operation of this equipment Is discussed.

The Apollo time standard will be utiUzed to generate station tIme and to
correlate station and spacecraft events. The Apollo time standard consists of
redundant clocks and time·code generators to enhance reliability. VarlOl.ls tlme
codea and standard frequencies are generated by this equipment for use by the
S-band system. Peripheral lnstrumentation is also included with this system to
aid in synchronizing the network to a common SOl.lrcc. TLme synchronization is
establisbed with the National Bureau of Stan<hrds Station, WWV, and frequepcy
correlation Is maintained to one part n
i 10.0 with VLF' techniques.

INTRODUCTION

The basic or primary function of the Apollo precision frequency source and the time
standard is to provide a reUable and accurate tag or reference scaler for tracking and telem­

etry data. These systems are utilized within the S-band system to supply precision frequencies

and pulse repetition rates to various subsystems, such as the tracking data processor and
modem, the antenna poSition programmer, the ranging subsystem, and the digital command
subsystem .

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Precision Frequency Source

The precision frequency source contains two rubidium frequency standards and two crystal

frequency standards. The operator has the option to select any nl"!O;- ')! t�� fo.;.r stalluards as the

primary !;ta.'!d::.rd ar.a tu aiso select the order of preference fOr the other three. Normal operat­

ing procedure i s to select the more accurate of the two rubidium standards as the primary unit.

125
126 R. L. GRANATA

Detection of failure, which is performed in the control logic, can be noted in several ways:
excessive drift rate, amplitude variations, and power supply failures. Upon detection of a
failure in an oscUlator, that unit will be switched off line. If this happens to be the opcrating
standard, the second preference unit is made operational. U a failure occurs in a secondary
unit, the ones lower in preference are moved into a higher position. Detection of failure is
also indicated on the control panel to inform the operator of the present equipment status.

The control lOgic also performs another important (unction, that of frequency conlrol of
the secondary frequency standards. The secondary standards are compared to the primary
standard in a phase detector, and the resulting phase error Signal drives a proportional and an
integral control loop. The proportional loop controls phase variations of the output signal by
changing the control voltage on the varicap frequency control in the oscUiator. The integral
loop drives a servo and nulls out the oscillator drift or long term errors. The servo also
drives an indicator dial which is calibrated for frequency correction. The rubidium control
loop is similar In nature except that current variations arc made to adjust the magnetic field
around the gas celL The maximum tracking rate o[ this servo will follow an error of 2 x 10+9•
A stepping motor is employed in the integral control loop to eliminate the need for the genera­
tion of 60 or 400 cycles per second power.

The output of the combiner (5 Mc), which is the selected standard, is then syntheSized by
redundant paths into two additional output frequencies, 1 nlegacycle and 100 kUocycles. These
three frequencies are then expanded in the distribution amplifier to furnish the required output
configuration. This unit interfaces with the time standard at this point. All users of these
frequencies in the S+band system obtain their outputs directly from the time standard system.

In order to Obtain a highly reliable unit, each frequency standard contains its individual
power supply and baltery pack. The control lOgic and distribution system have redundant power
supplies and battery packs, each capable of supplying the required power. The power units for
the two rubidium standards, the control lOgic, and the distribution amplifier are identical and
can be interchanged in case of a major failure.

Time Standards

The time standard contains redundant clocks and time code generators. Logic gating
within the signal distribution area of all output func tions allows the operator to select the
operational time standard. SwitChing is performed manually and at the discretion of the opera­
tor. All other functions, binary coded decimal (BCD) to binary conversion of time, status clock
control signals, special frequenCies, and clock synchronization signals are generated after the
time standard selection circuits. The easiest method of describing the functions of this system
is to lOgically follow the signals through each unit.

The frequency divider portion of the digital clock receives two redundant one megacycle
Sib'l\als from the precisian frequency sourc e. These signals are added through a resistive
network. The combined signal is then limited and squared by means of a zero crOSSing detector
developing pulses for driving the digital circuits. The two inputs Signals are generated in the
precision frequency source and thus are always phase coherent . Loss of one input Si1,'TI31 results
 APOllO PRECISION FREQUENCY SOURCE ANO T1UE STANOARO 127

in a phase change of less than 20 nanoseconds. The 1 megacycle square wave is then divided
by means of 8-4.-2-1 BCD decades to a 1 pulse per second rate. At the lOO-kilopulses per
second point in the divider chain, two methods for obtaining time synchronization are employed,
an analog and a digital technique. The analog method employs a continuous phase shifter utiliz­
ing a sine-cosine potentiometer. This method is used for daily time corrections to compensate
for oscillator drift as measured by the VLF equipment. The digital method adds or subtracts
pulses from the 100-kilopulses per second bit stream. Several rates of correction are manually
selectable by the operator. This technique is utilized to aid in synchronizing the frequency
divider to WWV or to the redundant time standard.

The digital clock accepts the 1 pulse per second from the frequency divider and divides by
appropriate factors to obtain time of day and day of year information. For synchronization with
WWV, time of year information is inserted into the digital clock by means of a bank of switches.
A visual display is also present above this unit to indicate time. Outputs from the frequency
divider and digital clock are employed in the time code generator to develop the four NASA
time codes.

The outputs of the flip-flops in the frequency divider, time of year information from the
digital clock, and serial lime codes are presented to the logic switch in the signal distribution
unit for selection, as a group, to develop the output signals.

SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION

As well as performing the time standard switching function, this unit develops all the
output signals; contains expansion for the AC and DC line drivers; modulates the time codes
with their appropriate carrier frequencies; develops the special frequenCies for the tracking
data processor; such as 2400, 1200, and 600 pulses per second; and develops the necessary
signals for driving the time synchronization equipment.

The BCD to binary converter generates time of year information into straight binary data
to be compatible with the tracking data processor requirements. This information is available
in three different granularities, one second, one tenth of a second, and one millisecond. One
complete conversion of the time of year information is made within 100 microseconds.

The STATUS clock develops count dOwn and elapsed time information to display the mission
status. Outputs from this unit are provided to drive multiple displays for use within the ground
station.

The VLF and WWV equipment :lr� ::,rO�'id�d to aid ill the tlme synchronization and mainten­
ance of time synchronization of the station clock. The WWV signal is displayed upon an oscil­
loscope and used to synchroniz e the station one pulse per second to the received WWV signaL

The VLF equipment phase locks a 100-kiiocycle output from the precision frequency source
with the received VLF signal. A phase plot is obtained which defines the frequency error of
the precision frequency source and the accumulated time error since the previous VLF
measurement.
128 R. l. GRANATA

The patch panel provides a convenient method of connecting signals to the other station

subsystems.

ACCURACY & RELIABILITY

System accuracy can be broken down into two basic categories: frequency and time.

Frequency

The frequency accuracy is determined by the inherent stability of the rubidium gas cell,
VLF tracking capabilities, and operator ability.

The specification placed upon the Apollo precision frequency source is to maintain a fre­

quency setting within 5><10-11 for a one year period. This value is placed upon the system for
worst case operation. These units could deviate to the maximum on a daily basis and still
meet the specification, but past data have shown that the daily mean frequency does not exhibit

deviations greater than 2><1 0 - 1 1 •

VLF tracking is now widely utilized to compare frequencies of a house standard to that of
a stable reference transmitted in the 10 to 30-kilocycle band. In order to achieve the system

accuracy required by the S-band, VLF signals must be monitored on a continuous basis. The

VLF equipment in this system has a resolution of one microsecond which gives approximately

a frequency resolution of lxlO-1! over 24 hours. Due to diurnal shifts and ionospheric nOise,
the system at best can resolve five microseconds or 5xl O - 1 i over 24 hours.

If this data is closely monitored and tabulated for a period of one week or more, an ac­
curacy of 2><10-1 L is achievable. These results have been repeatedly obtained in our laboratory

and we feel that with properly trained site personnel, the same results can be achieved. This

then leads into the question of the site personnel effects on the system frequency accuracy.
The author has already stated that the best achievable results are 2X10" 1 l and that on a daily

basis 5xlO-ll can be maintained. With reasonable performance on the part of the site personnel,
the author feels that our site will maintain its frequency standard between these two values.

Time

Time accuracy is determined by the synchronization technique employed and the frequency
accuracy of the precision frequency source. The method of obtainIng time synchronization is

to employ the WWV, HF time signals. These transmissions are received and displayed upon

an oscilloscope. The station pulse is then compared with the WWV tick, a one pulse per second

Signal, and aligned to be COincident with it. The jitter on the WWV pulse allows setting of the
station clock to no better than :to.S millisecond. Propagation times from the transmitting
station have been calculated previously. The station pulse which is coincident with the WWV
signal is a delayed (61 pps) pulse. The amount of delay being that calculated for the particular
site. By synchronizing the 61 pulse per second with the received WWV signal, the stations

undelayed or normal ! pulse per second output is synchronized to the WWV transmitted signal.
 APOLLO PRECISION FREQUENCY SOURCE ANO TIME STANOARD 129

In this way. the S-band network will be synchronized to a common base. The propagation delay

times are then the second source of station time error. The calculated values for each station
are based upon both experimental data and mathematical calculation. The estimated error for

these values is in the order of one millisecond. This is partly due to the uncertainty in the

mathematical model used, seasonal ionospheric variations, and ionospheric disturbances.

The third source of time error is that derived from a frequency error. As stated earlier,

the maximum expected frequency error is 5xlO-l l • This error would contribute approximately

5 microseconds a day to the time error. The author mentions this source of error to show its

magnitude, and because if lelt uncheCked, it accumulates and contributes to the other errors.

VLF monitoring of frequency 1s done by displaying phase error. The display is exhibited

directly as time error. The operator can then adjust his clock on a daily basis to eliminate the

time error due to frequency offset. The total system error based upon these facts is in the

order of one millisecond. Other techniques are now being developed which show promise for
improving this error by an order of magnitude. These may be incorporated into this system at
a later date if mission requirements show the need for improvement.

I
ATOMIC ' '''
STANOARD

CONTROL

I
' '''
' '''

I
ATOMIC '''' lOOKc
''''' SIGNA L

J..
STANDARD

�
fRfQUfNCY SYNTHfSI$
''''
CONnO\. STANDARD DISTRI8UTION
CONTROL ' '''

f-+
AMPlIflfR

1 S Mc
LOG IC
1
1 00 Kc

I
' '''
"-1
CRYSTAL ' '''' SIGNAL

I
STANDARD
SVNTHfSlS
CONTROL
' ''''
� lOOKe

I
CRYSTAL ' ''''
STANDARD

CONTRO\.

Figure I-Apollo precisiQ(l frequency source.

'''''
STANDARD

Table 1
PHASE fRROR DC
AMP
Errors.
DfnCTQR

MOTOR Frequency
'''''
Freq Std 5 x 10·"
UffRENCE
VLF 2 - 5 x lO - "
Operator ?

r ;��� I Time
t wv.'V sync *0.5 ms
v,,\VV prop delay ±l.O ms

I I>I+f---l
I
*0.005
CRYSTAL .v
Frf1'!""!K
'Y ms/day

i
STANDARD I

•
I
Figure 2-Frequency conlrol loop.
130 R. L. G�ANATA

IMe FROM
�fCISION
FREQUlNCY
SOUteE

� liME STANDARD " 5 "

TIME STANDARD " A "
II

r-1 L STANDARD
TiME STANDARD Lr
I
I
FREQUENCY TIME CODe C ODE FREQUENCY
fUQUENCIES fREQUENCIES
DIVI!)[R GENERATOR GENERATOI! DIVIDER

"" ""

I
�ERlAL SERIAL
PARALLEL PARALLEL
TIME CODES TIME CODES OIGITAL
DIGITAL BCD TIME aco TIME
f--< CLOCK &
DISPLAY OF YEAR OF YEAR
CLOCK &
DISPLAY �

-
EMERGENCY
POWER
y� AN NA EMERGENCY
POWER I-
SUPPLY """ SIGNAL SUPPLY
RECEIVER DISTRIBUTION
CHASSIS

pi
SYSTEM SIGNALS SYSTEM
TIME PROf'AGATION
FROM " A " OR " 8"

r-
POWER POWER
COMPARISON DELAY 6Dcp.
SUPPLIES SUPPLIES
CIRCUI T G[NERAT� POWH AMP

=:;l I::
._t�15V
POWER POWER

I
TIME IIC O - DINA R:

"ttl5V
CONTROL SCOPE TRIGGER CONTROL.
COMPARISON CONVERTER
1 PPS " A " OR - a -
AC OSCillOSCOPE AC
SYSTEM
,,<" 60<p.
PATCH

-�'"
MA.IN POWER PANEL MAIN POW'CR

j
ANTENNA
COONT OOWN.

H
'" 100 t:c kt MOT �
-., ELAPSEO TIME
DISPLAYSS
UCEIVER & HOLO ClOCK
( tOCATED AT
CHART CONTROl CONSOlE )
R ECORDU
TIME Of
YEAR (GMT)
SIGNALS DISPLAYS
TO USERS
(REMOTELY lOCATED)
,..----.,
RF SYSTEMS
DATA SYSTEMS
RANGING SYSTfM$
ETC .

Figure 3_Time star.dard block diagram.

 APOLLO PRECISION FREQUENCY SOURCE AND TIME STANOARD 131

.
c
______•___ TIME
o
FRAME ( 1 SECOND)
5 10 "
I
1:=REFERENCE TIME I
UNITS SECONDS TENS SECONDS UNITS MINUTES
2 , 8 2 • 8 2 • 8

II -I � 2...
81NARY • 0 •
-l � 6...
BINARY " I "
--I � 6 ... INDEX MARKER
OCCURRING EVERY 100 ...
FROM 100... TO 900...
2MS INDEX (TYPICAL) (TYPICAL)
MARKER UFo
FOR ENCODED -! �
TIME

" " 35 '" ., '"

• , , •
TEN MINUTES UNliS HOURS

2 , 8 2 , 8
,'LJ
-' .. �
\ TYPICAL)

'" '" " " "

, , , I , ,
TEN Houd UNITS DAYS

1 2 4 8 1 2 4 B 2 ' 8
UL"-J
L 'C-J'
L '
C -J
L "-J
.r
UllLJ'
---, -1LJLJLJLJU
,-"
I- TIME AT REF. MARKER IS,
-
121 DAYS, 10 HOURS, 23 MINUTES, �.S3 SECONDS

" " os " 95 100

, , HUNDRED D�Y ,
I STATION t.ri. kEFERENCE MARKER I

�L��������AJLr���FVLrUCn 2 , 8

i � PICAl) NOTE:
I . FRAME RATE I/SEC
2. GKOUP RATE lO/SEC
3. BIT RATE 100/SEC
TYPICAL MODULATED CA�RIU
fREQ l000 cp.

Figure 4-NASA I/second binary lime code.

132 R. L. GRANATA

TIME FI\AME ( 1 MIN.)

0 , " "
,
,

,
,

FREfERENCE TIME , o· 15 SECONDS

REFERENCE UNITS MINUTES TEN MINUTES UNITS HO�S
MARKER " 2 • , " , , 2 • ,
0. 1 SEC . --l I-O.3 SEC. -< � 0.3 SEC. INDEX MARKER
/lINAJlY 0 " BINARY " 1 " OCCURRING EVERY .5 SECONDS
(TYPICAL) (TYPICAL) FROM .5 SECONDS TO S5 SECONOS
•

" 20 " "

, , , 1 15-30 SECONDS
TEN HOURS UNITS DAY TEN DAY
2 • , , 2 • , , 2 • ,
--

--l �O.S SK.

(TYPICAL)

lO 35 40 45
C
' --0 "-
--�--
�'-- -"
----
"---
"---
"---
-" -"
-- ---"
-- "-
-- --
"---
�I 30 - � SECONDS
.�. � �
HUNDRED
;o 7
DAY
1 2 • /I
-R �l-R �L
C- ,"
A.C " �
' Mc' , .C
LC
'
��
�
-<t
� OC "
''
: S'� ''-
.''- ��
t- 'M''
'= n
A,n
c .'c" ,, .
"- '-
I ''-
(TYPICAL) 121 DAYS, 10 MOORS, 23 MINUTES, 34 SECONDS

",'--
·.. -"--
--C-
--"---
� c;:
-- "--
-"--
--"-
--"-
--"-
--'"
c�_,y;"'<ll
"---
"- --"--- �
�.s-60 SeCONDS
cOt
·mot'
FUNCTIONS REF. MA�KER UNITS MINuns
1 1. • 8

Nons :
1. FUME RAlE I/MIN
2. GROUP RATE Il/MIN
IT 3. BIT RAlE 2isEC
X 3.3X
TYPICAL MODUlATEO CAR1UER
fREO l00�p>

Figure 5-NASA 1/minute binory time (;ode.

 APOLLO PRECISION FREQUENCY SOURCE ANO TIME STANOARO 133

--_____ TlME FUME ( I HOVR) _____ __ _ _

o 5 10 15 "
"- - ' I I ,

J
r- REFnENCE TIME

ReFERENCE f- �� TENS HOURS

I
'___"UY 'I'c0-...1!l
MARKER , 1 2 � 8 1 2 4 8

-I I- 6
,.rt..rt.....ru-
.r LlLJL-1...JL ""-,L "--, __ ....
.
11 ... ....
...fL
_ J
L ....
n _..lL...
� � 0.2 MIN 0. MIN
BINARY "0" 81NAAY " I ·
(TYPICAL) (TYPICAL)

20 " " '"

,
UNITS DAY TEN DAY

1 2 4 8 I 2 � 8
J""lS"UL JL....
J L..J
L..
,n_J't..
....J
L. ....
r ..L-'
u L....
ltJL...
. I'LJL...
..Jl- ....
....I' ....
...JL..11 ...
--I � 0.6 MIN. INDEX --I 1- 1 MIN. �
TIME AT RtF MARKER IS,
(TYPICAL) 121 DAYS, 10 HOURS, J..t MINUTES
MARKER OCCURRING
EVE�Y 10 MIN. FROM
10 MIN. TO SO MIN.

so 5S 60
I " I
CONTROL
HUNDRED DAY fUNCTIONS UF. MARKER UNITS HOURS

S',1U!- -'"-' UL..JL..JL...L....

( 8

j
I 2 4 8 I 2

.nJLJLJL JLJLJLJ ..J f

-U'l
S "'
Jl.'P..JL.
.Jl..JL..J J
I...
... J. L.Jl. ...
1200 CYCLES OF lOOep<
Nons,
-'-­ I . fRAME RATl I / HOUlt

JU�
2. GROUP RAn I / I O MIN.
,--,­ 3. BIT AAT£ I / MIN.
X 3.3X

TYPICAL MOOUlAnD CAlliER

F igure 6-NASA l/hour binary time code.

ic _______ 10 S(CONDS
_ -i'
I--
I
I SECOND
..oj
_____ _ __________
__
I FlAME

::-l r UNITS I
I DIGIT
0, 1 TENS UNITS TENS
SECOND HOURS MINUTES MINUTES SECONDS

��
��
�� ��� L��i�
"��i'�
� �
,��R,----,n"-----�'Le- �' ---ik�
�n,-- �
-� ,L
l
L �
__
__ _
__ __

FRAME _ . --- TIME

GROUP MARKS S.D.T.C. fOlMAT

L�2L_f1u uJL_llNJuLJW l ___.Jn

L I_---1 I__jO,_....�y
ru1 u �u L.L
J l[ _
....J _Jn .J tuL.j
�J
...J u'i __

3 • 5 2
TIME AT STAllT OF FllAME - 2J HOUltS.
45 MINUTES, 20 SECONDS TYPICAL FRAMf

CALIBRATION FRAMr

Figure 7-Formot seriol decimal time code.

134 R. l. GRANATA

, __ -.
= =0;- ______ 10 secoNDs _
_ ___________ j
I FRAME

O
1 S�CONO
, DIGIT

r
O . l S SEC
I
II'THOURS
£NS UNITS TENS UNITS TENS HUNDREDS TENS UNITS
HOURS MINUTfS MINUTES SECONDS DAYS DAYS DAYS

--+���
b'= �=� l �l-
---l� � =-'n�
-."JL,;=-''== ±
�n,'-
:: --::J=''"''�nL---.JnL_
L --:FRAME l � RKU
,
GROUP MARKS
_ liME

�LJWP���l��
s.o.1.e. FORMAT

L2 TlMf AT 1r
ART OF fRAM£ -123 DAYS,
23 HOURS, 45 MIN\JTES, 20 SECONDS
TYPICAL fRAME

�@r WJlllil�'@lLJ!JI�JIJIJliUUUW@II!-JI!@--L-
o � 5
-JI!!.. O!I�-'nL-�
9 4 3 2 1
'----'nL--'nnr-L
TIME AT START Of FRAME -321 DAYS, 09 HOURS, 59 MINUTES, 00 SECONDS

TYPICAL FIlAME

----Jb-JIW.
u ��� u -JIJllllttl�Innr�LJjI1-JI!l_--NI�T L "JIIU�1JIJJI�
" l� " .lL
L�"
2
S
9 9 4 3 1

. . AT
.T 'START Of FRAME -321 DAYS,
09 HOURS, 59 MINuns, 40 SECONDS
TIME
CALIIlRATiON FRAME

Figure S-Apol l o format �riol decimal time code.

 APOLLO MISSION PROFILE
by

J. J. Donegan

Goddard Space Flight Center

ABSTRACT

A typical AJXlllo mission profile is presented to provide an undersl.'lncting of

the tracking requirements placed on the Unified S-Band System in support of the
Apollo missions. Characteristics of the Apollo spacecraft are included, as well
as the timing sequence of the Apollo spacecraft events from initial liftoff
through lunar touchdown, lunar liftoff, reentry, and earth touchdown. Orbital
parameters, night constraints, and navigational problems are also discussed.

The Unified S-Band System is implemented to provide ground instrumentation support for

Apollo missions. In this role it will provide monitor and realtime control capability to flight
controllers on the groW1d from liftoff to landing. In order to understand the tracking require­
ments on the UniHed S-Band System, it is necessary to know the mission profile the system
will be required to support. This presentation describes a typical Apollo mission profile.

Figure I-Salurn V vehicle.

13 5
136 J. J. DONEGAN

The Saturn V vehicle is 360 feet tall as

compared with 109 feet for the Gemini Titan
11 vehicle. It delivers 7-1/2 million pounds
of thrust as compared with 430,000 pounds
delivered by Titan II. It is a three stage

launch vehicle . The first stage is deSignated

S-lC, the second 8-11, and the third S-IVB.
The third stage or S-IYB is a restartable
engine.

Elements of the Apollo spacecraft are

the launch escape system, the Command and
Service Module (CSM), and the Lunar Ex­
cursion Module (LEM). Totally fueled, this
conhb'Ucation weighs about 90, 000 pounds at
liftoff.

The operational control of the Apollo

mission will reside on the ground in the
Houston Control Center, even though the
spacecraft will be designed with the capabil­
ity of executing the mission and all abort
Figure 2-Apollo Ipocecraft.
options without use of ground information.

Figvre 3_Apollo operational control center.

 APOLLO MISSION PROFILE 137

For a typical mission the timing sequence of events is given in the following table:

TIME llt ELAPSED TIME

EVENT
AFTER LIFTOFF

2.8 hours Lunar injection

3.3/3.5 hours Transposition (turn around) discard

third stage

72.8 hours Arrive at moon (3 days)

74.5 hours Lunar touchdown 24 hours stay

on moon

98.5 hours Lunar HftoU 24 hours stay on moon

99.9 hours Rendezvous at moon

103.5 hours Leave llmar orbit for earth

196 hours Start reentry

196.6 hours Earth touchdown (8 days)

At liftoff the Saturn V weighs approximately 3000 tons and has the capability of transporting
45 tons to the moon any day of the month. The first stage (S-lC) burns for about 2-1/2 minutes

Figure 4-Timing sequence of event! For typicol mission.

138 J. J. DONEGAN

1'1 lei

Ibl 1'1

Figure 5-501urn l iftoff, firsl stage burning, first stage separation, and second stage separation.

to approximately 200,000 feet. After first stage separation, the second stage (S-I1) ignites,
producing a thrust capability of approximately 1 million pounds and burns for about 3-1/2
minutes to all attitude of 600,000 feet. At this point the second stage separates. The laWteh
window will )je about 2- t/2 hours based 011 the restraint of a variable laWleh azimuth limited to
26 degrees and 011 the !Jasis of one tracking ship covering the insertion phase.

During the second stage burn the tower laWlch escape system is jettisoned.

The third stage or S-IVB which is a resta rtable engine is then rired ul'iefly to attain a
velocity of 25,520 feet per second ,U\d place s the sp,u;ccra ft in a IOO-nauUcal mile Ilarking
oriJit. Durin!:;: thi:; phase crew and <"'Quipment will iJe c hecked out to see if they qualify to
 APOLLO MISSION f'fIOFILE 139

F i gure 6-Eorth orbitol checkovt.

Figure 7-lunor trajectory in5ertion.

perform the complete mission. The plane of the parking orbit should include the target or an·

ticipated lunar landing point to avoid cosUy out of plane maneuvers.

At approximately 2.8 hours after liftoff the S·IYB engine re-ignites, propelling the space·

cra[t to a velocity of approximately 35,640 feet per second and n

i jecting it into the translunar
140 J. J. DONECAN

trajectory. The spacecraft then goes into a translunar coast and during this phase it is neces­

sary to determine the orbit quickly to make a "go/no go" deCision On the translunar phase of

the mission prior to transposition. This will require about 10 minutes of tracking.

Apollo will introduce new and complex operations. One of these is the transposition or

turnarOWld maneuver. During this maneuver the CSM will be separated from the S-IVB!LEM

configuration, turned around, and coupled up again, freeing the engine of the Service Module

(SM) for use. Figure 8 shows the explosive separation of the forward section of the spacecraft/

LEM adapter, and the turn around maneuver. It is presently estimated that this phase will take

atxlUt 30 minutes.

,., '"

'" '"

,,' "

figure 8-Comm(Jnd loery;ce module Ioeporotion, lurnoround maO'leuver, docking ond

coupling, separotion of S-IV8 stage, m idcourse correction, ond breoking maneuver.
 APOllO MISSION PROFILE 141

Also shown in Figure 8 are the docking and coupling up of the CSM to the LEM!S-IVB, and
the separation of the S-IVB stage which is now discarded. I f required, midcourse corrections
are then performed by the astronauts using the service engine to establish the proper course.
This will occur about 5 to 8 hours after injection. It will take about 72.8 hours to reach the
moon. Using the SM propulsion system, the astronauts will perform a braking maneuver to
achieve the proper lunar orbit. This will be approximately a 100-nautical mile circular orbit
above the moon's surface, at an injection speed of approximately 7500 feet per second.

Sometime later two astronauts will transfer from the Command Module (CM) to the LEM,
and one astronaut will remain in the CSM in hmar orbit.

When all is ready, the astronauts will separate the LEM from the CSM and turn around the
the LEM to descent attitude. First they will make a reconnaissance pass coming to a Pericynthial
of 50,000 feet above the anticipated landing point. If all looks good, they will start the actual
landing approach. The rate of descent will be carefully controlled. The LEM will reach a hover
point 300 feet above the lunar surface before final landing. Lunar touchdown then occurs. Im­
mediately upon !anding, the LEM will be prepared for relaunch before either astronaut sets
foot on the moon. Lunar landing occurs at 74.5 hOurs elapsed time.

While on the moon the astronauts will perform scientific experiments , gather geological
samples, take photographs, and do some exploration. They will also leave some scientific in­
struments behind for transmitting scientific data back to earth.

After a 24-hour stay on the moon, the astronauts will fire the liftoff engines using the four­
legged adapter as launch pad and leaving it behind. Lunar liftoff occurs approximately at 98.5
hours.

The hmar launch must be timed to permit rendezvous with the C8M. This is a critical
maneuver which imposes severe requirements on ground tracking. Rendezvous will occur at
99.9 hours. Upon docking the two astronauts will return to the CM, detaching the LEM and
leaving it in lunar orbit. If everything checks out at approximately 103.5 hOurs, the astronauts
will fire the service module for the return trip to earth.

It is very important to determine the transearth trajectory early. From ground track­
ing, midcourse corrections will be made to assure that the spacecraft enters the correct
reentry corridor about 40 miles thick. A miss can mean up to 350 g's or can mean skipping
back into outer space, or can mean encountering exceedingly high temperatures during reentry.
The determination of the orbit quickly in this phase is of paramrlu!'lt imp0rUncc. Adjustn"t.'lIl:s
of time enroute to earth will determine where landing takes place on earth. Fuel penalty for
trajectory adjustments early in this phase are less than for later in the transearth phase.

tlelore entering the earth's atmosphere, the astronauts will jettison the S M . It must be
separated so that there is not a re- contact problem between the 8M and CM, and so that the
anticipated impact point of the 8M is not in a populated area.
14 2 J. J. DONEGAN

,., '"

'" '"

'" '"

Figure 9-Tronsfer to lEM, lunar approoch orbit, lunar de:;cenl, lunor touchdown,
photography, and exploration.

The eM is then placed in proper attitude for reentry. The Apollo spacecraft like the
Gemini spacecraft is a lifting vehicle. Its landing footprint gives the astronauts some control
of their landing point. Apollo reentry is a very critical maneuver. Reentry speed is about
35,787 feet per second and reentry range varies from 2100 and 5000 nautical miles. Ionization
phenomena are intense during this phase, creating tracking problems for the groW'ld during the
blackout periods. Drogue chute deployment and main chute deployment are shown in Figure 1 1 .

The Apollo mission terminates in a water landing in the Pacific after approximately
196.6 hours elapsed time. Two possible landing areas are contemplated. one in the
 APOLLO MISSION PROFILE 143

(.( (,(

'"� '"�

(.(

. igure 1 0-Lunar liftoff, lunar orbit rende;zvous, docking, leoying lunor olbit,
ond return trip 10 eorth.

northern and one in the southern hemisphere. These are near Hawaii and Pagol
Pago.

As seen from study of the mission profile, the Apollo project introduces new and complex
tracking problems, which must be resolved to provide realtime control of the mission Crom
l11tOU to reemry. ·Ine Apoiio uniiit:!o 5-oamj ;:)Y"'''III i" u.:iulS .1':: 515;;cd �" ;:;.chic,·c th�:::
result.
144 J. J. OO'lEGAN

. . . "
. . '
.

. •�'
.
.

.
I-I 1'1

101 1'1

I-I

Figure I I -Service module jettisoning, reentry attitude orientation, reentry, drogue

chute deployment, and main chute deployment (terminal descent),
 COMPUTER TEST PROGRAM TO QUALIFY
USB SYSTEM
by

J. Barsky

Goddard Space Fliglli Center

ABSTRACT

The GSFC computer processor will utilize data from the Unified S-8and
IUSB) System to document its operating characteristics during actual orbital
track. The USB system will be calibrated by the C-band network of FPS-16 and
FPQ-6 radars which have been proven in Mercury and Gemini. The basic com­
puter program ut1lizeel will be the Gemini program , revised to receive and
process the outputs of the two systems both simultaneously and separately to
allow lor maximum comparison of the results. The results will be measure­
ments of the noise and bias in the USB network and the orbital determination
accuracy as a function of this noise and bias.

System testing of data flow to and from a USB site conducted at GSFC will
uWire developed tests from the CADFISS program. These tests will be used to
determine (I) the degree to which the eom�ter-related portions of the system
have fulfilled their system design requiremenLs, (2) those portions of the sys­
tems which are not functioning properly, aD:! (3) the operational capability of the
system to support a mission.

INTRODUCTION

The computer test program to qualify the Unified S - Band (USB) System will consist of two
phases. The first is the CADFISS program which will check each site as it is implemented and
check the whole network before a mission, supplementing remote site testing . The second is a
check of the system during a mission with an orbit computation program capable of utilizing

both USB data and C-band radar data.

CADFISS PROGRAM

The !"espcnsibUl.ty ur tile CADFlSS program testing for the USB will be to verify the opera­
tional readiness of hardware and software configurations which may affect the data content of

messages used for computer computations at GSFC and/or MSC. Particular emphasis w ill . to'?
placed rm �'.!b��·&tc... ii",:'eda..,...::; which are not checked during unit testing. Where possible, the
tests utilize the operational program which will be used for mission support. This enables the
CADFlSS tests to perform an authentic pre-mission checkout of the applicable systems.

145
146 J. BARSKY

The general equipment areas that are involved are communications, radar tracking, in­
cluding boresight, antenna programmer and range and range rate, the digital command system
(DeS) at high and low speed and the PCM telemetry tests at high and low speed. All of these
tests are applicable both to Manned Space Flight Network remote siles and the ships, except
the boresight test which cannot be run on the ships. All GSFC tests will have the capability to
process variable input rates for both high and low speed tests.

CADFISS utilizes an automatic program concept, aU phases of testing being Wlder control
of the computer program. The 7094 is the center of the testing system and controls data flow
activity between remote sites and the Goddard Space Flight Center.

In discussing the tests necessary to accomplish the testing obj ectives it is assumed that

GSFC will have access to aU nigh- and low-speed commUllication lines that exist between MSFN
sites and MSC, Houston, and that GSFC's realtime systems will have access to high speed com­
mand Circuits, high-speed tracking circuits, and low-speed teletype circuits required to per­
form the proposed CADFISS lists. Facilities will be available at GSFC to accept and format
data from six high-speed telemetry circuits simultaneously, and error codes required on the
outgoing command circuits will be affixed by the GSFC realtime system.

Communications Tests

The communications tests are required to ascertain the condition and continuity of each
GSFC remote site circuit. The commWlications circuits are common to all areas of testing;
therefore, a Simple end-to-end test is required. The testing will consist of sending data from
GSFC to the Site, where it is compared against an expected pattern and scored, and the results
are transmitted to GSFC. The site, in turn, sends data to GSFC, to be compared with an ex­
pected pattern and status of the circuit is established.

Radar Tracking System Tests

The testing of the radar tracking system consists of three aspects; the range and range­
rate (doppler) test, the radar boresight test and the antenna position programmer test.

Range and Rate Tests

The purposes of range and rate tests are to: (1) verify the operation of the ranging
system for one discrete value of simulated range; (2) insure that the voltage controlled oscil­
lator (YCO) frequency is inserted into the range format position of the first output message
following range code acquisition; (3) verify the proper operation of the range/frequency indi­
cator bits to provide a coarse check on X, Y angular data; (4) check time; (5) test the ranging
system for both Lunar Excursion Module (LEM) and Command Service Module (CSM), on dual
radar sites; (6) check the "n" counte r; (7) check operation of the lOO-megacycle interval
counter and (8) test the doppler readout circuitry operation.

According to the procedUre set up for range and rate tests, the site upon cues from GSFC

acquires phase lock with the collimation transponder and the transiXInc!cr acquires phase lock
 COMPUTER TEST PROGRAli TO QUALIfY USB SYSTEM 147

with the ground station, after which ranging is started. When range acquisition is achieved ,
VCO frequency is transCerred to the range output register and then to the tracking data proces­

sor. Successive output messages will contain the range units which correspond to the delay

inserted at the transponder simulator. In addition to range and frequency, the message iden­
tification characters and the time word are checked Cor proper operation.

During the range test, the doppler counter is tested by using a stable 1 megacycle gener­

ator as a simulated doppler source analog signal and is checked for the destruct and non­

destruct modes and for Nl and N2 count periods. The approximate length of test is 5 minutes.

Tests will be required for both high and low speed testing to satisfy laW1ch area and network

radars and will be capable of operating with variable speed input data.

Radcrr Boresight Test

The purpose of the radar boresight test is to check the angular alignment of the radar
system and check on the time and message identification. Upon receipt of a cue from GSFC,

the site acquires and locks on the boresight signal. "N" frames of data are transmitted to

GSFC over low-speed teletype circuits. The data is compared with the tower survey value to
determine angular alignment. A high speed test will also be required to test radars used in
the launch area but 1s not applicable to the ships as they will not have a collimation tower.

Anlellna Position Programmer Test

The purpose of the antenna position programmer test is to verify the proper operation of

the subsystems and interfaces used to position the antenna. The operational program will be

used in the on-site data processor. GSFC will send acquisition points to an on-site computer

via low speed teletype. The operational program in the computer uses these points to compute
and pW1ch a pass tape which contains command angle data to direct the antenna position pro­

grammer (APP). The tape is entered into the tape reader for the APP where it will direct the

antenna to the specified orbit search. The radar encoder outputs the angular position of the
antenna to the tracking data processor (TDP) where it is formated and transmitted to GSFC.

The acquisition points sent to the on-site computer are used at GSFC to construct the com­
mand angles which were used to direct the APP. These angles will be used to construct a
simulated orbit. The data received from the site will be compared against this orbit with some
small amount of errors allowed. Test time is approximately 5 minutes . A high speed test is
also required.

Prior to getting an operational progl"am for the on -site computer, a tape will be prepared
at GSFC and used to simulate an orbit pass. This tape may also be programmed lor discrete
antenna positions and the ooresight tower coordinates.

Diallal Command Syslem

The digital command system will be tested to verify proper operation of the subsystems

and interfaces used operationally as part of the digital command system including an input data
148 J. BARSKY

check (program IWlctions), an up-link check and a validate and retransmit check. The pro­
cedure wilt be to prepare output command loads in the GSFC's IBM 7094 computer, affix error
code to data, and transmit to the appropriate site. The remote site program in the command
data processor (CDP) will perform a validity check on the data and store commands or request
retransmissions as requir ed.

The second phase of the test up-links the data to the collimation tower or the dummy an­
tenna load. The up-linked data feed!; the verification receiver and is then fed to the COP via

the input buffer. The CDP performs a comparison with the up-linked command and indicates
those commands which do not compare. The addresses of failing commands will be sent back

to GSFC via low-speed teletype as a program function or a manually prepared remote site
report. Sequential switching of circuits at Honolulu and London win require that this test be
run in three passes to test an sHes.

The operational program will be used in the CDP. This test will vary slightly in opera­
tional procedures at the site due to the different modes of operating the command system.
Mode 1 requires site personnel to up-link the command data. Mode 2 operation up-links the
data upon receipt of an execute command from GSFC and Mode 3 up-links the command im­
mediately upon receipt of data and validatioll . The test will be limited to approximately 1 0
minutes per site.

PCM Telemetry Tests

The PCM telemetry will be tested to verify the data flow path from the sub-carrier de­
modulator to the telemetry processor and the output of the telemetry processor via high speed
to GSFC. The PCM simulator will be used to input directly to the PCM demodulation distribu­
tion panel or modulate the S-band downlink at the collimation tower if the latter is available.
Each vehicle format will be checked as well as each decommutation station.

The operational program is used in the telemetry processor during this test. The data
transmitted to GSFC are compared against tables of expected values and the test results trans­
mitted back to the site. The high circuit switching at London and Honolulu limits the number
of sites which may be tested simultaneously, therefore, three passes will be required to test
all sites. The CADFISS program will then check the entire network and allow the orbital com­
putation to be performed with confidence in the equipment.

ORBIT COMPUTATION PROGRAM

The ultimate test of the USB system as a tracking system is its ability to provide data to
determine an orbit. Theoretical studies can show what the capabilities of a system should be,
but only actual track of an orbiting vehicle can prove its real capabilities.

One problem associated with determining the capability of a tracking system is a good
standard of comparison. In Mercury and Gemini we simply used the best tracking: systems
available, the C-balld radars FPS-16 and later the FPQ-6. These proved fully capable and
 COlJP·; lER TE51 PROCRA'.! TO QUALIfY USB sysrE� 149

provided excellent orbit determination. This then provides an ex.celle1lt measur ing stick [or the

USB.

Althou�h the USB has the added capability of measuri ng doppler or range- rate, the specifi ­

cation for angles and range are not as good as eit her the FPQ-6 or F PS - 1 6 . The results o f

recent Gemini missions show the rms errors for the C- bands to be roughly 0.1 mil in angles
and 5 yards in range as compa red to specifications of 0.6 mil in angles and 15 yards in range

for the USB.

The USB is primarily desi gned for t racking to lunar distances but does have definite near­
earth functions. Once a ve hicle is far from the earth, the angle tracking ceases to be of value

and the doppler and range are the prime sources of information . Therefore the USB has to be

evaluated in two ways: first , as a complete system with angles ; second, as a source of ra nge and
ran ge- rate a lone .

The comparison then will be made on vehicles carrying both C-band and USB transpo nders.
The central computer will accept data from aU sites and perform orbit calculations in three
modes: C-band track alone, USB t rack alone, and combined C-band and USB track.

The re siduals and rms errors will be computed for the USB as a function of all three solu­
tions. These errors will be analyzed to determine the biases or systemat ic errors in the vari­

ous sites, which may be due to static errors such as station location. X and Y angle boresig:ht

and ooresight misalignment, fl'l"quency standard, and dynamiCS errOl'S such as antenna lag.

Other errors are always present which comp\Jcate an analysis. The mathematical model o r

equations of motion are ne,'er eXilet, particula rly ill the case o f a satellite rdatively close to
the ea rth and s ubj ect to all of the earth's harmonics pe rtu rbation and especially to atmosph('ric
drag.

The model will contain Cowell equ:ltions of motion integ rated with an improved 8th order

central difference integrator. AU necessary perturbations will be accounted for in the equa­
tions of motion . The data will be corrected for all known dfeCls indicat ing local verticaL re­

fraction, light time and delays, and timing errors.

One of the prinCipal problems associated with tracking has been the nature of the satellite

itself. If it is unstabilized and unsymmetric, a random tumble area is usually used with a

fixed coefficient o f drag for drag calculations. If it is tumbling at a high rate . the main source

o f error is the coefficient of drag, which is difficult to estimate for an odd shaped vehicle. If.

in addition , the tumble rate is slow compa red to the orbital period and the orbit elli!)tic. the
problem of the pre cise orientation during the r>eriQd of r:
�axi r."".i.m urag becomes very Significant.

Another associated problem occurs if the vehicle il'; stabili7.cd hy on-board thrusters. This

tends to act as a small net thruster which perturbs the orbit greatly in prf'f'i.,i0!! cr!;:t da­
termination: thpreforc a st:itoi.: urbit 1S required for performing the tests described before.
Ideally for these tests, the orbiting vehicle should be round to minimize errors in sur face area
and coeHicient of drag computations. It should be unstalJil ized to eliminate effects o f thrust

and should be in a fai rly high orbit to minimize perturbations on the orbit. If unce rtainty in the
150 J. BARSKY

drag and thrusting characteristics are allowed to dominate the solution, no definitive analysis
can be made .

A crucial role of any tracking system occurs when the orbit has to be defined or redefined
on the basis of one station. This is where the performance in terms of low data noise is very
important. As has been pointed out, there are many phases in which a single station will have
to determine the orbit in the Apollo mission.

In Mercury program, however, it was found that once a sufficient amount of data had been
accumulated (e.g. about one orbit), the solution from a "poor" tracking system and a "good"
tracking system did not differ appreciably. The case in point was the Verlort versus the
FPS-16. At that time the relative nOise of the two systems was 1.0
mil and 4 0 yards for the
Verlort, compared to 0.2 mil and 10 yards for the FPS- lS. However, after one orbit, the
solutions using Verlort alone or FPS - I S alone did not differ greatly. This condition depends
on the two systems having only a difference in noise levels where one of them is much noisier
than the other but there are no Significant biases present.

Where the superior capability of the FPS-lS appeared was in the ability of one station to
determine an orbit. Here the systems differed vastly in their results, the FPS-1S being an
order of magnitude better in velocity determination. Therefore, by testing the single station
solution of USB against a best combined solution, a real figure of merit will be obtained for one
oC the most critical roles of the system - the ability of a Single station to redefine the orbit.

In summary then, the residuals uf the combined solutions should provide a good estimate of
the possible biases and errors ill the system and the single station solution error should provide
a real measure of the capability of the USB system.
 NETWORK SYSTEMS
by
C. O. Roberts
Goddard Space Flight Cente)'

ABSTRACT

This presentation out!!ncs the connb'Urations and capabilities of the network

equipment to be iostalled 00 the remote sit",s for the Apollo program. Discus­
sion indudes site and system design considerations, system parameters, func­
tions, and modes of operation.

The major systems, induditlg peM decom telemetry and DeS processors
and console syst�'ms. arc described in detail.

The discuSSion also include s th(' capabiliti('s to be provided for closed-loop

tests of the t'quipmcnt at tilt' remote l'il'ltions, and the design of the equipment
rcquil'cct to prOCess and distribute the data from the Unifi<.>d S-Band System.

Till' (bla flow from the control center to the remote sites is dt�scribed, as
wdl " s l'quipment arrangemcnt at a typical remote sileo

The quantities and types of new ndwo,'k equipment being procured for the
Apollo J)I'oj,:ct ar,' listed to provide a n indicatiOl"\ of the magnitude of the Manned
SlI:Lce !'light Network (MSFK) implementation progr.l.m for the Apollo project.

INTRODUCTION

The Unified S-8and System ls the major system located on the remote sites of the Apollo
Network. This system combines the various up-link data and the down-link data on a single
carrier. The system required to instrument the remote sites of the Manned Space Flight Net­
work (MSFN) for the Apollo project is described in this paper.

DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

Many fadvrs were conSidered in the development of specifications for the individual sys­
tems procured fOr the Apollo program. This program requires instrumentation for three
vehicles as well as the booster. This fact dictated the necessity for increasro nO>'Iii:oi.lity h: the
des:� of U·,<; ::.y::.iems. t:ach of the three vehicles will transmit PCM telemetry. The network
was designed to transmit digital commands to each of the vehicles. Increased data proceSSing
capability is required for processing and displaying significantly larger amounts of information.

151
152 C. D. ROBEP.TS

In addition to these features related to the space vehicles, other factors were considered.
Redundancy was considered necessary in all of the major systems. Modularity of design was
considered to be an important factor. Maximum flexibility was necessary to provide the capa­
bility of instrumenting the network with systems which would not be outdated a s vehicle param­
eters were further defined or modified. To meet required operational dates, major systems
were required to b e procured prior to detailed definition of the spacecraft equipment parameters.
The state-of-the-art digital equipment was employed throughout the network wherever possible.
This presentatiun attempts to show how these lactors influenced the design of the network
systems.

SITE DESIGN

A typical remote MSFN site for Apollo is shown in simplified block diagram form in
Figure 1. More detailed block diagrams of the individual systems are presented and explained
later.

MCC &
LOCAL
I
i 2�
)1

�17 Ti
VHF
VOICEKV_

y,VHF ( 2 b �
ACO AID
TLM �
�CV�Ss --I """ I I MODEM I
I TTY
I
-1 I " I "w
I
!
I "M
I rl
'M

I MCVG �

�
'" .

L-
1
"M
TAPE
I .�
CONSOLES
& DISPLAYS
V'" CM"
CCIA
f--
III '"
.
T 1
810M£O
vco
MCC
I "w
I
'Y
'\17
II I
Y
UHfCMD
XMTR( 2 )
UF DATA
WfHR •
MODEM
I
L-
VHf ( 2 ) MCC&
VOICE
)(MTR
LOCAL

L
L-fC - IAND
RADAR
L..tf MODtM

Figu re I-Typical remote �ile block diogram.

 153

Telemetry

The data flow between the major subsystems at the remote sites is shown in Fi gure 2 .

Telemetry data received from the various vehicles will be demodulated by the Unified S-Band

System. The data will then be decommutated and distributed by the PCM system. Selected
telemetry parameters will be transferred to the telemetry (TM) data processer. and to the
command data processer (CDP). Each PCM decem will contain two computer buffers to transfer
TM parameters broadside to the associated data processer. The decom has the capability of

transferring any selection of parameters into each of the computers.

The parameters transferred to the TM data processer are independent of those transferred

to the CDP. The P C M decom also has event storage and digital/analog (D/ A) converter capa­

bilities. Data transferred from the PCM stations to the TM data processer will normally con­

sist of parameters to be converted to engineering units, analog data to be displayed on strip/

chart recorders, clock data to be displayed for time comparison, and any other parameters

required lor display on the consoles. Parameters required for transmission to the control

center as part of the telemetry summary message will also be transferred to the TM computer.

MCC &

!
lOCAL

'f ;'f
VHf PI
/R
VOICE RCVR

t
,

,
L_ 'lHf ( 2 ) nM
, I I MO '" I
: I
RCDRS
ACQ AID RCVRS

,
,
I , TTY

l.G �1----
,
,
,

1
,

I "M *�--
, ,
,

I ,-�
, ,

.6
� ,
'M
------

=:I I
MCVG
, "'

+ �
, ,

�
CONSOLES
, , "" & (ISPLAYS

-�:::!l .r---.
, ,
"- -- u'"
.oM - -- eMO
", "'
-
CCIA

.-1 810lMED 1
. -

I I
,
L __ __
MCC ow
"'0

I� I
I I I
I
UHF CM� UP DATA
8UFfU
MODEM
XMTR ( 2 ) *

L VHF (2)
VOICE
MCC&
LOCAL
r
XMTR
- - - - TlM DATA FLOW
I

Figvre 2-Typicol remote site telemetry doto flow block diagram,

154 c. O. 1I0SrRTS

Data transferred from the PCM stations to the COP will include MAPS. spacecraft parameters and

clock wo rds which may be updated by command, and events for driving indications on the console

command panel. Data to be displayed on the consoles will be processed and formatted by theTM

data processcr and transferred to the memory character/vector gen e rator for storage. Data
stored in the memory character vector generator (MCVG) will be uti lized to c ontinuously update
displays on the cathode-ray tube located in the individual consoles. Data will also be processed
by theTM data processer for transmission in real time to the control cenler over high speed lines.

In addit ion to the Unified S- Ba.nd (USB), the 3D-foot remote sites will also be equipped with a

VHF acqu isition aid. During the early phases of the Apollo p rogram, data received from the

spacecraft will be VHF rather than USB. Provision has been made to provide either USB orVHF

telemetry data to the PCM decoms. Biomedical parameters from the USB and PCM Systems
will modu late voltage controlled oscillators (VCO's) and be multiplexed for transmission to the

control center over il voice-data line.

Command
Command data will be received from the control center over high speed lines as shown in
Figure 3 . The data will be checked by polynomial cOde techniqu es and stored in the COP after

MCC &.

1" LOCAL

t
VHf 1 2 J
! �
VOICt �CVR

'17
VHf (2) � rt"! ! ! I
Y
>CM
ACO AID �cv�s �Cll�S MODEM

1 I TTY !
LG I ow

t
I
,

I "M
I rl
1M
"
I MCVG .�
!
,

� 1 401 TAP[
CONSOU5
&. DISPLAYS
I
4
----

- ---
- '" -,
"M OMO
" 0)
CCIA
.
- - -

,
. f--
"

,
1
I

,
iT ,

8
I

, B IOM ED
, "00
MCC:
,
.. - - -
, ,
I

\7
�-{
-
I

I ; I
,
I
I

,- - 'JP DATA
I
L_ __
I
UHf CMD I
)(MT� ( 2 ) M
- -_.

O '"
BUFfH •

'\T7 ,
,
Vlif ( 2 )
L..-
I
.... �CC &
- - - - C D DATA flOW
VOICE
XMTR
LOCAL
M

( - SAND
�ADA�
-j
Ltf MODEM

Figure 3-Typicol remole sile cornmond dolo flow block diogrom.

 N(TWORK Snnl/$ 15 5

verification. II the data received from the control center is not valid, the CDP will generate a

request for an automatic retransmission of blocks of data which were not valid. Individual

commands, spacec raft clock, and up-date of command loads may be initiated from the flight

control consoles or from the control center. Upon initiation of a command, data will be trans­

ferred from the command data processer to the up-data buffer. The data received by the up­

data buffer will then be serialized and converted into a PSK wave form consisting of a two­
kilocycle data tone combined with a one-kilocycle reference. The PSK wave form may then be

utilized to modulate the UHF command system or the USB system.

Both systems are equipped with monitor receivers which will detect the data which were

transmitted and convert them to parallel words for entry into the command data processer

(Figure 4). These data will then be utilized in the preparation of summary messages to be
transmitted to the control center over a high speed line in real time. The magnetic tape unit

being provided with each data processer may be driven by either data processer. Therefore,

it appears advisable to transfer all command data received from the control center to the

magnetic tape unit for storage. II either computer fails, the data would then be immediately
available to the remaining data processer.

�����==
fMceROM PCM
"OM

v:,�
S - SAND
0.

__
� ->
� e
:M:
'� "

VER IFICATION
TA.PE

F i gure 4-Uplink dolo block diagram.

Voice, Acquisilion, and Recordin, [Figure 51

Acquisition of the Various space vehicles may be accomplished by one of three methods:

The utilization of the VHF telemetry acquisition aid, the C- Band radar, and the USB. Air-to­
ground voice capabilities will be provided on both VHF and USB. Tone remoting is being pro­
vided to permit voice modulation of the transmitters from the control center. Wide band, nar­

row band, VOice, and chart recorders will be provided for each site to record PCM telemetry,
spacecraft TV, voice, analog event, and status information. A TV monitor will be prOvided to

display the slow scan TV from the spacecraft, Teletype input to the data processers will. be

p,niviui:d ill 01'J.:: . ,hal ld�1JLet l'Y 5unHnariES from ether remotc :::itc:> m:ty be stored t!l the
telemetry computer. Summary data may then be called up for display on the cathode- ray tube

by the flight controllers. peM simulator will be provided for maintenance of the PCM system

converted into COmputer instructions by the console computer interface adaptor (CCIA).

Sites which will not have flight controllers during missions will not have MCVG, CCIA or

flight control i n stalled.

156 C. O. ROBERTS

r- ._ . . _ .. _ .. ...,... .-.. -+��:.�

:- - 1 - - " 1
'I Vl1f ( 2 ) , MCC
,

'L
' L: -
, VHF ( 2 � 1
u '
·l�.9.��.����
\
t
I
-- rI I
. TlM

"'"
MODEM

, -- -
I
• ACO AID , �CV�$

! I TTY

I
� I ''"
I
I
I

-<
,
, ,
, i
i I "M
I
1M
"
I MCVG .�
�(j-- _ _ _ .1 __ ,

r- l TAPE
CONSOLES

.�
DISPLAYS
I 'M'
&

, '" eCIA
OCM
usa
,
--
o.

,
. !-
! I
----r1' SIOM[D
"'0
MOO
I 'w
I
VI' DATA
aUffER •

- - - - - ACO

,
,

LL[������:�
-<
, ,

"""'I
-l�M��O'�EM"-j----+
___

Figure S-Typicol remote site acquisition block diagram.

Redundancy has been provided throughout the major systems (Figure 6). Each USB system

must be capable of handling at least two links in both receiving and transmitting modes. D..ial
VHF acquisition aids have been installed at most sites. IAlal VHF vOice receivers and trans­
mitters are installed. All sites equipped with UHF com mand capabilities are duaL All prim ary
sites will have three PCM decQms. The telemetry and command data processes are identical.
In case of failure of one data processor. the remaining data processor will be utilized to process

both telemetry and command information. All peripheral equipment which interfaces with only

one computer will be wired through switch units to permit them to be connected to either data
process.

The up·data buffer is designed to provide redundant channels. The MCVG has three iden­

tical channels. Failure of any channel will result in the loss of only four of the 12 CRT dis­

plays. The CCIA consists of two identical channels. The failure of either channel will resuit
in the loss of control from half of the Consoles.

F\J.U utilization of digital equipment has been made throughout the USB, PCM, Data PrOCes·
SOr, MCVG, CCIA and up·data buffer. These systems comprise the major part of the rcmote
site instrumentation shown in Figure 7 .
 NETWORK SYSTEMS 15 7

MCC &

I lOCAl

VHf ( 2 � 1
\17
VOICE R C V�
�

rf
� I
Y H R�S f M I I
VH f ( 2 �
C MODEM
Ace AID R DR5

I I TTY I
Y"I I 'w
I
!
I SIM ( '"
I
rl "

! TAPE

'" ""
,'>
CMD
" I
f-
! t
.

II B IOMED
"'0
""
I 'w
I
UHF CMD
XMTR ( 2 )
II U P DATA
BUfFER . I MODEM
I
'i17
VHF(2)
L- MCC&

..-
VOICE
lOCAL
XMTR

�)
'·"NO
RA.DA.R
-, MO{)fM

Figvre 6-Typical remote sile block diagram withovt cOMole$.

SYSTEM CAPABILITIES

Computer

Some of tbe major features of tbe data processor system are:

1 . Two identical 642B modified computers are provided. One is for tbe primary purpose
of telemetry data process and driving console display. Botb units bave an identical complement
of peripheral equipment.

2. The computer memory bas a two microsecond cycle time.

3. Each computer bas a 32K directability, addre ssability memory. This memory size was
selected to provide for the capability of driving CRT displays. It was determined that a 24 bit
word length was desirable to permit the computer to process spacecraft computer words and
ground and spacecraft time words as single units. The unit select has a 30-bit word length
capability.
ISS C. O. ROBERTS

r
_ _____ __
--, _+
MCC !\.
LOCAL

MCC
VH F ( 2 1
VOICE �CV�

l=0��2- - - - - ....
CONSOLfS
& DISPLAYS

,
_\ ccrA I
, L _ _ _ _"...J
, --

,... - - - -,
VHF ( 2 )
VOICE
Mec !\. f � DIGITAL EOUIPMENT
tOCAL .... _ - - _ ...
XMTR

C -&ANO
MOorM

Figure 7-Typicol remote sitE' digitol equipment block diagram.

4. Sixteen fully buffered input/output (I/O) channels were considered the minimum ac­
ceptable to provide for connection of all peripheral equipment without the necessity of multi­

plexing channels.

5, An overlap memory capability provides additional execution speed for the computer.

6. Continuous data mode capability permits the COmputer to transmit large blocks of data
to external devices without reinitiation of the buffer.

7. As the COmputer forms the heart of the remote site system th rough which both command

and display functions must pass, a militarized unit was considered necessary to provide hib"h
reliability.

8. Inter-computer transfer capability is necessary to permit both cOlllput£'rs to uC' i n t £' r ­

connected for transfer of data. This capability is also required for t h e Apollo ships in ordl.'r

that data may be transferred from the telemetry computer to the ships' central pro('('ss(H".
 NETWORK S�HE\1S 159

Pulse-code modulation IPCM)

The major features of the PCM system arc:

1. The PCM system procured for the Apollo project utilizes program control for both
acquisitiOn and distribution formats. A 4096 by 36 memory provides the capability for routing
any bit to any one of the 127 binary stores, and for the routing of any word in the format to any

one of the selected 127 D/A convertors.

2. The computer load capability is provided for rapidly loading the PCM program. This

feature permits the updating of the format by the cOmputer in real time.

3 . A computer output capability i s provided t o permit the PCM station t o transfer data
and status to the telemet ry and command data processors.

4. The 4096 word memory of the system provides the capability of storing 10 selectable
formats; six formats of the Gemini complexity can be accommodated.

5. Bit rate selection is under program control and up to 10 dif[crent bit rates may be

selected. This feature permits complete control or the PCM station by the program.

6. The system has the capability of handling all existing formats with bit rates up to one
megobit. Since all system parameters are under program cOlltrol, the system has the flexi­
bility to handle a wide variety of new formats.

7. Self check capabilities arc provided through the usc of a stored program simulator and

a Compara.lor for determining bit error.

Command

The m ain characteristics of the command system arc:

1. Redundant channels are provided throughout.

2. Flexibility has been provided throughout the system by Illacing all major parameters

under program control. Only software modifications are required to change word structure,

word length. sub-bit encoding, transmission verification method, and input verification format.

Command words transferrcn from the CDP to the up data buffer are in sub-bit encoded form.
The only parameter of the system which may not be chang:ed by program control i s the data

rate. The nnxinmm data rate is established at one kilobit by the selection of onc kilocycle a s

the r({€"l·ence fel l iiu� PSK sig:nai.

3. Continuous equipment status monitoring is provided by the utiliZ:ltion dia!-:Ilostic rou­

tincs. Equipment status may be cleterminpd (>\'f'n clllr;n� !,'..'l'i'.�!: when O:: 0!�1!11.:l.lld!:O :!l"(: ::8! b::: in;,:;
transmitted.

4. A real time command summary capability is provided. Data transmittcd from either
the USB system or the UHF system will be received by a monitor receiver, dl'llloduhtted, and

t r ansferred to the command pro<:essor for summary preparation.

160 C. O. ROBERTS

Displays

The principal features of displays arc:

1. Computer driven cathode- ray to displays were selected for the Apollo cOnsoles to derive
greater flexibility than can be obtained from analog meters.

2. A rapid reeonfiguration capability was considered necessary to keep the number of

consoles to a minimum. In a matter of minutes a console may be configured (rom S-IV-B
support to Lunar Excursion Module (LEM) or Command and Service Module (CSM) support.
The four systemS consoles and the command communicator console are almost identical. One
may be reconfl�ured to provide the support previously supplied by any of the others.

3 . Two CRT's were provided on each system console and the COmmand communicator
console. This feature provides the capability of continuously viewing prime data while cycling
through contingency data. It also provides additional reliability in that the two CRT's are

connected to separatc memory channels.

4. Three separate and identical channels are provided in the MCVG unit. No hardware is
common to all lhree channels. This factor minimizes the effect of an individual failure. A
failure in any of the three channels would result in the loss of four cathode· ray tubes, no two
of which would be located on the same console.

5. A flexible modular de::;ign of the consoles was necessary to permit addition of displays
and repositioning of existing displays in the console shell. The panels designed in standard
unit sizes may be repOsitioned on the consoles' viewing area.

6. A maintenance mOnitor was provided to permit rapid maintenance of the system. The
display module in the maintenance monitor is Identical to the display module utilized in the
consoles. If necessary it may be used as a spare unit. The maintenance monitor may be
paralleled with any of the 12 CRT displays for tests of the systems performance; however, the
capability of separate call·up of a new format for display on the maintenance monitor has not
been provided.

1. Both ch:\T;tcter and vector display capabilities were considered necessary to provide
systenl flexibility for displayin!;!: tabular data, analog data, trend plotting or meter formats.

8. A 3,000 word per minute printcr is provided at each of the systems console locatiOns

as well as at the command communicator console. The printer is multiplexed to both the
telemetry and command computers. Data from either computer may be printed by the hi�h
speed printer. 1\ is anticipated that the printer will be utilized for read-out of command in­
formation transmitted to the remotc site from the control center. read-out of the commands
initialed from the consoles display, selection of tabular data and tht.. display formats, and to
display results of computer diagnostic tests.
 NETWORK. SYSTEMS 161

DATA FLOW T:lblc 1

O:\ta Flow.

Site From Control Center

The capability exists at the remote site
From Remote
for transmitting various types of data to the
c ontrol center in real time (Table 1). The A/G \'oice Ale voice

following data may be transmitted from the

CiI-10 sum CMOS
remote site in real time: air-ground vOice

com mand summary messages, telemetry sum­ T;\1 sum Form3t select

mary messages, C-Band and USB tracking

Tracking d3t.:1 ACQ dat.
1
data, biomedical data, and administrative traf­

fic. The remote site has the capability of ac­ OlO-hIED iWmotc S i tl
' sum

Admin
c epting many types of data from the control
Admin, tl'aHic , t ral'fic
c enter in real time. These include air- ground

vOice, commands, format select, acquisition

data, remote site summaries, and administrative traffic. At present, all types of data men­

tioned may be processed automatically with the exception of acquisition data and administrative

t raffic.

CLOSEO LOOP TESTS

A block diagram of the remote site closed-loop test capability is shown in Figure a. The
method illustrated will permit closed-loop tests of the major portions of the system from GSFC

under computer controL Test data from GSFC can be transmitted to one of the remote site
processors Over either high speed or teletype lines. This data can then be utilized to load the

PCM simulator program. Data in the PCM bit str€-am may control from a remote sourCe in
real time the simulator output introduced into either the RF system Or the PCM system. The
output of the PCM system is then transferred to the data processer to be formatted for

TO GSFC

t
I MOO£M I I MOD £M I
I
-<I "M
I 1 0.0 1 1 0.0 1
,-,�
I sou�a

MONITOR
RCVR

Figure a-Typical remote site closed loop lest block diagram.

162 C. O. ROBERTS

transmission back to GSFC. Commands will also be initiated from GSFC through the command
data processer and transmitted from the USB or UHF transmitters. The :h..t a are then sampled
by the monitor receiver and transferred to the command processer through the up-data buffer.
Com mand sUmmaries may then be generated for transmission to GSFC to complete the closing
of the command loop. Telemetry and command summary messages received at GSFC may be
reduced by the computer complex: to determine remote site equipment performance.

EQUIPMENT LAYOUT

The quantity of new network equipm?nt being procured for the Apollo project (exclusive of
the equipment included on the Apollo ships and aircraft contracts) is presented in Table 2 . The
amount of equipment provides an indication of the magnitude of the M S FN Implementation pro­
gram fol' Apollo.

Figure 9 shows how the equipment arranged in a typical remote site. The USB equipment
mounted in the building has been located in one room. A large picture window has been pro­
vided to permit the antenna to be viewed from the controJ console. The P C M equipment, VHF
receivers, acqu isitiOn aids, and recorders have been located adjacent to the USB room. The
computel's, peripheral and associated equipment, including the MCVG unit, have been located
in one rOOm adjacent to the operations and tel emetry rooms. The communications room is
located adjacent to the operations room to speed mission message handlin�.
 163

Table 2

�l'W Network Equlpmcnl for Apollo .

... VOIC!!. INTtFl· "" T.V.

ASOP

%. '... . •• ... RCVR "-CAIO

•.8. N.8. ,� '"' '"'
"" '"
'" '" '" '" """ $1,.
Equip

A\,T I , • , , I 3 I I 5

A5C , 2 I I 2 I 3 I , 1 4 I 0

BOA 2 , 2 2 I I I 15 5
,

CY1 1
2 2
!
,
5 1 I 1 1 1 8 S

RRA , 2 , I 2 • I I 0

I
BRA/JPL 2 I 0
,

ello
,
I
, , I 2 I 1 I I , 0

TEX ,
i
I I
1 I 2 I I
i
I 8 5

2 T
I
GSFC , , , 2 I 2 I I 1 5
,

005 , 2 1 , 2 I 3 I I 0

ODS/J PL , 2 I
i 0

GBI , T
,
I 2 I 2 1 I 5

GUM I I 2 I I 2 1 3 1 1 12 , 0

, , ,
,

GYM
,
2 1 I 2 , I I 8 5
,

i
HAW I , I I 2 • I • I 8 0

�lAD ,
I , , I 2 , 3 I
I I 0

t.1AD/JPL 2 I I 0

�lILA • 2 • I 2 I 3 I 1 0
,

MCC-H 10 ,
I I 1 1 I 2 I

Ship 1'0. I , 2 ! 2 3 I I I 5

Ship :-1"0. 2 , 2 I 2 , 3 ! 1 : 0
, ,

Ship :-10. !l , 2 2 3 1 I I 0

Ship No. -I 2 I • ! ,

I
5h i
p hQ ,
,I
 '
,",:, -".. �"..
... ,.� "" "." ..
.......... _ ...,., ....
i
II
STOIIAIOE A.tA _._,q",
"•
.,�,

I :.:'..:�':',�:','!':::. :;..••
. . . ..,.,� .. "." . .... -
'.. ....'.
�....", ... . ......
.....,...

F i gure 9-Typical remote site floor pIon .

 APOllO NETWORK
PCM DECOMMUTATION SYSTEMS

by
W. A. Dentel

Godd(1rd Space FliKIlt CellteY

ABSTRACT

A description of the MSFTP-l (PCM) dccommuation

t systems currf.!ntly
I>clng utilizl.'<i on the Manned Space Flight NClwQI'k (MS).'N) is presented, includ­
ing a discussion of Ihe si!;:n:ll conditioner, the group synchroni1.cr, and the
telemetry output buffer nnd its copabilitics.

A description of the new stored program PCM dl'CommuUtion !Systems

being tlrOCU.'L'CI (0.· the MSf:>l is 1I1so presented. In addition, the added versatility
or the sto"tc'<i program :Ind its :lSSOCiak'ti SOflw:lfC will be discussed.

Tile two types of syslems arc discussed wilh respect to Ihe Interfaces with
the other on-Site \·quipment, including unified S-band (USB) , VHF receivers,
cOffip..ilcrs, and consoles.

INTRODUCTION

The following paragraphs describe the new pulse-code modulation (PCM) decommutation
systems being procured for the ApollO missions and the differences between the new systems

and the existing Gemini PCM system. The new systems will complement and increase our

present capability at the Gemini sites for PCM decommutatio n . There will be two types of

systems utilized on the Manned Space Flight Network (MSFN). The first is an existing patch­
board system which was manufactured by Electrical Mechanical Research, Inc. This system
is in use, and has been in use for some time on Gemini network. The second is a stOred pro­
gram PCM which Is presently Wlder procurement and in manufacturing at Dynatronics Inc., in

Orlando, Florida. The stored program PCM will be utilized in aU of the new Apollo tracking
sites, as well as to supplement the Gemini site complement of PCM's {or support of the Apollo
program.

PCM SYSTEM INTERFACE

The blork .-:!i?g!":l� {Fl6i..ii:C ij :snows in a very simplified manner the interfaces of the PCM

systems with the other network equipment. The decommutation system distribution unit (DSDU)
is the major interface unit for aU the PCM equipment and the other network equipment. The

165
166 W. A. OENTEl

!,
I
DSDU accepts inputs from the Wlified S-band
oes
COMPUTER . COMPUTER (USB) signal data demodulators, the VHF

T T
,w

telemetry receivers, and the magnetic tape

recorders. SeriaL data inputs are patched by
PCM NO t
I �c�, 'J I
'CM NO , a video patch panel into the PCM signal con­
NO 2
(OPTIONAL)

�lbl�l
ditioners. These serial data inputs can be
patched to PCM's 1, 2, or 3. The outputs
from the PCM stations are connected to the
DSDU patchboard systems. This allows the

osou
t
user devices at a remote site such as the
consoles, the event light indicators, and the
u'"
recorders to accept any event or any analog
""
SIGNAL U'"
parameter from any one of the three PCM
TEL[ME11lY
DATA fXelTERS
SYSTEMS
DIMOO bit streams which we have the capability of
receiving. There is also a direct interface
Figure l-PCM system interface diagram. at each of the PCM decommutators with each
of the two computers on site. Each PCM has
the capability, Wider program control, of st:lectlng or stripping out any word or number oC word�
from the format for inputting to the computer.

PCM DECOMMUTATION UNIT DESCRIPTION

The first of the two types of units being utilized on the MSFN to be covered is the new
stored program decommutator. A few of the differences between the new Wlit and the existing
patchboard type Wlit will be pointed out later. Figure 2 is a pictorial drawing of the new PCM
decommutator which 1s scheduled for delivery to NASA in August. In the first rack there
are two signal conditioners. Behind the door in the lower portion of the rack are several of the
self-test functions which consist of a self-test panel, a paper tape reader for inputting data to
memory, and other non-operational type
functions. All controls for operating the
station are located on the system control
panel in the second rack. Below and behind
the system control panel are printed circuit
card gates containing the program control
logic. The core memory is also located in
the second rack. The third rack contains
test equipment for the system. There is
also an oscilloscope, electronic cOWlter,
digital voltmeter, and intercommunication
panel. The fourth rack consists mostly of
printed circuit gates and contains all of the
output circuitry for the system. These
maj or outputs of the system consist of 127
Figure 2-PCM data dec:ammulation unit. digital-to-analog converters, 127 on/off
event outputs , and five 40-bU binary stores.
 APOLLO HET'ORK PeM DECOMt.IlJTATION SYSTEMS 167

PCM STORED PROGRAM SIMULATOR

Figure 3 is a photograph of the PCM stored

program simulator which is being procured for

the ApoUo. The simulator will be supplied to every

site used on the MSFN whether it gets a stored 1,-'" a - - ., '

:- . '.
program decommutator or not. The reason is with , . . � - .. "! .
•
i•• •
this simulator unit we can eventually perfor m
! ) . . . ..
(from GSFC ) closed loop computer tests of the site I ,
'.
utilizing the computer intput to this simulator, the • • •• .., ..' ' .
-=-=-= =-=, ,
output of this simulator via an RF link into a PCM o
• • • • •
decommutator, and from the PCM decommulator
• • • • • • •
to the on-site computer and back to GSFC. These
• •
o
• • • •
o

are at the moment in acceptance testing at the

manufacturer's plant, and the first is scheduled to

• • '.
be delivered in July.
.-
', -- •____ o 0 "0'
--'
'--'
Co'
_

• 0
PCM STOREO PROGRAM DECOMMUTATOR
- " , � �"'" '
,. .. f.,'----
�� .�
•
Figure 4 is a block diagram of the new stored
. ! ! • • • • ••
• • ••••• •••
program PCM decommutator. The pCM system
. . . . . . . . ": _ . "
utilizes computer techniques to accomplish real • • • • • • • • •.• •
time and delayed processing of serial PCM data
.
........... ........ .........- '"
formats under the control of an internally stored

program, The system is capable of changing for­

11 11
II:1 II 1 I' "Ii I "I I I"! II,II "" "
1111111 ,I, 1 10 11 1 11 '11I , 1'11 , '1'1 "Ii ',
Ii 1lIi' 111
mats by the selection of a push button on the front
panel of the system control panel, or the selection

may be accomplished at a remote location . The

system has the capabUity of storing up to 10 com­

plete PCM formats i n the decommulator.

Bit rates from 10 bits to 1 megabit per second

may be accommodated in either of two bit syn­

chronizers. Selection of either one of the two bit

conditioners is provided on the system control

panel. The narrow band bit synchronizer has 10

'.

associated with the lOstored programs in memory.

The wide band bit synchronizer is similar, with

Figure 3-Stared program simulator.

selection of bit rate anywhere from 10 bits to I

megabit per second.
168 r. A. DENTEL

"'"
K.--- 'A.itAltH DATA
'" • 'I'
'OMUC,,'" SYNCS CLOCKS- - CONVEUU ./w

-+
'AUlUL
DA1A OUTPutS
....,
EST ""SA
INK I PATTUNS AND CONTROlS DlnRI '
-'

1 �OG"'"

.,
CONT!!OLLU

::r
,,,TTUN SYNCS
COM'AltATQI IIN,"Y
SVt><C ,. "

l r·o.
STOttS
�

-+
OAT" '

Y I I
coMtUn�

I
BINARY OUTPUT tuFHR "
SIMULATO_ M!MQltV
DISPLAY (2eA)

l Tl �
T T MDR

::r
· 127 0/A
E '"

I
CONTROt. MANUAL -i CONVUTEkS
COMPUTER /MN I)AL

�
PANELS PRQGU.M
TAP( -t
INPUT '"
12? DlGlr"l

i
COMPUTU-t
ON· OFF STORES '"

I
Sflf HSTS

-::l
GO-Na-GO HATUS
nST EOUIPMENT SYNC ANO SIGN,o,lS
eSC,SCOPE. TIMING
en, CARD TEST
'OW('
SvPt'lifS

Figure 4-Block diogrom of 'tared progrom PCM dolo decommutolion syl1em number 60Cl0.

The parameters required for setting up the PCM system are rt!aCl from memory at the
initiation of a new program. At this time, memory instructions are read from the core memory
to the prOl&ram controller. The instructions are routed to the bit conditioner and determine
what type of code th.is format is supposed to be receiving (NRZM, NRZS. NRZC. split- phase,
or RZ). the polarity of data (negative or positive), and the bit rate (one of 10 fixed bit rates
associated with this particular format).

The synchronization patterns are also read from the core memory and inputted to registers
in the synchronizer for utilization In the frame synchronization. sublrame synchronization, and
work sync if it is utilized. At the end of the format setup procedure, the system automatically
goes into a search mode and be�ins searching for a frame sync pattern. Once it has acquired
the franle sync patt ern, or word sync if it is utilized, the system goes into a check mode and then
a lock mode. When in the lock mode, the decommutator is in step with the airborne commutator
and the data coming: from the outputs is valid.

Serial data from the bit synchroniz.er is coupled to the serial-lo-parallel converter where
it is converted to parallel form for outputting to the various output devices o( the system.
These consist of those ,;hown in Figure 4. There are three 64-lJit multiplex outputs and five
40-llit ulnary stores which have the capability o f assembling. under prog-ram control, 4o-llit
words from any syUables within the format. The syUables need not lle adjacent, and may be
anywhere in lenbrth from one to ten bits.
 APOLLO NETWORK PCM OECOMMl}lATtON SYSTEMS 169

There are two computer buffers for interfacing with the two 6428's that are being installed
on the MSFN. The computer buffers have the capability, under program control, of accepting
any selected number of words from the format. There are 127 digital-la-analog converters that
are individually addressed by utilizing a 7 bit address in the memory instruction, and again any
word in the format can be routed to any one of the 127 digital- to-analog converters. This is
also true of the 127 digital on/off stores, except in this case individual bits of any word can be
routed. One bit, or any number of bits from any word in the format, may be routed to any
arbitrarily assigned on/off store. Status signal outputs such as synchronization status are also
available.

There are three methods by which data may be inputted to the new stored program decom­
mutator at the site: manually, from the system control panel utilizing a series of switches; by
utilizing a paper tape reader which is contained in rack one; or the computer can directly inter­
face with the PCM decommulator and in real time change a format or some instructions in an
existing format. We are, of course, limited on the MSFN at the sites where we have existing
patchboard systems because the computer cannot input data to the patchboard system.

Parity is used in this 4096x36 bit memory. One bit of every word is used for a parity
bit. There are two modes o{ utilization {or parity. The first is a test mode whereby the system
completely runs through every memory instruction checking {or parity. [f a parity error is
determined the system will stop and display the error (that is. the memory address and data) on
the front panel displays so that it can be corrected. However, when operating on a format in the
operational mode it is desired that a parity check be made without the syslem stopping if an
error is found. In this case, parity is checked continuously as every word is brought out from
memory address and data are displayed, but the program continues to operate .

NARROW BANO BIT SYNCHRONIZER

Figure 5 is a front panel view of the narrow band bit synchronizer. The controls are stand­
ard. The only things different are indicator lights on some controls . Those controls that have
indicator lights are the functions which are under program control: bit rate, the type of de­
tector being utilized, filter and sample or the integrated and dump, polarity of the incoming
data, and the type of code. The wide band bit synchronizer front panel (Figure 6 ) is very simi­
lar, the only exception being that the bit rate itself is continuously variable, using the front
panel switches, from 10 bits per second to 1 megabit.

SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL

Figure 7 is the system control paneL The top portion contains the major operating con­
trols where format selection is controlled.

The next section is the memory control, which selects and manually inputs data to the
memory or selects whe ther data is going to be Inputted from the computer manually or from
paper tape. Parity errors are displayed on this pane1.
170 W, A. OENTEL

PCM SIGNAL CONDITIONE� &S(- 20- 2 1 0

o
o
o o l� o o o o
o
" 0",
QHSn OF SYNC

INPUT LEVEL

.5"
a 1-15
t>r2-l0 SAMPlE 2-
( � ,6
3.'�-_ 8
\Y -9
7

�
'10
INHG POS NEG

lS;) I
Db
o 0 ' "

INPUT VOLT...GE L
-,
"
:E"�,
,�
",6
�
L" J 0 -1r1'h
�10%

"EHCTOR LOCAL ts) REMOn POLARITY

''0

MeD! SElEer
'ObH'
D
OUT IN

NRZ·C NRZ-M NRZ-S RZ SPUl Jf

" '00.
IANOV/IOTH
o 0 0 0 o
POWER
RESTORATION

CLOCK
....
'... ' /
.,.,.,...,..-
®
,
OCM

INPUT OutPUT
®
, , ,

® ® ®
,. ... ORD
�
CODE TYP€
[3
Figvre 5-Norrow bond bit synchron izer, front ponel.

PCM SIGNAL CON() mON(t esc - zo- 211

0 • •
0

0
OHIET
" o
l!I IllS H� S(C 0
0
"'"
OF SVNC

otVIATION
100 II(
INPUT lEVU

(g �
1� • • , ,10K

' '0
. ,�

MULJI'UE�

5-7 � 1-15
1_:W
o tsi 0
m u,n

o 0 � •

. SAWl( INHG 'OS�NEG

-I(IlI.
INfO! VOlTAGE .I�
weA' r lEMOH 'OlARlTY
D
�
OEllCTOi: "00

OU' b'" IN lO HI
MOO! SIlEeT

LOOt
SPLIT �
'" 0 0 0 0 0

� ...... ' �
RESTORATION NIll.-( NlZ_M ><IIZ-S " MNOWIOlh

®® n @ .� .
,OW<,

[E]]
�"

0
ClO<:�

0
INPUf CODE tvPE
OUTPUT O· W C.O

Figvre 6-Wide bond bit synchronizer, front pone l .

The next section of panel is a monitor display. There arc a 64-iJit binary and two deCimal
displays. Any channel in any format may be selected for display on any one of the three de­
vices located here by the channel address controls, which are associated with a unique 12-bit
data tag associated with every word in the format uy utilizing the memory.
 APOllO METIORK PCM OECOIIIUTATlON SYSTEMS 171

r--- '- , .... --,

, _________ 00•• "O.,,'OA

, ..

�.�'::1 '�'$.
- "

[;! ;':�' I -B- r�"� �.�;�I

.

I��I
H9j9j9j9OO " . ¥" ......
... .....
.�. 19191919!919
_.. -" .'_ ..-....- ..

I
s.... ,�.'O'
1
B',
0 .... � ... . .... , � � -'- ' � .---��'- · �

. .. . " .. .. ..

eCH
l O Gl O 0 B 8 El 0 i3 G 8 13 I3 G 13 0 E1 8 8 13 (;] !il
i H I \3 11

Ii ;))_... ;\ "".... iii ....

. .
CHI . .
,
a " <:0

Figure 7-PCM decornmvlotor control poneJ.

The lower portlon is the synchronization panel, where threshold parameters for frame

sync, subframe sync, and word sync are manually controllable.

D/A CDNTROl PANEL

Fij!;un:: (; lllI a urawin� vi W� f..Ii�ii..i.l/..

.r ... lv.s: (D/A) o.:uutlul vam::i wili.o.:h iii lucatw in l"ill;� ",

It is used primarily for testing. The large switch on the left is one which will step through the

127 D/A converters. During the self-test diagnostic routine, it will check automatically for 0
and 100 percent of voltage for calibration of each D/A. Manual control of the digital voltmeter
display is on this panel providing the monitoring of the voltage output of the D/A in the system.
172 ... A.. O[NTEl

_' · ......"' 0 Hue,..,..

: � b b 'o ·o ·O '0 b b'�

-: "''0 'b ''0 "0"0 "0 "0 '0'"<j
,"

'

o
•
•
-,

I I �r�T�1911
.,.

•
' '� '
O .'

•
,," ,,�,
��.

o
o/� If"
�

\
"

+
i
." :':'NC6r@ (. tt(j"","'-·-;:")
• " <0, j''''

� o
., .
.�. Of. ,�t 'N"'"
"

.., ..... .... � .. "

�. ,
o
.,.. ,. ,..
/
• ,,

o
DIG"'" >'(I"... ". " .,.
I
..."" ..un .• . ,.

0'·..... 0''''­
..'
""

0/' "'.c" o
•• -,

Figure 8-0/A control ponel.

The capability of checking any power supply in the system or using the voltmeter for any ex­

ternal input is available if desired.

SELF·TEST CONTROL PANEL

Figure 9 is the self-test control panel located behind the door in rack 1. It is utilized for

seU-checkingthe system. The system can be rW1 in several diagnOStic modes, utilizing the
PCM simulator in a closed loop to check the output devices,and ean run bit-error-rate curves
on the signal conditioners, again using the simulator in a closed lOOp mode. The simulator COIl­
tains a bit comparator which provides a direct reading of the bit- error rate of the Sig'nal
conditioner.

The core memory contains internal circuitry for sell-check which will allow the input of

the worst case pattern or its compliment (all I's, all O's), and it will automatically step through
this program.

PCM STORED PROGRAM SIMULATOR

Figure 1 0 is a simplified block diagram of the PCM stored program simulator. Stored
program is perhaps a misnomer in this case, as w e are actually procuring two simulators. A
manual simulator and a stored program simulator are both contained in the same rack and

share the same output perturbation circuitry, where nOise, jitter, or baseline variation are

added to simulate some tape-recorder characteristics.

 APOLLO NETWORK PCM OECOMMUTATlQti SYSTEMS 173

.. " '''' ,::.<".,.

0 0 0 0
...,."..", "n

0 0 0
iii
..,..
''''''' ' 0
'
''' .. ...,.. ,U' ""

:::>
@ Ie
, ,�.
.. �O. ' " "0.' .�O.,

<ll>
" - ,� " .. , .
-

'd)' '
,
,� ,,� ,..., ,- ,,� ,- ,- , ' ,

'\S)'
- , , • , , -

�'
. (J).'
--01"" -.
"',0.0>
o. .. ,...,

<ll> @ iii
'u''''''i(
'"'

ill @
" , , IVu.o.....
,,

"
'"'".." ••,,,... ""'t
�" ,- ..,,"
,., IT...' ...oo
." v' .." '" '''''I"..
....,. ''''0-

L""\
"

iii �';'::7.'"

:::>
0<IT�.11 ,.., ""
�
G'''''' ,,,,",,, � <""".,.". ,." ""
c
@ @
IIlI" Itl'

� 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D O
.------ ...,," 0.0« -----, ���

l1li
".0, 'r¢P/"" ". , • m m • , , • , ".

'��' �f
, ,."".. .,.,,"'" , r-OIA-,

...�..
". 'B "'"-'""1
''''' '''''' 0
"...'

c"".� ""
""" {7'"\ ill
"""" '" ,.-- "Ot ON ..." ("'"'"' ''--,
I r"'''''G '
,-"
''' ,'"
�' M '''''' "'" .. -
,- .,, ..
..

,��
iii!
..... """'.

0
,... "."t '"

&>
-....

@
"""
1«<11 """'"

,
,
, - ... ",to

'&
, ,

C
?
nOt ON

(J)
"'Of

@ @
" -

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
....' "" ,,,.,..11 scu.a
, ,

, • _.
, , . , "
'''XI> '''''' ...,., "",. CIt .. - ,.
,- ,

Figure 9-Self-test cot"llrol ponel.

MASTER CLOCK
AND CONTl!Ol

ClWjWRITE READ/�ESlORE

r 2� 19 "
I I
I
CORE Mf.MORY

I
MEMORY
OAfA

I I
REGISTER
I
COMPUTER -<
I I I
PAPER
-< �OGOAM I I
r-
PROGRAM TAPE Mf.MORY MEMORY OUTPUT

I I
INPUT
-<
INPUTS MANUAL "''' DISPlAY SECnON
SECTION

I
DATA

-<
MANUAL
ADDRESS I ,

! SULAl OAOA
l
, ,

.t. I
MEMORY
_ _ ADDRESS TO COO,

I I
lEGISTER CONDlllONERS

L -,- _ J

-8-
_

'O<MA' INDEX
COUNTERS UGISTHS

F i gvre I O-Block diogram of PCM stored program simulotor.

174 YI'.A. OErflEl

The stored program simulator portion has all the characteristics of the decam with respect
to core memory inputs. Data input to the memory can be manual, by computer, or by paper
tape. Data arc read from the memory core. Ten bits of every word in the memory contains

output data. A 19 bit memory. 2,048 words, provides many unique words in the format, many

more than could practical.1y be obtained with a manual simulator. The simulator, like the decam,

can contain up to ten fOrmats. These can be controlled and selected at its front panel or re­

motely tied into the computer in a closed loop mode [or remote checking of a site. The output
portion of the s imulator allows the addition of noise, calibrated with reference to a particular

bandwidth to the system for rW1ning: bit error rate curves. It provides fOr the addition of jitter,

again by known amounts, and baseline val'iation by known amounts to simulate the variOUS
characteristics encountered when utilizing: telemetry receivers and recorders in a playlJack

mode.

SIMULATOR CONTROL PANEL

Figure 11 is the control panel of the simulator. It is quite similar to the system control

panel of the decommutator, The first portion controls operatiunal functions and data register.

The next portion is utilized for blanking, which may be started anywhere in a serial bit stream
and stopped at any other point, manually selectable, The remainder of the control panel is for

output data control such as adding noise, jitter, or baseline variation, The last portion of the

bit comparator, where bit errors arc obtained when the serial bit stream (from the Simulator
to an RF link, into a PCM Signal conditioner, and out of the si�nal conditioner back into the
simulator) is compared with the simulator output. Any bit error or incorrect decision made by

the signal conditioner is indicated on this panel, which also contains the manual simulator

controls.

DECDMMUNICATION SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION

Figure 12 is a block diagram of the deconul1utation system distribution unit, which is the
main interface box for all the PCM's and other network equipment. All the inputs frum each

PCM which are going to be utilized on Apollo connect into this W1it. PCM outputs come into a

main patch panel where any PCM may be arbitrarily selected, and in case of a failure PCM 2
can replace PCM 1 and be utilized by selecting the proper format and replacing this patch panel
to output PCM 2 directly to all the outputs interfaced with PCM 1.

The primary function o f this W1it i s t h e handling of the evellt indications from the PCM,
which are utilized to switch on the event indicator lights on the consoles.

From the main patch panel the events are routed to an individual patch panel for each COI1-

sale and for the recorders, All 127 events from each PCM are connected t o individual console
patch panels in parallel. This panel provides the means for selectin� any 108 of these events

from each console. These 108 can Come from one PCM or any mixture of 108 events from

the three PCM's,

 APOLLO NETWORK PCM OEClldll)TATION SYSTEMS 175

I'M'.Il.o<IOI ceNUOl

• •
MOO!
TnT ova
T1'MI'

• •
(lC I'OWU M(M OO:Y
FAIl\J�E POWl;R
r--U T'--­
SINGlE
ITH
I
IINC;t,E
CVClI
fi;;
o
INm An

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o
lOA(I
10 II IJ 14 16 " '8 19

& 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 &;
I�

o
1(.0.0

\TOP lIT �M'

T(ST
B....NKI
.. ..C;

I]
�Ull!'

® o

,
_______

(;:=\\ IC N
"'
''
r
''

�
'''
'"' '' ''''
' '' '''
CPS
''':-
05C FR(Q . ....SHIN( /)ITU l ,
INCltASt
__

b
A A
OUT PUT O I CONI�(
9
t) -
- -----,,,-
-,-
- -,,
oc-
'
,,"'
ST
;;;-
- -' 110
0S �1!'
110
"OG��'I
OII; f (l

�
s ""'N

�
•

V
, 30 ,I.S ,.12 NOII!' LINt
2.5 '
SIC;
6 '

NAI.

O '8-! ,SV
-='
�lOOO �IO 3� �IS I O i?\\ 20
OC OFFS!:!
�
SV ,,.., IIG
J
•

- 0V1 - -18
0

U
...
COA�S.( FINt flXiO UN
·SIG O �UT'l1I :m OUTPUT f\JI'-CTION OUTPUT 100000Ct
liN AMPllTUOf

(fy
....\llINf VAIIAIION

O TPUT I,S( 11M{

"MPLIT\JOf

NRZ-C�� b
CHANGE ,...--!..:l.
F XED l OAT"
@
I 0 Nfl _ , --,

© �:=©::
"A.tA l.( 1 _ 1 0 , 0 _ 1 00
. � IOO - I():x)
�I-IOJ
. S 6
' rn
NU_M ' ,U
2
,S0 . 0!.
SIN �TlO
I'

U
I'OlA�II '( COUPlINC;
'( SH(cna 2. '
� N'C; @:.
OfF_ -'� B

Al
I 2 3
Off-
_

�IMN
• S
"C OC

?;
'OS
COO! rvn

��
P E OC OFFln
9

��
FIN(

�'
� �
"��
00000

r�.���s�����
JITTf! AM UIlKl '/N WAIts(
IMU A .I -
I6 7 8 9 CON 1 �
' � � - �2 �
:. IOI! 1( 1UO
I� A
.�2 J S 6 } $ 9 10 11 12 IJ " ,1 16 2 3 . , 1 12 1.714�
)� 16-
1 1� � ' $ ... 1 �. �
8 ... � 1 �
1 � · '
' � 1

COMMON SYLlAaU
0
SYllAalE 2 ---'
OOCOo()()()Qo�o
"'CT
'-cn 1-'
'

I 1 -' '-cn 3 -'

1 6 7 8 9 10 11 ') 10 " '6 J 4 6 1 8 9 10 ' 1 1 1 13 .. 1\ '6 1 1 . 8 ... 1 2 . 1 ... .!.3.�1l
, 1
0000 050000 Ci <.:X..)Cj@ o
I
,
SYlI.AIIU SVlLAalE ) '- CU . ... '-CT�

�
• o

NAnOW ....NO
I '" '- C T I 6'"

O(LAV
WI(lE ....NO ,. PAUI.�El
o· \:Y
, r:.:' -.

MO<>' eln ,/4 IllS

o o o ®
M" �!SH HAlT ITO_ OAT" IN

® ® ® ® ® ® ® ® ® ® ®
MANuAL COtINi[I <:lOCK GlC CONC.
OAfA
C COw.<ON
O"TA
1 , I' UlO4tS OUT G"Tt ST"U 0"'"
A(lOR,SS

Figvre 1 1 -PCM stored program simulator (:ol'llro! pone!.

Jii Ain PATCH PANEL

Figure 13 is the main patch paneL On the left hand side are events coming in and going out
[rom one, two, and three PCM's, 127 of them from each. On the right hand side are the analog
functions coming tn from the PCM's. These can be patched on this panel to the aeromedical
176 W. It OENTEL

CSM ' 1 TO CSM ' I

PATCH PANEL

CSM '2 EVENTS TO CSM .2

PATCH PANEL

EVEN� TO LEM CONSOLE

u.
PATCH PANEL
127 EvtNT$

127 EVENTS
FROM PCM '2 [VENT$ TO
lEM/SII!:a LEM/ S N: 8
PATCH PANEL

EVENTS TO flOC CONSOLE

SYNC 11'10 •• eVENTS TO

AEROMto CONSOle
AEROMfD
PATCH PANEL

ANALOG TO USB

"" - ,
_" ANALOGS
CONSOLE COMMAND
CONSOlE
If­_����������
PATCH PANEL

[VENT EVENTS TO
RECOftOER • 1
PATCH PANEL

eVENTS TO

PATCH PANEL

Figl,lre 12-Block diggrom of decommutolion distribvtion system.

console for biomedical fW'lctions, and to the aeromedical recorders. Also included on this
panel are a few other functions which tie the PCM's into other systems on the site. There are
outputs (rom the PCM analogs which are required for the exciter portion of the unified S-band.
These are analog spacecraft parame ters indicating the static phase error and automatic gain
control (AGe) range of the spacecran receiver. These are received by the I;Cround station.
decommutated. and converted to anal og form in the pCM station, then patched on this board
(rom the PCM station back to the unified S-band exciter panel [or utilization in obtaining up-link
lock. This is not required, but it is utilized as an aid for obtain ing up-link lock. PCM sync is
also sent to the exciter with this analog to let the operator know when the data he is receiving
 APOLLO NETWORK peW DECOIlll TATlON SYSTEMS 177

"

, .

Figure 13-Main patch panel.

is valid. Also on this panel are the seven

aeromedical-biomedical channels from the
Wlified S-band. Sub-carrier discriminator
outputs are brought to this panel as this Wlit
will interface with the aeromedical consoles.
There are two methods by which we can get
aeromedical information . One is the Wlified
S-band where it comes out of the sub­
carrier demodulators, and the second is
where it comes down on the PCM telemetry
bit stream.

EVENTS PATCHBOARD

Figure 14 is the patchboard for the

events. There are three sections here for
inputting from the three PCM decommu­
tators. A fourth section for the output of the
events is divided into groups of 36 patches to
correspond with the groups of 36 indicators
on the consoles.
Figure 14-Event$ patch panel.
178 W. A. DENTEL

PATCHBOARD PCM SYSTEM

Figure 15 is the existing patchboard PCM system located on the sites. The basic difference

between the present and soon-to-be-obtained systems is that the acquisition parameters of this

PCM and its distribution parameters must be manually patched up (using a patch board). How­

ever, it does have the capability of containing four PCM formats which can either be selected

locally or remotely. It has just about the same output capability, except that the D/A's and
on/off events are limited to 100 rather than to 127. It is, of course, a larget' system in physical

size than what is being purchased .

110\\ IXI
, . "
I(\)IPI.��I

"

"

P�RIIY
suenslw

1 · I (l · PA�At l Jl
(1)/;V1RSI()�
SUSSVSIlM AU�llIARY
suesysl,_"

IOI!M,I,I
SIIICIIO/j
"
.�
OiSf'lAY
SU�SYSIIM "

81��Y AND
Olel""-I
DISPLAYS
SUBSYSJ(M

BIIS/WD. /
f�1 SU8fR
TIMING
PI.I.SIS

, ,
MlAlIPlI�

"

1(1 (XI I()UIP��NI

F i gure 15-Patchboord PCM �yltem.

180
 APOllO N ETWORK
REMOTE SITE COM PUTER SYSTEMS

by

E. Willis

Goddard Space Flight Center

ABSTRACT

A brief description of the 1218 remote site data processor currently being
utilized on the Manned Sp:1ce Flight Nctwon< (MSFN) is presented, including
bl"icf discussion of the systems configuration and the present c3IXlbilities In
Gemini misSion:;. New computer systems which arc to be install€<! on all of the
AVOlio sites arc also included. This covers the:

a. UNIVAC MOD-()42B computer

b. UNIVAC 1540 magnetic tape units

c. UNIVAC 1259 TTY adaptor

d. UNIVAC 200$/10 data transmission units

c. UNIVAC model 1000 CAM adapter and Greenwich mean time (G:\lT) bu.ffer

f. Motorola TP-4QOO 3000 word per minute line printer

g. U",IVAC 1299 distribution swltchload

h. COnsote computer interface adapter.

INTROOUCTION

The data processing system selected for Apollo remote Sites is being manufactured and

assembled by the UNIVAC Military Systems Division located In St. Paul, Minnesota. The com­

puter, the UNIVAC 642B, is designed to meet military specifications. There will be two identi­
cal computing subsystems located on each of the remote sites for the Apollo network. These
systems are identical in every respect with the exception of the mission req\lirements which
w ill be assigned to them. One comp\lter will process telemetry data, and the second will per­
[arm command functions.

6428 MODIFIED COMPUTER

The 642B modified computer shown in Figure 1 has the following characteristics:

1. It is a general-purpose, medium-scale, SOlid- state, parallel, binary machine.

181
182 E . WILLIS

2. The main memory is magnetic core, ca­

pable of being randomly accessed.

3. It has overlap memory capability which

can increase the execution speed of vari­
ous programs.

4 . It has a 2 . 0 microsecond read-write cycle

time and a 30-bit word length.

5. There is a storage capacity of 32,768

' .
words, directly addressable, half or full
word operands which can be increased to
131,072 words, directly addressable.

6 . Sixteen input and sixteen output channels

;:::::::.�: : :
are provided and all input/output transfers
are under full buffer control.
,.

7. With these sixteen I/O channels there arc

eighty-one Wlique interrupts.

Other features of the computer are:

1. Channel priority can be determined by the

software with very minor adjustments
Figure 1-6248 modified computer.
made to the hardware.

2. Input/output (I/O) control, which is accomplished with len basic instructions, pro­
vides positive control over the I/O and a h.igh. degree of sophistication in programming.

3. The continuous data mode capability will allow for automatic reinitiation of previously
established bu[fers W"lder program control. The termination of the buffer is also pro­
gram controlled.

4. Externally specified addressing features enable a data word to be stored or read from

an address directly specified by an external device.

5. Thc externally specified indexing capability can be used to transfer data words indirectly
speCified by the external device. The external device specifies the address of the buffer
control word for the particular transfer.

Periph.eral devices required to complete the computing system are;

1 . 1540 magnetic tape W"lit.

2. 1232 input/output console.

3. 2010 data transmission unit.

4. Console computer interface adapter.

 APOLLO NETWORK REMOTE SITE COMPUTER SYSTEIIS 183

5. High-speed buffer, tranSlator, and

printer. ...
-, ,.... .... .�..�-
-- ,

. .
, .. '

6. 1000 interface system adapter. \I ' . •

7. TTY adapter.
l
1259

1540 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT

The 1540 magnetic tape Wlit shown in

Figure 2 is designed to military specifica­

(
tions. Significant features o f the tape unit
are:

1. Air-cooling requirements will oper­

ate at normal conditioned room tern­
atures with no special ducting of the
I
air.

2 . The t a p e transports are shock­

mounted inside the cabinet.

3. The tape transports will handle 1/2

inch mylar tape.
f
4. The maximum writing and reading t··,
operations are 120 inches per second.
': f
f
I '
Rewind operations can be 240 inches
per second.

5 . The recording densities are 200, 556

or 800 frames per inch. Figure 2-1540 magnetic tape unit.

6. The recorded tapes will be compatible from transport to transport within the sys­
tem and with IBM 727, 72911, 729IV, and 729VI magnetic tape sets.

7. Each set of magnetic tape units will have duplexing capability. Either magnetic tape
system can communicate with either computer during operations. The same is true for
each of the computers.

UNIVAC 1232 INPUT/OUTPUT CONSOLE

The UNIVAC 1232 input/output console is shown in Figure 3. This unit consists of the
�p8 ;::��to c!cct.ic ,·c..ueJ, wid�jL wili rt!au 5-, o-, "i- or ti-level oiled, or dry paper and mylar
tape at 30 inches per second or 300 characters per second. The tape punch can punch 5-, 6-,
7-, or 8-level tape at the rate of 11 inches per second or 110 characters per second. The key­
IJoard input/output capablllty Is 10 characters pt:r st:cond, with 72 characters per llne.
18' E. WILLIS

-.m ..
�

Jl . . •
..

I
" ' '

-
,

.
,

:
�

.
•• •
-
--

.. ,

Figure 3-UNIVAC 1232 input/output comole.

UNIVAC 1259 TELETYPE ADAPTER AND

MODIFIED ASR-28 SET
Figure 4-UNIVAC teletype adopter all,
The UNIVAC 1259 teletype adapter and modif.ed ASR-28 �t.
modified ASR-28 set shown in Fib'Ure 4, con­
sists of:

Page printer which will accept TTY codes

at a maximum rate of 1 0 CM.I'acters per
second. "'000 ."'!lIIACI
SVSTI.. AOAPT[I

Type reperforator (A)

Type reperforator (6) l'GIO DAU

'LANK 'UNSMI\\OON OAT"

Tape reader (transmitter/distributer)

Keyboard

Au:d.liary line relay Figure �-Peripherol communicolions system.

Teletypew riter adapter (which provides the necessary interface between aU

the 1259 units and the 6428 modified computer.)

PERIPHERAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM IFigure 5)

Data Transmission Units

The purpose of the data transmission unit (DTU) and the commWlication complex is to pro­
vide computer-controlled input and output commWlication between remote site communication
 APOLLO NETlIORK REMOTE SITE COMPUTER SYSTEMS 185

lines and the UNIVAC 6428 computer. The DTU's are each designed to permit independent
operation. The DTU is also designed to provide a 8- or lO-bit parallel transfer between the
computer "and the DTU. The transfer rate of the data will be determined by the clock supplied
from 2 05 modulator/demodulator. The DTU is capable of transferring serial data to the sub­
set at speeds of 80,000 bits per second with only minor modifications consisting of adjustment
of four delay cards.

Contained in the same DTU cabinet is the UNIVAC Model 1000 interface system adapter.
This adapter consists of a timing buffer which will receive parallel Greenwich mean time (GMT)
from the station timing system and input GMT to each of the two computers with one-second
granularity.

The second purpose of this adapter is to multiplex five computer address matrix keyboards
located on the flight control consoles to one of the computer channels.

Console/Computer Inter'ace Adapter CCIA (Figure 6)

This Wlit provides the means of commWlications between seven flight control display con­
soles and both the telemetry and command computers. The CClA consists of two identical
sections, which are independent in all respects, including their source of power. One section
will service four consoles and the second section will service three consoles. At least three
consoles will be completely operational in the event of a failure in any portion o[ the system.

In Figure 7, it will be seen that each section of the CCIA consists of four major subsystems.
First is the concentrator unit which sequentially inputs the position of all keyboard switch con­
tacts into a 1218 computer. The 1218 com-
puter has a four kilobit memory capacity and
is programmed to detect actuation of any
SWitch, establish commWlication with both
DISCRETE
the telemetry and command computers, and
to format and translate data directed from
these computers to the distribution and stor­
age Wlit. This distribution subsystem pro­
MOTOROLA
vides the signals [or the keyboard button PRINTER
indicators, the wall- mounted clocks, and the INTERFACE

....�
.
digital- to -analog converters. Analog voltages
M UlTlllPLEX "'
derived from the digital-to-analog converter
unit drive eight channel pen recorders which
are associated with four of the consoles.

The uuffer unit and a translator unit for

six Motorola TP 4000 printer units shown in
Figure 8. are rm('bg<:'d L'! the CCLA. �::�t b"t
are not a part of it. The buffer and trans·
lator serve as the interface between the six Figure 6-Console computer interface adapter.
186 E. WILLIS
COMMAND &
DI$PL.A.'l' CONSOLES
r
I
COMMAND &DATA REQUEST KEYBOARDCONTACTS -,
SATURN/lEM

;
SYSTEM CON!.OlE

I
SWITCH
CONCEN-

'I<-
DISTil:

f+I
THEMETRY SECTION NO. TRATOR
COMPUTER COMPUTER GATES &

I
KEyBOARDS
6-(28 (MOO) 1218 STORAGE LEM SYSTEM
1,),5,7

I I
CONSOLE

I DI GITAL
I
1 1"('1'" SECTION I
'0 CSM SYSTEMS
ANALOG

I I
CONSOLE NO. 2

+
(nNVFRTFR� -
NO. 1 , ,

I I
TO WALL TO STRIP
MTO CLOCKS RCORS T,J
� - - - - - - - - - - - - �
CSM SYSTEMS
CONSOLE NO. I
- - - - -

I
r -
1
SWITCH
I
I
t
CONCEI'''·

I<-
COMMAND SECTION N O . 2 DISU FLIGHT DYNAMICS
TRATOR

I
COMPUT£R COMPUTER GATES & OFFICE CONSOLE
KEYBOARDS

I
1>0128 (MOD) 1216 STORAGE
2,',6

I
I I
COMMAND

I eCIA SECTION
COMMUNICATORS

I
CONSOLE
D IGITAL
"".

I NO. 2
w
DRIVERS

I
ANALOG

I
CONVERURS
'-----
� I
AEROMEDICAL

L
MONITOR
TO WAll TO TRI P
CONSOLE
MTO CLOCKS KORS 2.'
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J

F igure 7-Block diogram - console computer interface adopter.

high-speed printers and both the

telemetry and command computers.

Each printer Wlit is small in size

and is quiet, smokdess, odorless,

and residue-free while operating at

speeds up to 3000 words per minute.

Its paper capacity is equivalent to

30,000 lines of print with each line

containing 72 characters (SOO feet).

The last item of equipment to

be described (Figure 9) docs not fall

in the category of peripheral devices,
but it is a vital part of the system

interconnection. This is the digital

signal distribution switchboard, type

88-1299. A single switchboard may

Figure 8-Motorolo TP40Q pri nter �1. contain 10 independent, manually
 APOLLO NETWtJRK REMOTE SITE COMPUTER SYSTEMS 187

operated, 68-pole, 3-posiUon switches. Each site requires

two of these switchboards.

APOLLO OATA PROCESSING SYSTEM OPERATION

The Apollo data processing block diagram (Figure 10)

shows the interconnection between the computing system
and the other remote site systems. In the normal mode of
operation one 642B computer will process data for display
on the flight control consoles and format telemetry data for
transmission to the Mission Control Center. The second
6428 computer will process, validate and store commands
for transmission to the spacecraft.

If either computer fails, a third program may be loaded

into the remaining computer. This program will have the
capability of processing data for both display and command.
Atpresent it is anticipated that part of the display capability Fi gure 9-0i9itol si9nol distribution
switchboard, type SP-1 299.
may not be accommodated due to the size and speed limits

�2- a COMPUHR
I
T
""
1 �
1540
'" ,�
M'G
� �
,-
ADAPT ADAPT '"

+
ANALOG
....
TAPe
UN IT
"'
ReCORDER
,. )
PRINTER
8lEHR &
TTY ,
,

�
SHIP
"
TRANS ,
�"
,
T, ,

.
$/'
1 232 "' ..... CLOCKS
'<OM
PRINTER '"
(3)
,
BLFFER
'/0 UP- DATA "SO
CONSOLE , ,., - - � SCO/UHF
OM' ,m
, CCIA
PANH
T
) ) (DUAL SWITCH
'"
"SO
TIME
DUAL ,
,
_ MONITOR
Ct1AN) ,. )
L
'" 8 UFF ER
GM' ,
.m
, ____

)
'"'
1232
)
.... p,
'"
)

f--> r-
'/0
( 12)
, /.ICVG
CONSOLE
,
1 540

-� .
....
)
OSOU
"'''
M'G )

, �1 .00<.I
TAPE ,

T
r ,m I
�
DUPLEX
DTU ( <I )
UNIT )
I ;eM
I
T,
,
I

, I H I
, , , , -

nY , , , SIM •
, .CO
ADAPT , I , , +
� � ,
.l. + - - - -
COMMAND
642- a COMPUTER
DATA FLOW

Fi9ure l O-Apollo dato proce�s i ng system, block dio9ram .

188 E. 'ILLIS

of the computer. The limitations will be defined further after the computer program has been
developed. In the failure mode, peripheral devices required for either command or display
functions will be switched to the remaining computer manually at the 1299 switchboard. Units
which will not require switching include the following:

a. The I/O console

b. The 1259 TTY adapter

c. The GMT buffer

d. The 1540 magnetic tape unit

Each computer has these Wlits connected directly to it.

The I/O console will be uUlized malnly for ma1ntenance and check-out of the system. It is
anticipated that the teletype input to the console will be utilized mainly as a backup to the high­
speed input. The GMT buffer will input time to correlate up-link clock words and to time-tag
telemetry data. The 1540 magnetic tape units will be utilized for storage of computer programs,
background data, command loads, and tables for conversion of parameters to engineering units.
A high-speed printer will be located in the computer rOOm to provide a high-speed read-out to
the computer technician. It is anticipated that he will be required to assist the flight control
team in monitoring command loading and transmission.

Figure 11 indicates the block diagram of sites which do not have flight control consoles.
These sites will not contain either a ceIA, memory character vector generator, cathode ray
tube (CRT) displays or consoles with associated keyboard, analog recorders and spacecraft
clocks. One high-speed printer will be provided for Management and Operations personnel.

Figure 12 indicates telemetry data flow. Data received from the pulse-code modulation
(PCM) station will be processed by the telemetry computer and formatted for transfer to the
MCVG. Data displayed on the CRT will be refreshed from the MCVG. Selection of data to be
displayed on the CRT will be made from the data request keyboard (DRK). Parameters in the
various display formats will be limit-sensed by the computer. Indications will be given on the
DRK of formats which contain out-aI-limit parameters. Analog functions from the telemetry
data to be displayed on recorders associated with the systems consoles will be stripped from
the telemetry data by the computer and routed to digital/analog (D/Al converters in the CCIA.
The D/ A converters will be hard-wired to the recorders. Selection of one of six groups of
parameters can be made by a switch on the recorder.

The selection of a format by positioning the switch will generate instructions for the com­
puter through the CCIA. The 642B computer will perform the selection or switching function
of the analog parameters. Spacecraft clocks contained in the telemetry bil stream will be for­
matted by the computer and transferred to the CCIA for driving in-line digital displays. Pro­
vision has been made for transferring 16 additional off/on indications from the computer to the
CCIA. These functions will be terminated on the decom system distribution W'Iit and may be
utilized similarly to off/on stores to the PCM. Data to be displayed on the high speed printer
may be selected from the DRK.
 APOLLO NETWOR� REMOTE SITE COMPliTER SYSTEMS 189

I 6-12- 8 COMPUTER

t t t
4-
1259 15(0

�
'" MAG 'AM 'AM
A,OA,PT A,l)APl

•
rA,PE "
TTY UNIT PRINTER
8l.HER &.
TUNS

.....
1 2J2 "
"M
0/0 PRINTER

I-'
(3) UP- OATA "'"
CONSOLE ,., 8lFFER SCO/UHF
'm

r-
"'" OUA,l SWITCH
TIME GM' ",
MONITOR
'" BUffER RCVR

1232
';0
CONSOLE

15(0
�G

�
TA,P[ 2010

t TTY
UNIT
..... OUPlEX
OTU ( ( )
MODEM

12$9 .oM
"M
nv

; !
A,OAPT

6012-8 COMPUTER

f igure I I -Block diogrom of sile wilho",t flight cOl'ltrol console.

A 5X5 CAM matrix will be located on each of the systems consoles. This panel will permit
the flight controllers to communicate with the computer. A three-digit number plus mode indi­
cations may be transferred to the computer from the CAM. The data format to be transferred
to MSCC may be selected from the DRK. The data is then transferred to the DTU in either
eight- or ten-bit bites, converted!rom parallel to serial format and transmitted over the high
speed modulator/demodulator . Telemetry summary messages from other sites or the control
center may be input to the computer for storage through the teletype adapter. This data is then
available for display on the CRT at the flight controllers command.

Commands and command loads will be transmitted from mission control center (MCC) over
high-speed lines to the 642B compute r. The computer will perform error checking functions
as the data is stored in the command computer. It will also be output to the 1540 magnetic tape
I;,it fol' stoal.ge.
U Im1ication that a commanci loaci has been receiveci wili be provided to the
computer technicians and to the flight controllers on the high speed printer.

Off/on stores indicating spacecraft equipment status will he !'ltrippen from fhl'! p("M form:!t
by the decom and loaded to the computer. This data will then be utilized to drive the command
panel displays through the CClA. Switch selections of the command panel will be converted to
computer instruction by the CCIA. The command panel will contain modulator selection
switches, load and clock selections, and real time command switches. Sixteen miscellaneous
190 E. WILLIS

I
� �,
().j2- e COMPUTER

,
; r ,
:
;
,

§ @]
m' 1540 ,
,
M'G
(5)
HY ,
.-

•• ADAPT
AOAPT TAPE ANALOG
+
, "
UNIl , PRINTER ,
- �!COROER
TTY
, BUFfH & , ,. , ... ------ ,
' SHIP I
..;
,

�
, TRANS
, • CP I
,
, , 6429 I
L_ _ _ J
"�e _ _

.....
1232 " -,
-
CLOCKS
,eM
eU'HR --> sea/UHF
'/0 PRINTER " , UP· DATA US.
0'
CONSOLE " ,

if
eCIA CM' ""
US.
TIME
DUAL
OM'
,
,
(OUAl
CHAN) � PANEl
" ,
SWITCH
,,, MONITOR
«' BUfFa , RCVR

�G
,
,
1232 ,,,

G§
I
0/0
CONSOLE I -- MCVC; -
(12)
I

�
\ 54 0

-� ; I
I
M'G osou
I

iny
TAPE "'''

�-,
I
ON" I OUPLEX MO 'M
, OTU (4)
L ':M
m.
•
_ _ - - - - - - - - -

"M
HY

f
MCe

1
ADAPT

I THEMETRY
- - - -

1>t2 - e COMPUTER
DATA FLOW

figure 12-Telemetry dolo flow.

off/on functions have been provided at the CCIA. These off/on stores will be utilized to provide
miscellaneous outputs from the command computer.

When the command transmission is desired by the flight controller, he will depress the
assocated switch on the command panel. The selection transferred to the computer will cause
the selected data to be transferred to the up-data buffer and consequently, up-link to the space­
craft via either the Unified S-Band (USB) or UHF transmitte r.

Two command validation loops are available. One loop samples the transmitted command
throughout the monitor receiver for comparison in the compute r. The other validation loop
consists of message acceptance pulse data received from the spacecraft through the PCM sys­
tem. Diagnostic routine may be utilized in real time by the computer to check the status of
the command-transmitting system and the ground validation loops even during times of no com­
mand transmission. This greatly increases the level of confidence in the equipment in that the
malfunctions will be discovered very rapidly.

Results of the diagnostic routines may be recorded on the high-speed printer. Summary
data, acknowledgment of valid data receipt, or a request for the data retransmission may be
transmitted to the control center on the high-speed lines. This message could also be trans­
mitted to the control center over the teletype adapter. This method as anticipated will be
utilized stricUy for backup and fOr simulations.
 APOLLO DIGITAL COMMAND SYSTEM

by
C. B. Knox

Goddard Space Flight Center

ABSTRACT

The presentation explains the purpose of thl! commaoo system, the com­
mand word structure, the on-Site equipment configuration, and the operational
c:q:abil ilies of Ihe command system. The p.lrpose of the command system is
{
'xplained utili1.ing typical commands employt:d during a miSSion. Different
Apollo/Saturn command tylX'S are also itemi�.ed fOT each vchlclf.J. An explana­
tion of the command word structure demon.strates how each vehicle and vehicle
system Is addn.'ssed and updated. This c1<pianation will also include the pur­
pose aoo usc of th(' sub-bit codes and error codes used in the Apollo command
system. Diagrams art? utilized to prcs<'nt the on-site equipment configur:l.tions
and how they p::IrUcipulc in the command system. The discussion will include
the {unction, associat(>d capability, and purpose of each unit in the system. The
operalion.1.i capabilities and prQccdurcs wUi also be prcsented . In concluSion,
the prescntation will diSCUSS a typical data transmission from its origin at the
control center to the trnnsmission at the remote site.

INTRODUCTION

The purpose of the Apollo digital command system (DCS) is to provide a means for com­

municating with and controlling the spacecraft's equipment from the groWld . Some commands
are identified before the launch; others arc developed by the computing complex at the Mission

Control Center (MCC) in Houston during the mission.

The commands identified before the mission are the type that are to be executed at selected
intervals during the mission. One of these commands may be sent several times from one or
more ground stations. For example, a command requesting a tape playbac k of spacecraft re­
corded data may be sent by all stations once or twice during a mission.

Other commands developed during the mission by the MCC computers would ordinarily be
sent only once by one station. However, if the transmission were not successfully accomplished
by the selected station, it would be retransmitted hy :tnt)th�r station l:ltc, d ...ir;g n',€ r..,is�iulL.

An example would be the correct time for the spacecraft computer. The time of the spacecraft
computer is telemetered to the ground stations. If this parameter does not agree with the in­

dicated ground time, a command will be sent to the Spac.fH'r:tft <:0mp'clter th.:lt wi!! ..pdat€ tli<:

timing system with. th.e correct time.

191
192 AP(IlLO DIGITAL CO....ANO
. SYSTEM

COMMAND WORD STRUCTURE

General Purpose

The command word is configured so that each command will only be accepted by the selected
spacecraft if it has the correct vehicle address, systems address, bit structure, and word length.
The vehicle address requirement is obvious. The system address is required to differentiate
between the RTC, AGe, and CTE �ysiems aboard the vehicle. The hit structure employs sub-
bit coding for security measures.

The philosophy for secure up-data transmission is to insure that the command word will be
rejected by the spacecraft if it is not the exact command word transmitted. Measures have been
taken in all phases of the up-data transmisSion system to insure that the chances of the space­
craft accepting an invalid command is I x 1 O - � . In the ground -lo-air link each information bit
is encoded into five sub-bits to insure the nonvalid command rejection ratios.

Bit Arrangement Isee Figure 11

S -fir BIN SPC AND RTC
35 BITS
The general bit arrangement is as fol­
eSM/UM en 011 TEST
�o BITS
lows: Bits 1-3, vehicle address identifica­

"�
tion; bits 4-6, system address identification;

".{, �:=]
�
bits 7-remainder, system instructions. Each
"'/C£M
12 BITS
information bit in the transmission is en­
VA SA
DATA
coded into five sub-bits to insure spacecraft

Hoi.[.101111]I[0iClIIQIliololC
lltJ
l ol,I,JOjIloJI
I 'IIJ,ICJ
rejection of nonvalid words. The sub-bits
ClII'IOi,I,I

su.� � �
are transmitted at a 1 kilocycle rate. Ad­
ditional precaution is taken by encoding the
BITS
vehicle address bits with a different code VA CODE SYSTEM ADDRESS AND
than the remainder of the information bits. OATA CODE IS THE SAME
Normally, the sub-bit code for a zero is the
Figure ]-Apollo/Soturn commond structure.
complement of the sub-bit code for a aI/e.
Also, the CSM, LEM, and S-IV-B plan to use
the same sub-bit codes. Either of these parameters, codes for sub-bits ONES/ZEROS being
complementary or sub-bit codes for aU space vehicles, could be different.

Tables 1 , 2, 3, and 4 describe the bit structure of the varous commands.

In Table 1, data is MSB first - Each RTC is unique, Maximum number of RTC is 26 '" 64.

Tnbl(' 1
In Table 2, data is MSB first. The five bit data
words represent the following 1 8 symbols: verb, CSM/LEM Reat Tim<' Commands (RTC).

noun, key release, errur reset, enter, clear, plus, Identification

Bits
minus, 0, 1, 2 , 3, 4 , 5 , 6, 7 , 8, and 9. Symbols are
transmitted in unique sequences to farm computer 1 ·' Vehicle Addrt'ss
4-(j System Address
up-dates.
7- l � RTC Instruction
 c. B. KNOX 193

Every effort is made to insure that the commands generated at the Mission Control Centcr
are transmitted safely to the remote site and from the remote site to the spacecraft. RedWldant
data ci:rcuits are employed between the Mission Control Center and the remote site to insure
that the command reaches the site. Backup requirement is utilized at the remote site where­
ever possible. Also alternate data paths are used within some of the remote site equipment.

We must not only have the facilities for transmitting commands, but must also insure that
only valid commands are transmitted. Various means are used throughout the system to insure
that the chances of transmitting a nonvalid command are 1 x 1 0 * 9 .

Specific Types of Commands

The Command Service Module (CSM) and the Lunar Excursion Module (LEM) will use the
same command format for similar commands. The S*IV-B will use similar formats but the
word length is different from th.e CSM/LEM commands.

CSM/LEM Real Time Commands

The real time commands (RTC) are commands that are known and identified before the
launch.. These commands are the on/off variety that are used to control the spacecraft sys­
tems. For example, dump tape recorder playback, ON or OFF, C*band radar beacon, ON or
OFF; telemetry mode select, ONE or TWO.

CSM/LEM, ApollO Guidance Nayigational Computer

The Apollo guidance navigational computer (GNC) commands will provide updated informa*
tion to the spacecraft computer. This will enable the spacecraft computer program to be up­
dated or varied due to the new information developed during the mission.

CSM/LEM Central Timing Equipment

The central timing equipment (CTE) will receive correct timing data wherever there are
indications that the spacecraft timing system is not accurate .

S-IV-8 Real Time Commands

:. c not been ideniiGt:d at this Hme but they will per­

The S-IV-B real tim!> ("I)mmands t-,::y

form the same on/off functions as the CSM/LEM RTC if implemented.

S-!Y-8 C�rn::::.:tar-Stuiad Frugram Commands

The S-IV-B compute r-stored program commands (SPC) will incorporate timing and com­
puter instructions. These commands will perform the same function as th-e CSM/LEM.
GNC, and CTE commands described earlier.
194 C.S. KNOX

Tahll' 2 Tabl.... :1

CS�1/LE"'1 Cl' nl ra l Timing F:(luipml'nt (CTE)

CS�I/ LE�l Ap·o l l o Guidance Na\"ig-ational

Bi ts
C<lmpu\('I" (G:->C).
Identification

Bib; Identification
1-3 Vl'hkle ,\(ill!'!-!;,;
S.I·stem A(hlr�'ss
\\'hit'!c Alill n.'S5
4-G
1 ·:1
4-'-' Sl"sl�'m Addr�'ss
,-12 SC'C"IIOS

,
1 : '\ - 1 1< l\!inl.ltt's
1\)-24 !I<)lIr�
Pal'i\I'
8 - 1 :! S,' mImi
5.1 mImI CO ml )I{' nwnl
25-jO 0:1.'"5
) :\- \ ..

IS-:!t S.I" mhul [{qwal

Tahl,' '\

In Table 3, data is LSB first. Bits 24 S - I V - I I c:,:umpul{'r-SloIT 1'I'(Y,:" ';I1ll Cummand

and 30 aTe zero fillers since five bits are ISPC) '

sufficient to specify 24 hours or 31 days.

Il i l s ldl'nlifi('al ion

\-:1
In Table 4. olle 35 bit transmission con­
Vehkll' ,\ddl'<:s�
stitutes one syllable. Each set of four syl­ �-I; S,'Sltm .-\(ldl'l'SS
lables is followed by an execute command. i-l0 /I.1C"SS!lg{' Conlrol I nf<),'Illal ion
11 O('{'o,kr Addn'ss
J�
The execute command is initiated followin�
�ks!;>lg{' Conlrul Info rmali " n
spacccr,lft verification of the four syllables. 1 :: - 1 4 l'p-d:Ha
1 .-, - 1 " lk\'l�ll'r '\,111"l's';
1!1-:!,j { 'P-(\alil
Error Coding :!,; l ) " " ,�I{'r ,\(hllT_�S
:! (j -:!" CP-l!:!I"
The previous command word descrip­ l!) -::Il T"g" Hil
:n _:1.-, O(,{",)(I",' .-\(Idr('ss
tions have pertained to the transmission of

data from the remote sites to the spacecraft.

The communication link between the computing complex at Houston, where the commands

are generated. must also be protected to maintain the nonvalid command rejection ratio of

1 ;. 1 0 - 9 .

Proposed Code

The Base-Chaudhuri' cock has been proposed as a means for obta ining the required error

detection capabilities, Since many factors of the missions and the computer programs are not
completely defined at this time, this proposal may vary before actual implementation, However.
the final product will probably be very similar to the proposed system,

The Base-Chaudhuri code has the follow inv; characteristics:

1. Probability of an undetected errol' may be stated essentially independent of transmission

line error statisticS.

2, Detects all bUJ'st �!rrors equal to or less than " \.: in lenv;th.

·11",,·., ,\. M. ( "mm" ,,,1 1''''0'''( I", ,h,· Iti"h 81,,·,-,t n,,(,. t,(nk, Ph,ko'MSC.
 APOLLO DIGITAL COI.tiANO SYSTEM 195

3. F.robability that an error goes undetected when the burst length equals n - k ' 1 is:

4. Probability that an error goes undetected when the burst length is greater than n - k is:

where n =< total number of bits per word, and k '" number of information bits per word.

For a Base-Chaudhuri code where n = 57

k 30,

49 � 10-8

The parameters selected in the example are compatible with the equipment characteristics

and insure the desired error detection capability.

Proposed Operation 01 the Command System

It has been proposed to operate the command system in three modes:

Mode L Used at sites with flight controllers. The command is generated at Houston,
transmitted to the site, validated and stored in the command data processor. At
the selected time, a flight controller at the remote site selects the command for

transmission and the command Is sent to the spacecraft.

Mode 2. Used at sites without flight controllers. The command is generated at HOllston,

transmitted to the Site, validated, and stored in the command data processor. At

the selected time, a flight controller at Houston sends an execute command to the
remote site and the command is then sent to the spacecraft.

Mode 3. Also used at sites without flight controllers. The command is generated at Houston,

transmitted to the remote Site, and immediately sent to spacecraft if it is validated

by the I;ummanci data processor .

GENERATION AND TRANSMISSION OF A CSM/GNC COMMAND Isee Figure 2)

The computing centers at Houston will be receiving telemetry and tracking data from all
the remote sites. This data will be monitored to determine if any command action is necessary.
If the spacecraft 1s to change orbits by ground command and the spacecraft computer needs new

instructions, the necessary data will be generated by the mission computers. Error coding
196 C. a. KNOX

""
y ";:o'�n f::;:
.�
SWITCHBOARD
.0/

'i'
nOM

:(
nY
MCC
' "DAPTn
1259
UM � � '�o

' 1)
CMD
,

,;'6(.
TIMING .IT"-. -
·,i ,;
"M DATA
WffER
'.!.
:/.'i!M
DATA

i\i� ",0-
CESSOit
I '.,'
�

gMA��; �
""
H2 - 8

,"

� f-'
,co
NO '

!.CV, N6 '.f
:"
� u

-.j
seQ
NO '
,,�" .
CONSOlE COMPUTE� INTERFACE ADAPTOIt (CCIA)
I ,
I 'C¥> NO f
C ���
SYST£MS
LE CONSOLE
<A'
COMM
NO ' CONSOlE NO NO '
��
"'
'"
'--
"'
".
"
'"
-
' '
"
'"
'-- '--
"'
".
' CM
DECOMM
'"' lY
.CV'

F igure 2-Apo!to digitol command �ystem.

detection bits will be added to the format and the data will be transmitted to the appropriate

site at 2400, 1200 or 600 bits per second. The data processor is also capable of receiving and
transmitting over teletype circuits. Should the high speed circuits or eqUipment become unus­
able, the teletype circuits will be used.

Command data will be transmitted to the remote sites in data blocks. Each data block will

consist of sub-blocks. The number of sub-blocks per block will vary with each transmission:

however, each sub-block will contain the same number of bits. 5 7 . (Three extra bits may be
used for data synchronization which would make each sub-block 60�bits long since multiples of

30 would easily adapt to the remote site equipment).

The first sub-block of each load would be an introductory sub-block. This sub-block would

contain bits as shown in Table 5 .

The remaining sub-blocks of each load will vary with the type of data being transmitted:
however, each sub-block will always contain 27 bits for errOr protection.

MCC-H Remote Site Validation

The data transmission is received at the remote site via the high speed data circuits. The

command data processor accepts the data fOr validation if it has the correct site address. The
 APOLLO OIGIlAL CO�ANO SYSTEM 197

:-';U!\lhl'1" "r flits I{knt i ri"a 11011

; 51:!li,,,, \ddn' ...; s (t'''IJ:lhl\- vi" ad(h'{'sSi llg :11 "lalh,nSI

" Suli, l1ln,."k ID (capal)le Of id"IIUr.,· ing R 1I1<)(l\-sl

3 \·dli,.. l,· .-\,1< 1,..."" ( '''p:,hk of i{!<'lIlifl"ing � \"l'hi<-h'sl

" 5,",'1,'''' :, In'ss ({·'I I.ml)l\" vf a(ldn'ssin� s "[,,li" lls)

, Sul)- i'I''';'k Cm.llll I:Ol'lllitks nUlllhl'l" "r ,,,,h-hl,,d,s 1><""
hl,.)("k: ('apahk of 1.',til

, £Xl't·u\{' I V ( 1ll;1.'· 1)(, us{�l addl"{"Ssing- ('vmmands SIOI'{'d

;a thC' I"",mute Sill' o r mal' '·,ontain (Imal
., -
-, 1:: 1"1"<>1' p,'Oiection

processor then performs the following checks to determine if the command is

valid:

1 . Checks the error coding,

2. Checks the vehicle and systems address,

3. Checks the command word structure,

If the command is validated, it is then tagged and stored in the processo r's memory and

printed out on the high speed printers near the consoles. If the command is not validatE'd, a

retransmission is automatically requested by the data processor. The data are then transfer­
red to the magnetic tape Wlit for storage. Both the telemetry data processor and the command
data processor have access to the magnetic tape unit. If the command data processor experi­
ences a failure, the commands will be transferred from the tape unit to the telemetry data
processor, The telemetry data processor will then be programmed to perform the (Tifif-fll
fWlctions of command and telemetry data processing.

Flight Control Console

The flight control consoles contain the pushbutton command nlatrix for init iating commands

and indicators for displaying events associated with the commands. Each of the four systems
consoles and the capsule communicator console has the capability of transmitting 36 real time
commands, a clock r.ommam1 , ;lnn ;l <:"QfJ1f)l.!tf'r lo�(I

Each console can be used for initiating commands to any vehicle by interchanging the mask

overlays. The mask overlay has the proper coding to identify itself as the CSM system number
1 console or any of the other systems console s .

When the flight controllers decide to execute the command, the capsule communicator will

determine that the transmit system, UHF or S-band is in the proper configuration to transmit
the command. He will be able to determine the status of the system by observing the status
19B C. a. KNOx

indicators on his console, i.e., RF power, ON, S-band No. 1, and up-data mode selected. If the

command is to be transmitted by the CSM systems controller, the capsule cammW1icator will

permit this console to have access to the command system. The CSM Systems controller will

then press the CSM/GNC transmit control. The command request is sensed by the console
computer interface adaptor, coded properly for computer use and transferred to the command
data processor.

Console Computer Interface Adapter

The console computer interface adapter (eeIA) iJ1terfaces the consoles with the computers.

The primary function of this equipment is to receive command data from the consoles, identify

the originator, format the request in computer language and present the data to the computer:
and receive status information from thc computer about the various evelllS displayed on the
consoles and update the display as ncw data is received.

The CClA is configured in two separate data channels. Thi:; is to prevent the command sys­
tem from being incapacitated by a partial failure. If a failure occurred in part of the system,

the second channel could support hal[ the consoles. Masks would be interchallged among the

consoles to allow the highest priority con:;ole to have access to the computer.

Data Processor

The command data processor calls the CSM!GNC load from memory. The processor also

adds the redwldant complementary bits, the symbol repeat bits, and the parity bit. The system
control bits for arranging the UHF or S-band equipment are also generated by the data proces­

sal". The data bits are then sub-bit encoded in the proper sub-bit code and transferred to the
up-data uuffer in 30-bit parallel transfers. Twenty-live bits of each transfer are data and five

are control bits.

Up-Dala Buffer

The up-data buffer interfaces the command data processor with the RF transmitters. TIl('

up-data buffer receives the 30-bit parallel transfer of data from the data processor and sepa­

rateS the control data from the information data. The control bits are procl'sscd to control the

system as instructed by the computer,

The twenty-five information bits are serialized and transmitted at a 1 kilocyclt> rate. Each

bit controls a 2 kilocycle phase shift keyed (PSK) oscillator that is shifted 180 degl"l'('s by a
chan�l' or state from a Ollt' or a ?('J"O, The output of the 2 kilocycle oscillator is addl'<l with a
cohen'llt I- kilocyCle si�nal th;lt is transmitted {or synchronization purposes. A Ollt' is defilwd as

a composite Signal where the 1 kilocycle and 2 kilocycle signals are [;"oing positive at ,he Zl'ro
crossover point. The PSK demodulators are dcsigned to I'('cover the digital data from tht'

compol:;ite PSK Signal for computer verification,

The control data are transformed to relay closures to provide the data transmission path

that the computer has requested. Somc of the control Circuits are within th(> buff!.'r and sonH'
 APOllO OIGITAl com.w:o SYSTEM 199

art> f'xlf' rnal circuits. The buffer has a dual-data path for redundancy purposes, Some of the
control bils sf'lect the correct data path when an error is detected in the ground verification

loop.

There are two UHF transmitters employed in the system and one or two subcarrier oscil­

Idlors of the unified S-band (USB) equipment. The buffer will have the capability for transmit­

tin� through either system sequentially . Normally. the S-IV-B will utilize the UHF transmitters

and the CSM or LEM will utilize the USB equipment. Therefore. the buffer must select the

UHF transmitters when processing a S-IV-B command and the S-band subcarrier oscillator
subsystem (SeQ) when processing a CSM or LEM command. Associated with each U H F trans­
mitter and each SeQ is a verification receiver for monitoring the effectiveness of the ground

command equipment. The verification receiver5 are connected to PSK demodulators within the
buffer where the composite 1 kilocycle and 2 kilocycle signal is convf'rted back to a digital
signaL The control and status bits necessary to coordinate the UHF operation are diagrammed
in Table 6.

Tabl(' li

COllirol :1 1><.1 S\;UllS n i l s II,,' Fill' \Io(k

COlli 1'<11 !:'I:llul;

Bil From ('omlmkl' \0 l-II-I>:!!:I I',,(kr F ro m llur'kr to Cumpu[('L"

.'\uml)('I·
O,W Z('I"() OIl\" Zero

:W l' lll' \lIl1k USB Mod" U I l F Mod(' I'SB \lolk

,- .

I
-, 1; I I F , I-":Iil I'll F 1 \ OK UIIF " , 0" UIIF ", Of!'

"2 .... 1 ' 1 1 1 ' ""2 I-':.il UtI<' -"2 OK Ui-IF ·2 On UlII-" ·2 orr
,
-.!!l 1),. ml �tu I " \111" IknTl;l' D(.·m'lIlul"IOJ' '-'orm,,1 p,';m(' ., 1 Prim,· ';2

:lU i\11�lul:no,' HL'l'(" "S" !\\,Klui:'\IIL" !\ol'mal RF POII"C t' On In' Power Of!

The control bits are identified on one side of the chart and the status bits on the other. The

eontro1 bits will be explained fil'st.

Bit 26 - A ol/e selects the UHF equipment for transmission to the S-IV-B, a zero selects
the USB equipment for transmission to the CSM or LEM.

Note: Assuming that Bit 26 is Ollt', the following is applicable:

Bit 27 - A aile indicated that the number I UHF transmitter should be shut down (fail) be­
cause of a nonvalid transmission, A zero indicates the equipment is operating
satisfactorily.

Bit 28 - Similar to bit 27.

Bit 29 - A olle indicates that the PSK demodulators should be reversed because an error
has been detected in the ground v e rification loop. A zero indicates that the normal
(iH demodulator to # 1 verification receiver) is desired,
200 C.B. KNOX

Bit 30 - A olle indicates that the PSK modulators should be reversed because an,error has

been detected in the groWld verification loop. A zero indicates that the normal

(I!'l to H) configuration is desired.

The philosophy for switching W1its after an error is detected is: The PSK demodulators in

the verification loop will be switched first. The PSK modulator will be switched next if an

error is still present. If an error is still sensed after these two switches, the external trans­
mitting equipment will be requested to switch. The status bits arc explained as follows:

Bit 26 - A olle indicates that the buffer is supplying data to the UHF equipment. A uro bit
indicates that the up-data is gOing to the USB equipment.

Note: Assuming that bit 26 is a Olll', the following is applicable:

Bit 27 - A olle indicates that the UHF number 1 is on and working: properly, A zero indi­
cate.:; that the UHF numbe r 1 is off.

Bit 28 - Similar to bit 27,

Bit 29 - A olle indicates that the number 1 UHF equipment has been deSigned as the prime

equipment. The prime equipment will provide the RF signal to the antenna while

it is working properly. A Z/lro indicates that the numoer 2 UHF equipment has
been designated as the prime equipment.

Bil 30 - A onc indicates that the R F power is on. This means th;lt the R F power has \)een
sampled at the input to the antenna and is at a sufficient level. A 2.1'1'(1 indicates
that the RF power is off.

Status signals for oits 27-30 art' pruvided tu the buffer frum external equipment. The buf­
fer develops the status for oil 26 internally, The information is then transferred to the com­
puter for evaluation of the ground transmitting equipment.

If control bit 26 was a 2.(.'1"0 instead of a (Jill', the USB equipment would oe selected as the

transmittjn� equipment (see Tabie 7).

Talll\- 7

C"n! " ,,1 Slall1>;

II i 1
:o.:uml�·f I'rom ('"mpul.'!" , .. l'I'-lhla H,II'f,· ,'

Om'
- �. .__ . _ . --
�\·"o
.� . �
(In.'
..
�.� --- �:""---I Z.· ""

:!.; \ " I fF �lo�h' rSll �1'Mk L'Ul' �I,�'" t;SI' M,�I,'

:!7 .
\·. '-;\i,·:lli"n I{,., .......... \' " I' i i'i (';0' ion Ill"<"" i " " 1 " ��I�;I"d " 1 ()n �- natld " l Oll
, So·i.·,·! ' , ( Jrt'

:! .... \" ·,'iri,·;o1 io ,n It.·,·.. h.·" \',. ,. i I "" ,,' jon Ik...· i n·'· !-i-II"",I ':! ()Il S_ ll,,,,,1 ' :! ( )Il
,;:! Sd'TI .:! (11..-

:!� I I ),'Il) •• 1" '" I, " . It,·,,,n;,- 1),·I11<.lu 1,,1" 1" ;": "l'm,,1 s("n " I tJ l '-II"LI M,.k SC( ) " l on

:111 St',) " :! 111 , - 1 )"1" �I'MI,·

-- �---'-
- -----'
�1,.11I1:o1"r 1(,·...·" ",· M"dulalv" �"I'f�,,,1 �("t) ":! (In
.
 APOLLO DIGITAL CO/.I�AND SYST EM 201

Control Bit 27 NO. 1 verification receiver has been selected for ver ifi cation of the data
transmission. A 2C"O means No. 1 verifi cation receiver is not selected.

Control Bit 28 S i milar to Bit 27

Control Bit 29 A onc r equest s the PSK demodulators to rever se their normal configura­
tion, A .zero requests the demodulators to maintain their normal
configuration .

Control Bit 30 Similar to Bit 29. Causes PSK modulators to reverse the ir normal
configurat ion .

Status Bit 26 This bit has the same meaning as explained when the buffer was con ­
figured for UHF transmissions.

Status Bit 27 A OlU! indicates that the number 1 SeQ of the S- band equipment is on and
operat ing prope rly . A zero indicates that the number 1 SCQ is off or
not operating properly.

Status Bit 28 Similar to Bit 27. Ind icates status of SCQ NO. 2.

Status Bit 2 9 A aile indicates that SCOno. 1 is capable of modulating the exciter. A
zero indicates that the mode select switch is not in one of the up-data
modes.

Status Bit 30 Similar to Bit 29. Indi cates whether SCQ No. 2 is selected for update
transmissions.

The control bits or iginate in the computer and are processed by configure the the buffer to

transmit loop to satisfy the up-data requirements for each up-data transmission. The informa­
tion data transmitted by the RF system and monitored by the verification receivers is re turned
to the computer with the status bits after each up-data transmission. Therefore the co mpute r
is able to check that the data has been transmitted valid ly via the des ired RF path.

S-Band Up-Data Transmissions

The S-band syste m is capable of transmitting up-data in four of its eight transmit modes,
modes C, E, F, and G. The mode select switch is designed to inform the command system if
it is in one of the up-data modes.

Wilen the up-data mode is seiected, the co mposite PSK signai irequency moduiates at -70
kilocycle oscillator. The 70 kilocycle signal then phase modulates the S- band exciter which

drives the S-band power amplifier. The S-band signal is sampled at the output of the power
<iii.ijjUH""r ;;,y a v :"
i i.ri!';d.i.iuu l't:..:t.:ivt:1". Til� v�l·iii..:�i.iuJl .l·�!,;t:ivt:r u�llIwl..Ll�lt:� lilt: 5-Ui:c.uu �uu
70 kilocycle signal to obtain the composite 1 kil ocy cle and 2 kilocycle signaL This signal is
returned to the up-data buffer and to the up-data processor lor ground verification.
202 C. B. KNOX

UHF Up-Data Transmissions

The UHF transmitting system is operated for command purposes only. The system is
composed of two UHF exciters, two power amplifiers, two antennas, and two vcri(ication re·
ceivers. This equipment is now being used in the Gemini Program and will be adapted to the
Apollo program without any significant changes.

The UHF transmittinK system employs both transmitters, power amplifiers, and \'crifica­
tion receivers simultaneously. One transmitter-power amplifier is connected to an antenna
and radiates power continuously. The second transmitter-power amplifier is also run at full
power, but it Istcrmlnatcd in a dummy load. This arrangemcntprovidcs a hot standby unit that
is also monitored continuously for proper operation.

UHF Transmitters and Power Amplifiers

The UHF transmitters at the launch sites and at the Gemini sites is the AN/FRW-2 equip­
ment. The UHF equipment aboard the new Apollo ships is not of this variety but has similar
characteristics, such as:

Type of modulation: FM

Frequency, adjustable: 406 - 549 megacycles

Power output: 500 watts

The power amplifiers are the Collins Model 240-0 at the laW1ch areas and existing Gemini
sites. The new Apollo ships will have similar power amplUiers, each capable of 10- kilowatt
output.

The UHF verification receivers are compatible with the characteristics o f the UHF trans­
mitters. The receiver is housed in the transmitter's cabinet and monitors the transmitter's
output. The PSK is obtained from the UHF transmissions and returned to the up-data buffer
for command validation .

UHF Command Antennas

There are two UHF commalld antennas associated with each UHF system, The antenna
characteristics are:

Type: 9-Turn Quad Helix

Polarization: Left hand

Gain: Approximately 18db

Beam width: Approximately 20 degrees

Remot. Sites Without Flight Controllers

Many of the Apollo sites will not have flight controllers. Therefore, there will not be any
systems consoles or CCIA at these sites. The command system at these Sites will be remotely
 APOLLO OIGITAL COMMANO $VHEM 203

controlled from the MCC at Houston. The command system at flight controller sites will be
operated in mode 1. The command system at nonflight controller sites will be operated in
modes 2 or 3 . However, once the computer receives a command execute signal, the command
transmission proceeds the same at all sites.

Transmit Validation

A message acceptance pulse (MAP) is telemetered from the spacecraft to the ground sta­
lion when the spacecraft receives and validates an up-data transmission. If a command word

is not validated by a MAP, the word is retransmitted a preselected number of times before

alarming the flight controllers that a valid transmission can not be obtained. The valid or

non valid indication is displayed on the consoles via the CCIA.

The command history of the up-data transmissions is printed out on the high speed printers

for evaluation by the flight controUers. This printout will include the up-data transmission,

the time of the transmission, and an indication that the command was or was not received. The

command history may also be returned to Houston to complete the command-transmit verifi­
cation loop.
204
 APOLLO REMOTE SITE DISPLAY SYSTfM

by
G. N. Ge orgcadis

Goddard SPace Flight Cellter

ABSTRACT

A dcscl"iption of thf.' display systl'm which will be used \0 monitor :l.nd con­
lI'ol th(' spacecrafts during the many pha ses of Project Apollo is pl'cscnh'd. The
oper:'ltion :lnd output capability of the system is discussed together with equip­
ment located in the Apolloflight operations room such as the fast acc('ss flIe and
oi spl;t), system, silenced tektyp('wrilcrs, and the group display is also disl'ussed
briefly.

INTROOUCTION

Since the pulse-code modulation (PCM) systems, the data processing systems, and the

digital command systems have been described in previous papers, the writer will now de­

scribe the system which provides the direct interface between these systems and the flight

controllers, the Apollo display system.

The display system for the Apollo program as shown in Figure 1 will consist of one aero­
medical mon itor console, four spacecraft systems consoles, one command communicator
console, one memory-character generator, one maintenance monitor, one maintenance and

operations console and, for shipboard installations only, one flight dynamics officer's console.
The memory-character generator, which is the heart of the display system, is described in
detail in the followll1g discussions. Note that the previously described systems have their
inputs fed directly iIlto the consoles.

DUTIES OF CONSOLE OPERATORS

In order to better appreciate the display system deSign, a definition of the duties of each
console operator is in order. Their duties are:

1. Tllf' rn ..wumd COJ1:.'·mmicat<;r is tj',c- flil'.;,l l:uniroi team leader and maintains cognizance
over the more general mission-oriented events and activities. He maintains control
over commWlications and command function and has access to all spacecraft param­

eters to nht:l ; n <'I_n i!ldi�3.ti�� 8f ;::':::: .::.11 m.l55iun .:;.uU ::;p4cecrait status.

2. The Spacecraft Systems Monito',' performs detailed spacecraft systems monitoring and
analysis for the purpose of detecting malfunctions and asSisting the astronauts in

205
206 G. N. GEORGEADIS

3O-m CODE WORDS

MAINTENANCE
,- - - - - - - - - - - ,
flIGHT DYNAMICS OfFICERS CONSOLE MONITOR

L
(SHIPBOARD ONLY)
1,lIr
->f�'I!i
, , CODE
TelEMETRY

, -j.{ 01t:;:ji f.- 'r"----1"-

, DATA 3O-B IT
'- -- - -- - - - - •
, , CONTROL

,
COot: WORDS

��h l r-'
r---------
, ACI(NOWLEOGf
, "
""" 0"' .. .
, .
, COMMANDS AND �
REQUfSTS
.-.-- - --- - -, UNIT 12 UNIT It
,- - - ---- - - - - ., COMMAND COMMUNlo.TOft ALPHA-NUMERIC

/'
CONSOU SIGNALS

" L ;, L '"1
1:.£.
c-::"" .
M
C
M
C
M
C
c

I+-
- o

- �;�
G G G N
,

.
,L.
C C C ,
-
;- t::=�� AlPKA- " " " o

:, - -
,- - - - - - - - - - , --- , , ,
SiGNALS
r- - , NUMERIC ,
IT 10 N
I PROJECTION I COMPl/fU
N N
CONTROL -. ' SYSTEM MONITOR N N N ,

- - --- , I ��
I

- f77
DATA SOURCE , o

'�t�==:�::=3����'�,�
CONSOlE ( . ) 'NO , ,

1"+ �
�
I OATil.
,-- - - - - - - - -' VECTORS , , , w
" " "
,

J_ I ;!
;""'""'
�;';�'���,
,

- c,f!:'!.,!UI I
...._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ..., ;,
EXTERNAL ,
I
I COMMUNICATION
"

.� l.-
,
l ____ EA�� _ _ _ � ,
,
ACKNOWlEDGE COMMIINDS AND y
UNITS - 8 S UNIT UNIT UNIT UNIT
REQUESTS
, 2 3 4

!::::::E���::==������;�' �!:�- �'�

AUO-MEDlCAl CONSOLE MEMOlI'!' AND CHAAACTER
GENERATOR GROUP

����I �� L
: I
;&-�
- -

I TElEMETRY
lI__
[KG OATil. .
-
. �; ��.
",
'
�
�
L_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ �

UNIT 9
MAINTENANCE AND
OI'ERATION CONSOLE

Figure l-Dhplay system for �Ha progrom.

maintaining spacecraft system integrity. Each systems monitor has access to those
displays and commands contained within the jurisdiction of his designated responsibility.

3. The aero-medical monitor console is a two-operator position console. The aero-medical

monitors perform a medical surveillance of the physiological and environmental status
of the astronauts. For this purpose, they have access to special displays and a selec­
tion of telemetered parameters.

4. The Maintenance and Operation Supervisor exercises control over station maintenance
and operations personnel during the missions. He has access to all intersite and
intrasite commW'lications circuits available during the mission.

5 . The Flight Dynamics Officer monitors the spacecraft injection or insertion trajectory
characteristics for sufficiency or abnormality and can assist in the execution of an
abort maneuver if necessary.
 APOLLO ROIOTE SITE OISPLAY SYSTEM 207

RELATION OF DISPLAY SYSTEM TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ON SITE

Figure 2 gives an idea of where and hOw the display system fits in with the other equip­
ment on site. The console/computer interface adapter provides command and display request
capability to the consoles and also provides the necessary outputs to drive six high speed
printers, four analog recorders, and six spacecraft clocks located on the wall-mounted group
display. The group display will provide spacecraft and ground-generated times in addition to
station equipment status information to aU the personnel in the Apollo flight operations room.
The ground-generated clocks are driven from the Apollo time distribution frame. The station
equipment status inputs will come from each particular system to be monitored. The decom­
mutation systems distribution unit (DSDU) provides inputs from the PCM stations. The two
blocks labeled FAF 11 and FAF 412 are two fast access file and display system projectors con­
taining predetermined information SUCh as flight plans and procedures. These devices will be
independently controlled slide projectors that allow random access of 500 slides each to be
displayed upon request. One FAF will serve two systems console operators and the command
commW'licalor, and the other will serve the other two systems console operators and the com­
mand communicator. All consoles wlll have an intercom panel with local, range, and space­
craft communications .

CAM
AOAPTOR

,m

�" •
I
1>428
SIlZ8/LtM CSM 1 "M CSM 2 M 'O

MOO MOO

"'
PRINTERS
'
1
•
RCDRS
CONSOLE/COMPUTER
INTERFACE ADAPTOR
MEMORY CHAUCTeR GENERATOR
I II DSDU 'N' ERCOMI

11'
! ,! I M"N'.1 ! I E
�
G
! CMD I FAF FAf!

III II
�j
AHOMED
I ONiTOO:I
" "'0
I I I I I I
M CC.'.w.

I
I
II II I
I
I I I
"
' '
,I
I

Figure 2-Apollo di�play and interface external $igool cabling diagram.

208 G. It GEOIIG[A�S

APOllO FLIGHT OPERATIONS ROOM LAYOUT

Figure 3 shows a typical Apollo flight operations room layout for a remote site ground in­

stallation. It should be Iloted that all the consoles face direcUy forward in order to view the
g-roup display and two rear-projection screens. The group display contains spacecraft and
ground-generated clocks plus the station equipment status displays. The two rear-projection

screens are part of the fast access file and display system. It should also be noted that all the
systems consoles and their associated recorders are located in the front rOW. The high speed
printers which provide the hard-copy print-outs from the computer are located in front of the

systems console recorders and one between the command communicator console and the
aeromedical console, The teletype ROts are located, one at each end o( the (ront row, and
one between the command communicator console and the aeromedical console, These units

are Teletype Model 28 ROs which have been mounted in an enclosure which has been de·
signed by Bendix· Pacific to silence the units and to be accessible and visible to the sealed
operator,

9F STORAGE I STORAGE I
� 0 0 El 00 -
= 00

THIS 'LATf� 12"

M '
ccc "'"

I
0 A£ltOMfO MOVE Fl()(M: lEVEL

STORAGE STORAGE

G El
1,,,1 0 0 El El 0 0 IH5pl
-I
�"
�
RCOR RCDR
' " CSM I "M S tlZB/UM

t
��
�f ...f
,' �l/;
'
o_ .

.'-O" d' -O" MIltWIt

�.
A'�
� '�

figure J-Apol lo flight operolioo'u room loyoul,

 APOllO RfJo(OTE SITE OISPLAY SYSTEM 209

COMPONENTS OF ALPHA NUMERIC OISPLAY SYSTEM

The Raytheon Company is the prime contractor for the Apollo Display System. This dis­
play system consists mainly of an alpha numeric type display system. The alpha numeric
system is made up of eleven cathode ray tube display modules (or twelve in the case of ship­
board installations) not including the display module in the maintenance monitor; a maintenance
monitor; and a memory character generator.

CRT Display Modules

The CRT display modules are identical and interchangeable in the Apollo display system.
A block diagram of this display module is shown in Figure 4 . Each module contains a 17-inch
rectangular CRT which uses a combination of electrostatic and electromagnetic deflection for
displaying tabular data in a format of 36 lines with 72 characters in each line, in an area of at
least 100 square inches. Electrostatic deflection will be used for character writing and
electromagnetic deflection will be used for positioning and vector writing. In addition to the
CRT, the display module includes the deflection circuits, power supplies, and controls. The
two power suppUes associated with each CRT display module, one low-voltage and the other
high-voltage, are housed in separate containers and are removable from the rear of the con­
sole. For personnel safety, a safety glass is provided with anti-reflective coating and a tin
oxide coating for RFl suppression.

Maintenance Monitor

The maintenance monitor Wlit will consist of a dolly, with locking wheels arranged for
easy maneuverability, and a CRT display module which is electrically and mechanically iden­
tical to the other CRT display modules. In addition to the controls in the display module, the
maintenance monitor is equipped With a channel selector switch which will permit the moni­
toring of any of the displays located in the system for maintenance purposes.

Memory Character Generator

The memory-character generator (MCG) consists of three independent logic and memory
modules, two character/vector generators and independent power supplies for these. Each
channel will be located in its own cabinet as shown in Figure 1 and may be independently
selected by the computer for data transfers to the MeG. A single modified 642-B computer
fOist l.nlel'lOiCi:: output charuiel COUiiect.s the COl1ljlutar to t..".€ r.1CG by means vi .. single cable.
The computer wtll enable the desired channel, through the use of an external hmction word
which specifies the particular chaMel, to be addressed. Once a particular MCG channel is

If the selected chaMel is in its display refresh mode, it will compute the refresh cycle. At the
end of the refresh cycle, the MCG channel selected will send a data request to the computer
and accept input data. The transmission of an end-of- message command word on the end of a
MCG channel data block will disable that MCG channel. A new external fWlclion may then be
sent.
21 0 G. H. GEORGEAOIS

.!J,
l
'(
BRIGHTNESS
r-
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---------------

1
I
I r
VELOCITY

ft
I Ot-NUS 'I.OfO F
r
- VELOCITY
AMPl. AND 4M1'1.. AND OC r
VELOCITY OECOOU
-

GolIO au.S
r
I '" I
nOTEClION I
UNMANICING1
DYNAMIC I
fOCUS SYNC FOCUS 8Uf'fU I
V[CTOt AND CHO'PU
� AMPl.
I

i'
X VECtOlt IZ[ ""' I
-J,..
.

X BUFfU

�
r
DYNAMIC
., CATHODt r
I a.... s CKT.
.. FOCUS
r
X POSITION' fl.NCnON
r
XO/A GEN. r
r r
X MAGNETIC
r
,
r-
H
•
X LINEARITY DEFLECTION I
, XD/A

�
COUEeriON AMPL. r
---

, GEN. r
---

X VECTOR I ,

y �
VICTOR
---

M OFFS£I , OFFSET GEN. ,

, ,
- - -

MAGNETIC
RESTORATIONI >NO D£m TloN
N. SKtW
RHIORATION COil ,
, PINCUSHION
PULSE AMPl . ,
CClRlellON
- -

'( V[CTOl,
,
,.DEFLECTION
- -

OFFSET
,
,
I
I CHAlt.

L{,
Y OiARACUR COil
I m.E ,
SIZE
- -

Y CHAlACru ,
COI:REC110t>l
- -

"N

�
r C�HION

I
""I.
y VEC1Ol ;
Y OIARAC1U
-
Y UFU

:J EClOC
DHLECTION

1
HIGH
SIZE
J
�L I

� Y,�1\
Y 'OSITION I l' "V VOltAGE I
Y o/A SIGNAL
, X O!A.U. C TU I
COUl'lING
, OULECTION
r ,

:k
� Y Of'" J AMPl.
,
,
I
Tul
X CHAlAC x CtIAlACTU I
Y liNEARITY
� _ SIZE
CORUCTION ,
rcJ.u. r-
COU[CTION
r- GEN. ,
1 5•H
""'L

J. .Jt.CENm
I
, MAGNETIC V(RT. I
I
OfHECHON I
I vnT. ,. AM'L . ,
H.GH
"
, S.ZE I

�
, VOl1AGE
COW ,
, POWER
KV '"

�'
.UPPlY VOltAGE
, I ISV 60�----l POWER I
I SUPPLY
,
I
,
,
:,
COw
, VOLTAGE 35 VDC
POWER
" .$V 60�
I
I SUPPLY
,
L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ �

Fi �re 4-Digital display.

 APOLLO R EMOTE SHE DISPlAY SYSTEM 211

Memory Module

A memory channel block diagram is shown in Figure 5 . Each MCG channel contains one

4096, IS-bit core memory with a 4-m icrosecond cycle time. This memory is logically divided

into two memory sections of 4096 9-bit words. A memory section is further divided into two
subsections under program controL Each memory subsection of an MCG channel contains the

information necessary to drive a single CRT display. Therefore, the memory in each channel

has the capability of storing information for four CRT display presentations since there are

four subsections of memory. Since there are three MCG channels, the system is capable of

operating with twelve CRT displays.

The primary function of the core memory in each MCG channel is to store the input data
and refresh the four displays associated with that particular MCG channel memory at a flicker­

free rate. The memory is also addressable in a random access mode through the use of certain

command words. When the me mor y is receiving data from the computer, it is not refreshing
the CRT displays . This means that the frequency of the updating of the data stored in the

memory and the amount of data transferred from the computer to the MCG should be kept to a
minimum since the CRT display may become dim or an obj ectionable flicker may occur at the

face of the CRT.

Character/Vector Generator

Each memory section provides information to a character/vector generator which in turn

drives two CRT displays . The character generator which i s shown in Figure 6 will receive
6-bit codes and character size designation from the MCG memory and will transform these

codes into character deflection and W1blanking signals necessary to generate the corresponding

characters. The display character codes are those shown in Figure 7. Character formation
shall be based on a 32 by 32 matrix. Two character sizes are provided, 0.140 inches and 0.280
inches, with an actual character writing time of 3.16 microseconds. The characters are gen­
erated as sequential locations of memory read out. The memory refresh is read out simul­
taneously for two character generators. Each character generator will have the capability of
displaying 4096 characters on two permanently associated CRT's, each CRT being located in

a different console. Each character generator will also have the capability of driving the
maintenance monitor CRT which is in parallel with either of the two permanently associated

CRT's without degrading the performance of the latter. The character generators will recognize
start blink and stop blink character codes. Upon interpreting a start blink code, that character

position on the CRT will be skipped and characters between start blink and stop blink will be
wri.tten or not ...·riUen depending upon the phase of the bli.>'JkL"lg Signal. Upon interpreting a
stop blink code, that character on the CRT will be skipped, and subsequent characters will be
written without qualification.

The vector generator shown in Figure 8 will be equipped to: accept 18- bit words;
store initial position in X, Y coordinates of 9 bits each; use the final position in X, Y

coordinates of 9 bits each; draw a line from the initial position to the final position in

the time required to position and write two characters; and transform the old final position
 ..,
TIMING
r.A.!:!���lJI2�
• A AND " • CLOCK
l ___ l "" r--------- ...,
" A AND . 8 CLO
CI;
GEN(UTOIS
TO (HAUeTER/
"'CToo ..,
-

TIMING
OUT""'"
r IMsm CUM MASTEl L.:.
CLOCK
I ... u� I CHMACn.
�
SU£C TOR
i
I
,...-
,
I
I
. --- ---- --- ----......,

,.;j V �ITION
If:GrSTU
I ;.j OUTM-�l INCREMfNTQIt� II,
, Y �lT1ON
1 ANO 2

ILOCKS
fO All 1
I
I
r
'
T1 -
rrN I
r '$
MAIN TIMING I I Q
CHAIN I I
<
Z
!
I
I --
INPU T
�
-.r
COD
DETECTOR
E
I
1
r r �-4-<c;;;;
1t +I
M
TUNS\.ATOli REGISTER II
, IOUTPUT MOOlt INOEM£NT � I
1 m
tI LOAD
SEQUENCER
1 '6- 1
1I CONTRO\. I LOGIC I
�
I II ....j X AUXIWY �-1 X POSITION r-- II
I

,I
.- _L ..:-. :- ===.:.:=:. I
I , UGISTU REGISTU
, xPOSITION TO CHAUCTER!

��U�t:!(�8;�
\'£CTOII
INPUT MOO( CHARACTER
I r--!' I/O CONTlOl
�
:= CONTIOl : I
I
CHARACTER
GENEAATOli 1
(SHEET 2)

I1 It L____ Q!-�..9!!!�LLOGIC...!____J £NA�lE

ENTER OATA
OAfA
INPUT
lOGIC
I
II
MEMOIY LOAD
CONTROL
JAM CODE
H GENERATOR I
I
I
SIZE
CHARACTER

UNBLANI(
P
•
D ISPLAY 1 · 2
Il � g J '1 I II
a

0( _ START
�

0-
,, ;" ¥q� �8� � fOCUS
0

USTQR..6. T ION
... »
a

: L�=====;=j-
--l �
�

1 � � :> �1
II �.. � ;;: '"
":
_
INPUT ,
S I p . ,

�1�I[�",�p�'�"�'�'�$.E:;E�,!,�s�'�'�G�' �'[' i-�Il�===��=�����=:;::::: t

,'
r 1
PULSE
SYNC �

S
Ia 3 leGISTU
�
"

c
Aooms R:
g�T��s
I

�
...

L _
ATA E
_ ______ O ��� _ __ _ _ _ _ _
:r �
Z l REGISTU

-
COMpun.
INTERFACE
,

1
I
MEMQlY
I ! DISPl
. AY
I MEMOlY
I
r IEFUSH
-t Zu IlGISTU ',
�

-'-'
I
� !
I
ME �XI
IkOtHWt. T
'�--.UO...!...---'I M !
>

I
� -'- r
i
_ _

J: L ______________ ...J
COMPUTER
0'-642S
L �r-�.:;;�-;; l� �;--fr�1l TO CHARACTEk/
P T C
jj_trveaO!l G£NERATOIt n
___

���� ���....: � _l�� !

Figure S-Memory ehoMe1 bloek diagram.
 "POllO REIIlTE SITE OISPL"Y SYSTEM 213

�-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I

OUAY llNl Y ol.l<R-1

",NO ... eTO
-coo

,
MM.

Figure 6-Chorocter generator.

into a new initial position. By this process the vector generator will construct line segments,

joined end-to-end, starting from an arbitrary position at the same refresh memory data rate

used by the character generators.

When operating in the display refresh mode, the memory sections cycle all 4096 9-bit
words in 21 milliseconds. The speed capability of the display system will be sufficient to con­

tinuouSly accept a computer word every 50 microseconds, display 22,980 characters on twelve
CRT's, and refreRh Ihp. ri�t� (lir,pll\y."tj on aU tlI{IO!lvp. r.R1" R �t � fll(,;kpr-frplO! r�tp

The program controlled memory divider causes the information generated by the character

generator to be visible or invisible on the front of its two aSSOciated CRT displays. For ex­
ample, if the information for display number 1 is contained in the MCG refresh memory ad­
dress �tJtJ to tJ777, this information would be visible on display number 1 while the refresh
memory is cycling through these addresses and the Information contained in refresh memory
address l�tJ to 7777 would be displayed on display number 2 while the refresh memory is
214 G. H. GEORGEADIS

OCTAL CHAU,CTU OCTAL CHAlACTU OCTAL (HAlACHl

CODE COO. COo{
'" SKIP' " , " eo...... h...... '

.. , " y p SIt., da",'

., , " , " · ( , .... )

" , " dGo_1 .. •

" • " : (Colon) " •

" , " 9(T�...>, ""pI " C

" • " , c 'hi, (;0,1 .. ,

" , " ll. (Del..., cOS') " ,

" • " .. (O_,'o.... ) .. ,

" • .. ·( Oo.� ) " G

" • " , " "

" • ( A" .,'sk) " , " ,

" �,. " , " , ("'''Ill.)

" " orl loB.....• .. M " • (Period)

" " OP bl ...... • ., N " � ( 10...., I"....)

" n(�. cop) � 0 " C_""Code'

" No ....-, _... • " '" (',., 1_"
•"" .__ft'·
"

" • (o.g,_l
" / ( SIont) " 0

" S " •

" , " ... (po,cent)

,. , " a lSI,..... . ,_)

" y ,. t>

" " 'tlCfC....ftI Y,

nol <...et._n' X'
w do

'1"'" cod... ,.,11 1>0 ...ed a. conlf,,1 c......

Figure 7-Characler control codes.

cycling through these addresses. This is accomplished through the use of a 9- bit memory
divide operation code placed in refresh memory location Itj��.

The computer words entering the data input command logiC of the MeG will be either

command words or data words. The command words are used to signal the display system as

to cnannel selected, whether to write small or large characters or vectors, into which portions

of memory section data is to be written, which memory subsection is to be erased, where the
memory sections are to be divided between two displays, what data should be modified, and
when a computer transmission is ended. The command word format is shown in Figure 9.
Data words are used to specify the X- Y positions of characters, the heads and tails of vectors,

which characters should be written, and control data as it is being written into memory. The
data word format is shown in Figure 10. Figure 1 1 and 12 show computer word structures
and Figure 13 is a typical computer WOrd sequence.
 •
"
•c�
��. .�
c,��
,�
. ,,!
.,�. __
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
__ __
__ __
__ __
__ __ __
____ -+ CHAAAC n R
• G£.Nt:RAIO!1
x PO:;IT,OH I 'xPOSt"':W
r---------------------
�

- -
�

- - - - - -
� �

PIG IIff • XBUmR

- .- -. . -. - - - -- - -- �
- -- � --- --- - - - :=
:=:=
:=__
- - -- -------
1
• X n;PUT OUTPUT TO DISPlAY
,
811FHR CONTRO REGISTER

r-
,
,

}
,
, SU8TR�CHON CHARACTER
CE�ERATOR
,
IJNBlANKING
,
(ltTER
L
,
, BumR
DATA ••

I
,
BUffER
••
,

Of�Slr
,
, )( �[CTOR

�
,
CHARAC··U ! TO VECTOR CCVilMUTATQR HORMAltlED
(W,BU: NClRIMLIZATION lOCIC 01 ff£R(1OCf

["11[11 OM'\'
•
,
C�AAACl£R G[N£RAI� BUffER
r- 1
,
,
TOPID REG COtiTROl 1
MeISTER r-
,
•
,
CHARACT£R CHAftl.CTrR GHICJlATOII I VEl(ICHY
P
YNORMAUZ"I'ON SHiFf
,
IHITNSITY
TO INTENSITY COMPiNSATtOH >.P� '"
""
SIZE lOCIC SHIH lOGIC COMPfNSATlotl O tS UY

r-
•
CItARAC1(R CEN!:RATOR
1 J i
,
UN8LA�K CONTROl ,
DISPlAY TO CHARACTER CHARACIlR
GEH£RATOR £NA8l£ ••

�}
I AND :! NORMALIZED
R[STOR"TION I CHARACTtR SlZEh vnOC11Y
DiflUENCE I o;'f$tT
FOCUS , 10 DISPLAY BUffER

I
$yHt; PULSE I
,
"'"
CHARACJU • ,
I
,
"'""" ••
BUHIR
{NA8U ,

O
,
ENTER •,,
ATA .cH...R"'CTER
,
CHI:R...TOl!
,
CHARACT1R •
,
Silt I •
UNBLANK •,,
,
DISPlAY , ,
1 ...110 2 ,

t
)( D(lAY I )( \1CTDR
,

r
o.
- lilt( "'NO

}
"" "' ''''' LOG DRIV(R ,
S'"
,
DI
,

O
PV.V

r
ENTER
,
VECTOR 1 v V£CTOR
v on...v
O.&.'A ••
lIlf: ...N
CCWMUT...IOR - ANALOG

I-
"" DRIVER ,,
SUBT:ACTOR CHAR...CT£R _ ,
CHARACTER
ENABLE
}
,
"' I - U
, GEIf:IlAIOR

v POSITION INPUT PIO RfC • v OUTput :v POSHfOH

•
V
BUff{R CONTROl RECtSTU BUfFU
10 DIS PlAY
, ,
, ,
L_____________ ________________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - ----------------------------- "

Figure 8-Vector generator.

216 G. N. GEORGEADLS

29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 I S 1. 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 , . , , , ,
WORt> TYPE

lCCW , , , , , , MEMOiIY ....OOIIESS , , , , , , , , ,

"'OW , , , , , , MEMOI!:Y ADDRESS , , , , , , , , ,

". , , , , , , MEM!)Q;Y AOOtHS , , , , , , , , ,

EMSCW , , , , , , MEMOlY AOOtESS , , , , , , , , ,

" MEMORY ....OOilESS

" 'OW , , , , , ,
"
EOMCW , , , , , , , , , o 0 0 0 0 , , o 0 0 0 0 , , , , , , , , ,

" "

Figure 9-Command word forlTl<lt.

c""_,�, Cho_,... 5 ( ( ) (1
'
:
!focIOf . ( C I ''''' ",cter 3 (C ) Cho.o<;t.. 2 ( C ) ChMo<:. ... 1 ( C )
,"" 29 28 27 26 2S H 2 22 21 20 19 1 � \7 16 15 \ . II \2 1 1 10 , • , • , • , , , ,
�
My d'",acler b..! MY .""""" '" b.,o. A�y c",,",cler b..t AA'f <"""'- 'ef bo,o. Any d",.odof b.rt

� " " " "

" •
"

V""',,, No Slip Vec.or Data

'"" Sl<.ip Ooto Y Poxi!ion )( Poo;""" WOt<J Cod.
.�
In 28 21 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 16 17 16 15 U 13 12 \ I 10 • • , • , • , , , ,

, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,
« " "
, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,

N.. Skip
P...i!i..... Skip DolO N." P",ition
'"" SI<I,' Slink Y P",i,j"" X P"" 'i",, 0010 Cod.
Wo' " B!i nlo.
28 27 26 25 N 23 22 21 20 19 . . " " " " " " " " • • , , , • , , , ,

, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,

, , , , , , " "

, , , , , ,

, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,

Non: (5 can con"" " any '''''_'0< bvt .56 01

n fOf cM.oe t.r ... ... pooj,;",, _ ,

Figvre IG-Dato w()(d formal.

J0 29 28 V U 25 24 n 22 21 20 " L8 17 16 1S 14 13 1Z I 1 I0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
'-M , , , , , , , , , , , • , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,
.�
"

, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,

, .....- Code Mo.-y Acldre.. L arge e",",

,,';le< cod.
Small e","rae,... eade

New POll - s..- a. for V..tan

';on Oota
."'

Data Word C","racter S Chor

ader ( C","rac'er 3 Cha_te< 2 Cha""" , ... 1
Any d",",cte< bY. An, .","""'te. bu! An, charact... M An, . ","rac,.r bYt Any chofG.ter bY,

" " " " "

" 0
"

Figure l l -Word 5tNctvre5 aS50cialed with characters.

 APOLLO REMOTE SITE DISPLAY SYSTEM
217

,
, , ,
3029 28 27 26 2S 2 � 2 3 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 1 4 13 12 1 1 10 9 8 7 6 S •
,
, ,

,-� , , • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

, , , , , , , , , , , , ,
W�

,
•

• , , , , , , , • • • • • • • •
C_Cod. Me..,..,.. Add.... """ ,...

New p",,- • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • , • • • •
I,on
o.:,Ia Wotd ,
•
•
•
,, , , ,,
,
• • •

• • , , ,, • , , , , , , • • • , , , , , • • • • , • • • •

N ., S� '; p Y P..., . ,_ )( Po>,' ;"" N .... P",i.i""

Skip Cal., Codoo
Sian Bliok
S.op Slink

Cata WonJ • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

, , , , , , , , ,
• • •

• , , , , , • • • , , , • • • • • • • • •

N., S " p Y Posit"", )( P""I1"" V«:lo< Cata

0< Sk,p W",� Code

Figure 12-Word structure� associated with vectors.

'. "

MO" 29 28 27 26 25 24 2 3 2 2 2 1 20 1 9 1 8 1 7 16 15 1 4 13 12 1 1 l(l • · , • , • , , , •

lCCW , , , , • , , , , , ,
, , , , , , • • , , , , , • · , • , ,

NPCOIol • , , , • • • , , , , • , , , , • , , , , , , • • , • • , ,

<ow , , , , • • , 1' ,• , ,1' ,

• • , • , • • , , • , , , , , ,
, , , , , , , ,
_.- ._.

sccw • , • , , , , • , • , , , • , • , • , , , •

NPCO>l , , , , • , , , , , , ,
, , , , • , , , , • , , ,, , , , •

<ow , , , , , , , , , , , , , 'I' , · , , • , , , ,, , , , , •

NPCO , , , , , • ,
, •,1 , , , • , , • , , , , , , , , , , , • ,

<ow , 0 , • , , 0 , ,
oj. 0 , 0 • , · , • • , , 0 , • • • • ,
, , , , , , ,
'1

NPCO>l , 0 • • 0 0 0 0 , , • • • , , • , , • • , , •

<ow • , • • • • • '1 • '1'

0 • • • • • • • • , • • , , , , , , ,

N'" , • , • 0 0 , , 0,I ' , 0 • • , • • • • , , 0 • • , • • • •

v<W , , , , 0 , , , , , , • , , • , , • • , • • I' • • • • • • ,
N"" • • • 0 • • , • , , , • • , • • • • • , • 0 , • • , • • • •

,"w , • • • • • ,
• ,• , , , • , 0 • , , • , • , • • · , • , •

'"w • • • • • • 0 , • , , • • 0 • , . • , , , , , • • • • 0 0 •

v.w • 0 0 0 • • , , 0 , • , , • • • , • • • • • , • • • • 0 0 •

Figure 13- Typical computer word 5equence.

COMMAND CGMMuNiCATilR CONSOLE

The command commWlicator console, whose display panels are shown in Figure 14, has
two alpha numeric CRT display modules in it. These displays which were previously described
will be used to portray spacecraft telemetered information in the form of block diagrams,
218 G. N. GEORGEADIS

CRT EVENT UNIFIW S -aAND

OISPl)I.Y INDICATORS
tabular listings, meter formats, or a com­
PANEl
INOfCAT()jt eVENT llMER bination thereof. Spacecraft teiemetered
UAOOVT PANEl
time and command clock time can also be
displayed on the CRT display. The informa­

tion presented on an alpha numeric CRT

display shall be referred to as a format.

The format presented on each alpha numeric

display must be capable of being changed by

j.
the console operator at any time. These
INTERCOM
COMPUTU ADDRESS ' --'\'!)..
MATRIX KtY80AltD PANEl changes are accomplished through the use of

the display request keyboard, which is lo­

OI)PlAV REoueST COMA NO HV80ARD
KEY&QARO TYPE I
cated on a sloped panel below the CRT dis­

plays. Changes will be restricted to the

Figure 14-Command communicatO!' console.
selection of formats previously determined

and stored in the remote site data processor

memory. Each display request keyboard contains fifty-five (push button indicators) PBI's,

five of which are used for control fW\ctions such as designating the CRT on which information
is to be presented. Each of the other fifty PBI's represent a format which may be requested
by the console operator. Four coding switches are also provided on the display request key­

board which provide the capability of changing the fWlction of the fifty format PBI's. This
feature of the display request keyboard is accomplished through the use of coded plastic over­

lays together with the four coding switches. These coding switches allow the total capability of

15 different overlays to be used on the fifty format PBI's for a total capability of 750 formats
for each display request keyboard. Each overlay contains the identifying legends for the fifty

format PBI's and coding for the four coding switches. The coding switches will tell the com­

puter which overlay is in position over the display request keyboard. Each format legend has

an indicator light which will blink and illuminate red shOuld any parameter within the format
become out-of-limits.

Each display request keyboard is capable of requesting a new display presentation (format)
on either CRT display located on that console. It is capable of requesting a hard copy printout
of any tabular format on the keyboard whether or not the format requested is then being dis­

played. The high-speed printers described under the data processing system will provide the
hard copy required. And last but not least, the automatic generation and transmission of

selected summary messages to Mission Control Center (MCC), Houston is also initiated at the

display request keyboard.

The command communicator console contains three event light panels. Each event light

panel can display 36 events and also has a quick reconfiguration capability. The quick re­
configuration capability is provided by plastic overlays which are preassembled with the cor­
rect legends and desired colored lenses. No coding switches are required since this panel
consists of indicators only instead of PBI's. The reconfiguration of an event light panel merely

involves the replacing of the progr ammed patch board at the DSDU with another programmed

patch board and the replacing of the overlay over the event light panel itself with another
overlay.
 APOLLO REICTE SIrE DISPLAY SYSTEM 219

A command panel will be provided on this console, which is divided into four sections.
These sections provide the command communicator with six command enable PBI's, twelve
mode select PBl's. six load command PBI's. and thirty-six real-time command (RTC) PBl's.
This keyboard is also capable of quick reconfiguration due to the same type overlays and four
code buttons as used on the display request keyboard. The command enable PBIs are not under
the overlay since they do not change function. The matrix for RTC's wlll enable initiation of
RTC's and will provide a means of preconditioning to aid in the rapid analySiS of command status
and the operation of selected commands. The load commands are required to transmit onboard
computer loads such as clock times. The mode select portion is required for such commands
as RCT auto/manual and setup/command.

An operator status panel is a panel on the command communicator console only. consisting
of one status indicator light for each console operator position. An operator status unit is
provided at each console operator position. except the command communications, which will
allow each console operator to signal his state of readiness to the Command CommWlicator by
way of the operator status panel.

An event timer is also provided in the command commwlicator console. This device is a
five-digit, rear-projection clock which permits the console operator to program ±999 minutes
and 59 seconds, with COWlt-UP, cOWlt-down. start and stop controls.

A computer address matrix is provided the Command CommWlicator which permits the
console operator to request parameter group printout on the high-speed printer and to request
automatic computer generation of summary messages.

An intercom panel is provided each operator position in the Apollo flight operations room
which permits local, range and spacecraft communications. Two input jacks and a foot switch
jack are provided with each intercom panel and in addition a portable speaker is provided with
its output jack mOWlted on the upper righthand corner of the console.

The command communicator console is provided with a USB panel which indicates the mode of
operation of the USB ground equipment for both Command Service Module (CSM) and Lunar
Excursion Module (LEM). This is the only console in which this panel is contained.

Finally, the Command CommWlicator is provided with a. panel to control both fast access
file and display system prOjectors which have been previously discussed. The Command Com­
mWlicator also has control of the IXlwer to each of these projectors.

It is important to note that the Apollo consoles have been designed on a modul.ar baSis for
quick and easy reconfiguration of these consoles. The modules can be shuffled around or new
modules added or substituted in order to support future missions, or even the present mission.
This feature is better shown in Fij;!;Ure 15. It is also important to note that these consoles are
45-1/2 inches high and 58 inches deep with the three-bay consoles being 63 inches wide, the
four-bay console (aero-medical monitor console) being 82 iIlches Wide, and the two-bay con­
sole (maintenance and operations console) being 44 inches wide. The low-profile design per­
mits the seated operator to maintain a full and W'Iobstructed view of the group display (wall­
mounted clocks and status lights) and the fast access file and display system wall- mounted
220 G. N. GEQRGEADIS

rear-projection screens. All the controls and display devices which are mounted in or near

each console must be accessible and visible to a seated operator.

SPACECRAfT SYSTEMS CONSOLE

Figure 15 shows the spacecraft systems console of which there are four . The four sys­

tems consoles are designated: S-IV-B/LEM, LEM, CSM N l , and CSM 112. The S-IV-B/LEM
console is first used to monitor the S-IV-B vehicle and is then reconfigured, by use of the
methods previousLy described, to monitor
the LEM together with the other LEM con-
£VENT sole. The two CSM consoles, of course,
monitor the command-service module.

'�'OO.'''",c\:::'!\
[V(NT TlMH
COMPUTER .... OORES$

Y
""OO ' PANE L
M....TRIX .
The systems console is practically iden­

tical to the command communicator console.

There are three basic differences between

,",,'--I'
OP£RA.TOiI
STATUS these two consoles. One difference is that

! ���� ;�::7�""''1
KE VBO.... RD
OISPlAY
"/
P .... NH
the command,keyboard on the systems con­

sole has one indicator where the command

communicatOr command-enable PBI's are

'''''''."/
,
TVPE .II
CaMANO located. This indicator will tell the systems

console operator whether his command key­

� 7
board is "enabled" or "disabled" by the com­
\UNlfS CNLY)
mand communicator . AnotheT difference is
F igure 15-Spoceen:>ft system, console. '
the fast access We (FAF) control panel, which

appears only on the S-IV-B/LEM console and

the CSM H1 console. The systems console FAF control panel controls only one FAF instead

of the dual control aClorded the command communicator console. And finally, the systems

consoles each contain an operator status unit as discussed previously.

Each systems console has a vertically mounted analog recorder associated with it which

is driven from the CCIA. These recorders have eight channels, and controls are provided
which permit the operator to select any one of six groups of eight parameters to record. The

selection controls are on the recorder.

AERO·MEDICAL CONSOLE

Figure 16 shows the aero-medical monitor console. This console contains only one CRT
display module and two event light panels. However, it also contains two inte rcom panels, two

operator status units, two event timers, and one display request keyboard. The aero-medical

console also contains a four-trace cardioscope with 10 selectable analog inputs and its as­
sociated control panels. Figure 17 shows these panels in more detail. Associated with
 APOLLO REMOTE SITE DISPLAY SYSTEM 221

this console is a vertical mounted analog [V(NT TIMER

PANEL
recorder which is driven directly from the CRT DISPLAY 'N'''O
<>O', eVENT

�' b
PCM stations' DSDU. The input parameters
EVeNT
are selectable at the DSDU in the same man­
ner the event light panel inputs were se­ EVeNT TlM{�
R[ADQUT PANEL
lectable. This recorder is furnished with a
table extension to permit a more careful
analysis of the data being recorded. OPERATOR ':'''>�;;
FLIGHT DYNAMICS OFFICER'S CONSOLE
CAROIOSCOP[ OON,"OC/ OPEl ATOR
Figure 18 shows the flight dynamics of­ PANEL STATUS UNIT

ficer's console (FDO). This console is only

Figure 16-Aero-Medicol comole.

Figure 17-Pol'Iels of A.ero-Medicol console.

'" '''' .�, INOICATOR PANEL

present on shipboard installations. The FDO
contains one CRT display module, one oper­
OISPLAY
ator status unit, one display request key­
board, and one intercom panel . This con­
DIGITAL

STATUS 'N',:;t;
UNITS sole also contains a small command keyboard
which is physically identical only to the

PANEL computer address matrix (5 by 5 PBI matrix)

except that the first colunm of this command
keyboard contains 5 indicators. The other
four columns contain 20 real-time com­

Figure lB-Fl ight dYl"Klmics officer'$ console. mands. The FDO contains 12 digital read­
outs and an FDO switch panel. The digital
readouts are driven from the ship's central
data processor, and the switch panel provides the ship's central data processor with informa­
tion on the computer mode, the programmed lift, and the abort mode. Finally, this console
contains an event light/override panel which is merely a special event light panel with override
222 G. N. GEQRljEAOIS

capability on six of the events. Twelve event lights are provided, half to be driven from the

DSDU and the other half with override capability to be driven from the ship's central data

processor. Figure 19 shows the display panels of the roo console, some of which have since

been revised.

Cl Cl tl C

caOCD

Deccc

Figure 19-Display panels of FDO console.

MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS CONSOLE

The maintenance and operations console requirements are presently being finalized. To

date it contains only an intercom panel and an operator status utlit.

 COMMAND AND SERVICE
MODULE UNIFIED S-BAND SYSTEM

by
B. Hood

Manned Spacecraft Center

ABSTRACT

The basic communications and tracking requirements for the Command and
Service Module Unified S-Band System are given along with a brief discussion of
the reasoning behind these requirements. The operational modes, which include
simultaneous transmission of a pseudo-random noise (PRN) range code, TV,
voice, telemetry and biomedical data and system conflguratlon that evolved from
the se requirements, are considered. Such things as modulation techniques,
major systems, and basic data flow for these are outlined along with the modes
of operation and system configuration. A more detailed description for the
major systems Is then presented, Including block diagrams and data flow and key
parameters of the premodulation processor (PMP), transponder, power ampli­
fier and antennas.

INTRODUCTION

To introduce in this session the two ''blocks'' of the Apollo unified S-band (USB) will be
defined. The early Saturn .Apollo 200 series will carry what has been deSignated as a Block I
system. As a result of increased operational requirements, it has become necessary to modify
the functional design of the Command and Service Module (CSM) S-band system. This modified
or updated version has been designated as the Block n system which will first be flown on
mission SA-207 and wtll be the system used on the lunar misSion, and is the system discussed
in this paper.

BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR CSM TRACKING AND COMMUNICATION

The basic requirements for the CSM tracking and communications are to provide tracking
data, two-way voice communications, up-data from eroun1 to ep::.cccraft, telem ..tl'y and teie­
vision from spacecraft to ground, biomedical channels, relay capabilities, and scientific data
channels.

Table 1 presents the communication requirements from ground to spacecraft. There are
essentially three functions to transmit: ranging, VOice, and up-data. As the first reqUirement,
the spacecraft must be capable of receiving the pseudo-random noise (PRN) range code at any

223
224 a.HOOD

Table 1 time it is transmitted from the ground. The ca­

pability for voice reception will likewise be con­
Ground To Spacecraft Communications
Requ irements. tinuous with a requirement of 90-percent word
intelligibility under normal operating conditions
Fundion Requirements and 70-percent word intelligibility in the backup
mode. This percentage of word intelligibility
Ranging Continuous Capability would approximate lOO-percent sentence
Voice Continuous Capability intelligibility.
Normal - 90% Word Intelligibility
Backup - 70% Word Intelligibility The spacecraft will also be capable of con­
Up Data Continuous Capability tinuously receiving up-data or command infor­
Maximum of 1 Correct Message mation. The requirements for the up-data channel
Reject per 1000
are that no more than one correct message per
Maximum of 1 False Message
Accepted in 109 1000 be rejected and that no more than one false
message in 109 messages be accepted.

The spacecraft-to-ground communications provide a more detailed list of modes, as seen

in Table 2. The voice channel must have continuous capability and be transmitted with the same
word intelligibilities as stated previously. The telemetry system must provide a nonreturn to
zero (NRZ) PCM wave train at either a 51.2 kilobit rate or at a 1 . 6 kilobit rate with continuous

Table 2

Spacecraft To Ground Commullicaliolls RequLt'emellts.

FuncUon Requirements

Voice Continuous Capability

Normal - 90% Word Intelligibility
Backup - 70% Word Intelligibility

Telemetry Continuous Capability

NRZ PCM at 51.2 KBPS or 1 . 6 KBPS Rate

Maximum of I Errol' in 106 Bits

Ranging Continuous Capahility

Phase Cohercnt Turn-Around of the PRN Range Code
Television When Convenient
Near-Commercial Quality Resolution and Gray Scale
Scicntific Data 3 Channels
Tape Playh:l�'k Capability to Transmit Simultaneously With Real Time Data
Telemetl'y. Voice, and Scientific DMU
Emergency Key Continuous Capab!lity
Maximum of 25 Characters Per Minute
Relay Thru CSM Eva Voice and Biomed to MSFN

LEM Simplex Voice to MSFN

 CQWAAHD AND SERVICE WODUU UNIFIED S'BAND SYSTEW 225

capability. The ranging channel on the transponder will be capable of continuous phase-coherent

turnaround of the PRN range code and also will provide a coherent carrier on the down-link for
doppler extraction.

Television is not a direct mission operational requirement; thus it will be transmitted

only when convenient during the mission. When transmitted, it will provide data by which the
ground personnel can monitor activity in the spacecraft or scenes from the window. The data

transmission for this has been specified as near-commercial quality resolution and gray scale.
There is also a capabil1ty to transmit three channels of analog data. Use of these channels will

be specified by the scientific experiment office.

A tape playback mode will transmit data which has been taped on board the spacecraft

during the time it is behind the lunar disc or between ground stations while in earth orbit.

Stored information includes telemetry, VOice and SCientific data. The telemetry data will

either be of low or high bit-rate command module data. There will also be a capability of

receiving low bit-rate data from the Lunar Excursion Module (LEM) (over a VHF link) and
recording it aboard the spacecraft for later playback to ground stations. The requirement to
Simultaneously transmit taped data along with real-time voice and telemetry data was one of
the contributing factors in changing from Block I to Block n design.

The emergency key is a last-ditch communication mode. It will have a capability to provide

a maximum of 25 characters per minute. This mode would be used in case of major failure
aboard the spacecraft, such as losing both power amplifiers and/or the high-gain antenna. A
relay capability through the CSM is also available. Voice and biomedical data from an extrav­
ehicular astronaut as well as simplex voice from the LEM can be transmitted to the gr()J.nd

stations through the CSM communication facilities.

TRANSMISSION MODES

A list of possible transmission modes or data combinations has been derived along with

the appropriate modulation techniques. Table 3 shows this list for the gI'Olmd-to-spacecraft
transmission link. There are basically four pieces of data to be transmitted: PRN range code,
up-voice, up-data, and backup VOice. For SimpliCity, only modes 6 and 8 wUl be discussed.
In mode 6, the PRN code is phase- modulated directly on the carrier and requires apprOximately
3 megacyc les of bandwidth. The voice is frequency-modulated onto a 30-kilocycle subcarrier
which is in turn phase-modulated onto the carrier. Similarly, the up-data is frequency-modulated
onto a 70-kilocycle subcarrier and then phase-modulated onto the ��rripr_ In mod", 13-, the
backup VOice is frequency-modulated onto the up-data subcarrier, which is in turn phase­

modulated onto the carrier.

Table 4 shows a tabulation of the narrow band PM modes which will be used on the down­
link channels from spacecraft to ground. The reasons for nine modes are that circuit margins
may be optimized by using only those channels which are of immediate interest; and under

certain contingency modes where a power amplifier or an antenna has been lost, the spacecraft

must have the capability of transmitting at reduced rates.

226 fl. KOOO

Table 3

MSFN To CSM S-Baod Transmlssior: Combinations Summary (PM Modes).

2106.4 Me
Modulalion SulJcarrier
Carrler In[ormation
Tl.'ChniquE' Fn�qucncy
Combinations

I C:lrrier, PRS PM On Cal'ricr -

2 Carri!.'l", Voice nt/PM :)0 kc

, Carrier, Up-Data FM/P�I 70 kc

, Carrier
PR:-: PM Oil Carril'l' -
Voice nl/plIl .10 kc

5 CalTier
PRN P�l On Ca nil'!' -
Up-Data FM/PM 70 kc

G Carrier
PRN P:o.I On Cal'l'il'r -
Voicl' FM/PM :)0 kc
Up-Data FM/PM 70 kc

7 Carriel'
Voice FM!P:\\ ao kc
Up-Data nl/PM 70 kc

• Can'lt.'I'
\'oh:�' Il.:",kup no1/P,,-. 70 kc

Mode 2 i s the primary high-data mode which will be used during critical phases of the
mission. In this mode, the PRN code phase-modulates the carrier, whereas the voice frequency­
modulates a 1.25-megacyc!e subcarrier which then phase-modulates the carrier. The telemetry
data is a 5 1 . 2-kilobit PCM wave train which phase-modulates a 1 . 024-megacyc!c subcarrier,
which in turn phase-modulates the carrier. Mode 3 has essentially the same function with only
n lo6-ki lobit te lemetry stream on the l . 024-megacycle subcarricr.

Mode 4 has been designed as a lunar COast mode. There is reduced activity in the space­
cralt at this time and a minimum amount of data is required for monitoring. Modes 5, 6, 8, and
9 are possible transmission combinations which can be used to optimize circuit margins in
contingency situations. The emergency key capability is provided by amplitude-modulating a
512-kllocycle subc arrier, which phase-modulates the carrier. Also, the backup voice capa­
bility is provided by direclly phase-modulating the carrier with the backup VOice signal.

The wideband FM combinations are shown in Table 5. The main reason for the wideband
FM carrier is the TV data shown in mode 4. The other (unctions which exist on the FM mode
are the tape playback channels and the real-time capability (or the scientific data. The FM
channel is designed to accommodate playback of various combinations of VOice, CSM telemetry,

LEM telemetry, and scientific data. A high-speed playback mode is used for rapid dump of
low bil rate PCM at a 32 to 1 playback rate. This results in an apparent bit rate of 51.2 kilo­
bits per second on the 1.024 megacycle subcarrier. For playback of high bit rate PCM, a 1 : 1
 CQ!.IMAA O AND SERWCE p,(JOULE UMIFIEO S·8ANO SYSTEM 227

Table -t

CS:\J To MSF:.i S-Baml TI';lIlsmlssion Cumhin:ltion Summ:Il'�' IP�I :\Iode).

�<!Sj.5 �k
M"dulalion Subcarricl'
TN, hn i qu c
Carrier illformation
Fl'equenc}"
Coml)inalion

I CUtTi(>r
Voice F r.I/P�1 I . :?) �le
5 1 . 2 KBPS TM PCi\I/J>M/P�1 1 .024 Me

2 Carril'r
PRX PM On Carriel'
Voice , F M/PM l.:?z, :-'1c
5 1 . 2 KBT'S
I PCM/P!'II/Pi\1 1 .OH Me

3 C<llTier
PRK P � I On Can"icr
V�>ice FM/ Pfo.l 1.2;; :-"k
\.6 "BPS PC!'II/PM/PM 1.024 :'ole

4 C,n'l'il'r
Voi ce HI/PM 1.25 Mc
I . G "BPS PCi\I/PM/PM 1.024 Me

5 Carri er
I.v KBPS PCM/Pl'II /PM 1 .024 O\k

6 Carrier
Key AM/PM 512 kc

7 Car rie r
PIlK PM On Carrier

, Carrier
Backup Voice PM On Can'ier
I . G KBPS TM PCWPM/PM 1.024 :'olc

9 Carri e r
PIlN PM On CalTier
l.v KBPS TM PCM/PM/Pi\l 1 . 0201 Me

dump speed i s used. Playback of vOice is accomplished simultaneously with telemetry or

scientific data dump by modulating the FM carrier directly at baseband with either 1 : 1 01' 32:1
voice signals. The scientific data frequency-modulates the subcarciers of 95, 125, and 165 kilo­
cycles which then frequency modulates the carrier.

SPECTRA OF TRANSMISSION MODES

Typical spectra of the above transmission modes can be seen in Figur e 1 - 4 . Figure 1 shows
the iuii up-hnk spectrum with the range code, voice, and up-data subcarriers. The range code
is centered on the 2106.4-megacycie PM carrier, and the voice and up-data subcarriers are at
30 and 70 kilocycles, respectively.

A typical down-link spectrum is represented by Figure 2. It is seen that the spacecraft has
the capability of simultaneously transmitting both an FM and a PM carrier. The PM carrier at
228 8. HOOD

Table 5

CSt.! to MSfN S-aand Transmission Combination Summary (FM Modes).

2212.5 Me
Modulation Subcarrier
Carrier Information
Technique Frequency
Comhl nntion

I Playback VoicE' at 1 : I FM at D:'lscbnnd

Pla.rlJack C5)1
,) 1.2 lOWS TM :it I : J PCM/PM/FM 1024 kc

Scil'nliric Data
Playback ,It 1 : 1 FM/FM 9:; kc
FM/FM J 2!:> kc
FM/FM lui; kc

, Pla.vback Voi<;(' a\ .12 : I

I
FM at O:lseband
Pla.rhack CS�I
1 . (j KBI'S TM at 32 PCM/PM/nt 1024 kc

Scit'nliric Datn
Pla,vhnl'k at 32 I FM/Ft.! !=I5 kc
FM/nl J 2'; kc
FM/FM Iii" kc

3 Plnyh:K'k LE!\! F!\I :H B.1sdJ;ltld

U; KBPS
Splil 1'1o"s\' Ti\l at :l:�:l

, Tclcvillioll FM oH R.u('h.1nd

3 H"tll �Tim('
Sckntific 0:1\:1 FM/F�' fir. kc
FM/FM 12:. kc
FM/FM Hi:) k\"

� \rM �kIU
PM CAUI!l T[UVt�ION ItANGE coO!:
VOle( SUBC"'RRlf�

up· OM... $UlCAU1ER

UNO! CODE ENVEtOPf

'. ' JOKe

/
Figure I-Full up·jink spectrum with the range of code,
Figure 2- Typical dawn-link spectrum.
voi ce, and up·dato subcorrien.

2287.5 megacycles would be modulated with the range code, the telemetry at 1.024 megacycles
and the voice at 1.25 megacycles. The FM carrier is located at 2272.5 megacycles and is

modulated with the TV signal. Figure 3 indicates another typical down -link spectrum with a
normal PM mode. But instead of TV, the FM channel contains the playback voice modulated
directly on lhe carrier, the playback telemetry data modulated on its subcarrier, and the
scientific data subcarriers.
 COI.1!lAND ANO SERVICE MOOULE UNIFIED S·SANO SYSTEM 229

VOIC{
SUKARRIER
PlAYMCK 1M 1M

/ �
PlAYBACK �AN(;E (ooe
ENV£tOf'E

I
VOK[

'
FM (AR l n S(lENTIFI(
SUKAR1I.IER

PM (AARltR \
./ /" SUKARRIE11:S
OATA
, :-r .

\
o.

!Ol • 1 .024 Me 1'1 -22B7.5Mc TM SVKA�RIER VOIC( OIRfCTtY ON (ARRI(�

10] • 165 Kc 1' -I ,024 Me

1

I0 �125Kc 1., - 1.2�M.:

2

IOl + 95 KC

1'1 � 227"2.5 Me

figure 3-Typica! down-link �peetrum figure. 4-Conl ingeney down-I ink speclrum.
with 0 norma! PM mode.

In the event that the high-gain antenna or the power amplifier arc disabled, one of the two
contin�ency down-link spectra of Figure 4 could be employed. One spectrum shows the PM
carrier modulated by the range code and a low bit-rate telemetry subcarrier ( 1 . 6 kilobits of
PCM data). The other mode shows the PM carrier modulated directly by voice and a low bit­
rate telemetry sbucarrier. Although it is not shown, the spectrum for the emergency key would
be ess entially the same with a 512 kilocycle subcarrier phase-modulating the carrier.

BASIC CSM USB SYSTEM

A block diagram of the basic USB system is shown in Figure 5 . It consists of four basic
COmponents or subsystems: the antenna subsystem (omnidirectional antenna and high-gain
directional antenna): the pOwer amplifier, switching, and triplexing subsystem; the transponder s;
and the premodulation processor. The transponder consists of a PM receiver, a PM exc iter or
transmitter, and an FM exciter. The premodulation processor provides the capability to
demodulate the up·vOice and up-data subcarrier, as well as the capability for modulating the
down-link subcarriers and combining them into a composite waveform for use by the PM and
FM exciters. The premodulatiOn processor also interfaces with the VHF equipment for the
communications between the LEM and com-

HIGH
mand module.
GAIN
:: 1 \17
UP·MiA
.M
The system is not fully redundant since uP-vain
HCHVER
YOKE -<
there i s only one pre modulation prOCeSsor;
HUMURV -<
however, due to the requ irements for trans· TELEVISION -< FINAL
AMPlfIH,
mitting real-time and recorded data, there RECORDI.O j'''MO,"�HON 'M SWITC!1IN(;.
vOln
OMNI
PROCeSsOli EX(lHR 'NO
are essentially two sets of modulators for RECO,OfO
TR IPl(XU
HL£METRV � � �
each of the prime subcarriers. In the event

,:�'"
a ialiure Of one of the real-time modula­
�l
ui

-:l
tors, we could use a modu lator which has
J. .
::'�;
:;O
been provided for recorded data and thereby 810MU> R HA ___
__
. . .

maintain r e d u n d a n c y in the real-time figure S-Diogrom of bo�ic CSM

channels. Unified S-Bond System.
230 II. HOOD

Figure 6 shows the hasic USB receiver in the transponder. It is a dual-conversion super­
heterodyne PM receiver with a center frequency of 2106.4 megacycles. Following the conversion
phase, at a signal level of -U4dbm and a static phase error of 24 degrees, the carrier tracking
loop is capable of tracking frequency ranges of ±90 kilocycles and sweep rates of 35 kilocycles
per second/second. Immediately following the second mixer, the signal passes through an IF
limiting amplifier into a wideband detector.

The voltage control oscillator (VeO) in the carrier-tracking loop provides a reference for
the wideband detector. The output of the wideband detector consists of the range code which is
coherently returned to the PM transmitter and the up-data and voice subcarriers, which are
passed to the premodulation processor for demodulation and use in the spacecraft. The output
of the veo is also coupled to the PM transmitter where it provides the phase-coherent ref­
erence for this exciter. The transponder provides a frequency ratio of 240:221 for the coherent
turnaround of the carrier.

The basic configuration of the transmitter exciters is shown in Figure 7. The modulators
(PM and FM) receive data (telemetry and voice subcarriers) from the premodulation processor.
Other inputs to the modulators include range code, a coherent reference from the carrier­
tracking yeO (for the PM mode), and a reference frequency from an OSCillator (for the FM mode) .
Once the data is modulated, it is amplified and multiplied up to the proper frequency -2287.5

ItANGE CODE
PM XMTR
2ND I - f LIM WIDE BAND
AMPLIfiER
r-< DETECTOR

UP-DATA & VOICE

fiLTER 'M'
SUKAUIERS

'M
XM"
<.
''0

CARRIER
TRACKING LOOP

, , RECHVER PHASE
AMPLFIER ...... r-<
.
'000
INPUT FRONT END O£HcrOR FILTER

figure 6-Diogram of CSM S-bond receiver_

r- ISOLATOR
'M
AMPLIFIER MULTIPLIER AN'
MODULATOR
filtER '0'",
AMPLIf'"

� �
RA GE
CODE
•
M
•
0"

'M ISOLATO!!
MOOULATOR AMPLIfiER MULTIPLIER AN'
� filTER '0'",
AMPLIf'"

figure 7-Basic configuration of transmitter PM and FM exciter$_

 CO�AHD ANO SERVICE !.IOOUlE UNIFIEO s.BAN[l SYSTEM 231

megacycles for the PM mode and 2272.5 megacycles for the FM mode, and is then passed
through an isolator and filter network to the power amplifier subsystem.

The power antplifier subsystem, shown in Figure 8, is composed basically of two traveling­
wave tube amplifiers and the appropriate switching arrangements. The switches are designed
such that either transmitter (PM or FM in Figure 7) may be connected to either power amplifier;
and that the output of either amplifier may be cOJUlected to either input of the antenna subsystem.

t
...NTENNA

RECflVU TRI'lEXEI I
BY PASS
I r- ,--
I
m , F'LHR
,.
XMTR
, "K " ,
w ' '''''' w
, 'ow SUPPLY ,
, , ,
, ,
HIG H
" POW[l "
,
cow SUPPLY ,
N 2 N
G G
,.
XMTl
,w " fun
'-- '--

Figvre a-Diagrom of CSM S-bood power amplifier subsystem.

The traveling-wave tube amplifiers have two power-output levels: 5 or 20 watts. These
power levels are designated as low- and high-power modes, respectively, and are controlled
by the switching of the input power from the power supplies to the tubes. As can be seen, the
output of the traveling wave tube is liltered and passed through switching to the triplexer ar­
rangement and then to the antenna. The actual power delivered to the antenna is considerably
less than the output power of the tube due to
circult losses between the tube and the an- �IGH
C;...IN OMNI ANTENNAS
lenna. In the event of amplifier failure, the
PM exciter can bypass the power amplifier
and still provide a capability of 1/4 watt of
RF power.

The ante!!!!:!. S'.!bsystcm (Fig"..::"e !}),

sists of a high-gain antenna and a set of om­
nidirectional antennas. As can be seen, PM
and/or FM rlu·ri.,.rs �re !e-:! :r:t� !h{) t:-i-
plexer, which in turn supplies the power to
,1.1 POWEl ..t.MI'LiflU ncuvu
the selected antenna. The high-gain antenna
is mounted on the service module and has a
fM PaWU AMP'LlfIU
selectable set of gains and beamwidths.
The omnidirectional anteMas (low-gain) are Figure 9-CSM S-band anlenl'lO sydem.
232 6. 11000

located arOUnd the base of the command module and are spaced at 90 degree

intervals.

There are plans to use a number of combinations of antennas and power amplifiers in order

to optimize the circuit margins and conserve power during different mission phases. The

omnidirectional antennas will be used in earth orbit and in the first stages of translunar in­

jection up until the hlgh-gain antenna can be deployed. The omnidirectional antennas will also

provide limited capability at lunar distances when communicating with the high-gain antennas
on the ground.

The basic characteristics of the antenna system are tabulated in Table 6. As stated above,
the high-gain antenna has a selectable set of gains and beam width. It has a capability of 28. 4db
at a beamwidth of 4.6 degrees, 22.9db at a beamwidth of 11.1 degrees, or 7. 4db at a beamwidth
o[ 68 degrees. In order to cover the earth 's surface during early phases of injection, the
beamwidth must be quite large. As the spacecraft nears the moon, beamwidth is reduced. The

high-gain antenna is a parabolic radiating system and radiates a right-circularly polarized wave.

It is pointed at the earth by an IR sensor device. The omnidirectional antennas are Hux·moWlted,
right-circularly polarized, and provide an overall gain of apprOximately -3db over 80 percent
o[ the sphere.

Table (j

CSM Antenna CharnetN·isties.

Function Qmni High Gain

T,po Flush Mounted Pnr3l,)olic

Polarization RCP RCP

On-AJr:is Gain -3 DB Over 80'1 28.4 DB 4.6'

and Corresponding Sphere 22.9 DB 11.1'
3 D B Bcamwidth 7.4 DB ,,'

Pointing lit Sensor

 LUNAR EXCURSION MODULE
UNIFIED S-BAND SYSTEM

by

W. Kuykendall

Manned Spacecraft Gel/ter

ABSTRACT

A description of the basic S-band communication and tracking requirements

for the in-night and lunar phases of the LEM opemtion is given. Modu.latlon
techniques and associated RF spe<:tra for various communication modes involv­
ing voice, t",lemetry, TV, and r3;nging are presented. RF systems, including the
transponder, power amplifier, diplexer and antennas (omni, stcerable, and
erectable) are discussed. Current estimates of system gain and loss param­
eters are presented along with predictions of system performance at lunar
distance.

INTROOUCTION

In discussing the Lunar Excursion Module (LEM) Unified S- Band System, four essential

areas are covered: mission requirements, spacecraft system configuration to meet these re­

quirements, spacecraft signal design for the up-link and down-link, and expected system per­

formance margins.

Table 1

LEM COMMUNICATIONS ANO LEM S-Band Communication and

Tracking Requirements.
TRACKING REQUIREMENTS

Table 1 gives the communication and Mission Phasc Requirements

tracking requirements for the LEM. These

MSFN_LEM LEM .... MSl-'N
requirements can be divided essentially into
(Up-Link) (Down-Link)
two areas: the infiight area and the lunar

stay. Table 1 shows that the up-link require­ l.I'l-}'light Carrier Carrier
Voice Voice
ments for the inflight rha!'lp. ind'.!de fo!" Cll.!"­
Range Code I Biomedical Data
r ier, range code and voice. Note that there PCM Telemetry

is no up-data link to the LEM. The down­ Range Code

link infiightrequirements consist of r.HT'rip.r,

Lunar Stay Voice Voice
voice, biomedical data, PCM telemetry, and Biomedical Data

range code. During lunar stay, the up-link PCM Telemetry

Television
requirement is for voice only; the down-link

233
234 •• KUYKEffDAlL

requirement, for voice, biomedical data, PCM telemetry, and television. We might also note
that there is no requirement for a tape-playback capability from the LEM. There is, however,
an indirect tape-playback capability present since the LEM is capable of transmitting low-rate
telemetry to the Command and Service Module (CSM) where it can be recorded and subsequently
played back to the Manned Space Flight Network
Table 2 (MSFN). Another UnifiedS-Band (USB) require­
Carrier Modulation Techniques. ment that will not be treated in this discussion,
is the IWlar surface experiment package, S-band
link for communication with the MSFN.
Link ModulaUon

Up-Link PM The modulation schemes used for the up­

and down-link transmissions are shown in
Down-Link
Table 2. The up-link is always PM as is the
In-Flight PM
down-link during inflight phases. During the
lWlar- stay period, when the LEM is not trans­
Lunar Stay. Without TV PM mitting TV, the PM mode will normally be used.
Lunar Stay. With TV FM
When transmitting TV during the lWlar stay, the
FM mode will be used.

LEM SoUN� SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Figure I shows the system block diagram for the onboard S-band system in the LEM, il­
lustrating the several major elements in the system. At the left of the figure is the premodu­
lation processor (PMP) which fWlctions much like the PMP for the CSM. To the right is the
S-band transceiver, or transponder. Between the transceiver and antenna system are the two
power amplifiers; the antennas and associated switching are depicted in the upper right-hand
part of the figure.

STEUA8U

VOICE

VOICE

".
TEL[MiUY

"
,.,
YOICE SU8CARRIER
fROM S · BAND I
A.GC 10
STHRA.BL[
A.NTENNA .� �
''"
RECEIVU

fMUGINCY INPUT TO PHASE 0 ,

'" ,
S-IAND
TUNSCfIVIR OUTPUT I
MODUlATOR

I
""'-
HAR�INI tMPUT TO (REDUNDANT)
PA. f2
BIOMED FREO MODUlA.TOR fiLTER
PA I
20
f
OUTPUT ISOLATOR

T
lANGING
T
fM ·PM
ON· OfF CONUOl
CONtROL

Figure I-Block diagram of lEM S-bond $Y$tem.

 LUNAR EXCURSIDII M)(IUlE UIlIFIEO SoIWID smu
235

MOOULATION TECHNIQUES AND ASSOCIATED RF SPECTRA

Figure 2 shows the (ull up�link PM spectrum. Notice the absence o( the 70- kilocycle (up­
data) subcarrier. During normal flight operation the range code will be used intermittently;
therefore, the spectrum withOut range code represents the normal inOight up-link mode. The
center frequency is 2101.8 megacycles (plus or minus doppler and transmitter frequency
offset).

The full down-link spectrum (or normal

PM modulation is shown in Figure 3. Again
the range code will be used intermlttently;
therefore, the normal down-link mode will
��_/'C"'=NG E CODE

include the carrier and the two subcarriers.

The two contingency modes are illus­ JO k� VOICE MCAIIIIU

f , - 2 1 01.8 M<;
trated in Figure 4. Backup voice is modu­
lated directly at base band with low-rate te­ Figure 2-Full up-linlc PM $�ctrum.
lemetry transmitted on the 1. 024 megacycle
subcarrier. In the worst case, multiple (ail­
1 .024 Me TEUMETRY SU8CAUIEI
ures such as antenna, power amplifier. and
lANOE COOE 1.25 Me VOICE/ltOM£D SUICAMIEI
possibly PMP fallure could lead to the use of
the emergency-key mode which utilizes a
512-kUocycle subcarrier keyed on and off by
the astronaut.
'. -240/221 . tECErvfO fREQUENCY

Figure 5 shows the FM down-link spec­ Figure 3-full down-link PM spectrum.

trum, which will be used during the lunar­
stay mode if there Is television transmis­
1 .024 Me
sion. Also shown in the figure is the lH!Mf.TRY 512 Kc
IlACKUI' VOICE
SUBCAIRIEI SOICAUIU
spectrum containing TV and the telemetry
and voice/biomedical 8ubcarriers.

,. ,.
Table 3 shows the three possible com­ f, -2040/22 1 X IECEIV[D flEQ!,lE.NCY
binations of up-link information: carrIer
Figure 4-Down-link Rf spectra for conti"9'!ncy
model (PM).
and pseudo-random noise (PRN), carrier and
voice, and PRN and voice. Note that the
combinations is synonymous with modes.
Comb1nation 2 will be the primary up-link
mode for the LEM.

Tilt: va.rious coml;.natlons

)1 of down-link
transmission for PM and FM modes of oper­
ation are shown in Table 4. For down-link
',- 2782.3 M<
transmissions there are a few keyed modes
which will probably be used during most o( Figure 5-fM down-link. !opec/rum.
236 ,.KUYKENDAll

Table 3

LEM Up-Link S-Band TransmisSion Combinations Summary.

Carrier
Modulation &!.bcarrier Phase
Combination Wortnation Technique Frequency Deviation

1 Carrier, PRN PM on Carrier - 0,37 Radians

, Carrier, Voice FM/PM 30 kc 1.' Radians

3 Carrier

PRN PM on Carrier - 0.37 Radians

Voice nf/PM la ke 1. , Radl�

the operation and additional modes to be used in the event oC various failures. The primary
modes are combinations 1, 7 . and 10.

Combination 1 is the down-link carrier with voice and 51.2 kilobit telemetry on their re­
spectlve subcarrlers. Combination 7 Is commonly referred to as the lunar-stay mode. Voice
and biomedical information are transmitted on the 1.25 megacycle subcarrier while low-rate
telemetry is on the 1.024 megacycle subcarrier. In order to optimize the circuIt margins, the
phase deviations lor the two subcarriers modulating the PM carrier are reversed for combina­
tions 1 and 7. In combination 1 we are transmitting a wide-band high-rate telemetry signal.
In combination 7, it is not necessary during lwtar stay to transmit the same quantity of infor­
mation required during inIlight and we are able to reduce that bit rate to 1.6 kUobits per
second. The power in the two subcarriers may then be balanced, enabling combination 7 to
perform well with low -power transmission and the erectable antenna during lunar stay, con­
trasted to another alternative of operating with full power (20 watts). This is the basic reason
for a change in the modulaUon indices in the right-hand column.

The advantage of the reversal of the modulation indices in combination 7 Is evident if we

consider operation with low power during IWlar stay while keeping the same phase deviations
as used in combination 2. The result is a -3.9db margin for the voice and biomedical channel
and about a + 12.9db margin (Or the low-rate telemetry. However, if by reversing modulation
indices, results yield positive margins for both channels operating in the low-power mode.
These margins are over 3db for the voice and biomedical channel and 6db for the telemetry
channel. The last primary mode here of COurse is number 10 whicb is the FM transmission of
TV with the voice, biomedical and extra-vehicular mobility unit (EMU) signals. The EMU is
the device carried by the astronaut on the lunar surface. The biomedical subcarriers are
transmitted from the EMU to the LEM by the VHF link and are subsequently placed on the
S-band for transmission to the earth.
 LUNAR EXCURSI(II IIlDULE UNIfIED S-BNlD SYSTEM 237

Table 4
LEM Down-Llnk MSFN S-Band Tnln6miBslon Combination Summary.

2282. 5 Mc Carrier
Carrier Modulation 5ubcarrler Phase
Combination Information Techniques Frequency Deviation

1 Carrier
Voice FM/PM 1. 25 Me 0.7 Radians
51.2 kbps TM PCM/PM/PM 1. 024 Mc 1.3 Radians

2 Carrier
PRN PM on Carrier O. 2 Radians·
Voice FM/PM 1. 25 Me 0. 7 Radians
51.2 kbps TM PCM/PM/PM 1. 024 Me 1.3 Radians

3 Carrier
1.6 kbps TM PCM/PM/PM 1. 024 Me 1.3 Radians

• Carrier
BU Voice PM on Carrier 0.8 Radians
1 . 6 kbp6 TM PCM/PM/PM 1. 024 Me 1.3 Radians

5 Carrier
Backup Voice PM (24 db clipping) 0.8 Radians

• Carrier
Key AM/PM 512 kc 1 . 4 Ra.dia.ns

7 Carrier
(Lunar Stay Mode) Voice/Biome!S FM/PM 1.25 Me 1.3 Radians
1. 6 kbps TM PCM/PM/PM 1. 024 Me . 7 Radians

• Carrier
Voice/EMU/ PM on Carrier (no TBD
Blomed cUpping)
51.2 kbpe TM PCM/PM/PM

Carrier
Deviation
Ratio

9 Voice/EMU/ FM/FM 1.25 Me 0.17

Blomed
TM PCM/PM/FM 1. 024 Me 0.37

10 TV FM at Ba.seband 2.'
Vuio.;ti/EMlJ/ Fiti/FM/i'i'{ . .-
�. ...... Me C. ..7
Biomed
1. 6 or Sl. 2 PCM/PM/FM 1. 024 Me 0.37

0"""'" P!'.N �".:..:.

: �;: ;!:.:.:n'.... ,�<,; �� :O�: "',:!: �;; .,,'�;: � :,;:;;:M::;;':"::' =��!:"cc ('!::�!: ! !:==!; }) ::=� ",.::!: = �,;!:. ;.:.=!
IO-ooise '.';0 i• •Iot •.", .«1110:1 ell_d.
23. W. KUVKENDALl

EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS

Returning to Figure 1 the PMP performs the demodulation of the up-voice suhcarrier and

contains the voltage controlled oscillator (VeO) for the down-voice channel and the bi-phase

modulator for the PCM telemetry. It interfaces with the TV equipment, emergency key, and the

hardline biomedical channel. The hardline biomedical channel is a 14.5 kilocycle subcarrier
on which 0 to 3 0 cycles per second biomedical data is modulated when LEM is transmitting low

bit-rate telemetry. Due to the lower capacity in the low-rate telemetry format, certain neces­

sary biomedical data cannot be handled by PCM; therefore, a separate subcarrier was provided.

The other equipments with which the PMP interfaces on the spacecraft include the audio
center, the PCM telemetry equipment, central timing equipment, and TV camera. The S-band

transceiver (transponder) block as shown here includes two fully redundant transceivers as
well as an FM modulator. The two RF outputs are selectable, as are the two R F inputs to the
receiver s. Differing slightly from the CSM, the LEM utilizes amplitron power amplifiers
operated in cascade. Normally, power amplifier, PA H2 would be used when operating in the

20-watt mode because there is additional insertion loss in the circuit with power amplifier

PA HI in operation. The three types of antennas, shown in Figure 1, are the erectable antenna,
which is used during lunar stay operations, the steerable antenna, which is the primary inflight
antenna, and two omnidirectional antennas, which may be used as backups. These antennas are
switchable by the astronaut.

With reference to the control functions which the crew exercises over this system, the

astronaut has control over the telemetry bit rate through selection of either 51.2 or 1.6 kilobits.
He also may turn the ranging channel on or off by a manual control on the panel which allows

the ranging channel to be turned off when PRN ranging is not being used, thus eliminating the

turnaroWld of the up-link subcarriers and noise which is detrimental to the down-Unk per­
formance. Another control selects PM or FM such that the LEM can transmit either FM or

PM, but not both. The crew can also select transceiver one or two and the power amplifier

(PA 1i2) or backup power amplifier (PA il l ) . In addition, the crew has manual control for point­
ing the steerable antenna for initial acquisition.

Table 5 lists the characteristics of the three types of antennas used. The steerable antenna,
a 2-foot parabola which is the primary inflight antenna, angle-tracks the MSFN station auto­

matically. The erectable antenna, a 10-foot parabola, is used to provide the additional gain
needed [or the TV transmission from the IWlar surface. It is stowed in flight and is erected by
the astronaut on the IWlar surface. The low-gain omnidirectional antenna serve as a backup to
the steerable antenna. In lunar orbit the astronaut can switch between either of two omnidirec­
tional antennas located on opposite sides of the spacecraft for optimum commWlications.

As shown in Table 6, the steerable antenna is a 2-foot parabola with on-axis transmitting

gain of 20.3db and receiving gain of 16.5db. The noticeable difference in the transmit and re­

ceive gains is due largely to the R F tracking technique which degrades the receive performance.

The RF angle tracking involves a feed system for sampling four quadrants and deriving
the error signals. The 3db beamwidth is between 12 and 14 degrees and polarization is right­

circular with an elipticity of less than Idb within plus or minus 4 degrees of the boresight axis.
 LUIIO\R EXCURSION MODULE UNifiED S'SAItD SYSTEM 239

Table 5
Characteristics of LEM S-Band Antennas.

Name Type U"

5tecrable 2' Parabola Primary In_Flight Antenna

Auto-Tracks M5FN Station

Erectable 10' Parabola Primary Lunar-Stay Antenna

Stowed In-Flight
Erected on Lunar Surface

Omnl Low-Gain Omnidirectional Backup to SteerabLe

(Backup) (Can Manually Switch Between
2 Antennas)

Table I)

Characteristics of LEM Steerable Antenna (S-Band).

2' Parabola

Gain (On-Axis) Transmit: 20.3 db

Receive: 1 6 . 5 db

Beamwidth (-3 DB) 12" - 14"

Polarization Rep

Ellipticity < 1 db Within :1:4° of Boresight Axis

Pointing RF Tracker

Lobe on Receive Only

Utilizes S_band transceiver AGC to

derive error signals

The pOinting of the antenna is accomplished by RF angle tracking using a lobe-on-receiver­

only tcclmique. Original LEM plans called for an IR tracker muCh like that in the CSM tracker;
however, it was found that during the LEM descent phase, there are certain maneuvers which
could place portions of the LEM structure within the line-of-sight between LEM and earth. The
infrared system could then lock on the LEM itself requiring the flight crew to manually re­
acquire earth. Since this was an Wlacceptable crew task, several alternatives were considered
such as extending the boom, providing auxiliary antennas, and using an RF tracker. The latter
was the method chosen.

Table 7 gives the characteristics of the LEM erectable antenna. This is a lo-foot parabola
with an on-axis transmitting gain of 34.0, receiving gain of 32.5db and a beamwidth of 3 de­
grees at the 3db pOints. Polarization is right-clrcular with elipUcity less than Idb within 1.3
degrees of the boresighl axis. This antenna is erected on the lunar surface by the astronaut
240

Table 7

Characteristics of LEM Erectable Antenna IS-Band).

10' Parabola

Gain (On-Axis) Transmll: 34. 0 db

Receive: 3 2 . 5 db

Beamwldth (-3 db) "

Polarization RCP

ElIipUcity < 1 db Within :tl.3° or Boresight AJlis

Pointing Manual by Astronaut Aided by Sighting Device

Dimensions When Stowod 3' Long x 10" DIameter

and pointed by a visual alignment with the cen­

ter of the earth. The astronaut will be able to
Table 8

Characteristics of LE:'II Omniantennas (S-Band).

align the antenna accurately enough to achieve
good commWlications. The size of this to-root
antenna while stowed in the LEM is to be less
Type 2 Conical SpIrals

Gain Not Less Than -3db Over 8�!], than three feet in length and 10 incites in
of Spherical Area (assumes diameter.
switching)
The LEM omnidirectional antennas, shown
in
Poiaril'.ation RCP
Table8, consist of two conical spirals with
the specified gain not less than -3db over 85
Table 9 percent of the spherical area. The spirals are
LEM S-Band Equipment Weight and switchable for optimum coverage. The polari­
Power SUmmary. zation [or the omniantenna is also right-circular.

Weight DC Power
Table 9 gives the present power and weight
Hem (Ibs)* (Watts)· estimates of the LEM S-band equipments.

S-Band Transceiver 20. 2 29 Table 10 shows the LEM S-band circuit

losses. Circuit losses vary with transmission
Power Amplifier and 13.0 65, 2
Diplexer power. transmit or receiver channel and the
antenna selection. The difference between the
PMP 9 17.0
high-power and the low-power loss values is
Stcerablc Antenna 20. 0 20. 0 due to the insertion loss of the power amplifier
(Including system. The non-operating power amplifier
system 15 in the transmit leg even when trans­
electronics)

Erectable Antenna 10.0 mitting in the low-power mode. Thus, an addi­

tional insertion loss appears in the low-power
Backup AntelUlSS 2. ,
mode which does not appear in lhe high-power
,
mode.
 LUNAR EXCURSION MOOULE UNIFIED S·BAIfJ SYSTEM 241

In the case oUhe erectable antenna, high Ta.ble 10

losses are basically due to long cable rwts. LEM S-Band Circuit Losses.
A 65-foot cable run is necessary to allow the
astronaut ample room to select a suitable Antenna Losses (db)
place for erecting the antenna. Therefore, in
Transmitting Transmitting
the low-power mode with the erectable an­ High Power Low Power Receiving
tenna there are some very high circuit
losses. Stecrablc 5.5 7.9 6. 3

Ere<:table 9.1 11.5 10.0

Table 1 1 gives the expected circuit
margins for normal down-link communica­ Omnl 5. 3 7. 6 6.1
tions. No margins are given for the up-link,
since the 10 kilowatt transmitter power on
the growtd minimizes the problem of up-link commWlication with the LEM at lunar distance.
The first mode uses the steerable antenna at 20 watts while transmitting the carrier, range
code, voice, biomedical data and telemetry. The resulting circuit margins are based on the
circuit loss values given in Table 10. These margins are calculated assuming an 85-foot an­
tenna, a system temperature of 326 degrees kelvin and operation at lwtar distance. The system
temperature is quite high and a 2 or 3db improvement in these margins can be expected by
using the cooled parametriC amplifiers now being implemented for the ground stations. In the
first mode, the voice/biomedical channel has about a 6.6db margin, and high bit rate telemetry
has a 5.2db margin.

The erectable antenna normally uses a transmitting power of 0.75 watts lor lunar stay
mode when not transmitting TV. The carrier margin is 24.6db, the voice/biomedical margin,
3.2db and the low bit-rate telemetry margin, 5.8db. If the modulation indices had not been

Table 11
Expected Cin:uit Margins for Normal LEM Down-Link Combinations.

System IIIargin
Configuration Channels (db)

St.cerable Antenna. Carrier 32.2

2 0 Watts PRN Ranging 20. 3

Voice/Biome<l 6.6

Telemetry (51.2 KBPS) 5.2

Erectable Antenna Carrier 24. 6

0.75 Watts Voice/Biomed 3.2

relemetry {I. b N:H':S) 5. b

Ere<::table Antenna TV. Voice/Biomed, TM on 2.3

2 0 Watts �'M Channel

.
.
242 'It'. IIUYKENOALl

reversed, the voice/biomedical margin, which is 3.2db in this case, would be minus 3.9db and
telemetry would be plus 12.9db.

The margin for the FM mode is low, but with a low system temperature, the margin should

increase enough to assure good quality TV from the moon.

The above margins have assumed that the antenna is pointed direcUy at the center of the

moon; however, during the infiight modes, the antenna could be boresighted at a spacecraft

near the edge of the lWlar disc. Thus another slight improvement in signal performance may

be expected.
 UNIFIED S-BAND RF SYSTEM COMPATIBILITY TEST PROGRAM

by
A. Travis
Manned Spacecraft Center

ABSTRACT

The background, history, and present status of the Unified S-Band RF Sys­
tem compatibility program arc presented. A diagram of the tcst configuration is
fu rnish� and the equipment utilJze d in testing is tl ined
ou . The tests which have
been accomplished are enumerated and the general result s are given.

The responsibility of verifying spacecraft-ground-systems compatibility through systems

analysis and tests has been assigned to the Information Systems Division of the Manned Space­
craft Center. To fulfill a portion of this responsibility, the Unified S-Band RF System Com­
patibility Test Program is being conducted, and the background, history, and present status of
this program will be presented. Approximately one year ago it was decided that the ground and
spacecraft system development status was such that it was possible and desirable to make an
intensive effort to plan and conduct the S-Band Electronic Systems Test Program (ESTP). The
initial objectives were to:

1. Insure basic signal compatibility between the Block I USB spacecraft system and the
S-band ground equipment.

The tests which have been accomplished include: Gross compatibility tests as a first overall
look at the quality of the operational modes for Block I, data channel performance tests which
consisted of a detailed examination of each communication channel and signal combination, and
detailed investigation of the problem areas noted during the other tests.

General results of the tests show that Block I systems are compatible with the mission
requirements under SOme constraints, which have been defined; and several problem areas have
been delineated.

Some of the problems represent system constraints, oth pr� have a!!e-::ted the des!.;;n ::::!
spacecraft and ground eqUipment, and the remainder require further investigation. Tests which
are intended to investigate the latter problems are presently being planned and will be conducted
in the near future. In addition to the written reports, periodic hripfin� ., <,_nd r"''!i",�l1s :!!"e held
.

for interested parties.

Test results are documented ,in monthly activity reports, test-review reports, and a final
report. The final report on the Block I tests will be published in the near future.

243
244 A. TRAVIS

The new receiver/exciter subsystem, which was furnished by GSFC, and a Block I trans­

ponder are presentlS" being modified to Manned Space Flight Network (MSFN) and Block II
specifications.

2. Establish performance limitations and communications circuit quality for the early
Apollo flights by experimental means and evaluate the results by comparison with theoretical

analysis.

3. Provide a high degree of the assurance that the first Apollo USB flight tests would be

successful.

4. Provide data as soon as possible on design improvements required for future develop­
ment of spacecraft and ground systems to meet mission requirements.

The test planning has been a joint effort of the Manned Spacec raft Center (MSC), NASA
Headquarters, Goddard Space Flight Center (GSFC), Jet PrOI)uision Laboratory (JPL), Marshall

Space Flight Center (MSFC). and the spacecraft contractors. MSC awarded Motorola Com­

munications and ElectroniCS, Inc ., the contract to work with MSC and the other participants in
conducting the system tests at MSC.

GSFC, JPL, North American AViation, Inc., and Collins Radio Company have provided on­

site assistance by operating and maintaining equipment, as well as by handlin� information dis­
tribution to and from their home office.

Between July and December 1964, thc faCility at MSC was prepared and furnished with a

modified deep space network receiver/exciter subsystem, ranging subsystem, engincering

models of the data demodulators and subcarrier OSCillators, and engineering models of the

Block I Command and Service Module spacecraft equipment, These, along with special sup­

porting equipment, were assembled, carefully checked, and calibrated so that COntrolled tests
could be conducted.

A block diagram of the test configuration is given in Figure I, and the operational equipment

utilized in performing these tests includes: Receiver/exciter subsystem, ra.nging subsystem, Sig­

nal data demodulator, subcarrier oscillators, and spacecra.ft equipment. Equipment shOWn at the

right of the chart is for the spacecraft systems, while the equipment at the left is for the ground

systems. The spacecraft equipment is separated from the ground equipment by an RF-s hilded

enclosure, to insure that both the spacecraft and the ground equipment are sufficiently isolated an
that the received signal strength can be accurately controlled by the R F path. Tests utilizing the
modified transponder, Command and Service Module Block I D-Models, Lunar Excursion Module

production equipment, Command and Service Module Block II equipment, S-IV-B production
equipment, and the up-dated ground station will be initiated in the near futu re.
 UNIfiED S·SANO RF S'fSTUI CCliPATIBILIT'f TEST PflOGRAAt 245

r"cc,-,-"cc-,-1
uP - OATA
Dl!Ul SUllCARllER AUOIO
esc UP-VOICE
30 Kc & 10 K< CfNTU
UP-VOICE (30 Kc & 10 KoJ DlMOD
(PART OF PMPj u",
TRAN SMIT CODE MSFN
[XCITER

T.W., P. A. 2106 Me:

us.
) SWITCHES
XPONDU
& DIP\.EXU

MSfN
"N
UCEIVED COOE '"
UM SO Me:

CAU IE�
fl lO DEMOO
FM PM

SIGNAL
COND FM EMU VOICE
EQUIP

DOWN VOICE

EMU KEY

VOIC(
VOICE
"'MOO (PARI Of PMPj

Figure I - Slock I syslem lell configvrotion.

246
 COMMAND AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

by
B. Reed
Marshall Space Flight Center

ABSTRACT

The Command and Communication System (eeS) consists of a transpon der,

power amplifier and antenna system. The CCS Is located in the S-IVB Instru­
Dlent unit and is capable of up-data command, down-link telemetry and turn­
around ranging. A brief description of ea ch stage of the Saturn V vehicle is
presented. The S-TVB is the thiro powered stage of the Saturn V vehicle and
separates from the Apollo spacecraft at a distance of approximately 20,000 nau­
tical miles from the earth. The operational requirements of the CCS during the
period up to and including separation are describe d. This consIsts of the launch,
parking orbit insertion, and injection phases of the Apollo mission. Electrical
and environmental specifications of the CCS are presented. The errors in the
transponder due to doppler shift and doppler rate are tabulated versus input
signal level. Loop bandwidth and suppression factor versus signal level are also
included. The CCS omni- and directional antenna system and their swit ching and
coupling nctworils are describe d. A system analysis is presented and gain
margins are tabulated for the up-data link, ·down telemetry link and the RF
carrier.

INTROOUCTION

The S-IYB command and communication system (CCS) is a phase-coherent receiver­

transmitter capable of establishing a communication link between the unified S-band (USB)
ground stations and the instrument Unit (IU) of the Saturn Y launch vehicle. SpeCifically, the
CCS will: receive and demodulate command up-data for the guidance computers in the lU;
transmit pulse code-modulated (PCM) mission control measurements originating in the S-IYB
and the IU to the USB ground stations for processing; and coherently retransmit the pseudorandom
noise (PRN) range code that is received from the USB ground stations. The CCS physically
consists of a transponder, power amplifier, and antenna system. Each of these will be described
later.

SATURN V VEHICLE

We will nl)w ey.am.!!!� the S::.t:.:.rn V ;:ehi.de to .:: stablish ill:! n::iaLion to the (;(;8. The Saturn Y
consists of three powered stages and is shown in Figure 1 . The first stage is deSignated the
S-IC and is the stage normally called the booster. The S-IC is built by The Boeing Company .
It has a cluster of five F-I engines which burn liquid oxygen and RP-I kerosene. Each F-I

247
248 B. REED

A
engine produces a thrust of one and one-hall

,... . million pounds for a total S- Ie stage thrust

{ }
}-
, PAM/FM/fM of seven and one-hall million pounds. The F-I
, SS/FM VHF
3 PAM/fM/FM ' . rCM/FM
engine was developed by the Rocketdyne

\:
VHF 2 SS/FM
PCM/FM S - 8AND Division of North American Aviation.
1 PCM/FM
5 - 12:' m
2 SECUR� RANG
,eM/PM
SAfETY
COMMAND UPOATA The second powered stage, designated

R,t
RANGING
AW",
the 8-U, has a cluster of five J-I engines
C ND which burn liquid oxygen and liquid hydrogen.
eM
Each J-I engine produces a thrust of 200,000

}
,·n

{
pounds for a stage thrust of one million

VHf
{3 PAM/FM/FM
2 SS/FM
'AM/FM/FM
SS/FM
PCM/FM
SKUll[ RANGE
VHF
pounds. The s-n is built by North American
Aviation and the J-I engine, by Rocketdyne.
I PCM/FM

, r-.
SAFETY
, ""'"
COMMAND
The third powered stage, designated the
2 S£CUU RANG
SAFETY 5-IC S-IVB and built by Douglas Aircraft Com­
COMMAND
pany, has one J-I engine for a stage thrust
of 200,000 pounds. In addition, the S-IVB
J -I engine has a restart capability which will
be explained later. The CCS is contained in
the IU, which is rigidly attached to the S-IVB.
The Apollo spacecraft is then attached to the
Figure I-Saturn V instrumentatiol'l $yslel'll$.
IU.

The total height of the Saturn V vehicle including spacecraft is 110 meters. The S-IC is
42 meters high, the S-II, 25 meters, and the S-IVB, 19 meters. The Saturn V as described
has a capability to put a 200,000-pound payload into earth orbit or to thrust a 90,OOO-pound
payload to escape velocity.

A nominal moon mission will consist of a 72 degree laW1ch azimuth. The S-IC will burn
first. After the S-lC fuel is expended, the S-IC and S-U stages separate. Separation is
achieved by retro-rockets on the S-IC thrusting in the flight direction to slow the S-IC down
and ullage rockets on the S-lI thrusting opposite to the flight direction to speed. the S-ll up.
After sufficient separation time, the S-II engines are ignited. After depletion of the S-U fuel,
the S-II and S-IVB separate in a marmer similar to the separation of the S-IC and S-ll. Upon
separation, the S-IVB engines will ignite and thrust the S-IVB and the spacecraft into a 185-
kilometer (100 nautical mile) earth parking orbit.

Once the orbit is established, the S-IVB engines are shut down W1til an injection oppor­
tunity is presented. This may take from one to four orbits. At the time for injection, the
S-IVB engines restart and the S-IVB and the spacecraft are injected into a lWlar trajectory.
The S-IVB provides attitude stabilization for approximately two hours after its second burn
and separates from the spacecraft at a distance of approximately 20,000 kilometers from the
earth.
 COr.t.1l1rfD AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 249

CCS OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

The operational requirements of the ees include command up-data, down-link telemetry
in which ranging is desirable but not mandatory. Command up-data is not required on a
continuous basis throughout the entire moon mission. The requirement for command varies
according to the particular phase of the flight profile. During the launch phase, there i s no
requirement for up-data, the logic being that the launch is of such short duration that there
will not be sufficient imte to analyze and make an action decision on unpredictable situations.
The guidance computer is triple-redundant and Is programmed for all predictable situations.

After insertion into an earth parking orbit, command up-data will be required on a non­
continuous basis for crew and equipment checkout. If all systems are functioning properly,
the computers will be corrected if necessary and updated with the data required to accomplish
injection.

During the injection burn (second S-IVB burn), command up-data will be required on a
continuous basis to take advantage of any injection opportunity. During this period, the ground
stations will monitor the vehicle and determine the first injection opportunity. At a distance
of approximately 20,000 kilometers, the S-IVB/IU separates from the spacecraft and is no
longer needed for mission success. The ecs requirement is then complete.

TELEMETRY
The telemetry (TM) systems Oil the SatuA¥1 V are shown in Figure 1 . Each stage has its
own seU-sufficient telemetry link. During the launch and earth orbit phases, VHF transmitters

Table 1

Down-Link Telemetry VHF-UHF

Parameters VHF UHF

Transmitted Power (20 w) +43 dbm +43 dbm

Modulation, Polarization " Cable Gain - S . ldb -S.ldb

Transmitter Antenna Gain -3db +12db

Space Loss (260 mc - 20,000 km) -167db (2.2 gc 20,000 km) -lSS.5db

Reeeiver Antenna Gain HSdb ±44.Odb

Receiver Gain -O.Hdb -0.2db

Received Input PQwer -114.1 dbm -94.8db

No!!:e DC:':sity {KTD) -i73,4 ciom/cycie -173.4 dbm/cycle

Noise Bandwidth (ISO kc) +S1.7 db +51. 7db

Receiver Injected Noise (NF) +4,Odb +2.5db

Noise Power -117.3 dbm -119.2 dbm

Actual SiN +3.2d.b +24.4db

Required SiN +13.Odb +13db

Circuit Margin -9.3db +ll.4db

250 B. REEO

are the prime TM source making CCS TM unnecessary at this lime. At distances of approxi­
mately 10, 000 kilometers and greater, VHF transmission is inadequate, primarily due to space­
craIt and ground antenna gains. Table 1 is a comparison between the VHF and UHF transmission
links. After injection, the CCS transponder and a UHF transmitter become the prime TM links.
The mission control data from the S-IYB

'" stage and the IU are interconnected such that

",no
both sources of data are available at either
DATA .U "'"
source. This makes the mission control
'M XMTR

[=:�
c�c':::1
::: ..J
data double-redundant during the launch and
MISSION earth ol'blt phase via a UHF transmitter and

� _ME.:sUflE��S_ __ _ _______ _
_____

CONTlOl Tl4NSPONDU
the ees in the IU (Figure 2).

-.. HU
OAT" S - t2:S VHF The TM data from the S-IV8 and lU
'M XMTR
have different PCM formats. However, the

Figure 2-Telemetry systems. mission control data occupies the same time
slots in both formats making the recovery
of the mission control data simple regardless of which receiver i s demodulating the PCM
stream.

TRACKING

Under normal circumstances, there is no mandatory tracking requirement of the CCS.

During launch, tracking Is provided by C-Band beacons and surface radar with the Command
and Service Module (CSM) transponder providing tracking during other phases. The ees
transponder will have PRN turnaround capability and may be used as a backup to the CSM
transponder in case of failure or desire for a cross-check.

CCS TRANSPONOER OPERATION

The ecs transponder consists of a double-conversion phase-coherent receiver and a con­

tinuous wave (CW) transmitter tn which the received and transmUted signal are integrally
related in both frequency and phase. Figure 3 illustrates the operation of the transponder.

The received frequency Is deSignated 22lf and is nominally 2101.8 megacycles where f is nom­
inaUy9.S1 megacycles. The first mixer converts the 221f input to the first intermediate frequency
(IF) of Sf using a local oscillator of 216t. The first I F amplifier has a bnadwidth of 4 mega-

cycles and a gain of approximately 100db with an automatic gain control (AGC) range of 12Odb.
After amplification, the Sf signal Is converted to f in the second mixer using 6f as a local
oscUlator. The second IF amplifier is at a frequency of f and has a fixed gain of +54db and a

bandwidth of 1 0 kilocycles, which is determined by a crystal bandpass filter. The second IF

 COMMArtD AN 0 CDlIMUrt ICA110K SYSTEII 251

output is then limited to a constant signal plus noise (S+N) level of +15dbm before being pre­
sented as one input to the loop phase detector.

The other input t o the loop phase detector is from a crystal voltage-controlled oscillator
(VeO) which has been divided by two. It will be noticed that both local oscillators (21Sf and
Sf) are the 2f veo multiplied by 108 and 3. This makes the 216f and 6f local oscillators fre­
quency and phase-coherent with the 2f yeo. Since the loop phase detector is phase-comparing
the converted input and the divided veo, any phase difference between the two will cause an
output from the phase detector related to the phase difference.

"" p
I "'" I I " I
E.!,..f

-
�' .m.
ECTOR ��Y , �f
V
"" .
FILTER

,
r--- ",0

1"
"

I "
"" I I MLXU I -< a...LANCED
""
,
""

lRANSFU COMMAND
�N flOM AGC

TO COMMAND DfCOlQ£. COMMAND RANGE

I
DfMOOULAT.QN COO<

1
0"
'"x

)
-
20lil I " "
"" SWITCH "0" X' GAU
l-F CAU IE.
-
'"

TRANSMITTU SHUTDOWN
I �HAs.E MOOULAHO
1 .0'24 Me SUICAUI!1
PCM 'nEMET�Y

Figure 3-Trans.ponder block diagram (ABC loop nol �hawn).

The output of the phase detector is then processed by the loop filter and applied as a
control voltage to the yeo. This control voltage is such that the phase difference between the
converted signal and the divided yeO will be reduced. The amount and rate of reduction are
dependent upon tbe loop filter, the limiter, phase detector, and the Yeo. This will be covered
in the c..-:alysis section :.ter.
. Th€ .€c€-iv€t is now cvrosid€:,o?ct ill ii. "locl..t:d'· comlitiull and the
YeO w11l follow the input signal in phase and frequency and will thus contain the up-link dop­
pler shift.

The command up-data is frequency-modulated (FM) on a 70 kilocycles sub-carrier and

70 kilocycle sub-carrier is then phase-modulated onto the RF carrier. The PRN range code
is directly phase- modulated onto the RF carrier. The second mixer has a second output of
252 B.RHO

r, or approximately 9.51 megacycles. The f output is then amplified and limited before wlde­

band demodulation using the divided veo. The output of the demodulator will be the 70 kilocycles

sub-carrier and the PRN range code at baseband. The demodulated signal is then passed

through a 70 kilocycles bandpass filter with a bandwidth of 20 kilocycles to remove the command
sub-carrier. The sub-carrier is limited and FM-detected using a pulse-averaging detector.

The FM-detected output is video-amplified and presented as an output to be further proc essed

by the command decoder. The baseband PRN range code is one input of the transmitter

modulator to he described later.

The transmitter section of the transponder receives 2f from the veo and multiplies it by
4 to Sf. The Sf is then pnase-modulated and multiplied by 30 to 240f. It is thus seen that the

received and transmitted frequencies are integrally related by a ratio of 240 t o 221. The
phase modulator of the transmitter has two modulation inputs, the PRN code and the down-link

telemetry sub-carrier. Either modulation input may be separately set to modulate the down­

link R-F carrier to 2 radians for a peak modulation capability of 4 radians.

The down-link telemetry sub-carrier consists of a 1 .024 megacycle crystal oscillator that

is bi-phase modulated by 72 kilocycles nonreturn to zero PCM data which contains mission
control measurements. This sub-carrier is compatible with the USB ground stations although

its bit rate is different from the Lunar Excursion Module (LEM) and Command and Service
Module (CSM) PCM bit rates.

An auxiliary oscillator is included so that when the receiver is unlocked, the auxiliary

oscillator will provide a noise-free carrier for the transmitter. Upon lock, the auxiliary

oscillator is gated out by the re<:eiver AGC.

AGe is provided by a second phase detector which phase-dete<:ts the unlimited second IF
and the divided veo phase shifted 90degrees. This deteetor will therefore have an output

directly proportional to the amplitude of the input signal. The AGe system is designed to

maintain the signal input into the limiter a constant power within 3db over the operating

signal dynamics.

Figure 4 is a gain, bandwidth power distribution of the transponder. It relates signal and
power levels and signal-to-noise ratios at various points in the transponder under locked and
unlocked conditions. In the unlocked COndition, all amplifie rs are at maximum gain since there

is no AGC voltage developed.

Since the ees and LEM transponders have identical frequencies, there exists a possibility
of interference if the two are operated Simultaneously at close range. The ces transponder
 COIrlMAIW ANO COMMUNIC,\, liON SYSTEM 253

has the capacity to shut down the transmitter upon external command. This shut down command
will be initiated before the LEM transponder is used. The eSM receiver will remain alive so
that commands may be received at all times. It is desirable but not essential that the ees
transponder transmitter be turned back on after sufficient separation from the LEM transponder.
This will allow turnaround ranging to more completely define the trajectory of the S-IVB
alter separation from the spacecraft.

Tables2 and 3 show the main electrical and environmental specifications of the eeStransponder

At the data of publication, power amplifier proposals were under evaluation so the power
amplifier will not be described. Its main characteristic is to raise the ees 500 milliwatts to
20 watts.

22 1 - F IN
\""eno" PRE -

"t"!.
I •• MIXER

-; h. l - F
AMP ANa
'� M"" :/ t
�,
2..d I - F

I
TO � TO LIMITER

CENTER FREQ 2101.8 Me 47.55 Me 9.51 Me 9.51 Me

.
BANDWIDTH 1 2.0 Me 4.0 M< 4.0 Me 10 K<
*15 d\>M
GAIN - --- - .. '" " ..
llMITU OIJtPUT

GAIN RANGE - - -- - "" 72 db liNEAR TO -6 dbm

NOISE POWER AT
THRESHOLD -103.2 db -45 cII>m , ,,- INTO liMITER -30 dbm

SIGNAL POWER AT
THRESHOLD -124.0 dbm -78 dbm -33 dbm -33 dbto INTO liMITER

NOISE FIG�E +13.0 db --- -- ----- --- --

GAIN CaNT. METHOD -- -- - COHERtNT AGe COHUENT AGC --- --

MOO. 70 Kc
VIDEO
FROM 2nd MIXU PHASE LIMITER AMP
.

"', '''j
, ""
DETECTOR , ,
, , ,

I
, ,
, ,
, , ,
, , TO PHASE MOO ,
,
I
,
BANDWIDTH OMl n 4. 1lM NOISE BW 1.2 Me TO PHASE MOD 4 Kc PREeE'l' FllTU

'"
'-l
_ �
" "� ��c
G�'NG ·""''-
��
GAIN 9$ d\I TO OUTM Of DEl 2V PK/RAO TO MOD :m: PK/RADlAN
N O
NA V A +-·"C
CC -C
� ' '--
_ � �
_ -,cc� c --_= "� MIN INT0 7 � �
_
• _
'�
_ ,-_ ''_
_
'_ ''
__ _ , ,� ,.o
,_ COMMAND - 48 db.. __ f
ccc -
__
__ __ ____

CMc -3 <1 b POINT)

IIJDEO ( I .2 70 Kc lNPUT
tKtt;jUtNI.. Y 9.S! Me INPUT
VIDEO OUTPUT 4 Kc (-3 db)

Figure 4-Goin, bandwidth po....er

. distribution.
254 B. REED

Table 2

ecs Electrical Characteristics.

Frequency Received 2101.8 cps

Frequency TransmUted 2282.5 cps

Offset Ratio 240/221

Noise Figure (including preselector) 13db

Threshold Noise Bandwidth (BLo) 400 cps

Strong Signal Noise Bandwidth 2330 cps (2BL)

Carrier Threshold (SIN = +6db) -126db

Dynamic Range lOOdb (12Odb capability)

Transmitter Power 500 mw

veo Gain (Ky) 400 cps/volt

Phase Detector Gain (ke) 0.35 volt/degree

Phase Multiplication (M) 110.5

Tracking Range .d8S kc

Input Power 28 ± 4 VDC@ 32,5 watts

Weight 20.5 Ibs.

Size 5.4 x 9.8 x 14.9 Inches

Table 3

ecs Environmental Characteristics.

Temperature (Operating and Storage) -20·C to +BSoC

Vibration:

Random Noise 20-59 cps at 0.04 gl/CpS/S

(5 minutes in 59-126 cps at gdb/octave

each plane)
126-700 cps at 0.4 g 2fcps/S

700-900 cps at 18db/octave

900-2000 cps at 0.09 g7/CpS/S

Shock: 50 g for 11 milliseconds with 8 shocks in three perpendicular planes

Acceleration: 100 g for one minute in three perpendicular planes

Vacuum and Less than 1.0 psi leakage per 24 hour period when pressurized to 15
Pressurization: psig and subjected to a vacuum of 1.5 X 10-6 millimeters of mercury.

RF Interference: MIL-I-6181D
 COttW.HO ANO COlIMU"ICATlON SYSTEM 255

ANTENNA SYSTEM

The antenna system for CCS is being designed to meet three requirements:

1. To provide adequate coverage for pre-launch and launch conditions.

2. To provide the wide angular coverage required at low altitude during parking orbit,
where roll maneuvers will be performed

3. To provide adequate coverage of all stations which are optically visible during the
period from Injection to spacecraft separation.

To meet these requirements, a system consisting of an omnidirectional antenna pair for

the receiver and an omnidirectional pair and a directional antenna for the transmitter are being

designed. The omnidirectional pair for the receiver will be permanently connected and will

maintain essentially omnidirectional angular coverage for the receiver from launch throughout
the mission. The transmitter will operate into an omnidirectional pair from launch through

injection to a point approximately 10,000 kilometers from the earth. At this distance, the path
loss beCOmes great enough to require additional gain from the vehicle antenna, and the trans­
mitter is then switched to a directional antenna having a gain of about 6 db initially. The beam­

width of this antenna will be adjustable, so that it may be reduced as the range becomes greater,
the angle subtended by the earth becomes smaller, and the required gain increases. The

orientation of the directive antenna pattern remains fixed with respect to the vehicle, and
directing of the pattern toward the ground stations is accomplished by attitude control of the
vehicle.

The omnidirectional antenna elements CO OMNI CO>

'" DI_ECTIONAl
are rectangular hall-loops, located diametri­
XMTl
cally opposite on the vehicle body and driven CCS!PCM
OMN'
with equal power. The directional antenna is SW1TCH XMU
a 3x3 array of Archimedlan spirals, con­
nected through a switchable system of phas­

ing and power-dividing transmission lines.

The antenna system is shOWn in Figure 5. As '"

SWITCH
nM
can be seen, the CCS transponder and the 'CM
DI�fCTlON"'l
UHF TM transmitter may be switched to
XMTR
share an omniantenna or to their Own sepa­

rate directional antenna as described above. Figure 6-Anlenno �y�tem.

PHASE LOCK LOOP ANALYSIS

The criteria that determined the CCS RF carrier-tracking loop design was the required
20,000 kilnrn'?t'i:'r corr:r:".-=.n:'caticr. liilk 1.' �11�'" alili toe received trequency dynamics caused by a
combination of vehicle velocity, acceleration, and ground station acquisition procedures.

The following standard phase-lock equations were used to calculate the loop errors and

characteristics under the combination of signal strength and frequency dynamics listed with
the equations:
256 B. REED

1. Threshold loop bandwidth, BU)

- (405
_

42iil )
. f '"
, ; 400 cps,

2. Loop bandwidth, BL

3. Loop nOise bandwidth, BN

4. Signal suppression factor, "-

s
N< lOdb

0. • °0 at threshold where

" noise into the limiter

signal into the limiter.

5. Phase error due to acceleration, " .

where

"
doppler frequency offset due to acceleration.

6. Phase error due to velocity, B v

360·

where phase detector gain '" .35 volt/cycle, veo gain ", 400 cycles/volt

M " multiplication ratio " 110.5 .

7. Available tracking loop gain, G

.

8. Required tracking loop gain, G

il

maximum doppler f requency o f f s e t

threshold phase error at detector

GA > Gil U the loop 1s to be functional.

 COWWID AND CO".MUNICATIOH nSTOI 257

The two doppler dynamic conditions considered are:

{
BLO : 400 cps

fI � 63 KCS1
Case I

Case n
{ i , S lS KCS'

fd, i 190 KCS

Table 4 is the tabulated velocity and acceleration errors calculated to be produced by the
transponder under case 1 doppler dynamics. Table 5 Is the calculated errors In the transponder
under case [I doppler dynamics. Figure 6 shows the phase errors tabulated [or the two doppler

Table 4.

Tabulated Velocity and Acceleration Errors Produced by Transponder Under Case I Doppler Dynamic s.

fd .. 181.5 KCS: i "' 63 KCS

'

INPUT PRE. AVAILABLE RE�!RED

'i.
e, 8, SIGNAL DEl. lOOP L P
•
LEVEL ". GAIN G.�IN
,.., ".,

.242 39.8" 46S 400 -1:12.0 -11.0 1.339 It 106 2.573 It 106
.260 37.0- 43.8" 420 -131.4 -10.4 1.441 x IQ6 2.573 x 106
.280 34.4· 42.0- 442 -130.7 - 9.7 1.550 It 10' 2.573 X 10'
.300 32.1· 39.0" 464 -130.0 - 9.0 1 .662 X 10' 2.573 X 10'
.320 30.1· 37.a" m -129.4 - 8.4 1. 770 x 10' 2.:;)73 II 10'
.340 28.3· 34.5" 508 -128.4 - 7.4 1.880 x 10' 2.573 X 10'
.360 26.8· 32.5" 530 -128.2 - 7.2 1 .996 x 10' 2.:;)73 II 10 6
.380 25.3· 30S 552 -127.7 - '.7 2.IIO x l0' 2.573 x 10'
.400 24.1" 29.1· 574 -127.1 - 6.1 2.220 x 10' 2.;)73 X 10'
.450 21.3· 2G.l" 629 -125.5 - 4.5 2.448 x 10' 2.573 X 106
.500 1 9.3" 23.4" 684 -124.7 - �.7 2. '?''?'S x �OA ,.:;.3 x iu�
.55ii 17.6" 21.2" 744 -123.3 - 2.3 3.050 x 10' 2.573 X 10'
.600 16.a" 19.5" 798 -122.4 - 1.4 3.330 x 10' 2.573 X 10'
.G50 14.8" 18.0" 853 -121.3 - 0.3 3.600 x 10' 2.573 X 10'
.700 13.8" 16.8" "8 -120,1 · O.� :U!7!! x !!l� :0:: .:;;3 " iv�
• , "v ll.!:I· 15.G" 963 - 1 1 8 ,9 • 2.1 4.1:;)6 x 10' 2.;)73 X 10'
,800 12,0- 1 4. G" 1018 -117.4 - 3.' 4.440 X 10' 2.::'73 X 10'
.850 1l.3· 13.8' 1073 -115.7 · 5.3 4.710 x 106 2.573 X 10'
.900 10.7" 13.0- 1128 -113.6 · 7.4 4 .990 x 106 2.573 X 10 6
.9:'0 10.1' 12.3" 1183 -109.8 ·11.2 5.260 x 10' 2.573 X 10'
.980 9." 1 1 .3' 1138 -106.0 · 1;).0 5.540 x 106 2.573 " 106
258 6. REED

Table 5

Tabulated Velocity and Acceleration Errors Produced by Transpoodcr Under Case " Doppler Dynamics.

fd " " 90 KeS: i '"' 35 KCS

1

INPUT PRE. AY&'llABLE

SIGH,,- 0(1,
" t, b, "- LEVEL SIN RA T i D
LOOP
CAIN
(db...)
. ""

.242 22.1" 24.4' .00 -132.0 -11.0 1 .339 x 10·

.2UO 2 0.5' 22.5' 420 -131.4 -10.4 l.441 x 106
.280 19.1' 21.0- 442 -130.7 ·
'.7 1.550 x 1 0 6
.300 17.8" 19.5' 46' -130.0 ·
'.0 1 .662 X 106
.320 16." 1 8. 1' m -129.1 ·
8.' 1.77Q x lO 6
.340 15.7' 17.1' 508 -128.4 ·
7.' 1.880 X 106
,3GO 14.9' 10.1' 530 -128.2 ·
1.2 1.996 x 106
.3110 1 4.0' 15.4' 552 - 127 . 7 ·
1i.7 2 . 1 1 0 x 106
.400 1 3.4' 14.0' 57< -127.1 ·
G,I 2.220 x 1 0 6
.450 12.0' 13.1' '29 -125.5 ·
4.5 2.448 x 1 0 6
.500 10.7' l l . 7' 684 - 124.7 ·
'.7 2.775 x 1 0 6
.550 9.S" 10.7' 74. -123.3 ·
2.3 3.050 x ) 0 1
.GOO 8.9' 9.75' 79' -122.4 ·
1.. 3,330 X 1 0 6
.li50 8.Z' 9.0' 85' -121.3 ·
0.3 3.600 x 1 0 6
.700 7,(i' BA' 908 -120.1 · 0.' 3.870 X \ 0 6
.7()0 7.1 7.7' 963 - 1 1 8.9 · 2.1 4.la6 x 1 0 6
.800 G.r i.:J l Oll:! - 1 17.4 · 3.6 4.HO x 1 0 6
.flaO G.3 'i.!l 1073 - 1 15.7 ·
5.3 4.710 x \ 0 6
.900 :;.!r 4;.:. 1 1 ;! II - 1 1:.1,6 ·
7.4 4.990 )( 106
.!.I.-,O :j.6� 6. 1 54 1 \itl - 1 09.tt - 1 1.2 5.260 x 1 0 6
.9110 ;j.4· ;" Ii:} I�at:l - I OG O . · I.i.n :;.5,10 )( 106

dynamic conditions plotted versus trans­

ponder Input signal level. The errors cal­
culated in Tables 4 and 5 used the approximate

§
r 110 formula for the suppression factor, alpha.
<;
_

MIN. SIGNAL ST�fNGIH

�
• 115 O v , ' 0" · 2�·
1
The approximate formula was used to make
"
the error calculations a simple computer
1"Xl
MIN. SIGNAL STUNGTH
�
•

run. The al>Proximatc formula actually

• OV?· 0,,?� 24·

i
..... · 125 produces a greater phase error as shown
5
· I JQ
0" 1 ¢V 1 � OVI by Figure 7 . Figure 8 Is the exact and actual

,--!
". suppression factor plotted versus !lignal
- 1 3S, '_,_
" .J
"
L _
�,�
, .J
,�
, c�,_�� ,,_-!
, "
' ,,�c
."
, , level. In all tases the approximate sup­
PHASE fUO/t IN OfGUES
pression factor is equal to or less than the
Figure 6- Pho se e.fon for doppler dyngmic condiTions exact suppression factor. Since error due
verws input signcJI level where 0'1 ond 0... , represenT to velocity is inversely related to the
1
g frequency devialion (fd) of .t181.5 kjloc:yde� ond (I
suppression factor, the approximate solution
cenTer frequency (f) of 63 kilocycles2• gnd where 0 '2
gnd 0" , represent on fd of ±9O ki locydes ond on f gf will yield a greater error than the exact
35 kiloc:""ydes2. solution under the same doppler dynamics.
 COIN.IANO AND COII.MUNICATlDN SYSTEM 259

..
SYSTEM MARGINS
.

••• --
... - ... .... -
"'"
-, "
The system margin calculations were ••• , "'"
,
,
, "'" ;
performed for the up-link command, range
� .., • ,
,
code and carrier and for the down link te­ J , co
� ••• ,
, .., •
lemetry, range code and carrier. ,
.. , ,
z <

� ,
,
."
�
Standardcommunications equations were " ••• ,
, ''''
0
z

used to arrive at the circuit margins. , , •

.., ,
•
"" •
, 0
, g
.., ,
, ""
1. Assumptions: ,
.. , , ""

• ''''
a. These calculations were based '" ". 'CO ,,. '" ,,. '"
upon the sub-carrier frequencies being 1.024 INPUT SIGNAL LEVEL (dbm)

megacycles for telemetry and 70 kilocycles

Figure 7-Loop bandwidth ond suppression factor versus
for the command. The modulation indices input signal level, where � '" (1 + 4/. N/S) - 1 /2 , B L
were taken to be 1.22 for both sub-carriers B LO 0/3 + 2 /3"0)' 'LO =: 0. 242, and B
:0
LO =: 400
cps.
and 0.6 for the range code

b. T h e sub-carrier demodulators
were assumed to be standard Foster-Seely
•••
type discriminators.
.!. 0.8 EXACT SOLUTION
c. The circuit losses that were esti­
� /
FROM DAVENPORT
0.7 APPROXIMAn \
mated are so marked.
:! SOlUlION
\
.6
Z 0 \
d. Maximum range is 27,OOOnautical Q

�
::::: 0.5 \
miles or 48,600 kilometers. \
a

------'�
-
\

0.3L___
o.�

\
�
2 . Equations: � .26
I
"0 ·

0.2
"
a. Carrier power

PC
INPUT SIGNAL LEVEL ( DaM)

I I I I I I I I I I I
. 6 rad.
20 16 12 8 " 0 _4 -8 -12 -16 -20
SIN IN PREDETECTION 8W
M� 1 . 2? r"n.
Figure 8-Signol suppression versus input signal level
and SIN in predetection BW, when a =: f1/(1 +4/'., NlS)
b. Ranging power
(approximate) where N equals KT8f (noise power in
prcdc���livi"1 !l'.'.').
S <:"Iu.... :• •'!jnoi power, '\.0 equois
400 cps, Bl F equol$ 10 kilocycles, and F � equals
13db.
260 B. REED

C. Sub-carrier power

d. Modulation loss carrier

PT
MI.£ '
101.0\1, 1 0 PC

e. Modulation loss, ranging

f. Modulation loss, sub-carrier

g. Required S!N predetectton

h. NOise spectral density

N, KT. B ; T. • 2900K per cycle across SO ohms

 TYPICAL ACQUISITION PROCEDURE

by

R. H. Newman

Goddard SPace Flight Center

ABSTRACT

The problem of acquisition i6 considered from thegroond operational aspect

during earth orbit for each of the following tasks: (I) Spacecraft illumination,
(2) Tw�way RF acquisition, (3) Data acquisition, (4) Range acquisition, (5) Angle
acquisition, and (6) Station-to-station hand-over.

The time required to perform each of these tasks, total acquisition summary
chart, and ground acquisition aids are discussed.

INTROOUCTION

The typical Apollo Unified S-Band acquisition procedure presented consists of the following

tasks:

1. Spacecraft illumination - to position the groW'ld antenna properly for spacecraft antenna

reception of the groWld transmitted up-link.

2. Two-way RF acquisition - to obtain a two-way RF lock between the ground transmitter,

spacecraft transponder and ground receiver.

3. Data acquisition - to lock the ground demodulators and the pulse-code modulation (PCM)
decommutator alter RF lock.

4 . Range acquisition - to provide the network with a range reading.

5. Angle acquisition - to provide the network with accurate angle information.

6. Station-to- station hanciover - to !landover RF lock from one station to another without

losing down-data or voice from the spacecraft.

SPACECRAFT ILLUMINATION

Spacecraft Ulumination depends on the position of the spacecraft antenna and the pointing

accuracy of the ground antenna. Here we will assume that the spacecraft antenna is properly
oriented and only the task of positioning the ground antenna will be considered.

261
262 R. Il. NEWMAN

I'ptOG�ED PATti
Figure 1 is an attempt to depict the
/
I ground transmit and receive pattern in space .
I
The acquisition antenna actually has a 10-

.---/i-..
/ ACOUISITION BEAM
degree receive beam but is not shown be­
MAIN BEAM
I cause the spacecraft would always be within
/ the acquisition beam shown for a normal
mission. If other than a normal condition
exists and a signal is not observed in the
lO-degree acquisition beam, the antenna con­
HORIZON trol will be changed to one of its search modes.

During the initial acquisition phase, the

1.2°
antenna program track mode will be utilized.
In this mode, the antenna will be positioned

1-- '- ---1 in real-time in accordance with a predicted

spacecraft flight profile computed prior to
Figure I -Ground tron�it or.d receive p(lltern in $pOce. launch during the launch phase. The main
beam will be positioned at the horizon ini­
tially and will follow the programmed path.
The antenna programmer can be up-dated as required prior to launch by insertion of time and
angle offsets . After the launch phase, up-dated predicts will be sent to all stations if required.
If necessary, the antenna may be deviated from Its predicted path by manually adding X, Y and
time offsets while in this mode.

It should be noted that if the spacecraft 1s within the acquisition beam Shown, the spacecraft
and both ground receiving systems will be illuminated at the R F horizon.

TWO-WAY RF ACQUISITION

The unified S-band two-way RF acquisition can be achieved faster and more reliably by
locking the up-link first, because the ground receiver cannot maintain a down-link lock when
the spacecraft receiver acquires the up-link. A method of achieving up-link lock first is given
below:

Sweep the ground transmitter over a fre­

GROUND quency range sufficient to lock the spacecraft
TRAN5MITTE�
receiver. After the up-link is locked, the space·
�WE[P

II
GENERAiOR craft transmitter frequency follows the ground

I transmitter sweep. The sweep continues until

Sf'AC[(RAFT TURN AROUN�
TRANSPONDER RATIO ASSUMED 1:1
the ground receiver locks to the spacecraft
GROUNO
RECE!VU transmitter. Two-way lock is indicated by ob­
serving that the groWld receiver voltage con­
Figure 2-Diagram il lu$troting procedure for two-way trolled oscillator (VeOl is following the
RF (lcqu;s;t;on. ground transmitter sweep. Figure 2 illustrates
 TYPICAL ACQUISITION PROCEDURE 263

this procedure. The sweep about the

GROUND unlvER
nominal freQ.uency (Fn ) should have a
range sufficient to cover the frequenc y
"",
------ - "
uncertainty associated with both the
,
spacecraft and ground receiver. This ,
,
,
GROUNO TRANSMITTER
procedure would require modification
-C�-----<C----------------
,

,,
__
to accommcxlate the transponder in earth __
__ __
____

,\ /
orbit due to doppler shift.
... SPA.CECRAFT TRANSPONDER

Figure 3 shows the worse case (over­ --- - ----- - --

head pass) of doppler shift anticipated in
earth orbit. The doppler. as seen by the
spacecraft, varies from plus 60 kilocycles
at the acquisition horizon to minus SO kilo­
F igure 3-Wor�e case (overhead pan) doppler
c ycl es ai the loss-of-lock horizon. The anticipated in earth orbit.
ground receiver, if the spacec raft is locked
to the ground transmitter, will seetwo-way
I� -60 Ke
doppler shift or twice that observed by the -'l/\l\r
GROUND
TlANSMIITER
spacecraft receiver.
SW!iEP
Therefore, a sweep range covering the GENERATO<

total doppler and receiver frequency un­

certainty range or the proper selection of ,.,
-60 K<
SPAC!CRAfT
TI(ANSPo,mu
fnqucncy offsets for the ground receiver and
transmitter plus a sweep will allow the
'NV
'"

ground system to acquire the spacecraft at

RECEIVER
GROUND

any timC' during a pass. Figure 4 shows an

example of how acquisition can be accom­
plished at the horizon for an overhead pass
T ONE - WAY DOPPLER � t:l Kc
+60 Kc
BIAS

using receiver and transmitter bias (fre­

quency offsets).
Figure 4-Procedure for aC<1uIsltlan 01 horizon for on
By biasing the g:round transmitter f n overhead PO$� using receiver ond tronlm'lIer bias.

minus 60 kilocycles to counteract the f plus

•
.

6 0 kilocycles doppler, the spacecraft ap-

pears to receive a Signal at its nominal frequency. If the sweep is adequate to cover all fre­
quency uncertainties of both rec.eivers,the spacecraft should ac.qllirj> the 'lp-li:!!L The space­
cralt output will sweep in step with the ground transmitter after lock about the nominal frequency.
The ground receiver has an f n plus 60 kilocycles bias to offset the f� plus 60 kilocycles doppler.
Therefore, this combination (frequency offsets plus sweep) will allow thp �rn..�!!-:I. �y!Otc!:! to :!c
quire lOck at anytime during the pass.

In order to accommcxlate this feature and also to provide the capability for reliable acqui­
sition procedures, the ground system flexibility shown in Table 1 is being provided.

Automatic bias decay is necessary so that the ground receiving and transmitting system
can operate at the nominal frequency. This minimizes the stress in all receiver loops and
26.

Table I allows the ground transmitter to return to a

Ground Acquisition System Caplibililics. stable frequency necessary for accurate
ranging information (Figure 5).
Variable sweep range
The acquisition system also has the ca·
Vari;tblc sweep fate pability to sweep the ground receivers for
down-link locks only , H required.
Thirteen selcctablt' bias levels

Variable hias Figure 5 represents a typical sweep and

bias system that cOuld be utilized for an
On� operation selects propt.'f bias ror ground
overhead pass during horizon acquisition in
transmltLcr and both reCCiVl'l"S
earth orbit. It Is drawn to scale and would
Automatic bit\s decay require three selectable bias levels to ac­
commodate reacquisition during all phases
of an overhead pass. Blasing is utilized in
order to minimize transponder stress dur­

�
ing acquisition. The sweep characte ristics
are:

�_,
FlEQ- NOM

U�·lINK . o f LOCk __
__ L Ground transmitter bias f � - 30
kilocycles
GROUND llANSMllnR lOCI( UANSMITTU
TO SYTHESIZEk
2. Ground receiver bias f � + 60
flEO -NOM - - .
·.�s kilocycles
-StAlT lIAS o(CAV

otCAY SWEEP 3. Sweep range f" + or - 60 kilocycles

4. Sweep rate -35 kilocycles per

A - '
GROUND uetlvEl

------------�-
second/second

> alAs

mO- No.,N,,-
TWO WAY
....... AQUISITION
COMPUTE
- - - - -
The following should be noted when ob­
serving the sweep diagram:

1. At the point where two-way acquisi­

tion is indicated. down-data is being
received and up-link modulation
should be initiated.
Figure 5-T)'pico\ RF acquisition sweep procedure.
2. Two-way lock Is recognized on the
ground by noting the ground receiver
static phase error following the transmitter sweep. The operator can also note the
spacecraft telemetered AGe and demodulator in-lock indicators.

3. The sweep decay function is normally initiated immediately, although the diagram shows
the sweep continuing.

4. A time lag is shown between sweep decay and bias decay. During normal operation the
sweep decay is manual but the bias decay would automatically start as soon as the sweep
decay reaches zero.

5. The point shown, lock transmitter to synthesizer, is a manual operation that is initiated
alter bias decay (push-button operation).
 265
TV?1CAl ACQUISITION PROCEDURE

6 . After the synthesizer and exciter VCO are locked, range rate is available and range
acquisition can be initiated.

Table 2
DATA ACQUISITION Demodulator Lock Times.

Data acquisition is the task required to lock the Voiee demodulator },O see
data demodulators and PCM decommutator. This
Telemetry demodulator 1.0 see
operation is completely automatic. The time required
for each function is given in Table 2. The PCM de­ Pcm decom (51.2 KBS) 0.16 sec
commutator lock time is the time required for bit­ ( 1.6 KBS) 3.7 sec

error rates of 1 x 1 0 ' · or better.

On-site data processor 0.05 sec

RANGE ACQUISITION
Table 3
Range acquisition should be attempted only after
Range Acquisllion Procedure.
the exciter has been locked to the synthesizer (time
standard) as indicated in Table 3. The exciter control
Initiate range modulation (manual).
operator should initiate range modulation on the up­
link. Immediately after the range code modulation is Lock range receiver (automatic).

initiated, the range receiver will automatically lock.

Initiate code acquisition (manual).
Next, the range subsystem operator initiates code
acquisition, which is automatic. The range read ing i s Acqulr(' code (aut.om"Uc).

then sent to the network equipment automatically.

ANGLE ACQUISITION

Accurate angle information is not considered available W1til RF lock has been achieved and
the antenna cOntrolled in the auto-track mode.

If it is assumed the spacecraft is illuminated at the horizon with the acquisition and main
beam, two-way lock should occur in both receivers (acquiSition and main) within one sweep
period. As soon as lock is observed in both receivers. signal levels should be compared in
both receivers to ascertain that the main receiver channel is not locked on a side lobe. Table
4 gives the time required to accomplish this fWlction.

The antenna servo control operator must decide when to switch from the program-track
mode to the auto-track mode. The effects of multipath at low elevation an{!:les will determine
wl'!l:'!l the switch can t.� made.

It is anticipated that the auto-track mode will be feasible when the antenna is approximately
two to five degrees above the horizon . Multipath will be the only constraining factor after RF
lock before this mode can be initiated.
266 R. H . N EWMAN

STATION·TO·STATION HAND·OVER Table 4

Typical Worst Case Time
The task required for station-ta-station After Spacl;'craft Illumination
hand-over is that of transferring up-link lock Bc{ore Angle Data AV<lilab\e.·

[r o m one station to another without down­

link loss of lock and with a minimum loss of
One transmitter sweep period
up- data . This can be accomplished during
mission phases that have sufficient overlap­ Switch to auto-track 3.0 sec
ping RF antenna coverage to allow that: (decIsion time included)

1. The up-range station (station A) has Antenna slew time 1.0 sec
a two-way lock with the spacecraft
Antennll sdttlng time 1 . 5 sec
transponder.
Total SWl'CP period +5.5 sec
2. The down-range station (station B)
acquires the down-link in both re­ "Mu]"I"',1I ,-f/eets nu' "<.>ns"j",ed.
ceiver channels (acquisition and main
receiver).

3 . Initiation of up-link transmission from station B at a predetermined time.

4. Transfer lock of space craft receiver to station B up-link transmission and terminate
transmission from station A.

The task required to achieve a down-link lock with stations A and B Simultaneously is
relatively Simple. The main problem is that 01 making the spacecraft transponder change
from one up-link to another without SWitching to the auxillary oscillator mode which is con ­

trolled by AGe. If the transponder did switch to the auxiliary oscillator mode, both station A
and station B would lose down-link lock because of the sudden discrete frequency change caused

by the switchover. Therefore, station B must place its up-link in the transponder receiver pass
band before station A terminates transmission.

The step-by-step procedures listed below will assume station A has a two-way RF lock and
station B mu st acquire without loss of down-data and with a mini mum loss of up-data during
hand- over . Sufficient overlapping: RF coverage between stations to accommodate hand-Over will
also be assumed.

Step 1. (a) Antenna in the program track mode.

(b) Exciter VeD manually set to the spacecraft nominal frequency minus the sum
of stations A and B predicted one-way doppler.

(c) Rec eiver (acquisition and main), veo set to spacecra ft nominal frequency
minus station A's predicted one-way doppler plus station D's predicted onc ­
way doppler.

(d) Transmission throu�h the main antenna .

(e) Swe ep characteristics set for a normal initial acquisition procedure .

Step 2, (a) Lock the acquisition and main receiver. Lock should occur automatically
without sweep at the RF horizon.
 TYPICAL ACQijISJTI()N PROCEDURE 267

(b) If a down-link RF lock is not established within a predetermined time, initiate

a normal acquisition procedure (push button operation).

Step 3. (a) Observe the signal power in both receivers and ascertain that the main receiver
channel is not locked on a sidelobe.

(b) Ascertain all demodulators locked.

(c) Switch antenna to the auto-track mode as soon as possible (when multipath

permits).

Step 4. (a) At a predetermined time initiate the up-link without modulation and with the

transmitter set for the maximum power out.

(b) An audible beat should be observed at each station as soon as the up-link is

initiated. Station B changes the exciter veo frequency to obtain a zero beat.

Station A ceases transmission and station B initiates up-link modulation as

soon as a zero beat is Observed. (Beat is caused by the presence of two

carriers in the transponder pass band that modulates the down-link.)

(c) Initiate an initial acquisition procedure if an audible beat is not observed as

the up-link is energized.

Step 5. (a) Offset exciter veo to spacecraft nominal frequency. Switch to synthesizer

control when the exciter veo static phase error is approximately zero.

(b) Lock range clock receive r.

Step 6. (a) Initiate range code acquisition.

(b) Continue to monitor spacecraft and ground receiver static phase error and
AGe throughout pass.

The above step-by-step procedure for hand-over was presented in detail to demonstrate
the total task required for a ground station. It should be noted that this procedure is applicable
to a normal horizon acquisition except for the bias level requirements and the fact that the

exciter yeO would be utilized in a sweep mode.

The manual mode presented is recommended [or hand-over because :

1 . If the down-link is locked utilizing the ground receiver sweep mode, the possibility of
locking one of the turned around up-link subcarriers (30 and 70 kilocycles) is better
t"'�n that of acqui.:-i.:-;g th<; card... -.-. This can be recognized but a timo-consuming pro­

cedure would be required to ascertain carrier lock. The manual mode appears feasible
because the spacecraft yeO is being controlled by station A's time standard. There­

fore; th� dO�\'!l-E!lk f!"cq:.:c;";cy �j".d ti·ar,5vvllu",j· I"t�\;�iver pass band can be determined

very accurately during this controlled period and the maximum error will be that con­

tained in prior information given to each station which should be within the space­
craft and ground receiver pass bands.

2. The transfer of up-Link is presented as a manual operation because it appears to be the

fastest way to reliably hand- over the up-links. Utilizing a sweep mode at station B will
268 R. Ii. NE'/iWAN

cause transfer of lock when the signal at station B is stronger than that of station A as
the sweep passes through the transponder receiver pass band. However, the question
is, when is the signal stronger?

ESTIMATED ACQUISITION TIME CHART

Table 5 gives an estimation of the time required to accomplish the different tasks discussed.
The time shown for each function represents the time required from the RF horizon considering
worst case conditions.

Tabl(' 5

Lsti matl'(\ Acquisition Tim�' Chat!,'

Time arter SIC

Function Comments
illumination

( I) sic illumination At the RF horizon 0.0 sec

with transmiSSion
through main antentl;L

(2) Two-way RF lock Sweep exciter veo 8.0 sec

(acquisition and main
rCCl'ivcr \ock(.'<i)

(3) AU dcmorls locked Automatic 9.0 sec

,

(4) initiate up-link 2 sec l'ecognition 10,0 >:lec

modulatio:1 time allowed after
function (2)

(5) Decay sw{>{>p Manual Op('raUon 14.0 S{>c

(6) Offset eXCite,' Automatic fundion 16.0 sec

veo to Mmin:ll after sweep decay
frequency

(7) Lock excite r veo M:lnu:ll Op('ration 17,0 sec

to synthesizer

(8) Hange rate Available only when 17.0 sec

the exciter veo is
control\(>d by the
synthesizer

(9 ) Range code 20.0 �ee

acqui�ition

( 10) Angle acquisition Auto I,'aek mode and -

anh:nna sctlh.'<i.
AVaibblt' :ls soon
as muliipalh problems
ccase

.
 IMPACT OF APOLLO UNIFIED S-BAND SYSTEM
ON NASA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK

by
w. Dickinson
Goddard Space Flight Center

ABSTRACT

The enginee ring aspects of the data communications buildup re�lred of the
NASA Communications Network in order to support the Apollo Unified S-8and
(USB) System are presented. USB system needs for a worldwide high-speed
data transmission capabIlIty in terms of sites, circuit facilities , data rates, and
transmission system reliability. flexibility , and restorability are outlined. The
spe<:ific hardware being used to buUd the system is described, includIng HF
radio and wlreline data modems, data error-detection and correction equip­
ment, data error-detection terminals, data quality monitors, audio (circuit) and
d igital (data) switching systems and datu technical control and test systems.
Performance design goals of the final nClwork and the capability for expansion
of the perscnt nctwork are discussed.

INTROOUCTION

The NASA Communications Network (NASCOM) provides operational communication lines

and facilities carrying mission-related information for the conduct of NASA programs and
projects. These lines interconnect such facilities as NASA's foreign and domestic tracking,
telemetry, and command control sites; launch areas; test sites; and mission control centers.
The present NASCOM network consists of approximately 600,000 route-miles of facilities in­
cluding voice, teletype, and high-speed data circuits.

The Unified S-Band (USB) System which NASCOM will support requires transmission of
three baSic data streams: telemetry and tracking information in an inward or site-to-mission
control center direction and command information in an outward or control center-to-site
direction. The quantity of data handled via the interconnecting communications network is such
that existing teletype facilities cannot handle the volume of data required as has been done
during support of the Mercury and Gemini projects. Therefore, it has been necessary to desi�n
and engineer a world-wide network of high-speed data transmission facilities interconnecting
nearly 30 overseas locations and five locations in continental North America, including tracking
Sites, communications switching centers, prime communications carrier terminal locations,
and misslOn control centers.

These facilities consist of voice bandwidth channels derived from combinations of landline,
microwave radiO, submarine cable, and high frequency radio communications systems which in

269
270

180' 160' 140' 120' 100' SC' 60' 40' 20' ,. • •• • •• ,. ,. 'W 'W ,.

- - .:. PASADENA-.
....8... E�MUOA MAORID
. ,-';J
' :--:- 40'

'"",,,,,
HONOL�LU APOLLO SHIP 20'
j .-�.-

MOJAVE '
- . -- ••

. :j N
......
2
KAUAI -; GUAYMAS APOLLO SHIP
0'
t- - 1 .. ··
_

, �� : : �: : .:
-
...
,. I
;.�O ,.'.; � --:, .. _ �. j'_._
+ ...
�
. : . CORPUS CRIST! : ,
•

. CAPE KENNEDY
O.
- . . '
....... . . . . . . 'HOVSION ,
O - t ' ! HUN''',ILLE FT. MYERS
.... , . ;
. , . . I · ' O
' SHIP1 ' " ......
- -

j- APOLLO 20'
-

20' ���L�

I'+
I CARNARVON :: - : : ! : :

�--t -I' I II
, "

I , SliIP
�

o . ! .� 1_:_:
, " ..+ .. '
: �! �O<?M£�'
!

.,. i i
J OHA ��!S�R�.t_
' ,'
. _

I ' LAIDE - I otN8URA. ­

,.

. . I I I.
" I
ADE
.

r !. "
.

--" �I" . L I . II " " " j ' ,C

I ,

"I I' ;
1 ,
..
:

"
,,
60" � : , ' , I I - - �':.".
" I !
.
' "- I

f1"
I ,
•

�" I
-+', !I . ir...:..J.-cL
i -:'i ,
r · P. �
i
.

)' l W I!O' 'lOOO.'':- ;;;; -•

,,
• - .'-�
.,;"
. ;;;
. ,;
.-;
.
;;c'. -C;;;
' OO ,,,"'
80·

1:0· ]/ ' ' ;;

''�
'-
; ' . ...J
O
'••'• -", .- • • ;
", ",
;,. ;:
";;;
,;
·--"
". · ,:,!
, ...

Figure I-Hi9h-�peed and wideoond "elwQrk�, present and planned.

most cases are leased, but in some cases are government-owned. Most of these circuits have
required considerable special treatment in order to condition them properly for efficient digital
data service. In this connection, since a large portion of the overseas facilities are leased, it
has been necessary to maintain close coordination and free exchange of information with com­
munications carriers.

The resulting data transmission network provides a minimum of two full-duplex data cir­
cuits to every USB site. Operation at 600 or 1200 bits per second is possible to all sites and
operation at 2400 bits per second can be achieved to some. By means of diverse circuit rout­
ing, full-p!!riod channel performance monitoring, end-to-end error detection, and a concept of
center-to-center and center-to-subcenter circuit trunking with subcenler-to- site tributaries,
a highly reliable, rapidly restorable, and extremely flexible data communications network has
been designed. This is absolutely essential in order to support a concept of fully remoted site
operations to sites where no on-site flight controllers are employed.

IMPLEMENTATION

Communication Subcenters

The first step in the expansion of the NASCOM network was to consider communications
subcenters in areas of the world which would provide convenient and efficient concentration of
 I!JP(CT Of APOLLO UNifiED S·dANO SYST[II O� NASA COJor.llJ�ICATIIUIS HEI'.iORK 271

a number of data circuits. Four such subcenters were established, located in Canberra.

Australia: Honolulu, Hawaii: London, England: and Madrid, Spain. These eXCI·cise contrul o\'er
(aciliti es in thc Australian/Indian Ocean, the Pacific, the English/African, and the European/

Atlantic areas respectively.

In Honolulu and London it was only necessary (0 expand existing subcenters: while in

Canberra and Madrid completely new facilities were designed and are being installed. All are

operated by the foreign national licensed communications carriers having jurisdiction in these

respective areas. The prime communications center located at the Goddard Space Flight Center

controls all trunks to the London and Honolulu subcenters: trunks to other centers located at
Cape Kennedy, Florida and at Houston, Texas: and tributaries to sites in the continental NOIih

American area. The normal configuration for such circuits is to route through the Goddard

Space Flight Center for facilities control purposes and then to terminate at the appropriate

mission control center (MeC), such as the MeC at Houston for USB system support .

tn addition to providing mOre effective control, the communication subcenters also provide

a location for reconstruction of data as necessary by means of regenerative repeating equip­

ment on circuits which pass through the subcenter. This permitted a solution to a technical
and operational problem encountered during the design phase of this system - that of main­

taining adequate control of the end-to-end equalization characteristics of the circuits in order

that reliable operation at rales up to 2400 bits per second might be achieved.

In the initial investigation of this problem, it was discovered that because of the variety

of facilities employed and the multiplicity of controlling agencies involved, no single licensed
carrier, domestic or foreign, would assume responsibility (or the end-to-end characteristics

of a circuit - from Carnarvon, Australia to the Goddard Space Flight Center, for example. Also.
if each carrier is responsible for only a se�ment of the total circuit, the equalization specifica­
tions for each segment would be so severely stringent that it would be doubtful they could be met

initially and nearly impossible to maintain them under operational conditions. Consequently. the'

approach of data regeneration at aU subcenters was adopted, with the result that the longest cir­
cuits or cirCuit legs which must meet end-to-end equalization specifications are between sites
and subcenters, between subcenters, or between subcenters and the Goddard Space Flight C('nter.

In nearly all cases, this segmentation places the entire trunk or tributary circuit within

the jurisdiction of a Single leaSing agency and maintenance of high-quality service is more

readily assured. Another very important advantage is that any combination of trunks, tribu­

taries, or alternate routes can be interconnected to provide service between any two points in

the network, thp only limlliTl� la�ior t:>o;>ing tho;> ;airtilivo;>

.r accumulation of bit errors from each !�g:
of the composite circuit. This flexibility obviously would not be available if regeneration were

not employed during an attempt to maintain a quite stringent end-to-end circuit equalization
characteristic.

Equipment Employed in Implementation

There are three prinCipal classes of equipment employed in the implementation of this

system: data modems (modulator/demodulators), which serve to condition the data suitably for
272 r DICKINSON

transmission via the communications channel: error control equipment, which in some cases
only detects, but in other cases also corrects, bit errors; and technicaJ facilities control

equipment which provides appropriate test gear and patching access to the circuits to permit

proper maintenance.

Data /Hodc ms

There are two types of data modems used for USB System support - a wireline modem

designated the 205A built by the Western Electric Company and a high-frequency radio modem

built to NASA Communications Division speCifications by Stelma. Inc. These were chosen

specifically to solve the problems of implementing the USB support effort and are becoming

standards for the rest of NASCOM data network obligat ions.

The 205A i s a synchronous, phase-modulated, single-channel or single�carrier modem

basically capable of 1200- or 2400-bit per second operation and, with a manufacturer's modi­

fication, also capable of 600�bit per second operation. It i s designed to perform with a bit­
errOr rate of 1 in lOs or better at 2400 bits per second on channels which have a signal-ta-noise

ratio as low as l2db and which meet American Telephone and Telegraph (AT&T) schedule 4B
equalization specifications. Because of the phase-modulation scheme employed, the modem is
relatively immune to typical levels of impulse-type nOise. The high� stability timin� system

(±0.0005 percent) used by the modem permits back-to-back regenerative operation without
excessive accumulation of phase jitter and will allow a complete line dropout of from one to

five minut es Or more before system synchronization is lost. The modem is fully transistorized,
takes about 24 vertical inches of 19-inch wide cabinet space and is capable of being fully remote

controlled . In the COntinental United States and Hawaii, this equipment is leased from and

maintained by Ben System-affiliated companies. In all other locations, the modems are pro­

cured and maintained by NASA.

The Stelma HF radio data modem is also synchronous and uses a phase-modulation tech­
nique but employs 12 tone channels spaced throughout the audio spectrum, each operating at

200 b it s per second. This modem is capable of 600-, 1200-, or 2400-bit per second operation
with a bit-error rate performance of 1 in l O S at 2400 bits per second with a signal-lo-noise
ratio of 17db. A high-stability clocking system is also used to permit back-to-back regenerative

operation and allow maintenance of system synchronization through long fades or dropouts.
The modem is fully transistorized, takes about 38 vertical inches of 19-inch wide cabinet
space, and is capable of being fully remote controlled. Other features include internal or

external system self-check, full-diversity receiver operation, and Doppler shift or spectrum

translation correction resulting from a moving source (an aircraft for example), multipath
ionospheric propagation, or a mistuned radio receiver. The HF and 205A modems are fully
compatible on the DC side and consequently may be placed back-to-back for interconnection of
wireline and HF radio services. The H F modem will be used primarily to support the USB

tracking ships in the Atlantic, PaCific, and Indian Ocean areas.

 IMFACT OF APOLLO UNifiED HIAItO SYSTEM ON NASA COtl\lUNICATIONS NETWORK 273

Error Control Equipment

There are three types of error-control equipment being implemented. One of these, a
forward-acting error detectiOn and correction system, will be used only on the HF radio cir­
cuits and will improve the quality of digital data being sent over this media by detecting and
correcting bit errors which originate in the data transmission path. This is accomplished
using algebraic, parity-like, digital encoding and decoding techniques. Characteristics of this
system are that one-half of the bits being transmitted through the transmission media are
error-control bits and that the decoder has two to three seconds of serial data ,:;torage i n order
to permit calculation, location, and correction of bit errors which have occurred. The result­
ing bit-error rate, however, which may have been as bad as 1 in 1 0 2 or 1 in 10l on the radio
path, will be between two and three orders of magnitude beller after correction, or nearly
equivalent to the performance expected of a wireline circuit. Particularly significant is the
fact that long bursts of bit errors caused by typical HF path-fade durations of one second or
less can be completel)' corrected. This feature is expected to materially improve the reliability
of the HF radio portions of the cOnlmunications system.

In addition to the error control scheme just described, a powerful error detectiOn arrange­
ment will be used to determine data quality and overall circuit performance on an end-to-end
basis. The number of additional bits required (or this function is in the order o( 1 0 percent,
much lower than (or the H F radio error control scheme. However, the reliability of operation
is such that the undetected bit error rate is never worse than 1 in 10' and is usually in the
neighborhood of 1 in 1 0 1 1 to 1 in lO'S . Present plans call for implementation o( this feature on
all data channels handling tracking data.

Another device to assist in the real time assessment of circuit performance is the high
speed data quality monitor (DQM). This is a relatively inexpensive piece o( equipment that
can be used for continuous monitoring of operational data trafhc at many points throughout the
network. The DQM is programmed to recognize the format of the data being transmilted and
to measure bit errors that occur in known sequences of bits within the data block. The mea­
sured bit-error rate is then displayed on the front panel and updated at appropriate intervals.
The DQM can also generate its own test pattern which can then be sent through a channel and
measured by other DQM's along the length of the circuit. This equipment is completely tran­
sistorized and occupies seven vertical inches in a 19-inch wide rack.

An example of the use of this equipment can be provided by considering a data circuit which
originates at Carnarvon on the west coast of Australia, routt's through Canberra. Honolulu, and
,
the Godda rd S!,l!.<:e Flight Ce!:�cr for :-cg;:r;e,atioii arod di·�...i;' l:VlIlroi pur!X)ses. hnally termin­
ating at the mission control center in Houston. DQM's would be placed on-line at all locations,
including the originating station, in order to determine whether or not the data was of good
quality at that !JOi nt If !he error !'::!tc '.�'::!� !::::.:: <lot Carna,·..or; ar.d C....'ut:n;o. iJUt hi� ai Honolulu,
the faulty portion of the circuit would then be isolated to a trunk between Canberra and Honolulu,
and be replaced by a spare. Continuous monitoring will, in most cases, permit replacement of
a poor quality segment of the circuit before that particular segment has completely failed.
274 W. OICKINSON

Tahl1ical Facilities Con/rol System

The technical facilities control system is designed t o permit complete c ircuit and equip­

ment monitoring and/or testing. This function is fully implemented at the Goddard Space Flight

Center and at all of the 5ubcenters and partially implemented at each of the sites. Test equipment

in this fac ility include an audio signal generator, vacuum tube voltmeter. oscilloscope, digital pat­
tern generator, equalization-mea!'iuring equipment, and a digital counter. The DQM's and appropri­

ate patching arrangements [or the required monitoring functions are located in this facility also.

PERFORMANCE

In terms of system performance the following goals have been set:

l. WireHne circuit bit-error rate of 1 in lOS or beUer.

2. Basic HF circuit bit-error rate of better than 1 in 10l, 50 percent of the lime, and
better than 1 in 101, 90 percent of the time.

3. H F Circuit bit-error rate with error correction of 1 in 10' or better 90 percent of the
time.

4. End-to-end undetected bit-error rate of 1 in 109 or better.

CONCLUSION

From the foregOing, it can be seen that the impact of USB system support requirements

on the NASCOM network is indeed quite large. Many new problems have been encountered and
have been solved either by new approaches to data communicalions network design or by ap­

plication of new techniques in specific pieces of equipment. Because of the concept of a seg­
mented network and adherence t o standard equipment and techniques at all locations that are

supported by the NASCOM network, a very flexible and easily expandable data communications

network has been created.

 ROLE OF APOLLO SHIPS

by
M. D. Greene
Goddard Space Flight Center

ABSTRACT

ThiS presentation describes the Apollo ships program planned to provide

support for the insertiOn/injection and reentry phases of the Apollo space nights
to the moon. Discussion covers characteristics of the ships and an outline of
their inslrulllcntation systems, their coverage areas, and time schedules for
completion, operational readiness, and integration into the Manned Space Flight
Network (MSFN). Organizational responsibility for the Apollo ships program
is also treated.

INTRODUCTION

Under the Apollo ships program, five ship s are now undergoing conversiOn to provide
support for the insertion, injection, and reentry phases of the Apollo moon flights. These ships
will be operated by the U.S. Navy and will rill critical gaps in support requirements which can­
not be met by land stations. The first ship is scheduled to be operational by mid-1966 and all
are scheduled to provide full mission support by early 1967. The three ships which will support
the insertion!injection phase are converted T-2 tankers (Figures 1 and 2). The two reentry
support ships were Victory ships used for tracking at the Pacific Missile Range and are being
modified for the Apollo program (Figure 3).

--

Figure 1-1-2 tanker being converted Figure 2-Drowing of completed Apollo program 5hip
for Apollo program coverage. providing in5ertior/injeclion coverage.

27 5
276 I.l O. GREENE

Fi9ure J-Drawing of completed Apollo program reentry ship.

NEED FOR SHIPS COVERAGE

The requirement for ships to provide coverage during the insertion portion of the Apollo

flight stems from the need to track the spacecraft continuously until after the C-S booster cuts off

and the spacecraft is inserted into an earth orbit. As will be seen from Figure 4, land stations

do not provide coverage lor the final portion of the insertion phase. This requirement is also
shown in Figure 5, which depicts coverage on the vertical plane during launch and various

recovery modes. The need [Or ships coverage of injection into lunar trajectories will be readily
apparent from Figure 6. The basic coverage at the start of injection is indicated by the circles
within the dark lines. The lines define the limits of the area from which injection can be made
into a lunar trajectory. It may be noted that a large portion of this is over the open sea. Ship
cove rage is indicated by the darker circles. Figure 7 illustrates coverage seven minutes after
the start of inj ection.
 ROLE Of APOLLO SHIPS
277

....:)MIH..I INSlI"OH It.() Of c()t<lIHU()O.1S

'" a l'IC�."' '''''
'\:, 1 I 00 H....
SHIP TUCKING
10l(I;l H.... 2<01)H.M.
CAP••ILITY
. .....,
,
/
v' 'V
, S :&5 ,
,
"
/
,
, CUTOFf
,

10Clr. Of
IUoO:ING �HII'$
PO$I1ION 1Il00 "'....

MIICA

TUCKING END Of
SHIP CONTINUOUS
LOCATION RlCOVUY AREA

Figure S-Coveroge on vertical pione during lounch

ond voriOU$ recovery modes.
Figure 4-Sloliol'l coveroge during il'lsertion phase •

.. \111 1... 111 .. ,. Ie ,. III I. .. . . It .. .. .. . It . ... .. It . .. .. . . ..

I
I

-- ... . . .

t
. . . _. . . . . _. . . . . . . _ . . .
- - _.
. -, -- . -

L=.:!o.=-,_�
,- :::;:,� .
. - .� . - .-�--. -..;. . - •
;"' : ; �
- -- -
- --- --- -,�-- - - C - " -=-' -
- -� �-
- -�-

• ----
• • lit • lit .. I. .. \III 1 ;00. \111 .. I. Ie I. \III I. ... .. . .. . .. .. • .. . . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .

Figvre 6-0 minute injection coverage_

278 M. O. GREENE

Figure 7-7 m i nute injeelion coveroge.

IMPLEMENTATION O F APOLLO SHIPS PROGRAM

Orranization Responsibility

The organization responsible for the conversion of the Apollo ships is the instrumentation
Ships Project Office of Ute Office of Naval Material. This organization, which was established
by a joint Department of Defense-NASA agreement, is headed by a Navy captain, who Is
assisted by two deputies, one from the U.S. Air Force and the other from NASA. The
prime ships contractor for the three insertion/injection Ships, which are being converted
at Quincy, Massachusetts, is the General Dynamics Corporation Electronic Division.
The subcontractor is General Dynamics Electric Boat Division. Ling-Temco- Vought
Company has the contract for the two reentry ships, which are being converted at Avondale,
Louisiana.

Schedule for Implementation

Figure 8 gives the cOnversion and operational schedule for the Apollo ships. It is hoped to
have the insertion ship on station by about July 1966, but at that time they will have
only a rather linlited support capability. It is expected that the ships will be capable of fully
supporting the ApOllO mission by early 1967.
 ROLf Of APtlLLO SHIPS
279

. ." ..,' .. " ..,'

T -AGM- 19
USNS
MUSCLE SHOALS

,
Y-AGM-20
USNS JOHNSTOWN

,
T-AGM-21
USNS FLAGSTAFF

,
T-AGM-6
USNS WATERTOWN

USNS HUNTSVILLE

LEGEND
* UNIfiED ' S '. aAND SYS. Of.LlVERY (DOCKSIDE)
• ALL MAll & SU5-SY$, DEUVEIlY REaD. ( DOCKSIDE)

6 OPTIMUM [QUIPM{NT DELIVERY (DOCKSIDE)

figure a-Apo llo ships conversion ond operotional schedule.

SHIPS INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS

Instrumentation systems for the Apollo ships include:

1. Communications 7. Acquisition
2 . C-Band Radar Tracking 8. Command
3 . Unified S-Band 9. Telemetry
4. Navigation and Stable Reference 10. Timing
5 . Meteorological 1 1 . Data Handling
6 . Frequency Monitoring 12. Display and Control Center

Figure 9 is a block diagram of the various systems and Figure 10 indicates their location
on an insertion/injection ship.

The 'VHiri<-:u 5-Banci System 1S the key system on all five ships. The prime telemetry
antenna, shOWn in Figure 10, is a wideband antenna ranging from 200 to 2300 megacycles. There
is alsO a backup antenna for the telemetry system. The S-band equipment is located below­
decks on the third deck, which is almost completely taken up by instrumentation systems. The data
processing rOOm is located a deck lower, on the first platform. Also located below-decks are
280 M. O. GREENE

the command control system, C-band radar, and the navigation and stable reference system,
which includes the ships inertial navigation system (SINS), star tracker, and flexure monitor
system.

The two reentry ships do not have a command system and their telemetry systems are
considerably reduced from those on the insertion/Injection ships. There is a timing
system on both types of ships. DatahandUng and the display and control center on the reentry
ships are also considerably reduced .

�.,�- - � �
Ol'TlC"'l

�
OlutTOR

�-1
�TAR- CKE_

- -
I
_ ....L _ _ _ .1 .L..
,
_ 1. _

- .
I
- -0*--.,
-'- - - -
':1'-.,
_ .1
,
--�-
ACO & STAB
& DESIGN
COMMAND s- BAND STAI/NAY
(_lAND
I
JH£METRY nM
CONTroL RADAR IUSS
{TLM) U,OAR (SPAMS)
I
(CC) (USB)

COM'AANOS TIUICKIN(; I fII.ACKING

nM usus
DATA I """

COMMA-NOS CENTRAL
HM&CC NA V_ OAT"
D' GnAl LINKS OArA PROCESSING
CQM'UTUS
KOP)
TlACJ:ING
(ONUm TCM CONTlIOl
DATA TO All

Y B
VOICE
suss

!0-
COMMUNICATIONS
(COMM)

MISSION INSl
STATUS sr.t.tus

MISSION QPUA'ION$
CONTlOl CENTU CQNTltOl C[NHt
(MCC) (OCC)

Figure 9-81ock diagram of Apollo ships iMlrumentotion systems.

 RetE Of APOllO SHIPS 281

..---­
��:;.c;�-
�.
\

ANTENNA AND
I N S TRUMENTATION
LOCATIONS

GIIIIIIIII)
J
/
Figure l�Locotion of instrumentction systems on ship
prcviding insertiorVinjedion coverage.
282
 APOLLO/RANGE INSTRUMENTED AIRCRAFT

by
L. C. Shelton
Goddard SPace Flight Center

ABSTRACT

The functions of aircraft in providing communications coverage in support

of the Apollo mission, the reasons fOr using aircraft to supp\emenl land and ship
station coverage and factors determining the number of aire raft re<lJired arc
discussed. A sample operational aircraft deployment plan for lunar mission is
presented . A functional dcse ription of the onboard instrurnentaOon by major
subsystems and operator positions is given. Technical problem areas including
anll'fUla�>:;I?:t: IimitaHUfl>:l, mulUpath inlcL'fca'm:t: anu ,.,.dia fn,quency Intel'­
ference and proposed solutions to these problems are treated.

INTRODUCTION

The objective of the Apollo instrumented aircraft project is to provide a fleet of eight air·
craft specially instrumented to maintain inflight voice and telemetry communications with the
Apollo spacecraft during the injection and reentry phases of the Apollo mission.

The U.S. Air Force Electronic Systems Division at Hanscom Field, Massachusetts has
procurement responsibility for the aircraft. The Air Force National Range Division at Patrie:
Air Force Base will operate the aircraft . Two contractors, Collins Radio Company and Doug!;
Aircraft Company, are now conducting competing program studies.

These aircraft are intended to supplement, not replace, ships and land stations. During
certain phases of the Apollo mission they will serve as links in the communications chain
between the spacecraft and the Mission Control Center at Houston, Texas. They wiU be spec if
icaUy used during the following mission phases:

1. One minute before injection burn, during the injection burn period, and continuing for
thrpp minnt",s aitcr the er:.d of injection bu'il.

2. Those fX)l'tions of the reentry during which S-band communications are possible.

3. R<o.�iJ Jt::�ioyml'nt to anycntical area which may require voice and telemetry coverage

WithOut aircraft, 20 to 30 additional surface stations, ship and shore combined, would be
required to maintain communications coverage of all possible injection areas for a particular
mission. The number of these areas is considerable iJecause of the variable launch azimuth
and parking orbit injection options for the Apollo lunar mission.

263
284 l. C. SHfLTON

SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS FOR INJECTION

The support requirements for injection consist only of voice relay and telemetry recording.

The vo!_ce relay is required for real-time mission control and the telemetry data is required
for postflight data analysis. There are nO plans for obtaining tracking data or real-time
tele metry data processing on board the aircraft.

The aircraft is required to provide two-way voice communications with the spacecraft by

the Unified S-Band (USB) System and a VHF!AM voice link. Communications with the ground

are by conventional HF radio. The alrcraIt acts as an automatic VOice relay station. When a

transmission is made from the Mission Control Center to the spacecraft, the aircraft receives

the transmission from the ground by HF radio and automatically retransmits the voice to the
spacecraft via the USB system or VHF. Vice versa, the aircraft automatically relays voice to

a ground station and to the Mission Control Center. Facilities are provided on board the air­

craft to permit an aircraft operator to communicate directly with the spacecraft or ground,
should the normal automatic relay not function.

The aircraft will be required to record telemetry transmitted from the Apollo spacccraft

and the S-IV-B booster. The telemetry to be recorded consists of the USB and VHF from the

com mand module and S-band (PCM/FM) and VHF from the S-IV-B booster.

The current planning for an Apollo lunar mission is such that injection can occur over any
part of a large area of the earth's surfac e. The exact point at which the injection will occur
may not be decided until a short time prior to the injection, thereby requiring either a great

quantity of stations to cover a large area, or a small fleet of highly mobile stations. The area

of injection is narrowed considerably as a specific launch day and launch time is chosen. Still

further narrowing occurs after launch when a particular orbit is chosen from which injection

takes place. The following discussion will emphasize the need for the highly mobile airborne
stations in order to give the needed missiOn flexibility.

Figure 1 shows the entire range of parking Orbits and launch azimuths for the earth orbit

phase prior to injection. The labels on the orbits indicate the launch azimuth and the orbit

number. Thc launch azimuths shown (72" to 108j are the approxi mate Cape Kennedy range
safety limitations. A variable launch azimuth is required in order to offset the earth's rotation

and eliminate the need for plane changes. For a particular launch, the variable azimuth is
actually reduced to a maximum of 26°, Which is the limit of coverage provided by the
insertion ship. The 260 corresponds to apprOXimately three hours of hold time.

The mission rules further state the injection can occur on the second or third orbit for an

Atlantic planned injection; or the first, second, or third orbit for a Pacific injection. Also, the

decision to delay injection from one orbit to another can be made just prior to the scheduled
burn time.

Figure 2 shows a typical Atlantic injection area, bounded on the east by orbit 2, 720 launch
azimuth, and on the west by orbit 3 , 9a" launch azimuth. The north- south limits of this area
correspond to one minute prior to injection burn and three minutes after injection burn. The

Pacific injection area i s somewhat larger since there is also a possibility of injecting from the

first orbit .
 APOLLO/RN/GE INSTRUL\€NTED AIRCRAFT 285

�� . - : · · -i " , · · 1 8O'
ISO' 1/>0' I�O' 120' 100' .,. W '" 2� 0' 20' W W "
,
,. 121)' 14(1' 160" ,w

�
i
'-
, ---- -- ! l
�..,.-..,

I� �� .... ��'0r,' ({",' ,

. I.- _ ! O_
,
--l

W , <::>
.. , , , r-'" 7'..\i"7li-"i'
I
! _.. . -lin'
., '

I:
O,
20'

:-:-1' �
0'
,
_ .

.-.
20' 20'
3/108'

.. . --i'''-1
: � l : . : : 1 : : l: : i
i

;,:;:,i
; , I 4(1'
- l/l08' - - , -"
. , . . . . •

- - _ . .- -- -
, - "

ti
-

: -�-
i - �---:-- - --+. -�- :

180"
,

160' 14(1' Ill)' U'lO' SO' 2�

, I ,.,.
60' .,. ".
' .,. , .,. ,,�

Figure I-Range of parking orbits and launch azimuths for earth orbit p;'Oloe •

'
.,' r--------, ., ,---- -----------,
3/98' V'9S'
'"

0' "

:��-- � ,�
'c" ,""
'c" I0'�""
20 ' ,� o"�.
40'.
�C
,: �
�.
�N�'�SO'
,
." L-��_"_",_LI_L,__"_"_L_L
'L-,� _L_L�
� Aie
\00' �' />0' 40' 20' 60'
60' so' POSITION FOR COVERAGE Of 2,'n'
100' 80' '" 0' .,.

Figure 2-Typicol Atlontic injection oreo. Figure 3-Aircraft I ina-oF-sight coveroge.

The original planning for aircraft !':tI!,!,ort fo!" in;cct:.cn CO'iel'agt: inciudeci the assumption
that the aircraft would be able to establish communications with the spacecraft at or very near
Hne-of-sight distances. Figure 3 illustrates the method used to locate the aircraft for coverage
of the ten-minute injection burn data intervaL Tho:' r2.ti!i c! thc thi"ce .;i,'dt:!� are equal to the
line-of-sight distances between the aircraft and spacecraft at the beginning, middle, and end of
the data interval. Spacecraft altitudes of 100 nautical miles prior to injection and 200 nautical
miles three minutes after injection were used. Using an aircraft altitude of 35,000 feet, the
line -of-sight . coverage is approximately 900 naut ic al miles one minute prior to injection burn
and 1400 nautical miles three minutes afte r burn. The area of overlap of these circles defines
the location of the aircraft. Two aircraft located in the shaded overlap areas can therefore
286 l. C. SHELTON

provide the required line-oi-sight coverage. The "notches" in the circles represent approxi­
mations for the expected antenna nulls at the front of the spacecraft and rear of the S-IV-B
booster.

FACTORS DETERMINING THE NUMBER OF AIRCRAFT REQUIRED

In order to provide coverage of all possible launch azimuths and orbits within the data
area, the aircraft must perform a complicated deployment pattern. The aircraft flight patterns
have been devised so that maximum use is

made of the aircraft's mObility, thus de­

creaSing the number of aircraft required.

The following discussion will illustrate

how the aircraft arc deployed in a typical

v 8' . 3 MIN

' -�"'�o�'I
" 0 situation. Figure 4 shows some of the key

aircraft locations for four possible injection

I , I I I ',.
, Lt-J-----'---.l
100' SOO 60' .0' 20' O' 20G 40' 60' 80'
(Go , ' , ,
ground tracks.

Figure 4-lIlustratian af key aircrafl lacation$ for Points A and A' correspond to the shaded
coverage of atlantic injection data area. portion of Figure 3 and are the aircraft 10-
cations for a 720 orbit 2 injection. Let us

assume that the injection is actually planned for orbit 2 and the launch is planned for 72" . The

aircraft would lOit er along the curved lines B and B' until the launch takes place. The reason
for initially locating the aircraft to the west of the planned injection will be shown later in this
illustration. If the launch did occur On schedule and at the 720 launch azimuth, the aircraft
would fly eastward to points A and A', taking their onstation positions just before the spacecraft
pass. The distance to be flown is apprOximately 700 nautical miles, and there is adequate time

to cover this distance, since the spacecraft will have traveled over one orbit prior to the pass.

U a decision were made at the last moment to postpone the injection to orbit 3, the aircraft
would have to assume positions D and D' or C and C' on Figure 4. Actually, only the aircraft
at A could reach C' or D' in the one and one-half hours required for another orbit, and a third

aircraft would be required at either C or D.

Now, consider the case of a hold occurring near the scheduled launch time, and continuing
for the full three hours. In this case, the injeCtion ground track would appear to sweep from
east to west across the data area at about 900 knots at the equator. This speed is greater than

that of the C-135's, which is the reason for initially positioning the aircraft to the west of the
planned injection. In order to reach positions lor coverage of 98�, which in this example cor­
responds to maximum hold time, the aircraft must fly to points G and G'. Although this dis­
tance is almost 2000 nautical miles, the aircraft can make it, taking advantage of the three hour

maximum hold, plus time for one orl.lit. Should a decision be made to delay injection until orbit 3,
the aircraft at G would fly to £', and an additional aircraft would be required at point E.

From the above discussiOn it is seen that three operational aircraft are required to cover

the data area in the Atlantic. One backup is requil'cd for a total of four aircraft. In the Pacific,
 APQLLO/RANGE I�STR!IAIEIHEO AIRCRAfT 287

six operational aircraft plus two backups are required. The additional aircraft in the Pacific

are required because of the necessity to cover orbit 1 as well as orbits 2 and 3. A total of
eight aircraft are thus required to cover the "worst case" Apollo injection.

AIRCRAFT COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT

The primary Objective in determining performance requirements was that the aircraft must

be able to communicate on all links at the maximum line-of-sight limitation. As previously

indicated, this is 900 nautical miles at the beginning of the data interval and 1400 nautical miles

at the end of the data interval. Normal signal margin calculations yielded the following air­

craft antenna gain requirements: 30db fOr S-band and 12db fOr VHF. These antenna gains would

theoretically yield good quality communications at 900 nautical miles and somewhat marginal
communications at 1400 nautical mile range, providing the S-band transponder in the spacecraft

is operating in the high power mode. Higher antenna gains are not specified because of the

limited available antenna aperture on the C-135 aircraft.

ANTENNA CONTROL
Figure 5 shows the apprOximate location
L
of the equipment inside the plane. There are SPACECRAFT COIMI
J. TLM RECORDING
2.

about 20 racks of equipment, with five pri­ (, SYSTEMS MONITOR

$ . GWVNO COIMI HF PROlE
mary operator positions. The spacecraft 6. TIMING ,,
7. POWER .""."
_
\.'
communications anterma will be located in

the nose of the airplane as shown, and it will

be an S-band and a VHF antenna mounted on
a common axis. PolarizatiOn diversity will

be .included On both frequency bands. The

cOM •.��'�D",
'N
�
s ,�,
fact that both frequencies are mounted on WIRE
one axis will enhance acquisition procedures.
Ouring injection, it is planned to initially

acquire the spacecraft on VHF, probably us­

ing the S�IV-B booster telemetry. This will

automatically point the narrow beam S-band

WEATHER
RAOAR
antenna on target, permitting acquisition of

the spacecraft S-band transponder. A com­

plicating factor in installing the spacecraft Figure 5-Aircraft equjpment arrangement.

communications antenna is that it is nec-

essary to include the existing C-13::i w�alher radar. The antenna will have the capability of

tracking in azimuth plus or minus 80 degrees, and in elevation, up 80 degrees and down
30 degrees.

Figure 5 also illustrates the five operator positions presently envisioned. The function of

the Systems Monitor is to direct the activities of the aircraft instrumentation operators, and to

directly converse with the spacecraft or Mission Control Center as necessa ry .

Figures 6 through 9 illustrate the aircraft communications system. Figures 6 and 7 il­

lustrate the polarization diversity technique which will be used in receiving S-band and VHF
288 l. C. SHELTON

"Ufil l
kECtlVU f-+
OAIA
DATA flACKING

T I
�IG LS

DATA &

�
H '....CIC.NG H
--<
MUltl- OOWN VOIG
t--'
m-
,:UPUX[R
AMI'lIFIU COUf'lU CONVERTER R£CUVU """'OU-

r
LAlIaN

,OlA.,ZATlON
L
t-+
VIDEO
OlVust!y
"",,0

,,,,...

f-.
SI'lCTRUM
S - 8ANO DIVERSITY lllOEO VIDEO/If TO
OIS'LAY
llAN!.MITTU COMBINE. 'ATCHING [COlOn
",m

rl HORI-
NTA,l
VIDEO

f-
I
VIOtO

DATA &
C.:! � r-
�,- MUlT'- 'OWN TUCKING H VOICE
OIPLlXU AWliflER COUPLER CONVUTER ReCEIVO --< DEMOOU-
'-''''.

DATA r+
ucuvu DATA
J
TkA KING
SIGNA.LS
_1:"
01(£

DIVERS1TV TO "UOIO
COM81NU ,ENTU
vo� VOICE OUTPUT

Figure 6-S-band receiving ly$tem block diagram.

IlACIONG
neEIVEI r-- TUCKIN G SIGNALS

,f7 veUICAL
1 VIO(O

�
,, - , ''' - MUlir - ,
f-<
. -

D,Pl(XU UCEIVU
AA\'UfIU caUPlU H
Z illiON
VUSHY pu· 0

PIIEAMPLI�fit.
'RE -

10 COMM 'CATIONS
DOWN
CONVUTEI r----
DIVERSITY
AND COMBINER
SPf.CT'1)M �E- 0 VIDEO VIDEO/
rUNSMITTU AND PU-O
DISPLAY ' - f PATCH
UNIT �OWN
CQNVUTH

"
r
PRE- 0 '.E - 0
..o�IZONUL OOWN
o-r CONVERTER
'- ' MULTI - . -,
I- r--
�,-
DIPl()([� AMPUFIU COUPLEt RECEIVER
IIZ"TION VIDEO
VUS1fY

j
TO COMM�lo.TlONS
I'It[AWLIFIER Ar,ND
TRANSMIIIU
TRACKING
R£CEIVU
r-+ TRACXING SIGNALS TO 'ufo.!u
Fi9'Ke 7-VHF telemetry receiving system block diogrom_

data. It is expected that the use of polarization diversity will somewhat reduce the signal
muitipath problem the aircraft will encounter_ The capability will be provided to select

either vertical/horizontal linear on left/right circular polarization prior to the mission.

 APOllO/RANGE INSTRUI,(NnO AIRCRAFT 289

AUDI 0
SlAN()ARD fREQUENCY

1
£V�NlS

AGC
1 DIRECT
PREDHECT AND
tECORD ---0
I--t
TIMING VIDEO INPUTS AMPLIflUS
DATA
0"
INSEITION ANTENNA POSITION
CALiaRATOR
"- CON'/UnR
MIXED DATA
'M
�ECORD 14 TRACK
AMPLIfiERS WIDE -
"'NO
RECORDt:R RECOWER
PREO£TeCTIQN REPRODUCER
TEST OO�
[ QUIPMENT CONVHT£RS

--
STANOAl!D FREQUENCIES DATA DUMP AND DIUCT
REPRODUCE
MONlTCIt OUTPUTS A...PLlFIERS
...
TIMING SIGNA�S

MUtTIP�E
INPUTS
ANTENNA "PO
c�
'"�
"'ON ___ -+I c-' 'M
REPRODUCE
-
vID£Ojl - f+ AMPLIf iERS
_
____
____ �.'
� C'�
" N
�'CA�
� C
G'_ __
____ �" PATCH
PANH DIRECT
£VENTS PRWflECT AND
VIDEO INPUT�
IECORD
AMPLIFIERS
f---t
OSCIllOSCOPE ,
MONITa!. r
_____ C'MC
: A""
.:NO-,
:
�" O"
'"'H
"C'
" ___->I 'M
,ECCltD

I
U HACK
A.....PlIFIERS WIDE-

FROM ALL TLM

REceIVERS
{ _
_ ___
PR(o£HCT DATA
c
v�
"
"0'0
,_,
OA
::: '___
..
Me I

__ ._�"
( 10 10 M<
PRUltTECTtON
OO�
CONVERHRS
OANO
RECORD<�
REPROCUC[R I
fROM AUDIO C[NTU
_
_ ___ C
�
A�
"�
O�
'O �
O�
A'!
A ____ __ DATA DUMP AND DIRECT
REPRODUCE
MONITOR OUTPUTS A......PlIFIERS

PREDHECflON
"�
l" '��
CO
�N
��
V�
''�
H�'J- ______ _____--'t.,_��j.i4--
-' r
'' M
''-''
'-'
�
REPR �UCE
AMPLIfiER

t1� 10 Me TO SPECTRUM Dlsp y V EO TO DATA DUMP SYSTEM

CHART RECCltDt: R OUTPUTS

Figure a-Video/IF distribution block diogrcm.

The aircraft S-band system is similar to the ground unified S-band system, with the ex­

ception that no ranging data is transmitted to or received from the spacecraft. As shown in
Figure 6, the unified S-band telemetry d3t� is de!!!oo.!l:l.tcd and :rout� to the recording system
and the demodulated voice is routed to the H F transmitters for automatic relay to ground. The

voice received from ground is transmitted to the spacecraft via a IOO-watt S-band transmitter
with the same S-band antenna used lor receiving.

The VHF telemetry receiving system, shown in Figure 7, accounts for a large portion of

the aircraft inst rumentation, since up to ten VHF data links may be receiyed from the S-IV-B
and Apollo spacecraft. Two receivers will be used for each data link, as shown.
290 L C. SHELTON

DIVERSITY TRAILING WIRE

CQM81NH ANTENNA
IN'VTS TO CONTROL

COMBINED
AUDIO S - !AND
!TT INDEP,NDENT
SIDE BANOS
I
I
t--
POWER lOW PASS
EXCITER

I '\7
AMPLIfIER FItTER
COMBINEO

I
AUDIO VHf TRAIliNG

i
WIRE
ANHNNA

AUDIO $- BANO
r<
POWER tOW PASS
EXCITU
AMPLIFIER FILlER

AUDIO ..,
INDEPENDENT
AUDIO TO VHF CENUR PATCHING
SlOE 8A.ND LONG WIRE
'NO
OUTPUTS
BAND PASS
ANTENNA
AUDIO
'NO REC{!VU
� '\[7
'"''''' {-o
FILTER
'NO THHVPE 'GO
HECTRONICS +- PATCHING
INHRCOM
AUDIO L
-
fo-
BAND PASS ANTENNA
RECEIVER
FILTER COIJPLU
VARIOUS OUTPUTS TO ,GO
AUDIO RECORDER
& TElEMETRY
RfCORDt:R
TONE
UCEIVER

r !
AUTOMA.TIC TONE TRANSMIT!
SEND/ TElEGRAPH RECEIVE
UCEIVE lUMINAL SWITCHES

Figure 9-Aircrcft!ground communical;om block diagram.

Figure 8 illustrates the types of data which will be recorded on board the aircraft. It is

tentatively planned to use three 1 4-track wideband tape recorders. Data outputs of individual

receivers and diversity combiners will be recorded in order to enhance reliability.

The HF ground communications system is shown in Figure 9. The capability to use both

frequency diversity and sideband diversity will be provided. The H F teletype equipment will
be used to provide the aircraft with updated deployment and antenna pointing data.

A trailing wire antenna will be used to increase H F transmission efficiency. A combination

of wing tip probes and fuselage-long wire ant ennas will also be used.

PROBLEMS IN USE OF AIRCRAFT AS COMMU�ICATION STATIONS

There are several rather seriOUS technical problem areas inherent in the use of aircraft

as communication stations. Mainly, these problems are: antenna size limitation. multipath

interference at low antenna elevation angles, and radiO frequency interferenc e.

The antenna size limitation is mainly a function of how much aircraft performance deg­

radation can be permitted. The seven-foot diameter aperture in the nose of the C-135 aircraft
 AP(LlO RANGE INSTRUUEHTEO AIRCRAFT 291

causes two to four percent decrease in the aircraft's maximum range. When this is added to

the drag caused by the HF antennas (probes and trailing wires) the range of the aircraft may

be reduced enough to prevent deployment for Apollo injection coverage. Other aerodynamic
factors such as stability, weight and balance, and pilot vision are also involved.

The seriousness of the multlpath interference problem in aircraft telemetry reception has

been observed by NASA and 000 in previous aircraft telemetry recel ving missions. There are
three primary reasons why airplanes have a serious multipath problem: (1) the high reflection

coefficient of sea water, (2) the Increased height of the aircraft, which causes greater frequency

of multipath nulls, and (3) the broader beam width of relatively low-gain aircraft antennas.

Some measures which are being considered for reducing the muitipath problem include the use

of high-capture ratio data receivers and antenna beam tilting. Multipath interference at
S-band is expected to occur at frequencies from 10 to 250 cycles per second. These nulls
would make phase-lock capture of the spacecraft transponder by the aircraft very difficult.

A well-recognized problem In aircraft communications is radio frequency interference.

RFI problems are most prevalent when attempting to transmit high power HF while Simultaneously
receiving weak Signals. This is just the case in the Apollo aircraft when relaying voice (rom

the spacecraft to greund. It is felt that the RFI problem, through careful design, can be mini­

mize if not eliminated.

Other operational problem areas which will require work include: increasing the reliability
of ground-la-aircraft communications, optimizing the aircraft deployment flight patterns, and
overall maintenance of the aircraft and electronic systems on a near world-wide basis.

It is expected that the first Apollo aircraft will be fully operational in early 1967. A suf­
ficient amount of operational experience should be gained with the aircraft on later 200 series
missions and early 500 series missions, before actually providing support for the lunar mission.
292
 STATUS OF THE APOllO PROGRAM

by
Quo M. Covington

Deputy Assistant Director

Office of Tracking and Data Systems

Goddard Space Flight Center

From the beginning of this program we have attempted to move from tried and true sys­

tems and facilities only when we could prove new developments and integrate them into the

existing system. We started out by expanding as much as possible the existing facilities and

equipment capabilities used for Mercury, to meet the requirements of the Gemini support pro­

gram. Similarly. we arc going to start tne Apollo program with primary support from the

Gemini systems, and move to the Unified S-Band (USB) commitment only after we have had a.
chance to check the system thoroughly, integrate it, and qualUy it for manned flight support.

I would like to point out the very obviOus by saying that the Mercury program was, by com­
parison with Gemini, and certainly with Apollo, a relatively smaller support task than we now
have with Apollo. With Mercury we had a single vehicle, and our specific planning was for a

three orbit mission. We were able to accomplish the support test, to a great extent, by using
existing low-speed data and analogue techniques. We registered our first major departure
from this course in Gemini, when we moved to a capability to support at least two vehicles

simultaneously.

Added to this was a complete order of magnitude requirement increase, in terms of data
to be transmitted, processed, and displayed in real-time. The result is, to my mind, that ex­

cept [or the additional facilities which we have added, the main change made in Gemini was in

the move toward digital techniques. To that end we installed PCM telemetry, digital up-data

links, and on-site digital data processors.

We have moved from Mercury to Gemini, and as we look forward to Apollo, we have es­

tablished a goal for ourselves of transmitting essentiany an the data from the station back to
the control center, so that truly centralized flight control can be accomplished. You have
heard some talk about the data communications network here today. I think that the words
which strike hardest are "HF c:ommllnit:'RtiO!lS al'!C data e rror correction," when Wi: lhiuK a.bout
the job of communications and the goal we have set of sending large quantities of data back to

the control center. Quite frankly, and I hope I am not saying anything I shouldn't at this pOint,
we don't see any answer to really centralized r.ontr..,l I1nli1 W€ ear. �eper.� or: ::;�tcmtc c,:,m­

munications {or all the stations which are not now tied to main trunk circuits on cables and
hardwire lines.

293
294 OZRO 1.1. COVINGTON

Looking at Mercury and Gemini and moving on to Apollo, I think the major aspects of the
change affecting our planning and our work to date nave been the requirements for an addition
in the number of network stations.

Table 1 lists those stations which were identified as Mercury support stations and those
we are including in the Gemini network. We CQuid talk to some extent about the changes here,
but I think it is quite clear that the Apollo requirement does call for many new facilities.

Table 1

Network evolution.

Station Mercury Gemini Apollo Station M.ercury Gemin! Apollo

I
Bermuda X X X C�V (MeC) X X X

Canary Island X X X SAL X R

Kano X L' L GBI X X

I
Zan�ibar X GTK X X L

I
Tananarive L L ANT X X X

Guaymas X X X ASC
I X

I
Merritt 1. (CNV) X Canton X L L

Guam X 1l3waii X X X
I

I
Goldslone X Pt. Arl:,'ucllo X R R

Goldstone - J PL BU' While Sandt; R R R

Madrid X Corpus Christi X X X

Madrid. - J PL BU Eglin R R R

Canberra X Rose Knot X X L

Canberra - JPL BU Coastal Sentry X X L

Muchea X Apollo Ship 1 X

Woomcra X R' R Apollo Ship � X

Carnarvon X X Apollo Ship :J X

Apollo Ship 4 X

Apollo Ship 5 X
_. _- - ----
. I. . 1.''''''cJ . .

The change is also in support of three Apollo modules, whereas Gemini has only two which
have called for additional equipment at each Site, and in many cases the capability of handling
simultaneously two equally complex problems, as well as additional capability within elements
of station eqUipment. For example, we must move to a considerably larger on-site computing
complex than was used to support Gemini. in addition, there is the requirement for a capability
to provide tracking and data acquisition at lunar distance. I believe the USB discussions pretty
well cover what we plan to do.

With that, then, as a little of the backgrOWld and our early thoughts on the subj ect, let us
quickly get to the status of implementation of the network. We have based all of our schedule
 salm Of lHE APOLLO PROGRAM 295

planning on three or four different time parameters. In the beginning, we decided that the most
difficult job we asked the contractors of the support team to do was that which went to Collins.

We felt that the most complex task and the one that would take the longest, in terms of design

and manufacture, was the manuIacture of the USB equipment. and we geared our equipment
availability to that contract schedule.

In each case, we add one month to the schedule completion date for shipment, if the station

is a continental U. S. slaUon, and based on past experience, we have added two months to over­
seas sites. We have allowed seven months for the installation and check-out of the electronic

equipment, after the facilities are available, and we are still able to get away with insisting on

six months network Simulation before we are ready to commit these stations as prime support

capability for a manned night mission.

Another factor which turns out to be a key determining factor in scheduling availability of
operating stations is the construction of facilities program. Our jOb in scheduling. then, has

been to consider all of these factors together and to keep optimizing the possible station se­
quence availability against the mission requirements, as best we can.

In Table 2 , we show two on-site dates. The first is the time when we expect all these sites
to have the equipment installation and check-out complete. The final completion data is the
point at which we say that the stations will be ready (or any and all prime support missions.

We arc not insisting: that all of this work be finished before we are willing to commit these

stations to test and qualification runs. We would like, however, to insist that the block of sta­
tions which is required for any mission have six months for network simulation and mission
training of the people before we commit it as the source of prinle data on which the success of
the mission will depend.

The status , as you have heard, is that a 30-foot USB station is operating at Collins now.
It is being used to check-out the integration and interface problems which we will have to face

at the land sites. A second USB slation in combination with ships' antennas is being set up
right now . This will be dedicated primarily to finding the interface problems that we will en­

counter on board ship. Two of the 30-(00t antenna structures are actually ll
i shipment, one to
Guam and one to Carnarvon . The first USB electronic equipment to go to the Guam site will be
delivered this month. We expect that the USB will be Checked out for missions support during
1966. There is some indication we will have an Apollo mission flight earlier than that. How­

ever, we �\'m be able to do '."l'Y tilth;:, if ot.llything, on that mission. We hope to complete the
check-out by early 1967 at aU the prime sites, and begin to commit these as prime facilities

from early to mid-1967.

296 OZRO N. COVINGTON

Table 2

Apollo MSFN schedule.

Equipment Installation &: Network Simulation

Station
On-Site Check-Out Complete Complete

Gu= 1 May '66 1 No\' '66

Carnarvon 1 Jun '66 1 Dec '66

Bermuda 15 Jun '66 15 Dec '66

lIa�1I I Aug '66 I Feb '67

MIla 1 Aug '66 I Feb '67

Texas 1 Oct '66 I Apr '67

Cuaymas 1 5 Oct '66 15 Apr '67

Ascension 15 Dec '66 15 Jun '67

Grand Bahama 1 Jan '67 1 Jul '67

Antigua 1 Apr '67 I Oct '67

Grand C:lnary I Apr '67 1 Oct '67

Goldstone 1 5 Oct '66 15 Apr '67

Canberra 15 Jan '67 15 Jut '67

Madrid 15 Mar '67 15 Sep '67

Ship ' ! 1 Apr '66 1 Jul '66

Ship 12 1 Jui '66 1 Oct '66

Ship 13 1 Oct '66 I Jan '67

Ship '4 15 Oct '66 1 Feb '67

Ship '5 15 Dec '66 I Apr '67

1 Aircraft 15 Dec '66 15 Mar '67

8 Aircraft 1 Oct '67 1 Jun '68

 Appendix A

GIDSsary Df AbbreviatiDnS

AMC - aeromedical monitor console Modem - modulator/demodulator

APP - antenna position programmer MPAD - mission planning and analysis division

CAM - computer address matrix MSCC - manned space control center

CCC - command computer console MSFN - manned space flight network

(Mercury or Apollo)
CCS - command control system
PAM - pulse-amplitude modulation
COP - command data processor
PCM - pulse-code modulation
CRT - cathode ray tube
PDM - pulse-duration modulation
CSM - command and service module
PMP - premodulation processor
D/A - digital/analog
PPM - pulse-position modulation
DCS - digital command system
PRN - pseudo- random noise
DQM - data quality monitor
SCO subcarrier oscillator subsystem
DRK - data request keyboard
SOC shipboard Doppler counter
DTU - data transmission unit
SINS ships inertial navigation system
I/O - Input/output
SPE static phase error
IR - infrared
SPS service propulsion system
LEM - lunar excursion module
SSC spacecraft system console
LES - launch escape system
TOP - tracking data processor
LOR - lUnar orbit rendezvous
USB - unified S- band
MCG - memory character generator
YCO - voltage controlled osc1llalor
MCVG - memory character vector
generator VSWR - voltage standing wave ratio
MM - maintenance monitor
VTVM - vacuum tube volt meter

297
298
 Appendix B

List of Attendees

Abernethy, F. G. Brooks, David R. Cl;u'k, Orval

Adis, George Brown, B, Porter Coates, Robert J.
Albanes, N. J. Brown, Carl W. Cochran, Earl
Albin, Frank Brown, Dwight Conner, James
Allen, K. J. Brown, Robert H. Connolly, G. E.
Allen, Joseph J. Brown, Robert M. Connors, William E.
Allinder, Dick Brown, W. Corwin, Stanley
Allison, James E. Brown, Wilfred ill Courtright, Morris, Jr.
Allred, Val W. Broughton, Thomas G. COVington, Ozro M.
Alvey, John D. Brumber, P. Cox, H, R.
Anderson, D. W. Brunker, Lester A. Cox, R. T.
Arndt, E. A. Bryant, Fred B. Cox, R T.
Arslanian, John G. Bryant, William C., Jr. Crump, Arnold W.
Ashcroft, R. T. Buckley, Edward Curkendall, D. W.
Augenstein, R J. Buehler, Richard K. Danlzig, Henry P.
Bacque, Cramer Bugg, William M. Dauphin, V. M.
Bahan, C. W. Bunce, Robert C . D' Ausilio, Robert F.
Barr, Thomas A. Bunda, Frank E. Davis, Charles
Barnes, Robert T. Burke, M. L. DebriS, R, Dr.
Bartel, Donald R Burke, P. G. Dentel, Wnl. A.
Bannerman, James Burkepile, James M. DiLosa, Vincent J.
Basson, David Burnham, R E. Dinwoodie, Jack
Baumiller, William Burton, Walter G., Jr. Donahoo, M. L.
Bauer, Harry Burnham, R. E. Lt. Col. Dorman, Donald K.
Beall, George Burns, Richard W. Downs, James E.
Beagan, Charles V. Burrows, Lloyd Drechsler, William G.
Bcgenwald, A. J. Busche, H. C. Dudney, Richard K,
Dchuncik, John Butler, David Dungan, Larry J.
Bell, Holland ByeI', David L. Dunn, Johnny
Behonick, John Byrd, S. S. Ealick, Perry L.
Belicomm, H. Stanly Byrne, Frank Eastman, S, R.
Benjamin, Vernon E. Campbell, Willis S. Eaves, Robert
Benzel, Cliff R Call, D. W. Eggers, Arthur L.
Best, Al Campenni, Robert D. Emmons, Paul
Bickford, Fred H., Jr. Camgel, Joe Engels, P.
Bienko, Mitchell Canqel, J. Estridge, Philip D.
Billig, Lewis S. Carlson, Arthur William, Jr. Eurmrous, Paul
Bilyk, Zenon Carlton, A. George Fadden, B. J.
Birks, William E. Lt. Col. Carey, Char les W. FaloticO, Anthony
Bisliip, Robert P. Carney, Wayne K. Fariss, George W.
Blanchard, Roger L. Carr, Ronald Farkas, Leonard
Blenis, Ronald D. Carson, Thomas M. FedericO, Paul R.
Blnc:k, Arthur C��lk, Ch;;u-lcs F. Ft:h.ltm, R. L.
Boden, W. Chandler, George P. Fellerman, K, D.
Bond, A. C., Jr. Charpentier, George Henry Ferrick, Eugene, Jr,
Bonnell, Dean W. Chase, William Findell, Max (Lt. Col.)
. ,
Chc:-:'G'.�'.:t�, H. D.
....,
. '
....

Bonnp.y: l..ylp O. '·UIII., \,.U'U·I�:;

Bonton, Richard Chi, Andrew Fisher, J. PrestJey, Jr.

Bosmajian, C. P. Chicoine, E. L. fitzPatrick, Joseph F.
Boulander, J. L. Clark, Howard E. Flaherty, John B.
Boykin, F. M . Clark, Melvin C. Flowers, John

299
300

Folsom, W. L. Hood, Ben H. Lauder milch, R. H.

Fosque, Hugh S. Horton, Jack A . Lawman, W .
Fratkin, Sidney J. Hughes, AeIt Lauman, B.
Friedman, R. F. Hocking, William M. Lawhead, N. L.
Friel, Fred J. Holt, Richard L. Leidy, Kenneth
Gantt, Alphonso M. Hoover, Alvie Leigh, Robert T.
Garabedian, A. Horton, William P. Levine. A.
Gaston, George Hulce, Richard L. Levy, Harold H.
Gardner, Virgil F. Humprey, E. Liebermann, Ralph W.
Garrison, Charles Hunter, Dan Lindley, P. L.
Gatto, Philip R. Hunt, ValeriO R. Logan, F.
Georgeadis, George N. Jackson, James C. Looney, C. H.
Gibbons, Thomas J. Johnson, Joseph E. Mackey, Robert J., Jr.
Godfrey, Robert D. Jondahl, Lee Maehr, E.
Golden, David E . Joyce, F. J. Maehr, T. E.
Goldberg, Vernon Kadar, Ivan Mahoney, Michael
Goodwin, Paul S , Jacobs, James Mallory, Gene H.
Goolsby. Lee Johnson, Philip S. Malnati, Robert J.
Gordon, Millard F. Jones, O. L. Maness, Clyde T.
Granata, R. L. Jumper, Fred Mansur, Dr. G. F.
Grandinetti, Anthony F. Kaerner, Murray Markham, Allan
Greene, Edward Kalil, Ford Markham, A. S.
Greene, E. P. Keesey, Walter T. Martin. John B.
Gregg, James C. Keith, Ernest L. Martin, William P., Lt.
Griffin, Thomas M. Kerstetter, Don Col.
Griffin, Tom Kessinger, H. E. Martin, Wm.
Grisham, William Kay, Robert Matlick, Thomas L.
Grossman, Bernard Kehl, Roberl P. Mayfield, Samuel O.
Guthrie, Jon Kirshur, Carl McCaul, P.
Guthrie, John Kessinger, H. McClannahan, Jack T.
Guy, Thomas Kiebler, J. McCaffery, R. J.
Guy, J . Kindgr, William J. McCaffery, Robert
Habib, Edmund J. Kirby, Lt.-CoL Julian McCombe, David H.
Haggerty, W. H. Knox, Carl B. McDaniel, Wes
Halcomb, J. K. Koerner, Murray A . McDonald. T .
Hancock, A. Kramer, Robert McDonald, T.
Hass, Donald King, Leonard McElroy, James B.
Hafer, Lt.-Col. Frederick L. Kirwan, Emil R. McIntyre, Paul, Capt.
Hahn, William E. Koeritz, Kenneth W. McKenzie, Joe
Halpeny, Owen S., 1st Lt, USAF Koes, Raymond K., Jr. McKiernan, John W.
Hancock, A. F., Capt. Kramer, O. McMillian, M. W.
Harner, Walter S. Krasnecan, J. McNealus, A.
Haugen, Glerm Krumpelman, J. L. McNealus, A., Mr.
Hayes, Robert D. Kruger, Bodo McNealus, Arthur L.
Heller, N . R. Kuykendall, W . E. McNealus, L. A.
Hepler, David S. Kyle, Howard C. Meszaros, John P.
Heyroth, J. Lane, J. H. Miller, Ralph
Hightower. Lloyd E. Lafleur, Walter Miller, Robert D.
Healy, J, J, Laios, S. Miller, M. C. Col. Lt.
Helm, Ted Lamb, Wilson G. Miller, C. M . Lt.
Herrburger, E. C. Lampl, S. Miller> R. D.
Hibbert, John J . Lanzkron, Dr. R. W. Miller, W.
Hildebrand, Carl E. Lantz, Paul A. Miller, Wm. E., Jr.
Heitzman, D. E . La Rosa, Roy Miller, Warner H.
Hill, J. D. Laudermilch, Ray Mitnick, Herbert
Hogg, David N. La Vance, Cecil Moore. Carl Mr.
 301

Morian, John A. Robert, Randolph C. Soar, W. S.

Morrison, C. R. Reed, R. B. Sos, John Y.
Morrison, Louis H. Regusters, Herman Spintman, Daniel A.
Morton, F. Reisch, F. E. Staggs, Fred
Muller, V. Reisch, F. E. Smith, Philip T .
Nall, R. D. Rende, J. Snow, R.
Naylor, D. A. Roberts, Carl Sohner, Harold
Nelson, Donald A. Roper, J. C. Spafford, M.
Nebb, Warren Rosenthal, Henry Satterfield, Jim
Nelson, Robert M. ReiSing, Paul E. Stanilofi, A. S.
Newman, R. H., Jr. Richard, Herbert L. Stevens, James M.
Nizko, Henry S. Roberts, T. Stilmar, Robert L.
Niner, Edgar P. Rosenberg, Harold R. Stock, Richard L,
Nuttall, Robert R. Ross, Edward Stodola., E. King
Okada., Koyo Roy, Mrs. Melba L. Stanley, Robert R.
Olden, Wm. Rush, Martin Stevenson, R. H.
Ottinger, George W. Russell. Walter C Jr. .• Stiver, Willard Carl, Jr.
O'Keefe, John J. Ryan, James Stockwell, E. J.
O'Shaughnessy, S. J. Runge, George Strum, Louie W., Jr.
Owen, D. H. Russell, H. K. Stuart, Thomas A,
Packham, L. E. Rutledge, C. K. Suleater, James
Packham, Leonard E. Rycroft, Michael J. Dr. Sullivan, Cornelius J.
PaInter, Parker Salman, L. W. Suomala, John B
PariS, Paris B. Salmon, R. F. Susman, Dr. S. M.
Parker, Charles D., Capt. Salzberg, 1. M. Swan, Col. Harry C.
Paddack, S. J. Sanderson, Kenneth C. Swee, Conley
Page, Robert K. Sapper, Larry W. Taggler, R.
Paradiso, A. M. Scanlon, Robert T. Talbott, John W.
Parker, James E. Schachne, H. S. Tanner, Walter E.
Parry, William R. Sanborn, S. Taylor, Robert C .
Parsons, W. Santos, Severino Z. Temkin, Aaron
Pashby, Paul J. Saunders, Mark C. Thompson, Henry F.
Pauley, Willis J. Scharf, Allen R. Toler, James C.
Payne, Mary H. Schauer, Karl TraViS, A. D.
Peake, Gerald M. Schempp, Len Tell, J. O.
Pendley, David B. Schiesser, Emil R. Thomas, Edgar F. (Capt.)
Perry, Robert A. Schroeder, C. Thompson, J. T.
Peavey, Ross D. Schwartz, John J. Toukdarian, Richard
Peters, K. Scott, Richard M. Trinter, V. E.
Pfeiffer, W. A. Schruder, K. Tucker, Allen G.
Piccoli, P. E. Schmid, Paul E. Turnbull, T. O.
Pixley, P. T. Schroth, R. Underwood, C. H.
POlitzer, Lt. - Col. Schwartz, Robert F. Uvaas, Charles M.
Pope, Robert H. Schwartz, Victor A Vavra, Paul H.
Potter, Philip D. Sebastia, Miss Vesper, Ralph O.
Pinckernell, H. Shaw, �rt Wachsman, R. H.
Poland, William B.o Jr. Shawha..'l., John J. W:!.l.ker, C. B.
PoUting, Urban H. . Sheboya., B. Walch, Rudy
Potter, Lee Simas, Victor R. Wallston, Don
Pu, Robert T. Selden, R. L. Waranch, M.
UT".,,,.,� ,
Quinn, M. J. �h;:a.w, R'lllo H. " � - . Y . , �.

Raleigh, James T. Shaughnessy, Ja.nl�S P. White, P. David

Rand, Robert L. Siller, Joe Wigand, R. C.
Randolph, R. Z. Slick, E . P. Williams, A. D.
Reed, B. R. Smith, Jahn A. Ward, Robert J.
Reich, Bruno W. Smor, Paul White, J.
Rand, Robert
302

Whitson, Roy Wittgartner, Dan York, W1ll

Wilkes, Morgan E. Woolston, D. Zimmerman, Elliott
Willis, Don Wright, Eugene L. Zink, Eugene
Wilson, C. P. Yageldwich, J. Zugler. T.
Witson, R.
Intentionally Blank Page
 "Th� atrOllaul;{(// and IP::U ,uli/·itin of thr UII;ttd Sfattl IhtJU b�
rOllduettd 10 al fO eOI//,;bufr . . . 10 flu t'xpallJ;o/J of 11II1IIall knowl·
rdg� of pbmolllma il/ Ih.. almolplu,r alld Jpacr. Thr Adm;lIhtrat;OIl
Jhal/ prol1id.. /0' thr u·idr/I pr,:ct;c,lblr alld approprialr diJJrmi,l11f;Oll
of ill/ormal;on cOl/cl!millg ;11 IlrJi//jfir$ al/d Ihe fnllils IhUt'0f."

-N...TlO:-:... L Auo:-:...uTICS ...:-:0 SP...CE ACT Of 19)8

NASA SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS

TECHNICAL REPORTS: Scientific and technical inform:nion considered

important, complete, and a bsting contribution to exist�ng knowledge.

TECHNICAL NOTES: Information less beoad in scope but nevertheless of

importance as a contribution to existing knowledge.

TECHNICAL MEMORANDUMS: Information receiving ' limited dimibu·

tion because of preliminary data, ucurity classification, or other reasons.

CONTRAqOR REPORTS: Technical In'formation generated in conneciion

with a NASA Contract or grant and rel�ased under NASA auspices.

TECHNICAL TRANSLATIONS. information published in a foreign

language considered to merit NASA distribution in English.

SpECIAL PUBLICATIONS: Information derived from or of value to NASA

activIties. Publications include conference proceedings, monographs, data
compilations, handbooks, sourcebooks, and special bibliographies.

TECHNOLOGY UTILIZATION PUBLlCA'rIONS; Information on tech·

nology used by NASA dlat may be of particular interest in commercial and other
nonaerospace applications. Publications include Tech Driefs; Technology
Utilization Repons and Notes; and Technology Sun·eys.

Ddai/J an the a�ailabifjfy 01 theJe publications may be obtainecl lrom:

SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION DIVISION

N AT I O N A L A E R O N A U T I CS A N D S P A C E A D M I N I S T R AT I O N

Washinston, D.C. 20546